This is a reproduction of a library book that was digitized

by Google as part of an ongoing effort to preserve the

information in books and make it universally accessible.

https://books.google.com
324.72.5

VEPRI
VE
TASTE

HARVARD
COLLEGE
LIBRARY
 1,1,1,1

The Department of Public Instruction, Bombay.

A GRAMMAR

ОР

THE SANSKRIT LANGUAGE.

BY

F. KIELHORN, Pu.D .; C.I.E. ,

PROFESSOR OP SANSKRIT IN THE UNIVERSITY OF GÖTTINGEN ;
CORRESPONDING MEMBER OF THE ROYAL ACADEMIES OF
BERLIN AND MUNICH ; HONORARY MEMBER OF THE
AMERICAN ORIENTAL SOCIETY ; ETC., ETC., ETC.

Third Edition, ReviSED AND ENLARGED.

· Registered under Act XXV . of 1867.

Bombag :
GOVERNMENT CENTRAL BOOK DEPÔT.
1888 .
All rights reserved .
Price Two Rupees.

112
 Ch. Kanman .
hola , May1,1889. .

SANSKRIT GRAMMAR .
 UBI.T. I. I.
Y ) |23Y 11: "

3225 YAME ! ..

321172.5
HARVARD COLLEGE LIBRARY
FRO:: TIECCLITE OF
CHARLES : .00ELL LENGAN
BHAIRCH 15, 1941

==
 ( . . . !
Yi | 37 ||: !

‫تعهد‬ YA | ! ..

‫ جن‬4 4 ، 7 ،
HARVARD COLLEGE LIBRARY
FRO : TIE STATE OF
CHARLES :.00::WELL LANMAN
‫ نام‬: CH 15, 1941
 To
GEORG BÜHLER, C. I.E.,
TUIS VOLUME

IS CORDIALLY INSCRIBED BY HIS FRIEND

AND

FORMER COLLEAGUE.
1
I
1
 PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION.

The present grammar, which is published at the request and

under the patronage of Mr. J. B. Peile, the Director of Public
Instruction in this Presidency, is intended principally for Indian
students. It contains as much of the Sanskrit accidence as is
necessary for the ordinary B.A. examination. Those who look
higher, I refer to the Siddhanta -Kaumudi and other indigenous
works on grammar, without a careful study of which a scholarlike
knowledge of the Sanskrit language appears to mo unattainable.
My chief aim in composing this grammar has been correctness,
and to attain this object I have considered it the safest plan not
to give any rules nor to put down any forms without the authority
of the best native grammarians. I trust I may not appear pre
sumptuous in maintaining that this has not always been an easy
task, and that in many cases much patient labour and weighing
of arguments had to be gone through before a certain form could,
on the best possible authority, either be accepted as correct
or rejected as incorrect. The result of my labour is before the
public ; and having done my best, I shall be grateful to everyone
who will take the trouble to point out to me any errors which
insufficient care or reading or want of judgment has allowed me
1
to pass unnoticed .

On the arrangement of my grammar only few words need be

said here. I have considered it necessary to separate the roots of
 viii PREFACE .

the tenth class from those of the other nine classes, and to treat of
them under the head of derivative verbal bases. Most scholars
will, I hope, approve of this change. Nor will they, I trust,
object to the introduction of the Subjunctive mood in § 218. That
the terms Radical Aorist and S -Aorist will be generally approved
of I feel less assured , and I shall be ready to give up the 8 - Aorist
for any better of more scientific term that may be suggested to
me. * To introduce into a Sanskrit grammar the expressions
: First and Second Aorist at a time when the best Greek grammars
try to get rid of them , appears to me little advisable ; and I cannot
see the appropriateness of the terms Simple and Compound Aorist
when it is far from certain that the letter s, which is employed
in the formation of the four last varieties of the Aorist, is really
the remainder of the root as ' to be .'

F. KIELHORN .

Deccan College, March, 1870.

• In the Second Edition the term Sibilant -Aorist has been adopted from
Professor Whitney's Grammar.
 PREFACE TO THE THIRD EDITION.

Not to mention some minor alterations and additions, I have,

in this edition, drawn more prominently attention to the inser.
tion of the intermediate i in the general tenses and in verbal
derivatives generally, and I have introduced the terms aniç and
set, which even my European pupils find most convenient. I.
have also added a chapter on the employment of infected words
in the sentence, which , like the rest of this grammar, is based
entirely on the works of the native grammarians.
To Mr. K. M. Chatfield, the present Director of Public In
struction, my thanks are due for having allowed me to publish,
together with this third English edition, a German translation
of this grammar .

F. KIELHORN.

Göttingen, April, 1888.

 TABLE OF CONTENTS .

PAGE
CHAPTER 1.-THE LETTERS $$ 1-12 1
i . The Deranagarî Alphabet SS 1–6 ............ 1

Classification of the Letters $$ 7–12 ...

2. 4

CHAPTER II.-RULES OF EUPHONY SS 13-59............ 6

A. Final and initial letters of complete words 88 13-41 6
1. Contact of final and initial vowels $$ 17-25 6
2. Contact of final vowels and consonants with initial
vowels and consonants $ S 26-41 8

( a) Changes of final consonants $$ 26–37 8

( 6) Changes of initial consonants $$ 38–41...... 11

B. Changes of final letters of nominal and verbal Bases and
initial letters of Terminations, and of other letters in
the interior of words $$ 42—59 ...... .... 12
CHAPTER III.-DECLENSION OF NOUNS SUBSTAN .
TIVE AND ADJECTIVE $$ 60—168.......... .... 14
A. Consonantal Bases $$ 71-130 16
1. Unchangeable Bases $$ 71-91 16
Decl. I. Bases in and $$ 71–72 . ... 16
Decl, II. Bases in radical consonants other than
nasals and semivowels $$ 73–82............. 18
Decl. III. Bases in 5 $ $ 83–84 ....do 24
Decl. IV. Bases in the suffixes इन् , मिन्, and विन्
$$ 85-87 ... ..... 25
Decl. V. Bases in the suffixes अस्, इस, and उस्
$$ 88–91 ... 27
2. Changeable Bases $$ 92—130 28
Decl. VI. Comparatire Bases in GR SS 97—100 ... 29
Decl. VII. Participle Bases in 377 $$ 101-108 30 ...

Decl. VIII. Bases in the suffises fa and a $$

109–113 33
 xü

CONTENTS ,

PAGE
Decl. IX. Bases in the suffixes 77, 77 , and 77 ,
$$ 114-121 ... .... 35
Deel. X. Perfect-Participle Bases in TĘ $$
122–125 39
Decl . XI. Bases in 377 $$ 126-130........... 41
B. Vowel. Bases $$ 131–153 .... 42
i
Decl. XII. Bases in 37 and at S$ 131-135 42
Decl. XIII. Bases in 3 and 3 $$ 136-140 ......... 44
Decl. XIV . Femin. Bases in ſ and 5 $$ 141–144. 47
Decl. XV. Monosyll. Masc. and Fem . Bases in 37 , 8,
5 at the end of Tatpur. Comp. $$ 145–147 ... 48
Decl. XVI. Bases in te $ $ 148–152... 49
Decl. XVII. Bases in , it, and it $ 153 51
A list of some irregular Bases $ S 154—166 ......... 32
Suffixes expressing the meanings of cases and inde.
clinable nouns $$ 167-168 ......... 56
CAAPTER IV. - COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES $$ 169 -

176 56
(a) By means ofthe secondary suffixes ac and an SS
169-172 ..... 56

( 6) By means of the primary suffixes $ 47 and 58

$$ 173—175 ..... 57
Chapter V. - PRONOUNS, PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES,
AND THEIR DECLENSION $$ 177—200 ...... 60
1. Personal Pronouns $ $ 177—178............. 60
2. Demonstrative Pronouns $$ 179–181 ................. 61
3. The Relative Pronoup 182 64
4. The Interrogative Pronoun $$ 183-184 65
5. Indefinite Pronouns $$ 185-186 65
6. Reflexive Pronouns $$ 187–188 65
7. Possessive Pronouns $ $ 189-190 65
8. Correlative Pronouns $ $ 191–192 ........ 66
9. Reciprocal Pronouns § 193 .......
10. Pronominal Adverbs & 194 67
1 ) . Pronominal Adjectives $$ 195-200 ... 63
 CONTENTS , xiii

PAGE

CHAPTER VI.-NUMERALS AND THEIR DECLENSION

$$ 201—213 69
Cardinals and Ordinals $8 201-203 69
Declension of the Cardinals and Ordinals 88 204-212.73
Numeral Adverbs and other Numeral Derivatives.
§ 213 ....... 75

CHAPTER VII.-CONJUGATION OF VERBS $8 214-485..... 75

1. Conjugation of Primitive Roots $ 8 221–403 77
1. The Parasmaipada and Âtmanepada $8 224–385 . 78
Augment and Reduplication $8 228-232 79
d . Special Tenses S $ 234_296 82
(a) Special Tenses of Roots with unchangeable
special Base ( 1sl, 4th, and 6th Classes ) $$
238-250 85
Irregular Roots of the 1st, 4th, and 6th Classes
$$ 247-250 .. 88
(6) Special Tenses of Roots with changeable special
Base (2nd, 3rd , 5th, 7th, 8th, and 9th Classes)
$$ 251—296 ............. ...... 90

Irregular Roots of the 2nd, 3rd , 5th, 7th, 8th,

and 9th Classes & $ 266-296 104
B. General Tenses $$ 297–385 ........ 109

The intermediate $ 298 110

1. The Perfect S $ 299—330 .... 111
(a) The Reduplicated Perfect $$ 301-327 ......... 112
(6) The Periphrastic Perfect $$ 328-330 ......
....... 124
2. The Aorist $$ 331-366 126
(a) The Radical Aorist $$ 333–344 ..... 127
(1) The Sibilant-Aorist $$ 345–366 130

3. The two Futures $ S 367-377 .... 137

(a) The Simple Future $$ 368—372 ..... 138
(6) The Periphrastic Future $$ 373——377 ...... 141
4. The Conditional SS 378-379 143

5. The Benedictive $$ 380—385 144

 CONTENTS .
sir
PAGE

148
II . The Passire $$ 386–401
148
A. The Present and Imperfect $$ 387-390
B. The Perfect, the Aorist, the two Futures, the
Conditional, and the Benedictive $$ 391-401. 149
Conjugation of rt. gue in Far ., Âtm ., and Pass. & 402 152
Alphabetical list of some irregular Verbs § 403 ............ 157
II . Conjugation of Derivative Verbal Bases $$ 404-485 ... 168
1. Conjugation of the roots of the tenth class and of
the Causal of all roots $$ 404–438 ........ ...... 168

1
(A.) The roots of the tenth class SS 404–423 ...... 168
178
( B.) The Causal $$ 424–438
186
2. The Desiderative $$ 439–456
197
3. The Frequentatire SS 457—174
206
4. Nominal Verbs $$ 475–485 .......
CHAPTER VIII. - PREPOSITIONS AND OTHER VERBAL
211
PREFIXES $$ 486-490
CHAPTER IX . - FORMATION OF NOMINAL BASES -
$$ 491-576 .... 214
215
1. Derivative Nominal Bases $$ 494—540
216
1. Participles $$ 498—512 .....
(a) Participles of the Present Tense $$ 498—500.... 216
(6) Particip'os of the Simple Future $ 501 ............ 218
( c) Participles of the Perfect S $ 502—305 ............ 219
( d ) The Past Participles $$ 506—512 .......... 221
228
2. The Gerund $$ 513—526 .... .....
228
(a) The Gerund iu cat $$ 514—518 .......
232
(1) The Gerund in S $ 519–525 ......

235
(c) The Gerund in a $ 526 ...
236
3. "The Infinitire $ 527 ... O

236
4. Verbal Adjectives S $ 528–538 .......
237
(a) The Verbal Adj. in nou § 529 ....
(6) The Verbal Adj. in state $$ 536-531 237
238
(c) The Verbal Adj. in z SS 532–538
5. A list of other common Primary Suffixes § 539 242
6. A list of the most common Secondary Suffixes § 540. 245
 XV
CONTENTS .

PAGE

247
II. Compound Nominal Bases && 541-370.........
1. Tatpurusha or Determinative Comp. $$ 547-561 . 252
( a ) Dependent Determinative Comp . $$ 547-552. 252
(6) :Ippositional Determ. Comp. ( Karinadharaya )
...... 255
$$ 553—557 ......
(*) Numeral Determ . Comp. (Dvigu) SS 558–560 . 257
2. Babuvrihi or Attributive Compounds $$ 562—568. 259
3. Dvandra or Copulative Compounds $$ 569–573 . 263
4. Avyayîbhava or Adverbial Compounds $$ 574-575 . 264
CHAPTER X -INFLECTED WORDS IN THE SENTENCE
205
$$ 577–646 .......

266
1. The Finite Verb $$ 578—593
267
( a ) The Present Tense $$ 582-583
(6 ) The three Past Tenses $ $ 584-585 268
269
( c) The two Futures § 586 ........
269
( d ) The Imperative $ 587
270
( e) The Subjunctive ş 588.........
U) The Potential S$ 589-591 . 270

( 9 ) The Conditional § 592 ..... 271

........

(1) The Benedictive $ 593......... 271

2. The Infinitive, Gerund, Participles, and Verbal
Adjectives $$ 594–604 ... .....
........ 271
(a) The Infinitive $$ 595–597 ...... ... 271
( 6) The Gerunds in car and I $$ 598—599 ............ 272
273
(c) The Participles $$ 600—603 .......
274
( d ) The Verbal Adjectives § 604
3. The Cascs of Nouns $$ 605-645 274

(a) The Nominative $ 607.......... 275

(6) The Accusative S $ 608—613 .... ..... 275

277
( c) The Instrumental $$ 614–619 ...
279
(d) The Datire $$ 621–624
(e) The Ablative SS 625—630 .... 280
282
( ) The Locatire SS 631–638 ...
... 284
6) The Genitive SS 639—644
285
Number and Gender $ 645 .....
1
 1 Milit, till

SANSKRIT GRAMMAR .

CHAPTER I.
THE LETTERS.

. ) .—The Devanagari Alphabct.

§ 1. Sanskrit, thc sacred as well as the learned language of India, is
commonly written iu the Devanagari alphabet. This alphabet cousists
of the following letters :
(a) 13 vowel-signs : -अ a, आ , इ , ई i, उ ॥ , ऊ , Fri,
Fri, at !i,Te, ai, ait o, aft au .
(6) 33 syllabic signs for the var ous cousonants, cach followed by
the vowel a :
on line liha, I ga , E gha, 3 na ;
cha, chla , a ja, झ jha, Tña ;
टE ţa , 3 tha, ड da, 7 dha, OT ? la ;
त ta, tha, da , dha, na ;

Tpa, + pha, a ba, # bha , म ma ;

य -ya , T ra , ल la ,, a vai

T sha , sha, स 8ll , 5 ha .

(c) Two signs for two nasnl sounds, vi:. Anusvára , denoted by-,
i.e. a dot placed above the letter after which Anusvåra is pronounced
(e.g. sih ansa ), and AnunAsika, denoted by *, i.c. a dot within a
semicircle placed above the letter after which Amunisika is pronounced ;
aud one sign for a strong spirant called Visarga , denoted by :, i.e. two
vertical dots placed after the letter after which Visarga is pronounced
( e.g. T gajah ).
§ 2. (a) The vowel-sigus in § 1 (a) denote only such vowels as are
not preceded by a consonant in the same scutence or verse, i e. they
ls
 Tidl
.

yil 2 3 VIKU

Yann 21

. SANSKRIT GRAMMAR.
[$ 3
denote the vowels which stand at the commencement of a sentence or
verse, and those vowels in the middle of a sentence or verse which are
preceded by another vowel ; e.g. 37477 abhavata ; # 376 sa áha.
(6 ) Short a , following upon a consonant of the same sentence or
verse, is not denoted at all ; e.g. Ts : gajaḥ.

(c) The remaining rowels, when following a consonant of the same

sentence or verse, are denoted thus :
& u ņri e ai 0 QU

by Ir ?
2

6.9. का कि की कु कू कृ कृ क्ल के कै को को
i.e. kuki hêku kú kri kļi kļi ke kai ko kau .
Ecceplion : The vowel şi, when following upon r , is denoted by the
initial sign ri ; = rri. (See $ 3 c .)
$ 3. (a) When any of the 33 syllabic signs in $ 1 (6) is to denote a
consonant which is not followed by any vowel and stands at the end of
a sentence or verse, thc sign called Virama (i.e. ' pause'), is placed
under it ; eg. ककुप् kakup, अभवत् abharat, अयम् ayam.
(6) Two or more consonants which are not separated by a vowel or
vowels are denoted by combivations of the syllabic signs in § 106). These
combinations are formed either by placing the succeeding under the pre
ceding sigo, leaving out the horizontal top -line of the former, or by
placing the signs one after the other, leaving out the vertical stroke of
the preceding sign ; e.g. p = p.ta ; = k- na ; F = n.da ; ET = ch-ya ;
fact = t-8-n-ya. (Owing to the difficulty of printing the Virâma is
occasionally employed in combinations of consonants ; e.g. instead
ofunyunkte.)
(c) When the consonant r immediately precedes another consonant
or the vowel e ri, it is denoted by the sign placed above the letter
or combination of letters before which it is pronounced ; e.g. a arka,
pri kárlsnya. This sign for r is placed to the right of any other
signs which may stand above the letter over which it has to be placed ;
e.g. arkena, var arko, span arkun . When follows another
consonaut without the intervention of a vowel, it is denoted by the sign
d placed under the consonant after which is pronounced ; e.g. 757
rajra, u shukra.
§ 4. The changes which some letters undergo when they are com
bined with other letters will appear from the following alphabetical
list :
 THE LETTERS . 8
$ 4.)
& k -ka, 40 l -kha, Ti k -ta, k -t-ya, i l:-t-ra, mal-t-va ,
s k -na, FH l :-ma, FT l -ya, or 7 k -ra, F k - la , 5 k -va,
क्ष k - gha, क्ष्म -gh- ma %;
Ou kh -ya, u kh -ra ;
g - ya , a gora, g -roya ;
gh -na, e gh -ma, Tgh -ra ;
Fi-ka, ick-ta, r i -li -kha, i-k-sh-ea, ri-ga,
n - gha ;
च ch-cha , च्छ ch-chha, च्छू ch -chh -ra, a ch-iia, च्म ch - ma%3B
छ्य chh- ya, chh -ra%B
ज्ज jja, ज्झ j -jha, ज्ञ j - ha, जय j-i -ya , ज्म j-ma, j -ra ;
añocha, 33 ñ -chha, Fñoja ;
दू- a ta, a tya ;
घ th -ya, th-ra ;
ग diga, ed- ys ;
द्य dh-ya , dhira
ण्ट n.tu ण्ठ n-tha, ण्ड -da, ण्ड ? -dha, ण्ण or a n - na, ण्म -ma

ल्क t -la, त्त t -ta , त्य t-t-ya, a t -t-ra, व t -t- va, स्थ t-tha,
न t-na, a t - pa , a or a t -ra, ल्य or त्र्य t -i -ya, त्व t -va, त्स t -sa,
277 th -ya ;
द्र d -ga, ६ d - da, d -dha, ड्व ddle -ra , Pd-na, दू d-ba,
d -bha, FJ d- th-ya, 7 d -ma, Ud - ya, il-ra, I d -r-ya, I d -va,
ब्ध d-v -ya ;
भ un- na , म dh-ma , ध्र dh -ra , ध्व dh - va%3;
न्त u.ta, न्त्य n.t- ya, न्त्र n.t-ra, न्द n.da, न्द्र n-d-ra, न्ध n -dha,
न्ध n -dli -ra, न n -na , an-ra ;
4 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR .
[$5
म p-ta , म p- na , प्म p- ma, p-ra, प्ल p-la, प्स pisa %B
55 b -ja, b.da , 54 builha, b -na , T bora ;
bh -na, 247 bh -ya, 7 bh-ra ;.
Em-na, म्प m - pa, म्ब m-ba, म्र m-ra, pm-la3
य्य y - ya , टव y - ra ;

रु ru, रू r- a, Sr.ka, r-dha ;

ल्क l-ka, ल्प l- pa, ल्ल -la, ल्व l - va%B
न-na , व्य U - ya , व्र v.ra %;

शु or भु sh- u , शू or y st- 7 or Fsh-ri, शृ or sh-ri,

ध sh -cha, ध्य gh -ch- ya, 4 sle-na, श्य or भ्य sh-ya, अ sh -ra,
ध्य sh-r-ya, N sh-la, श्व sh-ra, श्य 8h -o -ya%3B
ष्ट sh -ta, ष्टय gh-t- ya, ष्ट्र sh -t-ra, ष्ट्रय sh-t-r-ya, gh-t-va ,
ष्ठ sh-tha, व्य sh -th -ya, ष्ण sh-na, ष्ण्य gh- a - ya, ष्म sh - ma ;
F 8-ka, FCT - kha , FT 8-ta, FET 8 -t-ya, For a g -tra,
स्त्व st-ra, स्थ :-tha,स्न s - na , स्स 8 - pa , स्त्र-ra %B
है h - a, ह h -ri, rh- na, ह h-na, म hima, kh-ra, f n -la, ह h-va.
55. (a) The sign s, called Avagraha (i.e. ' separation, mark of sepa.
ration'), is in many texts employed to indicate the elision of (short ) ta
after preceding ए e or ओ ० ; e.g. तेऽभवन् te'thavan ; गजोऽस्ति gajo 'sti.
(6) The sign º denotes an abbreviation ; e.g. su achukshushaw ,
gazia ( acha )kşhurbhyán ; qrº Pá (niniye).
( c) The signs of punctuation are I and II .
$ 6. The numeral figures are : -
१ २ 3 ४ ५ ८
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0

१. 10 ; १५ 15 ; १५३ 143 ; २६८ 268 ; १८७१ 1879.

2. - Classification of the Letters.
$ 7. ( a) Vowels are divided into : -
(1. ) Simple rowels, अ, आ, इ, ई, उ, ऊ, ऋ, ऋ , क ; and
(2.) Diphthongs, ए , ऐ, ओ, औ.
(6) They are also divided into :
$ 12.) TAB LETTERS . 3

(1.) Short vowels, 37, , 3, # , # ; and .

(2.) Long vowels, 3 + 1, 5, 55, # ; t .7, at, t.

$ 8. Short rowels which are not followed by any consonant, or are
followed by only one consonant, are prosodially short ; short vowels
followed by combinations of two or more consonants and all long rowels
Are prosodially long.
$ 9. Vowels which differ in nothing but their quantity are called
homogoneous vowels ; 37 and 97 are homogeneous ; 5 and f ; 3 and
ऊ ; and ऋ.
$ 10. Guna and Vriddhi. The vowels 97 , 5 , 1, and the syllables
55 and syt are called Guņa ; the vowels TT , À , sit, and the syllables
strs ( and str . ) are called Vriddhi. The relation of the Guņa and
Vriddhi vowels and syllables to the simple vowels will appear from the
following table :
mafro

Simple V. भ इई उ& ऋ
Guna. भ 311 STT STRE
Vșiddi. STT SAT SIIT ( आल)

f 11. (a) Consonants are classified thus:

SU'RD , SONANT.

Unaspirate. Aspirate. Sibilants. Onaspirate. Aspirate. Nasal. Semirowela

Gutturals क ग्य :
ग घ
Palatals छ ग I य
Linguals ₹
Dentals त्
Labials प् न् I

( 6) The consonant is a sonant aspirate.

(c) Vowels likewise are sonant.
$ 12. ( 1) The four semirowels 2, 3 , 5, and correspond to the
simple vowels 3,3 3 , # , and 2, respectively.
(6) The three semivowels 4 , 5 , and 7 are sometimes nasal, and they
are then distinguished from the ordinary 4 , 5, and by the sign for
Anunâsika ( sic) which is placed orer them ( , , and ) .
 0 BANSKRIT GRAYNAR. [$ 13–

S CHAPTER II.
RULES OF EUPHONY ( Sandhi).
conta
- A.-FINAL AND INITIAL LETTERS or COMPLETE WORDS.
$ 13. A complete word (which ought to be carefully distinguished
from a verbal root or a nominal base), when standing alove or at the
end of a sentence or verse, may end in any vowel, except af and , or iu
one of the consonants 2,2,4,6,7,7,7,7, or Visarga
§ 14. Words are not allowed to end in more consonants than one,
except that they may end in one of the conjunct consonants o , f, g,
and provided both elements of these conjoncts are radical letters or
substitutes for radical letters ; e.g. Nom Sing. of the base 534= ;
3. Sing. Imperf. Par. of rt. = 3TATE.
§ 13. A word, when standing alone or at the commencement of a
sentence or verse, may begin with any vowel or consonavt, except
R, 5, 6 , 7, 7 , Anusrära, or Visarga.
§ 16. When complete words are joined together so as to form a
sentence or verse, their final and initial letters remain in some instances
unchanged, but in the majority of cases the final of the preceding or
the initial of the following word, or both , must undergo certain changes
which are intended to facilitate the pronunciation . The rules which
teach these changes are called the Rules of Euphony, or Rules of Sandhi.
1. - Contact of Final and Initial Voiceli.
§ 17. In general, no hiatus ( i.e. the succession of two rowels
without an intervening consonant) is allowed between two words. To
avoid it, the final and initial vowels are made to coalesce, or the final
vowel is changed to a semivowel, or the initial vowel is dropped. The
special rules are :
$ 18. Final simple rowels, short or long, unite with initial homo.
geneous (§ 9) voiels, skort or long, and form the corresponding long
vowels ; i e.
अ or आ + अ or आ = आ ; c.g. अत्र + भस्ति = अत्रास्ति ; अत्र + आसीत्
= अत्रासीत् । यदा + अस्ति - यवास्ति .
Fort + { or ई = ई ; .. अस्ति + इह = अस्तीह ; अपि + ईभते =
अपीसते नदी + इह = नदीह .
उ or i + उ or ऊ = ऊ ; e.g. साधु + उक्तम् = साधूक्तम् ; साधु + ऊचुः =
साधुचुः..
क + क = * ; 9. कर्ट + ऋजु = कर्तृजु.
$ 24. ] ROLES OF BURHONT.. 7

19. Final अ and आ unite with initial tor ई to ए . with initial 7 or

to ओ. with initial a to अर , with initial ए or ऐ to ऐ , and with initial
sit or at to aft ; c.g.
तव + इच्छा = तवेच्छा ; यदा + इच्छा = यदेच्छा ; यथा + ईक्षतेययेक्षते ;
सा + उवाच = सोवाच ; तदा + ऊचुः =तदोचः ; यथा + ऋषिः = यथर्षिः ;
तव + एव = तवैव ; तव + ऐश्वर्यम् = तवैश्वर्यम् ; सा + ओषधिः = सौषधिः
तव + औत्सुक्यम् = तवौत्सुक्यम् .
$ 20. Final simple rowels, short or long, except अ and आ , before
initial vowels not homogeneous with them are changed to the cor .
responding semivowels ($ 12 a ); i.e.
Fort before अ.आ, उ, ऊ क, ए, ऐ ,ओ, औ, to य् ; g. इति + आह =
इत्याह ; इति + उक्तम् = इत्युक्तम् नदी + एव = नये .
उ or before अ , आ, इ, ई, ऊ, ए , ऐ, ओ, औ, to g . मधु + अस्ति =
मध्वस्ति ; मधु + इह % मविह.
क before अ, आ , इ, ई, उ, ऊ , ए, ऐ, ओ, भौ, tot ; e.g. कर्व + अस्ति =
कर्वस्ति ; कर्व + इह = कत्रिह.
& 21. Final g and 3ft before initial 39 remain unchanged, but the
initial sy is dropped ; e.g.
ते + अत्र = तेऽत्र प्रभो + अत्र - प्रभो .
$ 22. Final F and sit before any other initial towel than 27 are
changed to 377 and 977 , or more commonly both to 37 ; the initial
vowel is not changed. E.g.
ते + आसन् = तयासन् , or more commonly त आसन् .
ते + इह = तयिह, )) त इह .
प्रभो + एहि = प्रभवेहि, 99 प्रभ एहि.
Note : - The hiatus resulting from the dropping of z avda in this
and the next rule, and of Visarga in $$ 35 (c) and 36, remains ; a STET
ctc., cannot be again combined .
$ 23. Final ऐ and औ are before all initial rowels changed to भार
and आव, or both to भा ; the usual practice is to change ऐ to आ , and
औ to आव. The initial vowel remains unchanged . E..
तस्मै + अदात् = तस्मायदात् , or usually तस्मा अदात् .
तस्मै + उक्तम् = तस्मायुक्तम् ॥ तस्मा उक्तम्.
तो + इह = ताविह, sometimes ता इह.
तो + एव = तावेव, ता एव .

Erceptions.
§ 24. (a) Final st or 877 of a preposition unites with the initial #
of a verbal form to आर ; g. प्र + ऋच्छति-प्रार्छति. / 29
no pronder Wwwn. ?
8 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR . [525

( 8 ) Final अ or आ of a preposition unites with an initial ए and ओ

of a verbal form ( except with the initial y of forms derived from y'to
go ,' and ' to grow ") to and it ; e.g.
प्र + एजतेप्रेजते ; प्र + भोखति - पोखति.- But अप + एतिअपैति.
8 25. ( a) ई, ऊ , and ए , when final in dual forms and in अमी ( Nom.
Plur. Masc . of the demonstrative pronoun 87 & ), remain unchanged
(pragrihya) before all initial vowels,and all initial vowels remain unchanged
after them ; eg.
गिरी + इह -गिरी इह ' two hills here.'
गिरी + एतौ =गिरी एतौ ' these two hills .'
अमी + अश्वाः = अमी अश्वाः ' those horses '
भानू + आस्ताम् = भानू आस्ताम् । साधू ऊचतुः ; लते इह ; लवे अत्र .
यजावहे इह ' we two sacrifice here .':
यजेते उभो ' both sacrifice :'
भासाये अत्र ' you both sit here.'
( 6 ) Interjections consisting of only one vowel and the final sit of
particles remain unchanged, and initial vowels remain unchanged after
them ; e.g.
भ + अपेहिअ अपेहि ; इ इन्द्र ; अहो अपेहि .
2. - Contact of Final Vowels and Consonants with Initial Vowels and
Consonants.

( a.) Changes of Final Consonants.

$ 26. Surd finals can stand only before surd initials ; before sonant
letters they are changed to the corresponding sonants, ( Visarga
generally to g ), and before nasals to the nasal of their own class. Final
dentals are generally assimilated to initial palatals and linguals, and
final म् to any initial consonant . The special rules are :
$ 27. Final क , द, and y
(a) Before sonant letters are changed to ग, इ, and r respectively ;
e.g. सम्यक् + उक्तम् = सम्यगुक्तम् । सम्यक + वदति = सम्यग्वदति ; परिवाद
+ गच्छतिपरिव्राङ्गच्छति ; ककुप् + दृष्टा -कष्टा.
(6 ) Before nasals, however, final , q, ' and q are more commonly
changed to छ , ण, and ve.g. सम्यक + मिलितः सम्यग्मिालतः by (a), ur
more cominonly सम्यझिलितः; परिव्राट् + न = परिव्राडु or परिव्राण्न ; ककुप् +
न - ककुन्न or ककुन्न .
((c) Before surd consonauts final f, T, and g remain unchanged ;
e.g. सम्यक् + पृष्टम् = सम्यक्पृष्टम् ; परिवाद + तिष्ठति = परिव्रातिष्ठति ककृप
+ शुष्का - ककुंशुष्का .
$ 30.] RULES OF EOPRONY . 9

828 Final -
( a ) Before initial or g , is changed to ; before I or Æ, to ti
before or , to mi before z or , to ; and before a to a ; e. g. aC +7
= तच ; तत् + छिनत्ति = तच्छिनत्ति ; तत् + जातम् = तज्जातम् । तत् + टकम्
= तहङ्गम् तत् + डयते = तडुयते; तत् + लुब्धम् = तल्लुब्धम्.
(6) Before the palatal sibilant L, finala is changed to q, after which
the initial is commonly changed to छ . 9. तत् + शास्त्रम् = तच्छास्त्रम्
or तच्छास्त्रम् .
( c) Before the remaining surd consonants final a remains unchanged;
e. g. तत् + करोति = तत्करोति ; तत् + तिष्ठति = तत्तिष्ठति तत् + फलम्
तत्कलम् । तत् + सहते = तत्सहते.
( c ) Before the remaining sonant consonants and before vowels
final t is changed to ; . 9. तत् + अर्हति = तदर्हति तत् + गच्छति =
तगच्छति तत् + भूतम् = ततम् । तत् + रमते = तद्रमते.
( e) But before nasals final ą is more commonly changed to Zi 4. g.
तत् + नृत्यति तत्यति by ( d ), or more commonly तनृत्यति ; तत् + मुग्धम्
= तयुग्धम् or तन्मुग्धम्.
$ 29. Final and e
(a) Are doubled when preceded by a short vowel and followed by
any initial vowel ; e. 9. प्रत्यङ् + भास्ते = प्रत्यास्ते सुगण + इति = ग .
णिति. (See $ 30a).
(6) Otherwise final and remain unchanged ; e. g. प्राड् + अस्ति
= प्राङस्ति ; प्रा + तिष्ठति = प्रातिष्ठति प्राड् + सः = प्राड: सुगण +
गच्छति = सुगण्गच्छति सुगण + च = सुगण्च ; सुगण + षटुम् = सुगषदूम.
530. Final न्
(a) Is doubled when preceded by a short vowel and followed by
any initial vowel ; . . तुदन + इह = नुनिह. But भवान् + इह = भवानिह.
( See 529a).
( 6) Before T , U , and I, final7 is changed to st ; before and 7 ,
to ; and before ल to the nasal c i.e. to ल. After - the initial
may be changed to छ . E. g. तान् + जनान् = ताञ्जनान् ; तान् + शत्रून् %
ताशवन or ताञ्छन्; तान् + डम्बरान् = ताण्डम्बरान् ; तान् + लोकान् =
ताल्लोकान् .
(c) Between final and initial च् or छ, or , and त् or ५, the
corresponding sibilants , , and a are inserted (i. e. [ before च् or छ,
ए before ट् or , स् before त् or L). and before them the inal न् is
changed to Anusrara ; e.g. तान् + च = तांश्च ; तान् + टान् = तांटाना
तान् + तु = तांस्तु .
( d ) Before vowels (except where (a) is applicable) and before the
remaining consonants final - remains unchanged ; ... सान् + आह %
2s
 10 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR . [$ 31
तानाह ; तान् + पालयति = तान्पालयति ; तान् + भर्तृन तान्भनून् ; तान् + धत्ते
= तान्धत्ते तान् + न = तान ; तान् + याति = तान्याति ; तान् + षद् = तान्षद
तान् + सः = तान्सः तान् + है- तान्ह .
831. Final म्
(a) Before initial vowels remains unchanged ; ... तम् + आह -
तमाह ; तम् + एव = तमेव.
(6 ) Before sibilants, and before ह् and r, final म् is changed to
Anusvara; eg. तम् + शत्रुम् = तं शत्रुम तम् + सः = तं सः ; तम् + इ = तं
हतम् + रक्षति - रक्षति .
(c) Before any other consonant final # may be changed to Anusvåra,
or it may be changed to the nasal of the class to which the initial con
sonant belongs, (to य्, , , before र , ल , व्.) The usual practice is to
change म् before all consonants to Anusrara. E.g. अहम् + करोमि
= अहं करोमि ( or अहङ्कारोमि ); अहम् + च = अहं च ( or अहच ) अहम् +
तिष्ठामि = अहं तिष्ठामि ( or अहन्तिष्ठामि ) ; अहम् + पिबामि = अहं पिबामि ( or
अहम्पिबामि ); अहम् + वच्मि = अहं वच्मि (or अहवच्मि ).
8 32. Final 0 remains unchanged before all initial letters ; e.g. कमल
+ अस्ति = कमलस्ति कमल् + करोति = कमल्करोति .
$ 33. Final Visarga, preceded by any vowel
(a) Remains unchanged before initial surd gutturals and labials
(क, ख, प, फ ); e.g. रामः + करोति = रामः करोति ; पुनः + करोति = पुनः
करोति ; रविः + करोति = रविः करोति .
( 6) Before sibilants, final Visarga may remain unchanged, or it
may be assimilated to the following sibilant ; .. 9. रामाः + षट् = रामाः
षट् or रामाष्षद रामः + सहते = रामः सहते or रामस्सहते ; पुनः + सः = पुनः
स: or पुनस्सः.
( 0) Before च or छ, or , and or थ्, final Visarga is changed to
the corresponding sibilants श्, , and स् respectively ; e . g. रामः + च =
रामश्च ;रामः + तु = रामस्तु पुनः + तु = पुनस्तु रविः + तु= रविस्तु.
5 34. Final Visarga, preceded by any vowel except अ or आ, is
changed to g before any sonant letter ; but this ç is dropped before ç, and
a preceding short rowel is lengthened. E.g: रविः + उदेति = रविरुदेति ; चक्षुः
+ ऋषः = चक्षुर्कषेः; मनुः + गच्छति = मनुर्गच्छति रविः + रूढः = रवी रूढः.
Exception : The final Visarga of 11: ' O, Ho,' is dropped before all sonant
letters ; e.g. भोः + आगच्छ = भो आगच्छ ; भोः + गम्यताम् = भो गम्यताम् .
835. Final अः, when standing for original अम्
(a) Is changed to ओ before all sonant consonants ; e. g. रामः (for
रामस् ) + गच्छति = रामो गच्छति ; रामः + हसति = रामो हसति.

।
 RUL ES
OF EUPION . Y 11
$ 40.]
(0) It is changed to it also before initial 37 ; the initial of itself is
dropped . E.g. रामः + अस्ति = रामो ऽस्ति.
(c) Before all other initial vowels 3T , when standing for original
अस् , becomes t ; e.g. रामः + इह = राम इह ; रामः + उवाच = राम उवाच .
$ 36. Final आः, when standing for original आस् , becomes आ before
all sonant letters ; e.g. अश्वा : (for अश्वास् ) + अत्र - अश्वा अत्र ; अश्वा : +
इह = अश्वा इह ; अश्वाः + धावन्ति = अश्वा धावन्ति .
$ 37. The final Visarga of अः and आः, when standing for originals,
is changed to g before all sonant letters; before an initial that final is
dropped and preceding tis lengthened. E.g. पुनः (for पुनर्) + अत्र - पुनरत्रः
इह -
पुनः + इह = पुनरिह ; पुनः + गच्छति = पुनर्गच्छति ; पुनः + रमते = पुना
रमते ; द्वाः (for द्वार) + अत्र = द्वारत्र ; द्वाः + दृष्टा = द्वादृष्टा ; हाः + रिक्ता
द्वा रिक्ता.
Note. In special combinations final Visarga after penultimate अ is
changed to Æ , and after penultimate z or 3 to , before surd gutturals
and labials. Instances of this change will be drawn attention to .
(6.) Chanyes of Initial Consonants.
§ 38. Initial 3
(a) After a final short rowel, and after the particles मा and आ ,
must be changed to च्छ ; ... तव + छाया = वर च्छाया ; मा + छिदन
= माच्छिदत् ; आ + छादयति = आच्छादयति .
(6) After a final long vowel, 3 may optionally be changed to oy :
eg.
e.g. सा + छिनत्ति == साच्छिनत्ति or सा छिनत्ति .
8 39. Initial ह् after final ग् , ड्, दू, and e, being substitutes for , ६,
त् , and
. by 6 27 ( 1) and $ 28 (d), is commonly changed to ८, द् , ५
and - respectively; e.g. सम्यक् + ह = सम्यग्ह or commonly सम्यग्य ; तत्
+ ह = तह or तद्ध ; परित्राट् + ह = परिव्राड्ह or परिव्राडः ककुप् + ह =
ककुब्ह or ककुभ.
640. (a) The initial (dental) न् of verbal roots is generally changed
to ( lingual) ण् after the ( lingual ( of the) prepositions अन्तः ( अन्तर् ), निः
(निर्), परा , परि , प्र, and after दुः ( दुर्) ; e.g. परि + नयति = परिणयति प्र +
नेतुम् = प्रणेतुम् ; प्र + नीता = प्रणीता.
( 1) The initial न of नृत् ' to dance,' नन्न् ' to rejoice,' नई ' to roar' and of
a few other less common roots remains unchanged ; c.g. प्र + नृत्यति =
प्रनृत्यति.
(c) The initial - of नश् ' to perish' remains nnchanged, when the final
श् is changed to r; e.g. प्र + नश्यति = प्रणश्यति ; but प्र + नष्टः = प्रनष्ट :.
( d) After the prepositions mentioned under (a) the of the preposition
F is changed to g before 77, 75 , TQ and certain other roots ; e.g. for.
गति, परिणिपतदि .
/
 12 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [8 41 —
§ 41. (a ) The initial & of many verbal roots is changed to after
prepositions ending in 7 and 3 , and after fat: and p ; e.g. F + atera
= निषीदति अनि + सिमति = अभिषिञ्चति ; अभि + स्तौति = अभिष्टौति ;
नि + सेवते = निषेवते.
(6) The initial & of roots which contain a F. , org, remains generally
unchanged ; e.g. वि + स्मरन् ( from rt. स्म ) = विस्मरन् ; वि + प्रवति (from
rt. बु ) = विनवति : वि + स्तीर्णम् (from rt. स्तृ) = विस्तीर्णम्.
B. --CHANGES OF FINAL LETTERS OF NOMINAL AND VERBAL BASES
AND INITIAL LETTERS OF TERMINATIONS, AND OF OTHER
LETTERS IN THE INTERIOR OF WORDS .
42 The special rules for the changes which take place when final
letters of nominal and verbal bases come in contact with initial letters of
terminations will be given under the heads of Declension , Conjugation,
& c. Here only the most general rules are noticed .
$ 43. In the interior of a simple word no biatus ( see § 17) is allowed ,
except in facre ' a sieve .'
§ 44. The rules laid down in $$ 18-20 apply generally also to the
fipal letters of bases and the initial letters of terminations ; e . g . citra
+ अः = कान्ताः ; कान्ता + अः = कान्ताः कान्त + ई = कान्ते; कान्त + औ
कान्तो ; मति + ए = मत्ये ; नदी + अः = नय ..
45. Final 5. f, and 3, 5 , especially when they are radical vowels,
are sometimes changed to rą and JT before terminations commencing
with a vowel ; eg . वी + भन्ति = वियन्ति ; भी + इ = भियि , यु + अन्ति =
युवन्ति ; भू + ६ = भूवि .
।
$ 46. Radical 7 and 3, followed by radical or < , are generally
lengthened when r or care followed by another consonant ; e.g.दिव
यामि = दीव्यामि ; गिर + निः = गीनिः ; पुर् + मिः = पूभिः.
।
§ 47. Final radical is sometimes changed to ft, or, when preceded
by more consonants than one, to अर ; .g. कृ + यते = क्रियते स्म + यते
= स्मर्यते.
$ 48. Final radical # before terminations beginning with a vowel is
generally changed to 75, before terminations beginning with a consonant,
to ईर ; when is preceded by a labial letter, it is changed to उर् and ऊर्
respectively. E .. कृ + अति = किरति ; कृ + यते = कीर्यते ; पिपृ + भति
= पिपुरति ; पिपृ + याम् = पिपूर्याम्.
549. Final ए, ऐ , ओ, and औ, before terminations commencing with
a vowel or 2, are mostly changed to H4 , 371 , 371 , and 3777 respectively ;
e.g. ने + अन = नयन ; रे + अः = रायः ; गो + इ = गवि ; नौ + ः =
नावः ; गो + य = गम्ब .
 RULES OF EOPHONT.
13
$ 55.]
§ 50. Before initial vowels, semivowels, and nasals of terminations,
final consonants of nominal and verbal bases remain generally un
changed ; 9. दुह् + ए = दुहे ; दोह् + मि = दोमि । वुह + यते = दुह्यते
वच् + मि वच्मि ; मरुत् + आ = मरुता.
§ 51. When a termination begins with any other consonant than a
senirowel or nasal, the following rules apply :
(a) Final surd consonants before initial sonant consonants become
sonant ; e.g. मरुत् + भिः = मरुद्भिः सर्वशक् + भ्याम् = सर्वशग्भ्याम् .
(6) Final sonant consonants before initial surd consonants become
surd ; e.g. तमोनु + सु = तमोनुत्सुः अद् + सि = अत्सि.
(c) Final aspirate consonants are changed to the corresponding
surd unaspirates before initial surd consonants, and to the corresponding
sonant unaspirates before initial sonant consonants ; e.g. art + a =
सुयुत्सु ; अग्निमय + भिः = अग्निमदिः
(d) Final palatal consonants ( including [ ), ए , and ह are com
monly changed to क्, ग्, or to ट्, ड्; e.g. वाच् + निः = वाग्भिः ; रुज +
भिः = रुग्भिः ;सदृश् + भिः = सदृग्भिः ; सम्राज् + भिः = सम्राडि लिड् +
भिः = लिङ्गिः लिह् + = लिस
( e) Final x is changed to Visarga, or to , or it is dropped ;
changed to ओ before sonant consonants ; e.g. मनस् + H = मनःसु or
मनस्सु , ज्योतिस् + भिः = ज्योतिर्भिः ;; आस् + वे = भावे ; मनस् + मिः
-

= मनोभिः.
8 52. Of two or more conjunct consonants which meet at the end
of &a word, generally (see $ 14) only the first is retained, the others being
dropped ; e.g. मरुत् + स् = मरुत् ; सुयुध् ++ स् == मुयुत् + स् ( by $ 51 c)
= सुयुत् ; अवन्त् + स् = अदन ; but ऊर्ज + स् = अ + स् ( by $ 5ld
=

and 6) = अ.
§ 53. When the final sonant aspirates q, , y, y, or are changed
to unaspirate letters, and when the syllable which originally ended
with , द, ध , भ् , or , commences with one of the sonant unaspirate
letters , , or a, the latter are changed to the aspirate q, , or of res
pectirely ; eg. बुध् + सु = बुत् + सु ( by 8510 ) = भुत्स ; दुह + स् =
दुक् + स् = धुक + स् = धुक् ( by $ 52) .
§ 54. g in the interior of a simple word after a vowel is changed
to च्छ ; cg. rt. छिद्, Imperf. अच्छिनन् , Perf. चिच्छेद rt. प्रछ, Perf.. पप्रच्छ .
§ 55. Initial and of terminations after sonant aspirates are
changed to ; e.g. लभ् + त = लम् + ध = लब्ध ( $ 51 c ) ; रुन्ध + थः
= हन्ध् + धः - इन्द्रः.
 14 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR . [856

856. Initial dentals of terminations after final linguals of bases are

changed to the corresponding linguals; e.g. ईइ + ते = ईहे (6516) ;
द्विष + धि = विड् + धि ( 551 d) = द्विड्डि इष् + त = इष्ट : मृद + नाति
मृड्वाति.
857. न् , when immediately preceded by च् or ज्, is changed to :
8.9. याच् + ना = याब्बा । यज् + न = यज्ञ .
$ 58. Dental l , provided it be followed by a vowel or by one of the
consonants 1, 2, 3 , 4, is changed to lingual I, when it is preceded
by ऋ ऋ ., or , either immediately or separated from these letters
by vowels, gutturals, labials, य, व, हू, or Anusvara; c.g. कर्तृ + नाम्
कर्तृणाम्; कर + अन = करण ; कर्मन् + आ = कर्मणा ; ब्रह्मन् + आ =
ब्रह्मणा ; राम , Instr. Sing. रामेण ; द्वेष , Instr. Sing. द्वेषेण पुष् + नाति =
पुष्णाति ;गृह् + नाति = गृह्णाति. But गर्ता + नाम् = गर्तानाम्; अर्ध, Instr.
Sing. अर्धेन & c..
8 59. The sibilant स् of a suffix or termination , provided it be fol
lowed by a vowel, or by a dental consonant, or by म् , or य् or व्, is
changed to , when it is preceded by क् , र, ल , or by any rowel except अ
and off, either immediately or separated from it by Visarga or an inserted
Anusvira ; e.g. कमल् + सु = कमल्षुः वाच् + सु = वाक् + सु = वाक्षु ;
वच् + स्यति % वक् + स्यति = वक्ष्यति अग्नि + सु = अग्निषु ; भानु + सु =
भानुषु ज्योतिस्+ आ =ज्योतिषा ; सर्पिः + F = सर्पिःषु or सर्पिष्षुः धनुस् ,
Nom. Plur. धषि ( SS 89 and 67) ; but पुम् + सु = पुंस ( $ 163).

CHAPTER III.
DECLENSION OF YOUNS SUBSTANTIVE AND ADJECTIVE .

$ 60. The Declension of Adjectives does not, in general, differ from

that of Substantives.
I $ 61. Nouns substantive and adjective have three Genders , a mag
culine gender, a feminine gender, and a neuter gender. The gender
of substantives must be learnt from the dictionary. Adjectives assume
the gender of the substantives which they qualify.
$ 62. Nouns substantive and adjective are given in the dictionary
in their base or crude form . Whenever an adjective assumes in the
Feminine a base different from that which it has in the masculine gender,
its masculine base is given in the dictionary, and the feminine base is
derived from the masculine base by the addition of a feminine suffis ;
... कान्त ' belored, ' Fem. base कान्त + आ = कान्ता ; धनिन् ' wealthy.'
 $ 67.] DECLENSION OP NOUNS . 15

Fem. base धनिन् + ई = धनिनी. The neuter base of adjectives is

generally the same as the inasculive base.
§ 63. Declension consists in the addition to the base of certain ter .
minations which denote the various cases in the different numbers.
§ 6. (a) Nouns substantive and adjective bare three Numbers ,
a singular number, a dual number, and a plural number. The dual
number denotes two.' E.g. Base 57 horse,' Sing. 37 : ' a horse,'
Dual apar ' two horses,' Plur. 572T: horses.'
(6) A few nouns are used in the Plural only ; 3789 : Fem . Plur.
' water' ; TTT: Masc. Plur. ' a wife';.
$ 65. There are eight Cases in each number ; viz. Nominative
( N.), Accusative (Ac.) , Instrumental ( I. ), Dative ( D.), Ablative
( Ab.) , Genitive (G., ) Locative ( L.), and Vocative (V.) The meaning
of the Instrumental is in English expressed by such prepositions as ' by,
with, by means of;' the meaning of the Ablative by such prepositions as
away from , from ;' the meaning of the Locative is generally expressed
by ' in' or ' at.'
§ 66. Table of Case -terminations added to masculine and feminine
bascs : .

Sing. Dual. Plur.

N. : (i.e. स्) औ अः (i.. अस् ).

Ac. अम् औ अः (i.e. अस् ).
I. आ भ्याम् भिः (i.e. भिस् ).
D. ए भ्याम् भ्यः (... भ्यस् ).
Ab. अः (i.e. अस्) भ्याम् भ्यः (i.e. भ्यस् ).
G. अः (i.e. अस्) i.e. ओस् ) आम्,.
ओः (i...
L. इ ओः (i.e. ओस् ) सु .
The termination of the N. Sing. is always dropped after bases ending
in consonants ( see § 52) . The Vocative is generally like the Nomi.
native.

8 67. The same terminations are added to neuter bases, except in

the N., dc., and V. of all numbers. No termination is added to neuter
bases (except those in अ) in the N. , Ac , and V. Sing.3 in the N., Ac .,
.

and V. Dual & is added instead of sit; in the N., Ac., and V. Plur. ris
 16 SANSKRIT GRANMAR . ($ 68
added instead of 9:, and a nasal is inserted before the final of bases
ending in consonants, except those that end in a nasal or semirowel. (As
will appear from the paradigms, the inserted nasal belongs to the same
class as the final consonant; before sibilantsand it is Anusvára).
68. The above terminations undergo various changes, especially
when added to bases ending in vowels ; these changes are best learnt
from the paradigms given under the various declensions.
$ 69. Terminations beginning with consonants may for convenience
sake be called consonantal terminations, terminations beginning with
vowels vowel- terminations .
$ 70. According to the final letter of the base the Declension of
nouns substantive and adjective is divided into :
A.-Declension of bases ending in consonants or Declension of
Consonantal Bases (Deel I.-- XI.); and
B. - Declension of bases ending in vowels or Declension of Vowel .
Bases (Decl. XII. - XVII.)
Consonantal Bases are subdivided into

1. Unchangeable Bases, i.e. Bases which either undergo no change

at all ( Decl. I.), or undergo generally only such changes as are
required by the rules of Sandhi (Decl. II.-V. ); and
2. Changeable Bases, i.e. Bases which in their declension show
:
a strong and a weak form , or a strong, a middle, and a weakest
form ( Decl. VI.-XI.).
A. - CONSONANTAL BASES.
1.-UNCHANGEABLE BASES.
DECLENSION I.

Bases ending in and .

$ 71. Sandhi:
1.{ may optionally be inserted between the final of
of a base and
the termination # of the L. Plur.
2. After final of the termination of the L. Plur. is changed to
($ 59 ).
$ 72. Paradigms: arturm.f.n.'counting well,' m.f.n. “ naming
the goddess Lakshmi or the lotus .'
1

i
 DECLENSION OP NOUNS . 17
§ 72.)
Base : सुगण् sugan कमल kamal

Masc . and Fem .

Singular.
N. V. सुगण sugan (552) कमल kamal ( 552 )
Ac. सुगणम् sugan -am कमलम् kamal-ans

L. सुगणा sugan- a कमला kamal- 2

D. सुगणे sugan -e कमले kamal -e

Ab.G. सुगणः sugar -ak कमल : kamal -al

... सुगणि sugani कमलि kamal.;
Dual.

N. V. Ac. सुमणौ sugat - a0 कमलौ kamal-an

I. D. Ab. सुगण्भ्याम् sugan-bhyām कमल्भ्याम् kamal-bhyam
G ... सुमगोः sagar -ok कमलोः kamal-oh
Plural.

N..V . Ac. सुगणः sugan-ak कमलः kamal - ah

I. सुगभिः sugar -bhiḥ कमल्भिः hamal -bhik
D. Ab . मुगभ्यः
sugan-bhyah कमल्भ्यः kamal-bhyal
G. सुगणाम् sugan -am कमलाम् kamal- am
L. मुगण्सु or
sugan-su or कमल्छु kamal- shu
सुगण्ट sugant-su
Neuter.

Sing. N. V. Ac. सुगण sugan कमल kamal

Dual N. V. Ac. सुगणी sugax-i कमली liamali
Plur. N. V. Ac . मुगणि sugan -i कमलि kamal - i
The remaining cases are like those of the Masc. and Fem.; ..g.
Sing. I. सुगणा, कमला ; D. सुगणे , कमले & c.
38
 18 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR . [$ 73—
DECLENSION II.
Bases ending ( for the most parl ) in radical consonants other than
nasals and semitowels ; viz. :
(a) Bases in क ख ग घ , ड् , त् थ् द् ध्, ५ .
(७) Bases in च ज् श्ष छ ।
( 0 ) Bases in.
( 4.) - Bases ending in क् ख् ग , दद्, न् थ् द्ध्, भ.
573. Sandhi :
1. Before rowel-terminations the final of the base remains un
changed ($ 50).
2. In the N. and V. Sing. Masc. and Fem ., and in the N., V., and
Ac. Sing. Neut. final क , ख , ग , घ् become , final ,, . द् become
& , final , y, q, y becomeq , and final C , F, 2, 4 become g ($ 51 ). "
3. In the L. Plur. finals are treated as in the N. Sing. (8 51 ) ; subse
quently the termination # is after F changed to g ($ 59), and a may
optionally be inserted between final and the termination .
4. Before the terminations मिः, भ्यः, and भ्याम् final क , ख्, म्, be
come ग् , final , , , द become final न् , , दू , थ् become द . and
final , ,, become = (651).
5. When final q, & , vor * by rules 2, 3, and 4 are changed to ,
₹ , त्, ५, or to ग् , इ , उ, , 553 must be observed.
।
$ 74. Paradigms: Faursta m. f. n. ' conquering all ;' ÀY m . f. n .
• kindling fire;' तमोनुद् m.f.n. ' dispelling darkness; सुयुध . f. n. fight.
ing well ;' धर्म m.J. n. knowing the law;' सर्वशक् m.f.n. ' almighty :
Base : विश्वजित् अग्निमय तमोनुद्
Masc. and Fem..
Singular .
N. V. विश्वजित् अमिमत् तमोनुत्
Ac. विश्वजितम् अनिमथम् तमोनुदम्
I. विश्वजिता अग्निमथा तमोनुदा
D. विश्वजिते अनिमथे तमोनुदे
Ab. G. विश्वजितः अमिमथः तमोनुदः
L विजिति अग्निमथि नमोनुदि
 § 74.] DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 19

Dual

N. V. Ac. विश्वजितौ अग्निमयौ तमोनुदौ

I. D. Ab . विश्वजियाम् अग्निमयाम् तमोनुयाम्
G.L. विश्वजितोः अमिमथोः तमोनुदोः
Plural.

N. V. Ac. विश्वजितः अग्निमथः तमोनुदः

I. विश्वजिद्भिः अनिमद्भिः तमोनुद्भिः
D. Ab. विश्वजियः अग्निमयः तमोनुयः
G. विश्वजिताम् अग्निमथाम् तमोनुदाम्
L. विश्वजित्सु अग्निमत्सु तमोनुत्सु
Neuter .

Sing. N. V. Ac. विश्वजित् अग्निमत् तमोनुत्

Dual N. V. Ac. विश्वजिती अनिमथी तमोनुदी
Plur. N. V. Ac. विश्वजिन्ति अग्निमन्यि तमोनुन्दि
The rest like Masc . and Fem.

Base : सुयुध् धर्मबुध् सर्वशक्

Masc. and Fem.

Singu'ar.

N. V. सुयुत् धर्मभुत् सर्वशक्

Ac. सुयुधम् धर्मवुधम् सर्वशकम्
I. सर्वशका
सुयुधा धर्मबुधा
D. सुयुधे धर्मबुधे सर्वशके
Ab. G. सुयुधः सर्वशकः
धर्मबुधः
L. सुयुधि धर्मबुधि सर्वशकि
20 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR . [ $ 75—
Dual.

N. V. Ac. सुयुधौ धर्मबुधौ सर्वशको

I. D. Ab . सुयुड्याम् धर्मभुयाम् सर्वशग्भ्याम्
G. Ih सुयुधोः धर्मबुधोः सर्वशकोः
Plural.

N. V. Ac. सुयुधः . धर्मबुधः सर्वशकः

1. सुयुद्भिः धर्मभुद्भिः सर्वशग्भिः
D. Ab. सुयुधः धर्मभुयः सर्वशग्भ्यः
G. सुयुधाम् धर्मबुधाम् सर्वशकाम् .
सुयुत्सु धर्मभुत्सु सर्वशक्षु
Neuter.

Sing. N. V. Ac. सुयुत् धर्मभुत् सर्वशक्

Dual N. V. Ac. सुयुधी धर्मबुधी सर्वशकी
Plur. N. V. Ac. सुयुन्धि धर्मबुन्धि सर्वशति
The rest like Masc. and Fem.
575. Decline : हरित् m.J.n. ' green, ' like विश्वजितः
मरुत् m. ' wind, ' like विश्वजित् in Mase.3B
.;
दृषद / 'a stone, ' like तमोनु in Fem.;
ककु ' a region,' like any in Fem . (with labial
for dental).
( 6 ) -Bases ending in च्, , , , छ .
76. Sandhi :
1. Before vowel-terminations the final of the bnse remains unchanged
($ 50 ); but final y may optionally be changed to T; (observe § 54 )
2. In all the remaining cases
( a) Final is changed to g, and the base is then declined as a base
ending in .
(6) Final y is changed to g ; but when the final 7 forms part of
the roots सज ' to emit, to create ' (except in सज /. ' a garland, Sing. N.
$ 77.] DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 21

सक् & c.), मृज ' to cleanse ,' यज् ( contracted into इज ) ' to sacrifice,
(except in ऋलिज्, m . ' an officiating priest,' Sing. N. ऋत्विक् &c., राज्
' to shine, to govern,' भ्राज् 'to shine,' and as the final of परिव्राज्m.
' a religious mendicant,' it is changed to . Afterwards the bases are
declined as bases ending in and respectively,
( c ) Final [ is changed to ; but when forming part of the roots
दिश् ' to point,' दृश् ' to see,' स्पृश् ' to touch,' and मुश् ' to stroke,' it is
changed to ; and when forming part of the root TT ' to perish ,' it is
changed optionally either to or to a. Afterwards the bases are
declined as bases ending in or in a
( d ) Final ç is changed to , except in m. f. n. ' bold,' where it
is changed to 5. The bases are afterwards declined as bases ending in
ट् and a respectively.
( e) Final g is changed to , and the base is then declined as a base
ending in .
5 77. Examples : The N., V., and Ac. Sing, and the I. and L. Plur.
of the Masc. and Fem., and the N., V., Ac. Sing, Dual, and Plur. of
the Neuter of the following paradigms : सत्यवान् m.J. . ' speaking the
truth ;' शेषभुज् m. f... ' eating the rest ' विश्वज् M.J... ' creating the
universe ;' fare m . f. n. ' entering ;' TT m . f. n. 'well-looking ;' 74
m. f. n. 'perishing ;' fçq m . f. n. .hating ;' que m.f. n. ' bold ;' T4415
or TOTITT m . f. n. inquiring about a word ':
Base : सत्यवाच् शेषभुज विश्वसज्
Masc. and Fem .

Sing. N. V. सत्यवाक् शेषभुक् विश्वसन

Sing. Ac. सत्यवाचम् शेषभुजम् विश्वसजम्
Plur . I. सत्यवाग्भिः शेषभुग्भिः विश्वसद्धिः
Plur. L. सत्यवाक्षु शेषभुक्षु हट् or ° एट्स
Base : विश् सुदृश् नश्
Masc . and Fem.

Sing. N. V. विट् सुदृक् नट् or नक्

Sing. Ac. विशम् सुदृशम् नशम्
22 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR . [877

Plur. I. विडि सुदृग्भिः नभिः or नग्भिः

Plur. L. विव or विट्त्सु सुवृक्षु नस or नटत्सु , or नक्षु
Base : द्विर्ष दधृष् शब्दप्रा or शब्दप्राश
Masc. and Fem.

Sing. N. V. विद दधृक् शब्दप्राट्

Sing . Ac. द्विषम् दधृषम् प्राच्छम् or प्राशम्
Plur. I. विडि दधृग्भिः शब्दमाद्धिः
Plur. L. हिट्स or द्वित्सु दधृक्षु प्राट् or पाट्त्सु
Base :: सत्यवाच् शेषभुज विश्वस
Neuter.

Sing. N. V. Ac. सत्यवाक् शेषभुक् विश्वस्ट

Dual N. V. Ac. सत्यवाची शेषभुजी विश्वसृजी
Plur. N. V. Ac. सत्यवाञ्चि शेषभुन्नि विश्वसृद्धि
Base : विश् सदृश नश्
Neuter.

Sing. N. V. Ac. Patei सुदृक् नट् or नक्

Dual ' N. V. Ac. facit सुदशी नशी
Plar. N. V. Ac. विशि मुशि नंशि
Base : द्विष् दधृष शब्दप्रा or शब्दप्राश्
Neuter.

Sing. N. V. Ac. हिद दधृत शब्दप्राट

Dual N. V. Ac. fast दधृषी प्राच्छी or प्राशी
Plur . N. V.Ac. हिंषि दधृषि प्राञ्छि or प्रांशि
 DECLENSION OF NOUNS .
23
$ 1 .)
$ 78 Decline : 17 f. ' speech ,' like सत्यवान् in Fema
भिषज् m. a physician,' like शेषभुज
6
in Masc .;
रुज f. ' a disease, like शेषभुज in Fem.;
सम्राज् m. ' a king,' like विश्वसज् in Masc.;
दिश् . ' direction,' like सदृश in Fem.;
like . द्विष in Fem.
विष् . ' splendour'
579. Irregular bases : आशिष / . ' a blessing,' and सजुष् m. ' a com
panion .'

Singular. Dual. Plural,

N.V. आशीः
Ac. आशिषम् सजुषम्
सजूः
} आशियी ससजुषजाौ आशिषः सजुषः

I. आशिषा सजुषा शोभिः जूभिः

आशिषे सजुषे शीाम् जूाम् शीयः जूभ्यः
"
D.

Ab. आशिषः सजुषः

} ‘
शी
G. आशिषः सजुषः शिषाम् जुषाम्
आशिषोः सजुषोः
L. आशिषि सजुषि } आशियोः शोष्षु जूष्षु
or or

° शीःषु जूःषु
(C.) - Lases ending in ह:.

$ 80. Sandhi :
1. Before rowel -terminations the final है remains unchanged (550).
2. In all the remaining cases, (a) is changed to Zi ( ) but when
final in a root which commences with ę , and in 37i77 f. a particular
kind of metre, ह is changed to घ्; (c) when forming part of the roots
दुत् ' to hate,' मुह ' to faint,' सिड् 'to lore' and सुह ' to spue ,' ह may
optionally be changed to द् or to घ्; (d) and when forming part of the
6
root नह ' to bind ,' it is changed to 4. Afterwards the bases are declined
as bases originally ending in द, घ , or 5 .
8.81. Examples: The N., V., and Ac. Sing., and the I. and L. Plur.
of the Masc. and Fem., and the N. V. Ac. Sing., Dual, and Plur. of the
Neuter of the following paradigms: Fesz m . f.n . ' licking ;' TE m . f.n .
 24 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR . ($ 82
' hiding;' दुह् m.J.n. ' milking:' दुह् m. f. n. ' hating:' उपानह . '
shoe .
Base :
.
लिङ् गुह् दुह छह उपानह
Masc . and Fem . Fem.

Sing. N.V. लिट् घुट धुक् ध्रुट् or ध्रुक् उपानत्

Sing. Ac. लिहम् गुहम् दुहम् द्रुहम् उपानहम
Plur. I. लिङ्गिः घुद्धिः धुग्भिः ध्रुद्भिः or ध्रुग्भिः उपानद्भिः
Plur. L..
लिस घुट्ट धुक्षु ध्रुट्स or ध्रुक्षु उपानत्सु
or or or

लिट्त्सु घुटत्सु ध्रुत्सु

Neuter .

Sg. N. V. Ac. लिट् घुट धुक् ध्रुट or ध्रुक

Da. N. V. Ac. Poet
लिही गुही दुही दुही
Pl. N. V. Ac. लिंहि गुंहि दुहि दुहि
582. Irregular base : नुरासाह् m., a name of Indra, changes its स् to
v whenever its final is changed ; e.g. N. V. तुरापाद, but Ac. नुरासाहम् ,
I. तुरासाहा ke
DECLENSION III.

Bases ending in F.
883. Sandli :
1. The final ç is changed to Visarga in the N. and V. Sing. Masc..
and Fem ., and in the N., V., and Ac. Sing. Neut.
2. In all other cases it remains unchanged. (550.)
3. Penultimate 7 and 3 are lengthened in the N. and V. Sing.
Masc. and Fem., and in the N., V, and Ac. Sing. Neut , and before
all consonantal terminations. ($ 46.)
4. The termination सु of the L. Plur. is changed to पु . (559.)
$ 84. Paradigms: RTE S. ' speech ;' I f. ' a town ;' 115 n. ' water .'
 DECLENSION OF NODNA . 23
8 85. ]
गिर्

EEEEE
Base : पुर वार
Singular.

N. V. गीः पू वाः

गिरम् वाः
Ac.

I. गिरा वारा

D. पिरे वारे
Ab. G. गिरः वार:

L. गिरि वारि
Dual
'

N. V. Ac. गिरौ पुरी वारी

I. D. Ab. गीर्ष्याम् पूर्व्याम् वार्ष्याम्
G. L. गिरोः पुरोः वारोः 1 1

Plural

N. V. Ac . गिर पुरः वारि

I. गोभिः पूर्भिः वाभिः
D. Ab . गीर्यः पूर्यः वार्यः
G. गिराम् पुराम् वाराम्
L. गीर्षु पूर्षु वाएं
DECLENSION IV.
Bases ending in the anfi res इन् , मिन , and विन ( Masc. and Neut.).
885. Sandhi :
1. Before vowel- terminations the final 7 of the base remains un.
changed ( $ 50 ), except when it is changed to by $ 58 .
Before consonantal terminations final is dropped ; the termi
nation of the L. Plur. becomes g षु ( $ 59 ).
3. The final न्
= is dropped in the N. Sing. Masc., and the N. and Ac
Sing. Neut., and optionally in the v. Sing. Neut.
4. The penultimate is lengthened in the N. Sing. Masc., and in
the N., V., and Ac. Plur. Neut.
45

.
26 SANSKRIT GRAMNAR .
[ $ 86-
$ 86. Paradigms: art m . n. possessed of riches ;' afar m. n.
' wearing a garland .'
Base : धनिन् स्रग्विन् धनिन् स्रग्विन्
Masculine. Neuter.

Singular.
N. धनी स्रग्वी
Ac.
धनिनम् स्रग्विणम् } धनि स्रग्वि
I. धनिना स्रग्विणा
D. धनिने स्रग्विणे
like Masc..
Ab. G. धनिनः स्रग्विणः
L. धनिनि स्रग्विणि
v. धनिन् स्रग्विन् धनि or धनिन्स्रग्वि or स्रग्विन्
Dual.

N. V. Ac. धनिनौ स्रग्विणी धनिनी स्रग्विणी

I. D.Ab. yfyn aparat l like Masc.
G. L. धनिनोः स्रग्विणोः
Plural.

N. V. Ac. धनिनः स्रग्विणः धनीनि स्रग्वीणि

I. धनिभिः स्रग्विभिः
D. Ab. धनिभ्यः स्रग्विभ्यः
like Masc .
G. .
धनिनाम् स्रग्विणाम्
L. धनिषु स्रग्विषु
$ 87. The Feminine base of nouns which follow this declension is
formed by the addition of the feminine suffix { to the masculine base ;
... धनिन् , Fem. base धनिनी ; स्रग्विन् , Fem. base स्रग्विणी ; it is declined
like नदी ( 5141 ).
 . DECLENSION OF NOUNS.. 27
§ 89.)

DECLENSION V.

Bases ending in the aufixes अस् , इस्, and उस्.

88. Sandhi :
1. The final स् is changed to Visarga in the N. and V. Sing. Masc.
and Fem. , and the N, V., and Ac. Sing. Neut.
2. Before vowel-terminations the स् of अस् remains unchanged (550),
but the स् of इस and उस् becomes [ (659).
3. Before निः, भ्यः, and भ्याम् , अस् is changed to ओ . इस् tor , and उस्
to उर .
4. The termination सु of the L. Plur. remains unchanged after अस्
while the & of 37 may optionally either remain ħ or be changed to
Visarga. After & and JĘ the termination must be changed to s
(6 59), and the स् of इस् and उस् must be changed, either to ष, or to
Visarga.
5. The अ of अस् is lengthened in N. Sing. Masc. and Fem.; and
अ , इ, उ of अस् , इम, उस् are lengthened in the N., V., and Ac. Plur. Neut,
5 89. Paradigms : सुमनस् m . f. n. ' well- minded ;' उचिस् m.in.
' faring upwards ; ' STET m . f. n. 'eyeless, blind. '
Base : सुमनस् उर्चिस् अचक्षुस् सुमनस् उर्चिस् अचक्षुस्
Masc. and Fem.. Neuter.

Singular.

N. सुमनाः उदर्चिः ‘ अचक्षुः सुमनः उदर्चिः अचक्षुः

Ac..

I. सुमनसा उदर्चिषा अचक्षुषा

D. सुमनसे उदर्चिषे अचक्षुषे
Ab.G. सुमनसः उदर्चिषः अचक्षुषः like Masc. and Fem..
L. सुमनसि उर्चिषि अचक्षुषि
V. सुमनः उर्चिः . अवक्षुः
28 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR , [ $ 90
Dual.

N. V. Ac. सुमनसौ उदर्चिषौ अचक्षुषी सुमनसी उदर्चिषी अचक्षुषी

I. D. Ab. सुमनोभ्याम् चिया॑म् नाम् like Masc. and Fem .
G.L. सुमनसोः उर्चिषोः भचक्षुषोः }।
Plural.

N. V. Ac. सुमनसः उदर्चिषः अचक्षुषः सुमनांसि उदींषि अचसूषि

I. सुमनोभिः उदर्चिभिः अचक्षुभिः
D. Ab. सुमनोभ्यः उदर्चिर्यः अचक्षुर्यः like Masc. and Fem .
G. सुमनसाम् उर्चिषाम्अचक्षुषाम्
... सुमनस्सु उदर्चिष्षु अचक्षुष्षु
OT or or

सुमनःस उर्चिःषु अचक्षुःषु

190. Decline : चन्द्रमस् m. 'the moon, like सुमनम् in Masc .;
अप्सरस /. ' a nymph, ' like सुमनस् in Fem.;
पयस् n . " water, like सुमनस् in Nent. ; .
ज्योतिस् .. ' light,' mke उचिस् in Neut.;
यजुस् n. the Yajurveda,' like अचक्षुस् in Neut.
591. Irregular dases : अनेहस् m. time,' and पुरुदंशस् m., a name of
Indra, drop Visarga in the N. Sing. : अनेहा, पुरुदंशा , उशनस् m , a proper
name , does the same ( N. Sing. उशना) ; and forms the v . Sing. either
उशनः, or उशन , or उशनन्.
2. - CHANGEABLE BASES.

8 92. In the first five declensions the base remains, so far as it is

not affected by the rules of Sandhi, nearly always one and the same
throughout all cases. In the remaining declensions of consonantal
bases, the base has generally two forms, a strong base and a weak
base . The weak base is usually that which is given in the dictionary; the
strong base is formed from it by lengthening of the penultimate vowel,
or by the insertion of a nasal before the final consonant, & c.; 6.9.
Weak base आत्मन् भवत् महत् गरीयस् & c.
Strong buso आत्मान् भवन्त महान्त् गरीयांस् &c.
§ 98.) DECLENSION OF ROUXS. 29

$ 93 . Some nouns have three bases, a strong base , a middle base,

and a weakest base. Here usually the middle base is given in the
dictionary. If we strengthen it, e. g. by lengthening its pevultimate
rowel, or by the insertion of a nasal, we obtain the strong base ; if we
weaken it, e.g. by the elision of the penultimate vowel, or by contracting
two of its letters into one, we obtain the weakest base ; e.g.
Middle base सीमन् श्वन् युवन् प्रत्यच & c.

Strong base सीमान् श्वान् युवान् प्रत्यञ्च & c.

Weakest base सीम् शुन् यून् प्रतीच & c.

§ 94. Vouns with two bases, i, e. a strong base and a weak base : The
:

strong base is used in the strong cases, the weak base in the weak
casos .
(a) The strong cases are the Nom. and Acc. Sing ., the Noin. and
Acc. Dual, and the Noin . (not the Acc.) Plur. in Masc. and Fem ., and
the Nom . and Acc. Plur. in Neut.
(6) All the remaining cases (except the Vocatires) in Masc., Fem .,
and Neut. are weak .
$ 95. Nouns with three bases, i.e. a strong base, a middle base,
and a weakest base : The strong base is used in the strong cases,
the middle base in the middle cases, and the weakest base in the
weakest cases,
(a) The strong cases are, as before, the Nom. and Acc. Sing., the
Noin. and Acc, Dual, and the Nom . (not the dcc.) Plur, in Masc. aud
Fem ., and the Nom , and Acc. Plur. in Neut.
(6) Of the remaining cases , those the terminations of which begin
with consonants (i. e, the I. D. Ab . Dual, and the I. D. Ab. and Loc.
Plur., in Masc., Feni., and Neut.) , and the Nom. and Acc. Sing. Neut.
are middle cases,
(c) All the remaining cases (except the Vocatives) are weakest cases.
§ 96 . The Voc. Dual and Plur. in Masc ., Fem., and Neut, are
always like the Nominatives. The Voc . Sing. is sometimes like the
Nom . Sing ., and has sometimes a peculiar form of its own. It can
neither be called strong, nor middle, nor weak.
DECLENSION VI.

Cumparative bases in ga (Vasc. and Neut.).

$ 97 . Two bases: strong base ending in ziz ; weak base ending in T.
98. Sandhi :.
1. In the N. Sing. Masc . gia becomes TT ; in all other strong cases
it remains unchanged.
30 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR . [$ 99

2. In the weak cases the base in ga is treated like a base iu sta of

Declension v.
3. In the V. Sing. Masc. यस् becomes यन्. The V. Sing. Neut. is
like the N. Sing. Neut.
599. Paradigm : गरीयस् m n. ' hearier.'
Strong Base : गरीयांस्
Weak Base : गरीयस्
Masculine.

Singular. Dual. Plural.

N. गरीयान् गरीयांसः
गरीयांसौ
Ac . गरीयांसम् गरीयसः
I. गरीयसा गरीयोभिः
D. गरीयसे गरीयोभ्याम् गरीयोभ्यः
Ab. गरीयसः गरीयोभ्यः
G. गरीयसः गरीयसाम्
गरीयसोः
L. गरीयसि } गरीयस्सु or गरीयःसु
V. गरीयन् गरीयांसौ गरीयांसः
Neuter.

N. V.Ac. गरीयः गरीयसी गरीयांसि

The rest like Masc.
5100. The Feminine base is formed by the addition of the feminine
suffix t to the weak base ; e.५. गरीयस् , Fem. base गरीयसी ; it is declined
like नदी (6141 ).
DECLENSION VII.
Participle bases in अत् (fasc. and Neut.)
$ 101. Two bases : strong base eading in stra ; weak base ending in
भत् .
8 102. Sandhi :
1. In the N. Sing. Masc. अन्त् becomes अन् (552) ; in all other
strong cases it remains unchanged.
§ 104.] DECLENSION OF NOUNS . 81

2. In the weak cases the base in stą is treated like a base in a of

Declension II .
3. The V. Sing. Masc. and Neut. is like the N.
§ 103. Insertion of L before the finil 2 of the base in the Nom ., Aco.,
and Voc. Dual Neut. :
1.7 must be inserted before the final a of the base in Participles of
the Present tense Par. of roots of the 1st, 4th, and 10th classes, and of
causal, desiderative, and nominal rerbs%3 e. g. बोधन्तीः दीव्यन्ती ; चोर ।

यन्ती ; बोधयन्ती ; बुबोधिषन्ती ; पुवीयन्ती. ।

2. it may optionally be inserted before the final a of the base in

Participles of the Present tense Par. of roots of the 6th class, and of
roots in ST of the 2nd class ; and in Participles of the Fut. Par. in
स्यत् or ष्यत् ; e.g. तुदती or तुदन्ती ; याती or यान्ती ; दास्यती or दास्यन्ती
करिष्यती or करिष्यन्ती.
3. न is never inserted in the remaining Participles of the Present
tense Par. ; . 9. अरती; ददती; सुन्वती; युञ्जती; कुर्वती; क्रीणती .
8 104. Paradigms : बोधत् m. n . ' knoring ;' अदत् m. n. ' eating ; यात्
in. n. ' going :' दास्यत् m. n. ' one who will give.'
Strong Base : बोधन्त् अदन्त् यान्त् दास्यन्त्
Weak Base : बोधत् अदत् यात् दास्यत्
Masculine. .

Singular.
N. V. बोधन अदन् यान्
दास्यन्
Ac. बोधन्तम् अदन्तम् यान्तम् दास्यन्तम्
I. बोधता अदता याता दास्यता
D. बोधते अदते याते दास्यते
Ab. G. वोधतः अदतः यातः दास्यतः
. बोधति अदति याति दास्यति
Dual .
N. V. Ac. बोधन्तो अदन्तौ यान्तो दास्यन्तौ
I. D. Ab . बोधयाम् अदद्भ्याम् यायाम् दास्ययाम्
G. L. बोधतोः अदतोः यातोः दास्यतोः

।
32 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR . [ $ 105—
Plural.

N. v. बोधन्तः अदन्तः यान्तः दास्यन्तः

Ac. बोधतः अदतः यातः दास्यतः

I. बोधद्भिः अदद्भिः याद्भिः दास्यद्भिः

D. Ab . बोधयः अदयः यायः दास्ययः

G. बोधताम् अदताम् याताम् दास्यताम्

L बोधत्सु अदत्सु यात्सु दास्यत्सु

Neuter

Sg. N. V. Ac. बोधत् अदत् यात् दास्यत् .

Da. N.V.Ac. बोधन्ती अदती याती or दास्यती or
यान्ती दास्यन्ती
Pl. N. V. Ac. बोधन्ति अदन्ति यान्ति दास्यन्ति
The rest like Masc..
$ 105. The Feminine base of these Participles is formed by the
addition of the fem . suffix f. 7 being inserted as in the N. Ac. V. Dual
of the Neut. ($ 103) ; e.g. बोधत्, Fem. base बोधन्ती ; अदत् , Fem. base
अदती ; यात् , Fem. base याती or यान्ती दास्यत् , Fem. base दास्यती or दास्यन्ती.
The Fem. base is declined like नदी ( 6141).
$ 106. Participles of the Present tense Par. of roots of the 3rd (or
reduplicating) class and the five Participles जक्षत् ' eating:' जापत्
' waking,' दरिद्रत ' being poor,' चकासत् ' shining,' and शासत् ' command .
ing' have no strong base, and are therefore in Masc. and Neut. declined
exactly like nouns in a of Decl . II. The insertion of a before the final
न in N. V. Ac. Plur. Neut. is, howerer, optional. E .. ददत् m. n .
' giving,' जापत् m. n . ' waking'
Masculine .

Singular. Dual.. Plural..

N. V. ददत् जाग्रत् जागतौ ददतः
Ac. ददतम् जागतम् ददन जाग्रतः
 $ 111.) DECLENSION OF NOUNS, 33

Neuter.
Singular. Dual. Plural.

N. V. Ac. ददत् जाग्रत् ददत्ती जापती . ददन्ति जागन्ति

जागती
or or

ददति जागति
Fem. base ददती, जामती, & c.
5107. बृहत् m.n. ' great,' and पृषत् m. ' adeer ,' .. a drop of water,
are declined like अदत् ; e.g. Masc. Sing. N. V. बृहन , Ac. बृहन्तम ,
I. बृहता, & c. Pem. base बृहती.
108. महत् m. n. ' great ' differs in its declension from अदत् only by
lengthening its penultimate s in the strong cases ; e . g . Masc. Sing .
N. महान् , V. महन् , Ac. महान्तम् , I. महता &c.Neut. N. V. Ac. Sing. महत ,
Du. महती, PI. महान्ति . Fem. base महती.
DECLENSION VIII.

Bases ending in the suffixes मत् and वत् ( Masc. and Nent.).
§ 109. * Troo bases : strong base ending in a , tral ; weak base end .
ing in मेव , वन
6110. Sandhi :
1. In the N. Sing. Masc. मन्त् and वन्त् become. मान् and वान ( 852) ;
in all other strong cases they remain unchanged.
2. In the weak cases the bases in मत् and वत् are treated like अदन
( Decl. VIL)
3. The v. Sing. Masc. ends in मन , वन ; the V. Sing. Neat. is like
the N. Sing. Neut.
1ll . Paradigms: धीमत् m. n. 'intelligent ;'विद्यावत् m.n. ' possessed
of knowledge .'
Strong B. धीमन्त् विद्यावन्त धीमन्त् विद्यावन्त
Weak B. धीमत् विद्यावत् धीमत् विद्यावत् .
Masculine. Neuter .

Singular ..
N. धीमान् विद्यावान् । धीमत् विद्यावत्
Ac. धीमन्तम् विद्यावन्तम्
। 6s
 34 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR . [ $ 112
Singular.
I. धीमता विद्यावता
D. धीमते विद्यावते
like Masc,
Ab. G. धीमतः विद्यावत:
L. धीमति विद्यावति
V. धीमन् विद्यावन् धीमत् विद्यावत्
Dual .

N. V. Ac. धीमन्तौ विद्यावन्तौ धीमती विद्यावती

I. D. Ab. धीमयाम् विद्यावयाम्
G. L धीमतोः विद्यावतोः } like Masc.

Plural.

N. V. धीमन्तः विद्यावन्तः
धीमन्ति विद्यावन्ति
Ac. धीमतः विद्यावतः }
I. धीमद्भिः विद्यावद्भिः
D. Ab. धीमद्भ्यः विद्यावयः
like Masc.
G.
धीमताम् विद्यावताम्
L. धीमत्सु विद्यावत्सु
$ 112. The Fem. base is formed by the addition of the fem . suffis
ई to the weal base ; e.g. धीमत् , Fem. base धीमती विद्यावन् , Fem. base
विद्यावती ; it is declined like नदी (6141)
113. भवत् used as an honorific pronoun in the sense of 'your
honour,' is declined like faaran , and differs therefore in the N. Sing.
Masc . and the N. V. Ac. Dual Neut. from the participle area being,'
wbich follows arva ( Decl. VII.).
N. Sing. Masc. भवान् ' your honour ;' भवन् ‘ being:
N. V. Ac. Du. Neut. भवती " 3;; भवन्ती
The feminine base of भवत् ' your honour ' is भवती, of भवत् ' being '
भवन्ती ; both are declined like नदी (5141),
 DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 35
$ 116.]

DECLENSION IX. ·

Bases ending in the suffices 377, 77 , and T (Masc. and Neul.; rarely Fem .).
§ 114. (a ) Nouns ending in 47 and 74 immediately preceded by
a consonant have two bases, a strong base ending in 3717 , and a weak
base ending in अन् .g. आत्मन् , strong base आत्मान् , weak base आरमन् .
(6) Other nouns in मन् and वन् and all nouns in sto have three
bases, a strong base ending in 2017 , a middle base ending in 37 , and a
weakest base ending in न ; e. g. सीमन् , strong base सीमान्, middle base
# 14 , weakest base The Loc. Sing. Masc., Fem ., and Neut., and
the N. V. Ac. Dual Neut, of these nouus may however optionally be
formed from the middle base in spa.
-

§ 115. Sandhi :
1. In the N. Sing. Masc, aud Fem . 377 , AT7, and are become 9T,
HT, and ar ; in all other strong cases they remain unchanged .
2. In the N. and Ac. Sing. Neut, the final of art, वन् is
, and TT
dropped.
न् ।is also dropped before all consonantal terminations.
3. The final Z
4. The Voc. Sing. Masc. and Fem. is like the weak or middle base ;
the Voc. Sing. Neut, may be like the weak or middle base, or like the
Nom. Sing. Neut.
5. The final Z of the base is liable to be changed to o and to sz by
the influence of preceding letters. (S $ 58 ; 57).
§ 116. Paradigms : ( a) 47 m . ' soul ;' TFT7 m. ' a sacrificer ;'
.

er n. the Supreme Being ; ' n. ' a joint.'

Strong B. आत्मान् यज्वान् ब्रह्मान् पर्वान्

Weak B. STICHE यज्वन् ब्रह्मन् पर्वन्
Maso. Neut.

Singular.
N. STICHT यज्वा
पर्व
Ac. STICHRTA quality }
86 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR [ § 116
Singular .
I. आत्मना यज्वना ब्रह्मणा पर्वणा
D. आत्मने यज्वने ब्रह्मणे पर्वणे
Ab. G. आत्मनः यज्वनः ब्रह्मणः पर्वणः
L. आत्मनि यज्वनि ब्रह्मणि पर्वणि
V. आत्मन् यज्वन् ब्रह्मन् or ब्रह्म पर्वन् or पर्व
Dual.

N. V. Ac. आत्मानौ यज्वानौ ब्रह्मणी पर्वणी

I. D. Ab. आत्मभ्याम् यज्वभ्याम् ब्रह्मभ्याम् पर्वभ्याम्
G.L आत्मनोः यज्वनः ब्रह्मणोः पर्वणोः
Plural..
N. V. आत्मानः यज्वानः
ब्रह्माणि पर्वाणि
Ac. आत्मनः यज्वनः }
L. आत्मभिः यज्वभिः ब्रह्मभिः पर्वभिः
D. Ab. आत्मभ्यः यज्वभ्यः ब्रह्मभ्यः पर्वभ्यः
G. आत्मनाम् यज्वनाम् ब्रह्मणाम् पर्वणाम्
L. आत्मसु यज्वसु ब्रह्मसु पर्वसु
( 6 ) राजन् m. aking : तक्षन् m. ' a carpenter ;' सीमन् 1. ' a boundary
नामन् . ' a name.'

Strong B. राजान् तक्षान् सीमान् नामान्

Middle B. राजन् तक्षन् सीमन् नामन्

Weakest B. TT तक्ष्ण सीम् नाम्
Maso. Fem. Neut

Singular .
N. राजा तक्षा सीमा
नाम
Ac . राजानम् तक्षाणम् सीमानम् }
§ 117.) DECLENSION OF NOUNS . 37

Singular.
I. राज्ञा तक्ष्णा सीमा नाना

D. . राजे तक्ष्णे सीने नाने

Ab . G. राज्ञः तक्ष्णः सीनः नानः

L. राज्ञि or तक्षिण or सीन्नि or नाम्नि or

राजनि तक्षणि सीमनि नामनि
V. राजन् तक्षन् सीमन् नामन् or नाम
Dual.
N. V. Ac. राजानौ तक्षाणौ सीमानी नानी or नामनी
I. D. Ab. राजभ्याम् तक्षभ्याम् सीमभ्याम् नामभ्याम्
G. L. राज्ञोः तक्ष्णोः सीनोः नाम्रोः
Plural .
N. V. राजानः तक्षाणः सीमानः
नामानि
Ac. तक्ष्णः सीमः }
I. राजभिः तक्षभिः सीमभिः नामाभिः
D. Ab: राजभ्यः तक्षभ्यः सीमभ्यः नामभ्यः

G. राज्ञाम् तक्ष्णाम् सीमाम् नानाम्

L. राजसु तक्षसु सीमसु नामसु
§ 117. The Feminine base of simple nouns in 977 is, where it exists,
formed by the addition of the fem. 'sufix ई to the weakest base ; e. g .
राजन् , Fem. base राज्ञी ' queen ,' declined like नदी_ ( 6 141). Some
nouns in मन् have an optional base in आ ; ..., besides सीमन् there
exists also सीमा , declined like कान्ता ( $ 131). Some nouns in वन् form
their feminine base by the addition of the fem . suffis $ , before which
the final l is changed to r ; e.g., पीवन "fat, ' Fem. base पीवरी, declined
like 7 ( $ 141). Bahuvrîhi compounds ending in pouns of this declen
sion hare the feminine like the masculine base, or they form a new
feminine base in आ, declined like कान्ता (6 131 ) ; when the final mem
ber of the Bahuvrihi has three bases (6 1148), the feminine base may also
be formed in t and is then declined like नदी (6 141). B.g. सुपर्वन् , Fem.
base सुपर्वन् or सुपर्वा ; बहुराजन् , Pem. base बहुराजन् or बहुराजा or बहुराज्ञी.
.
38 SANSKRIT GRAYMAR . [$ 118–

Irregular bases.
5118. पूषन् m., अर्यमन् m., two proper names, and bases ending in हन
' slaying ' ( derived from, and in form identical with, the root हन् ' to
slay '), which also follow this declension , form only the N. Sing. Masc.
Fem. and the N. V. Ac. Plur. Neut. from the strong base in आन् ; all
the other strong cases are formed from the middle base in 77. When
ever the penultimate 37 of For is dropped, Ę is changed to q , and 7 is not
liable to be changed to o E. g.
Masc . Neut .

Sing. N. पूषा अर्यमा वृत्रहा वृत्रह

Sing. Ac. पूषणम् अर्यमणम् वृत्रहणम् वृत्रह

-
---
Sing . I. पूष्णा अर्यम्णा वृत्रमा वृत्रना
Plur.N. वृत्रहणः वृत्रहाणि
Plur. Ac. वृतनः वृत्रहाणि
Plur. I. वृत्रहभिः वृत्रहभिः
The Fem. base of वृत्रहन् is वृत्रनी , declined like नदी (6 141).
5 119. अर्वन् m. a horse, forms the Nom. Sing. regularly अर्वा ; an
other cases are formed from अर्वत् , declined like अदत् ( Decl. VII.),
E.g. Sing. Ac. अर्वन्तम् , I. अर्वता, D. अर्वते &c.
• 5 120. श्वन् m. a dog,' मघवन् m . a name of Indra, and युवन् m.n.
young,' form their strong and middle cases regularly from the strong
Bases श्वान् , मघवान् , युवान् , and from the middle bases श्वन , मघवन् , युवन
their weakest cases are formed from the weakest bases शुन , मघोन ,
यून् . E..
Dual N. V. Ac.. श्वानी युवानी m. यूनी
I. D. Ab. श्वभ्याम् युवभ्याम्
G.L. शुनोः यूनोः .
Sing. N. मघवा; Ac. मघवानम् I. मघोना & c.
The optional base मघवत् is declined regularly like विद्यावत् ( Decl.
VIIIJ. The Fem. bases of श्वन् and मघवन् are गुनी and मघोनी, declined
like नदी (6 141) ; that of युवन् is युवति, declined like मति (6 136), or
युवती, declined like नदी (5141) .
§ 124.] DECLENSION OF NOUNS . 39

$ 121. अहन् n. a day ;' strong base अहान् ; middle base अहर् or अहस् ;
weakest base अह .
Singular. Dual. Plural .

N. V. Ac . अहः (:. 8. अहर्)

अहर्) अह्नी or अहनी अहानि
ż

I. अदा अहोभिः
D. अह्ने अहोभ्याम् अहोभ्यः
Ab . अह्नः अहोभ्यः
G. अह्नः अह्नाम्
अह्नोः
. हन}
अह्नि or अहनि अहस्सु or अहःसु

DECLENSION X.

Perfect - Participle bases in वस् ( faso. and Neut .)

$ 122 . Three bases : strong base ending in sig ; middle base ending
in वत् ; weakest base ending in उष् (for उस्.859 ).
5 123. Sandhi :
1.In the N. Sing. Masc. Fix becomes art ; in all other strong cases
it remains unchanged before the terminations.
2. The middle base in this treated like a base in
a
of Decl. II.
3. In the weakest cases 34 remains unchanged before the termina
tions. If the suffix ft was added by means of the intermediate T, this
g is dropped before 39 ; if final # of a root was changed to t before
वस , the original म् reappears before उष्. Radical rowels are in general
treated before 34 just as they are treated before the termination 3: of
the Red. Perfect ($ 307 ).
4. The Voc . Sing. Masc. ends in वन् ; the Voc. Sing. Nent. is like the
Nom . Sing. Neuto
5 124. Paradigms : विद्वस् m . n. knowing;' जग्मिवस् m... or जगन्वस्
m. n. ' one who has gone ; ' निनीवर m. n. ' one who has led ;' शुभ्रवस् m.n.
' one who has heard .'

Strong B. विद्वांस् जग्मिवांस् जगन्वांस् निनीवांस् शुभ्रवांस्

Middle B. विद्वत् जग्मिवत् जगन्वत् निनीवत् शुभ्रवत्.
Weakest B. विदुष जग्मुष् जग्मुष निन्यष् शुश्रुवुष
 40 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR . ($ 124
Masculine.
Singular.
N. विद्वान् जग्मिवान् जगन्वान् निनीवान् शुभ्रवान्
Ac.. विद्वांसम् जग्मिवांसम् जगन्वांसम् निनीवांसम्. शुश्रुवांसम्
I. विदुषा जग्मुषा जग्मुषा निन्युषा शुश्रुवुषा
.

D. विदुषे जग्मुषे जग्मुषे निन्युषे शुश्रुवुषे

Ab. G. विदुषः जग्मुषः जग्मुषः निन्युषः शुश्रुषः
.
L. विदुषि जग्मुषि जग्मुषि निन्युषि शुश्रुवुषि
v. विद्वन् जन्मिवन् . जगन्वन् निनीवन् शुश्रुवन्
Dual..

N.V.AC. विद्वांसी जग्मिवांसौ जगन्वांसौ निनीवांसौ शुश्रुवांसौ

I. D.Ab. विद्याम् जग्मिवद्भ्याम् जगन्वयाम् निनीवयाम् शुश्रुवझ्याम्
G. L. विदुषोः जग्मुषोः जग्मुषोः निन्युषोः शुश्रुषुषोः
Plural .

N. V. विद्वांसः जग्मिवांसः जगन्वांसः निनीवांसः शुध्रुवांसः

Ac.. विदुषः जग्मुषः जग्मुषः निन्युषः शुश्रुषः
I. विद्वद्भिः जग्मिवद्भिः जगन्वद्भिः निनीवद्भिः शुश्रुवद्भिः
D. Ab. विद्वयः जग्मिवयः जगन्वयः निनीवयः शुश्रुवड्यः
G. विदुषाम् जग्मुषाम् जग्मुषाम् निन्युषाम् शुश्रुवुषाम्
L विद्वत्सु जग्मिवत्सु जगन्वत्सु निनीवत्सु शुभ्रवत्सु
Neuter.

Sg. N.V.AC.विद्वत् जग्मिवत् जगन्वत् निनीवत् शुभ्रवत्

Du.N.V.Ac.विदुषी जग्मुषी जग्मुषी निन्युषी शुभ्रवुषी
PI.N. V.AC.विद्वांसि जग्मिवांसि जगन्वांसि निनीवांसि शुश्रुवांसि
The rest like Masc .
8128. ] DECLENSION OF NUUNS . 41

§ 125. The Feminine base is fornied by the addition of the fem .

suffix f to the weakest base ; e. g. Fre , l'em . base fastest; 1998 , Fem .
base जग्मुषी ; it is declined like नदी (5 141 ).
DECLENSION XI,
Bases ending in 72 , derived from , and formally identical with , the
root अच् or अच् ' to move' ( Masc. and Neut.).
5126. Three bases : strong base ending in अच् ; middle base ending
in अच्. The weakest base is formed by dropping the अ of अच् and
substituting for a preceding semivowel the corresponding long vowel ;
e.g. प्रत्यच , weakest base प्रतीच ; अन्वच , weakest base अनूच: if अच् is
not preceded by a semivowel, it is changed to są in the weakest base ;
c.g. उदच , weakest base उदीच्. प्राच् and अवाच् remain unchanged in
the weakest base ; fate forms far .
8127. Sandhi :
1. In the N. Sing. Masc. w becomes ($ 51, d ; $ 52) ; in all
other strong cases it remains unchanged before the terminations.
2. The middle and weakest bases are treated like bases in of
Decl. II.6 (576).
3. The Voc. Sing. Masc. and Neut. is like the Nom.
5128. Paradigms : प्रत्यच् m. n. ' western ;' अन्वच् m.n. following
उदच् m . n. ' northern ;' प्राच् m. n. ' eastern ;' तिर्यच m.n. ' moving awry .'
Strong B. प्रत्यञ्च अन्वञ्च उदञ्च प्राञ्च तिर्यच
Middle B. प्रत्यच् अन्वच् उदच । तिर्यच
Weakest B. प्रतीच अनूच उदाच } मा प्राच
तिर
Masculine.
Singular.
N. V. प्रत्य अन्वङ् उद प्राङ् तिर्य
Ac. प्रत्यञ्चम् अन्वञ्चम् उदञ्चम् प्राञ्चम् तिर्यञ्चम्
I. प्रतीचा अनूचा उदीचा प्राचा तिरथा
D. प्रतीचे अनूचे उदीचे प्राचे तिरचे
Ab.G. प्रतीचः अनूचः उदीचः प्राचः तिरश्वः
L प्रतीचि अनूचि उदीचि प्राचि तिरथि
os
।
।

SANSKRIT GRAMMAR . [ $ 129

Dual.

N. V. Ac. प्रत्यञ्चौ अन्वञ्ची उदञ्ची प्राञ्चौ तिर्यच्ची

I.D. Ab. प्रत्यग्भ्याम् अन्वग्भ्याम् उदग्भ्याम् प्राग्भ्याम्तिर्यग्भ्याम्
G.L. प्रतीचोः अनूचोः उदीचोः प्राचोः तिरश्चोः
Plural..

N. V. प्रत्यञ्चः अन्वञ्चः उदञ्चः प्राञ्चः तिर्यच्चः

Ac. प्रतीचः अनूचः उदीचः प्राचः तिरश्चः
I. प्रत्यग्भिः अन्वग्भिः उदग्भिः प्राग्भिः तिर्यग्भिः
D. Ab . प्रत्यग्भ्यः अन्वग्भ्यः उदग्भ्यः प्राग्भ्यः तिर्यग्भ्यः
G.
प्रतीचाम् अनूचाम् उदीचाम् प्राचाम् तिरथाम्
L. प्रत्यक्षु अन्वक्षु उदक्षु प्राक्षु तिर्यक्षु
Neuter .

Sg.N. V.Ac. प्रत्यक् अन्वक् उदक पाक् तिर्यक्

Du. N.V.Ac. प्रतीची अनूची उदीची प्राची तिरधी
Pl. N. V.AC. प्रत्यञ्चि अन्वच्चि उदञ्चि प्राच्चि तिर्यञ्चि
The rest like Masc .
8129. The Feminine base is formed by the addition of the fem.
suffist to the weakest base ; e.g. प्रत्यच् , Fem. base प्रतीची; अन्वच , Fem.
base अनूची ; उदच् , Fem. base उदीची प्राच , Fem. base प्राची तिर्यच , Rem.
base तिरथी ; it is declined like नदी (6141).
5130. Decline : सम्यच ' proper ; न्यच् ' low ; विष्वच ' all-pervading :
भवाच ' downward..

B. - VOWEL - BASES.

DECLENSION XII.
Bases ending in अ (Mase. and Nent.) and आ ( Fem.),
5131. Paradigm : कान्त m..., कान्ता /. ' belored.'
§ 133.] DECLENSION OF NOUNS . 43

Masc. Neut. Fem..

Base : कान्त कान्त कान्ता
Singular .
N. कान्तः कान्तम् कान्ता

Ac. कान्तम् कान्ताम्

I. कान्तेन कान्तया
D. कान्ताय कान्तायै
Ab . कान्तायाः
कान्तात्
G. कान्तस्य कान्तायाः
L. कान्ते कान्तायाम
V. कान्त कान्ते
Dual.

N. V. Ac. कान्ती कान्ते कान्ते

I. D. Ab . कान्ताभ्याम् कान्ताभ्याम्
G. L. कान्तयोः कान्तयोः
Plural.
N. V. कान्ताः कान्तानि कान्ताः

Ac. कान्तान् कान्तानि कान्ताः

I. कान्तैः कान्ताभिः
D. Ab . कान्तेभ्यः कान्ताभ्यः
G. कान्तानाम् कान्तानाम्
L. कान्तेषु कान्तासु
8 132. Decline : राम m. ' Rima,' like कान्त in Masc.:
FIT n. 'knowledge,' like air in Neut. ;
भार्या . 'a wife,' like airmail in Fem .
Observe $ 58..
5 133. Irregular base : अम्बा /. ' mother, forms its Voc. Sing. भम्ब
• 0 mother ! '
44 SANSKRIT GRAMYAR. ( $134
§ 134. Several adjectives in y follow the pronominal declension
(55 195-200 ).
5 135. The Feminine base of adjectives ending in अ , and of substan
tives in 37 which admit of a feminine, is most commonly formed by the
addition of the fem. suffix आ to the masculine base ; e.g. प्रिय ' dear ,' Fem.
प्रिया ; अज ' agoat , Fem. अजा 'ashe- goat,' declined like कान्ता Fem.
(6 131), But in many instances the feminine baso is formed by the
addition of the fem. suffix t to the masculine base ; e.g. गौर ' yellow ,
Fem. गौरी ; पुत्र ' a son ,' Fem. पुत्री ' a daughter,' declined like नदी (6 141).
Some adjectives denoting a colour and ending in a , either form the femi.
nine base regularly in 37T, or they take the suffis before which the
penultimate a is changed to t; e. g. Ta variegated,' Fem , par or gat.
Soine nouns in a change the 3f which precedes the penultimate
to either necessarily, or optionally ; e.g. सर्वक ' all, every, Fem. सविका ;
पुत्रक ' a son,' Fem. पुत्रका or पुत्रिका ; but क्षिपक 'throwing ,' Fem. only
क्षिपका. इन्द्र ' Indra ' and भव ' Shiva ' form इन्द्राणी ' the wife of Indra,'
and भवानी ' the wife of Shiva,' declined like नदी (6141 ). Other parti
culars must be learnt from the dictionary.
DECLENSION XIII.
Bases ending in and 3 ( Jaso., Fem ., and Next.).
( a ) -Substantives
136. Paradigms :-Am . ' fire ;' fa f. ' opinion ;' atten.'water ; '.
.

arg m.'wind ;' . ' a cow ;' ay n. ' honey .'

Masc. Fem. Neut. Masc . Fem . Neut

Base : अमि मति वारि वायु धेनु मधु

Singular.
N. अग्निः मतिः वारि वायुः धेनुः मधु
Ac. अग्निम् मतिम् वारि वायुम् धेनुम् मधु
I. अग्निना मत्या . वारिणा वायुना धेन्वा मधुना
D. अनये मतये or मत्यै वारिणे वायवे धेनवे or धेन्वै मधुने
Ab. G. अमेः मतेः or मत्याः वारिणः वायोः धेनोः or धेन्वाः मधुनः
L. अमो मतौ or मत्याम् वारिणि वायौ धेनौ or धेन्वाम् मधुनि
V. अग्ने मते वारि वायो धेनो मधु
or वारे or मधो
 DECLENSION OF NOUNS . 45
§ 138.)

Dual.

N.V.Ac. अग्नी मती वारिणी वायू धेनू मधुनी

I.D.Ab. अग्निभ्याम् मतिभ्याम् वारिभ्याम्वायुभ्याम् धेनुभ्याम् मधुभ्याम्
G.L. अन्योः मत्योः वारिणोः वाय्वोः धेन्वोः मधुनोः
Plural.

N. V. अग्नयः मतयः वारीणि वायवः धेनवः मधूनि

Ac. अग्नीन् पारीणि वायून् धेनूः
मतीः मधूनि
I. अमिभिः मतिभिः वारिभिः वायुभिः धेनुभिः मधुभिः
D. Ab. अग्निभ्यः मतिभ्यः वारिभ्यः वायुभ्यः धेनुभ्यः मधुभ्यः
G. अग्नीनाम् मतीनाम् वारीणाम् वायूनाम् धेनूनाम् मधूनाम्
1. अग्निषु मतिषु वारिषु · वायुषु धेनुषु मधुषु
( 8 ) -Adjectives.
§ 137. Adjectives ending in 7 and 3 (Masc., Fem., and Neut.) are
declined like masculine, feminine, and neuter substantives in g and 33;
but in the D., Ab., G., L. Sing., and in the G. and L. Dual of the
Neuter they admit the corresponding forms of the fasculine ; e.g. शुचि
• f.n. ' pure,' गुरु m.f.n. ' heary .
Masc .. Fem.. Neut . Masc.. Fem. Neut..

Sing. N. शुचिः शुचिः शुचि गुरुः गुरुः गुरु

Sing. Ac. शुचिम् शुचिम् शुचि गुरुम् गुरुम् गुरु
Sing. I. शुचिना शुच्या शुचिना गुरुणा गुर्वा गुरुणा
Sing. D. शुचये शुचये शुचिने गुरवे गुरवे गुरुणे
or शुच्यै or शुचये or गुर्वे or गुरवे
§ 138. Adjectives in 3 preceded by only one consonant may form
a new feminine base by the addition of the feminine suffix ई ; e.g. लघु
• light,' Fen . लघु declined according to $ 137, or लघ्वी declined like नदी
in $ 141. Some adjectives in i lengthen their final उ in the Fem..
.. 9. पङ्गु 'lame,' Fem. पङ्ग, declined like वधू (5 141).
46 SANSKRIT QRAMMAR . [$ 1394

Irregular bases.

$ 139. ale m.'a friend,' and gram . ' a lord, a husband.'

Sing. Dual. Plur.

N. सखा पतिः सखायः पतयः

सखायौ
Ac. सखायम् पतिम्
I.
} पती
( सखीन् पतीन्
सख्या पत्या सखिभिः पतिभिः
D. सख्ये पत्ये सखिभ्याम् पतिभ्याम् ]
सखिभ्यः पतिभ्यः
Ab.]
सख्युः
G. J सख्युः पत्युः
सख्योः पत्योः ( सखीनाम्पतीनाम्
L.

v.
सख्यौ
सखे
पतपते्या सखायौ पती
सखिषु पतिषु
सखायः पतयः

At the end of compounds qrar is declined regularly, like ITA (S 136 );

... भूपति m. a lord of the earth, a king,' L. Sing. भूपतौ. The Fem.
of पति is पनी ' a wife,' that of सखि is सखी ' a female friend, declined
like नदी (5141).
5140. अक्षि . an eye,' अस्थि n. ' a bone,' दधि n. ' curds' and सक्यि
n. ' a thigh,' form their weakest cases ( except the N. V. Ac. Da .) from
अक्षन् , अस्थन् , धन , and सक्थन् according to Decl. IX . ; ag.

Sing.. Dual. Plur ..

N. Ac. अस्थि अस्थिनी अस्थीनि .

I. अस्था अस्थिभिः
D.

Ab.
अस्ने
अस्थिभ्याम् } आस्थिभ्यः

G. } असअस्थः

}अस्मोः
अस्नाम्
L. अस्थि or अस्थनि अस्थिषु
V. अस्थि or अस्थे अस्थिनी अस्थीनि
 ।

$ 143.) DECLENSION OF NOCNS. 47

DECLENSION XIV .
।
Feminine Bases ending in and 5
(a) Bases of more than one syllable.
$ 141. Paradigms : नदी /. ' a river ;' वधू . ' a woman.'
Sing. Dual. Plur.
N. नदी वधूः ( नद्यः वध्वः
नद्यो वध्वौ (
Ac.

I.
नदीम् वधूम्
नद्या वध्वा
}; नदीः वधूः
नदीभिः वधूभिः
D. नये वध्वै नदीभ्याम् वधूभ्याम् नदीभ्यः वधूभ्यः
Ab . नदीभ्यः वधूभ्यः
G. } नद्याः वध्वाः
( नदीनाम् वधूनाम्
L.
V.
नद्याम् वध्वाम् } नयोः वध्वोः
नदीषु वधूषु
नदि वधु नद्यौ वध्वौ नद्यः वध्वः
§ 142. Irregular bases : 774 f.'Lakshmi,'air f.'a boat,' and traff.
the string of a lute,' form in the Nom. Sing. लक्ष्मीः; तरी:, and तन्वीर.
(8) Bases of only one syllable.
§ 143. Puradigins : tir f. ' thought'; 15. the earth .'
Sing . Dual. Plur.
N. V. धीः भूः
Ac.

I.
धियम्
धिया
भुवम् ियो भुवौ }धियः
} पधियो भुवः

भुवा धीभिः भूभिः

D. धिये धीभ्यः
भुवे धीभ्याम् भूभ्याम् भूभ्यः
or धिये orभुवै

Ab.] धियः धीभ्यः

भुवः भूभ्यः
G. Jor धियाः or भुवाः धियाम् भुवाम्
धियोःभुवोः oror धी
धीनाम
नाम्् or भूनाम्
L. धियि भुवि धीषु भूषु
or धियाम् or भुवाम्
48 SANSKRIT GRAN MAR . [ $ 114

§ 144. Irregular base : at f. ' a woman .'

Dual. Plur.
Sing.
N. स्त्री स्त्रियः

Ac. त्रियम् or स्वीम् }लियो { स्त्रियः

स्त्रीभिः
. खी:
or स्त्रीः
I. स्त्रिया
D. खियै स्त्रीभ्यः
स्त्रीभ्याम्
Ab . स्त्रीभ्यः
स्त्रियाः
७. } स्त्रीणाम्
L. स्त्रियाम् } खिये .
त्रियोः
स्त्रीषु
त्रियः
v. त्रि त्रियो
DECLENSION XV .
Monosyllatic Mase . and Fem. Bases in आ , ई, ऊ, (derived from roote
without the addition of any visible suffix ,) when used at the end of
Tatpurusha compounds.
§ 145. These bases take the same terminations that are added to
consonantal bases ; before vowel-terminations the final sy is dropped
( except in strong cases), and final ई and a are changed to Q and ,
when immediately preceded by one radical consonant, and to इय
and 57 , when preceded by more radical consonants . The Voc. Sing. is
like the Nom. Sing.
8146. Paradigms : विश्वरा m . f . ' protecting the universe ; शुद्धधी
m.J. ' one who thinks pure things'; खलपू m . f. ' a sweeper ;' यवक्री ..
' one who buys grain.'
Masc . and Fem .

Base : विश्वपा शुद्धधी खलपू यवक्री

Singular.
N. V. विश्वपाः शुद्धीः खलपूः यवक्री
Ac. विश्वपाम् शुद्धध्यम् खलप्वम् यवक्रियम्
I.

विश्वपा शुद्धध्या खलप्वा यवक्रिया

-

DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 49
§ 149.)
.

।
.

Singular.

D. विश्वपे शुद्धध्ये खलप्वे यवक्रिये

Ab. G. विश्वपः शुद्धध्यः खलप्वः यवक्रियः 1

L. विश्वपि शुद्धभ्यि खलप्वि यवक्रियि :

Dual. .
.

N. V. Ac. विश्वपौ शुद्धध्यो खलप्वी यवक्रियौ

I. D. Ab. विश्वपाभ्याम् शुद्धधीभ्याम् खलपूभ्याम् यवक्रीभ्याम्
G. L. विश्वपोः शुद्धध्योः खलप्वोः यवक्रियोः
4
Plural.

N. V. विश्वपाः
शुद्धध्यः खलप्वः यवक्रियः
Ac. विश्वपः } यवक्रीभिः
I. विश्वपाभिः शुद्धधीभिः खलपूभिः
D. Ab . विश्वपाभ्यः शुद्धधीभ्यः खलपूभ्यः यवक्रीभ्यः
G. विश्वपाम् शुद्धध्याम् खलप्वाम् यवक्रियाम्
L. विश्वपासु शुद्धधीषु खलपू यवक्रीषु
§ 147. Irregular bases : Bases ending with a leading ' take in the
L. Sing. the termination आम् instead ofs : e.g. मामणी ' one who leads
a village, a chief,' L. Sing. ग्रामण्याम् .
DECLENSION XVI.

Bases ending in ऋ ( Masc. and Neut ., rarely Fem.)

(a) ऋ changeable to आर .
§ 148. Nouns derived from roots by means of the suffix & and de
noting an agent, like कर्ट m. ' a maker,' and नमृ m . a grandson,' स्वर
' a sister,' भई m . a husband' (etymologically a supporter') change
their final + in the strong cases Masc . and Fem. (except the N. Sing.)
to आर .
6 149. Paradigns : कर्ट m. n. ' a maker ; स्वस f. 'a sister.'
78
।
50 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR . [8150

Masc. Neut. Fem.

।

Singular.
N. कर्ता स्वसा

कर्तारम् }कर्तृ

IFE
Ac. स्वसारम्
I. कर्तृणा स्वस्रा
D. कर्तृणे स्वने
Ab. G. कर्तुः कर्तृणः स्वसः
L. कर्तरि कर्तृणि स्वसरि
V. कर्तः (i.e. कर्तर) कर्तृ or कर्तः स्वसः (i.e. स्वस )
Dual.

N. V. Ac. कर्तारौ कर्तृणी स्वसारी

I. D. Ab. कर्तृभ्याम् कर्तृभ्याम् स्वसृभ्याम्
G. L. को कर्तृणोः स्वस्रोः
Plural.

N.V. कर्तारः स्वसारः

Ac. कर्तृन } कर्तृणि स्वसृः

I. कर्तृभिः कर्तृभिः स्वसृभिः
D. Ab. कर्तृभ्यः कर्तृभ्यः स्वसृभ्यः
G. कर्तृणाम् कर्तृणाम् स्वसृणाम्
.. कर्तृषु कर्तृषु स्वसृषु
8 150. The Feminine base of the nouns in @ which denote an agent
is formed by the addition of the feminine suffix & to the masculine base ;
..ए. कर्ट , Fem. base की ; it is declined like नदी (6 141).
(8) ऋ changeable to भर .
5 151. Nouns expressire of relationship like पि m. m a father,' मार
f. ' a mother ,' ay m. 'a husband's brother,' & c. (except those mentioned
in 5 148) change their final ऋ in the strong cases ( except the N. Sing.)
to 97T ; e. g. fra m'a father ;' href. ' a mother'
--

51
DECLENSION OF NOUNS.
§ 153.]
Dual. Plur .
Sing .
N. पिता माता
पितरः मातरः
V. पितः (i.e.पितर) मातः पितरौ मातरौ
Ac.पितरम् मातरम् पितॄन् मातृः
The remaining cases are like those of कर्ट m., and स्वस (6149).
§ 152. Irregular base : m. ' a man,' which is otherwise declined
like पिट, forms in the G. Plur. नृणाम्or नृणाम् ।
DECLENSION XVII.
Bases ending in t, art, and at.
$ 153. Paradigms: * m. 'wealth ;' Ti m. f. ' a bull,' 'a cow ;' it f.
EEEEEE
' aship.'
Base : है गो नौ
Singular.
N. V. राः गौः नौः
Ac. रायम् गाम् नावम्
I. राया गवा नावा

D. राये गवे नावे

Ab. G. रायः गोः नाव :

L. रायि गवि नावि

Dual..
N. V. Ac. रायौ गावौ नावी
I. D. Ab. राभ्याम् गोभ्याम् नौभ्याम्
G. L. रायोः गवोः नावोः
Plural . .

N. V. रायः गावः नाव :

Ac. रायः गाः नाव :

I. राभिः गोभिः नौभिः

D. Ab. राभ्यः गोभ्यः नौभ्यः
G. रायाम् गवाम् नावाम्

L. रासु गोषु नौषु

 52 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR . [ $ 154–
A list of some irregular bases not mentioned in the preceding paragraphs.
5 154. अनडुह् m. ' an or,' forms the strong cases ( except the N.
Sing.) from अनडाह , the middle cases from अनडुत् , and the weakest
cases from अनडुहः
Dual . Plur .
Sing .
N. अनड्वान् [अनड्डाहः
अनड्डाहौ
Ac.
I.
अनड्डाहम्
अनडुहा
} अनडुहः
अनडुद्भिः
D. अनडुहे अनडुङ्ग्याम्
Ab . } अनडुङ्ग्यः

G.
L.
"} अनडुहः
अनडुहि } अनडुरोः ' अनडुहाम्
अनडुत्सु
v. अनड्वन अनडाही अनड्डाहः
The Fem. of अनडुह is अनडुही or अनडाही ' a cow,' declined like नदी
($ 141 ).
5155. अप् /. 'water,' is declined only in the Plural (8648) : N. V.
भापः , Ac. अपः, I. अद्भिः, D. Ab. भयः, G. अपाम् , L. अप्सु .
5156. क्रोटु n.m 'a jackal ,' has two bases, क्रोष्टु and क्रोष्ट; the base
mig is used in all except the strong cases, and declined like are
16136); the base क्रोष्ट is used in all strong cases and in the weakest
cases of the Sing. and Dual, and declined like कर्तृ m. (6149).
Sing. Dual. Plur .
N. क्रोष्टा क्रोष्टारः
Ac. क्रोष्टारम् } क्रोटारी क्रोष्टून्
I. क्रोष्टुना or कोष्टा क्रोष्टुभिः
D.
Ab.
क्रोष्टवे or कोष्ट्रे
क्रोष्टोः or क्रोष्टुः
} क्रोष्टुभ्याम्
} (क्रोटुभ् यः
G.
L.
} क्रोष्टौ or क्रोष्टर } क्रोद्योः ०कोट्रोः
or
क्रोष्टूनाम्
क्रोष्टुषु
V. क्रोष्टो क्रोष्टारो क्रोष्टारः
The Fem. of sing is niet ' the female of n jackal,' declined like a
( $ 141).

।
$ 160.] DECLENSION OF NOUNS . 53

8157. जरा f. 'old age,' is declined regularly throughout, like कान्ता

f. ($ 131); but it may also optionally form all cases the terminations of
which begin with a rowel from the base जरस् , declined like सुमनस् 1.
(689) ; e.g. Sing. N. only जरा ; Ac. जराम् or जरसम् ; Plur . I. only जराभिः
G. जराणाम् or जरसाम् & c .
5 158. दिव /. ' the sky.'
Sing. Dual.. Plur .

N. V. द्यौः
दिवः
Ac. दिवम् } दियो }
I. दिवा द्युभिः
D. दिवे गुभ्याम्
Ab. ] दिवः } शुभ्यः

G. I} दिवोः िवार
{ददिवाम्
L. दिवि पुषु
8 159. दोस् n. (rarely m.) ' an arm,' is declined regularly throughout,
its final Æ being changed to Visarga in the N. Ac. V. Sing. ( or, when
Masc. , only in the N. and V.), to r before vowel-terminations, to r be
fore the terminations मिः, भ्यः, and भ्याम्, and to Visarga or v in the L.
Plur.; but it may also optionally form all cases except the N. Sing.
Du. Plur. and the Ac. Sing. Du. from दोषन , declined according to
Decl. IX.; e. g.

Sing . Dual. Plur.

N. at: ( n. and m.) दोषि . दोष: m .

दोषी
Ac. दोः ।. दोषम् , m. = N., or ajout: m.
I. दोषा or दोष्णा दोाम् or दोषभ्याम् दोभिः or दोषभिः
L. दोषि or दोष्णि दोषोः or दोष्णोः दोःषु or दोष्षु or
or दोषणि दोषसु.
8 160. पथिन् m. ' a road,' forms the strong cases (except the N.
Sing.) from पन्थान् , the middle cases from पथि, and the weakest cases
from पथ .
।
 54 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR .
[$ 161

Sing. Dual. Plur .

N. V. पन्थाः पन्थानः
Ac . पन्थानम् } पन्थानी { पथः
I. पथा पथिभिः
D. पथे पथिभ्याम्
पथिभ्यः
Ab .

G. } पथः
}
पथोः पथाम्
L. पथि } { पथिषु
§ 161, er m. ' foot,' used as the last member of compounds, forms
the weakest cases from पदः ... सुपाद् m. one who has good feet'

Sing. Dual. Plur .

N. V. सुपात् सुपाद:
Ac .
सुपादम् } सुपादौ { सुपद
L. सुपदा सुपायाम् सुपाद्भिः & c.
The Fem. is either like the Masc., or a new Fem. base is formed by
the addition of the Fem. suffix ई to the base in पद् . g. Fem. base
सपदी, declined like नदी (5141 ).
5162. पाद m . "foot, and हृदय . ' heart ' are declined regularly
throughout, like कान्त m. n . ( 6131 ) ; but they may also optionally
form all cases except the N. Sing. Du. Plur., and the Ae. Sing. Da,
from पद and declined according to Decl. II.; e . g.
Sing. Dual . Plur .
N. पाद :
पादाः
पादौ
Ac. पादम् } { पादान् or पदः
1. पादेन or पदा पादाभ्याम् or पद्भ्याम् पादैः or पद्भिः & c.
Sing. N. Ac. हृदयम् , I. हृदयेन or हुदा , D. हृदयाय or दे ete .
5 163. पुंस् m. ' a man,' forms the strong cases from पुमांस , the
middle cases from पुम् , and the weakest cases from पुंस .
 165.] DECLENSION OF NOUNS . 55

Sing. Dual. Plur .

N. पुमान् पुमांसः
Ac. पुमांसम् } पुमांसी { पुंसः
I.
पुंसा पुम्भिः
D. पुंसे पुम्भ्याम्
}
Ab.
EE पुम्भ्यः
G. } पुंसः
पुंसाम्
L. पुंसि } पुंसोः पुंसु ( 859 ).
V. पुमन् पुमांसौ पुमांसः
8164. पुनर्भू a widow remarried ,' is declined like वधू (8 141)
except in the Ac. Sing., where it forms पुनर्वम् , and in the Ac. Plur..
which is gard: ; G. Plur. garforr .
$ 165. gut m . f. ' a person possessed of good intellect, an intelligent
person,' and सुभू m.f. ' a person with beautiful eye-brows,' are declined
thus :
Singular.
Masc.. Fem .

N. V. सुधीः सुभूः सुधीः सुभ्रूः

Ac. सुधियम् सुभ्रुवम् सुधियम् सुभ्रुवम्.
. सुधिया सुभ्
सुभ्रुरुवावा सुधिया सुभ्रुवा
D. सुधिये सुभ्रुवे सुधिये or सुधियै सुभ्रुवे orसुभ्रुवै
Ab. G. सुधियः सुभ्रवः सुधियः or सुधियाः सुभ्रवः orसुभ्रुवाः
L. सुधियि सुभ्रुवि सुधियि or सुधियाम् सुभ्रुवि or सुभ्रुवाम्
Dual.
Masc. and Fem.

N. V. Ac. सुधियो सुभ्रुवी

।
I. D. Ab. सुधीभ्याम् सुभ्रूभ्याम्
G. L. सुधियोः सुभ्रुवोः
56 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR . [$ 166–

Plural ,
Maso . Fem .

N.V.AC. सुधियः सुभ्रवः सुधियः सुभ्रवः

I. सुधीभिः सुभ्रूभिः सुधीभिः सुभ्रूभिः
D. Ab. सुधीभ्यः सुभ्रूभ्यः सुधीभ्यः सुभ्रूभ्यः
G. सुधियाम् सुभ्रुवाम् सुधियाम् or सुधीनाम् सुभ्रुवाम् orसुभ्रूणाम् ,
L. सुधीषु सुभूषु सुधीषु सुभ्रूषु
5166. स्वयंभू m. ' the self- existent one,' a name of Brahman, & c., in
declined like खलपू m. (6 146), except that it changes its final i before
vowel-terminations not to e , but to उन् ; ... Sing. N. V. स्वयंभूः
Ac. स्वयंभुवम् , I. स्वयंभुवा & c.
$ 167. Suffixes added to nominal bases to express the meanings ofcases .
(a ) The suffix ag is sometimes added to the base of a noun to es.
press the sense of the Ablative case ; e. g. ama : ‘ from the village ;'
Tega : from the real state of the case, in reality ;' hra: from
ignorance.'
(b) . The suffisa is used similarly to denote the meaning of the Locative
case , but it is generally added only to pronouns and pronominal adjec
tives , e.g. तव 'there ' ( $ 194 ); सर्वत्र ' everywhere .'
8168. A few nouns, such as स्वर ' hearen,' संवत् 'ayear of an era ,
& c., are indeclinable .

CHAPTER IV.
COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES .
( a ) -By means of the secondary aufixes तर and तम.
$ 169. The Comparative degree of adjectives is formed by the
addition to their masculine base of the suffix at (Masc. and Neut, base ;
at Fem . base ), the Superlative degree by the addition to their mas
culine base of the suffix तम (Masc. and Neut. base ; तमा Fem. base ), e.g.
प्रिय ' dear ;' Comp.प्रियतर • dearer ;' Superl .प्रियतम · dearest.''
शुचि ' pure ; >शुचितर. ' purer;' शुचितम ' purost.'
16 licavy ;' गुरुतर heavier ; गुरुतम ' heaviest .'
 173.] COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES . 57

5170. Adjectires which follow Decl. II. change their final conso
nant before ar and an as they change it in the N. Sing.; the final of of
adjectives in 5 is dropped ; final stą remains unchanged ; final and
उस् are changed to इष and उष , after which the t of तर and तम becomes
द् ($ 56 ); e..
विश्वजित् ; Comp. विश्वजित्तर Superl . विश्वजित्तम ..
अनिमथ् ; अभिमत्तर ; अग्निमत्तम .
तमोनुद् तमोनुत्तर
"

तमोनुत्तम.
सुयुध
"

सुयुत्तर ; सुयुत्तम.
धर्मबुध्ः धर्मभुत्तर ; धर्मभुत्तम.
09

सत्यवान् सत्यवाक्तर ; सत्यवाक्तम.

धनि धनितर ; धनितम .
सुमनस् ; सुमनस्तर ; मुमनस्तम .
उचिस् ; उदर्चिष्टर ; उदर्चिष्टम.
$ 171. Adjectives which in their declension slow tiro bases, assume
before ar aud af their weak base ; those with three bases assuure before
ar and a their middle base ; in both cases their final coasonant under.
goes before at and at the same changes which it undergoes before the
termination of the L. Plur. ; e.g.
धीमत् ; Comp. धीमत्तर ; Superl. धीमत्तम .
विद्वस् ; > विद्वत्तर ; विद्वत्तम.
प्राच् ; 99 प्राक्तर ; प्राक्तम. ।
प्रत्य ; प्रत्यक्तर ; प्रत्यक्तम .
$ 172. The suffixes तर and तम may also be added to rerta! forms and
to indeclinables ; when added to verbs, they always appear in the form
of तरान् and तमाम , and they do the same if the new word derired from
an indeclinable is used adverbially. E.५. पचति —he cooks ;' पचन्तिराम्
' he cooks better ;' पचतितमाम् • he cooks best ; - उचैः · high ;' उस्तराम्
• higher,' उचैस्तमाम् ' highest, both uscal as adverbs 3; but उच्चस्तमस्तरूः
the highest tree.'
( ८) -By means of the primary sri.ces ईयस् Ind इष्ठ .
§ 173. Many adjectives may optionally form their comparative
degree by the addition of the sutlis ईयस् ( Masc. and Yeut. base ; ईयसी
Fem . base) and their Superlative degree by the acldition of tlic saftis 58
8s
 53 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR . [ 174

( Masc. and Neut. base ; इष्ठा Fem. base ). The difference between तर,
तम and ईयम् , इष्ठ is this, that whereas तर and तम are added to the
masculine base of the adjective, 12 and 8 are commonly added to
the root from which the adjective has been derived, the rowel of the
root being gunated. E. y .
क्षिप ' quick' (from rt. क्षिप् ); Comp. क्षेपीयस् ; Superl. क्षेपिष्ठ.
स्थिर — firm' (from rt. स्था ); स्थेयस् 9 स्थेष्ठ,
उरु ' wids' (from rt. वृ ); वरीयस् 99 वरिष्ठ.
Optionally क्षिप्रतर, क्षिप्रतम स्थिरतर, स्थिरतम ; उरुतर, उरुतम .
5 174. The following are some special rules for the addition of ईयस्
and इष्ठ ::
( a ). The final vowel of a masculive base which contains more than
one syllable, or its final consonant together with the rowel preceding
it, are dropped ; e . g.
पाप ' wicked ;' Comp. पापीयस् , Superl. पापिष्ठ.
पटु ' clerer ;' पटीयस् ; पटिष्ट.

महत् ' great ;' महीयस् ; महिष्ठ.

( ) The possessire suffixes मत् , वत् , विन , &c., are dropped ; when the
remainder of the base thereupon consists of only one syllable, it under
goes no change, except that its final resumes its original form ; but
when the remainder of the base contains more than one syllable, rule
(a) is applicable to it ; e.g.
स्रग्विन (i... सज + विन् ) ' wearing a garland ; Com. सजीयम् ; Superl. स्रजिष्ठ .
धनवत् (i.e. धन + वन् ) possessed of realth ;' धनीयम् ; धनिष्ठ .
वसुमत (ie . वसु + मत् ) ' possessed of wealth ;' , वसीयम् । वसिष्ठ.
( c) ri.e. ra is substituted for the rowel Fe of a base, when is
preceded by an initial consonant and immediately followed by only
one consonant ; e. g.
कृश · lean;; Comp. क्रशीयस् ; Superl. ऋशिष्ठ,
दृढ hard ; द्रढीयस् ; 9 द्रदिष्ट.
पृथु ' brond ;;' प्रथीयस ; प्रथिष्ठ,
भृश ' much ; भ्रशीयस् ; भ्रशिष्ठ.
मृदु ' soft3B प्रदीयस् ; म्रदिष्ठ.
जीयस् ; ऋजिष्ट.
,

but Fiy straight ;'

।
$ 176.] COMPARISOY OF ADJECTIVES . 59

$ 175. Alphabetical list of some irregular Comparatives and Super .

latires :-
:

अन्तिक ' near;' Comp.नेदीयस् ; Superl . नेदिष्ठ.

अल्प ' small ;' अल्पीयस् ; अल्पिष्ठ ; or
कनीयस् ; कनिष्ठ..
क्षुद्र ' mean ;' क्षोदीयस् ; क्षोदिष्ठ.
गुरु ' heavy ;' गरीयस् ; गरिष्ठ.
दीर्घ • long ;' द्राधीयस् । द्रापिष्ठ .
दूर ' far ;' दवीयस् ; दविष्ठ.
प्रशस्य ' praiseworthy ;',, श्रेयस् ; श्रेष्ठ ; or
ज्यायस् ; ज्येष्ठ.
प्रिय · dear ;' प्रेयस् । प्रेष्ठ.
बहु ' much ;';' >
भूयस् ; भूयिष्ठ. t
बहुल manifold ;' ,
बंहीयस् ; बंहिष्ठ.
युवन् . ' young ;' यवीयस् । यविष्ठ ; or
कनीयस् : कनिष्ठ..
बाढ ' firm ;' " साधीयस् ; साधिष्ठ.
वृद्ध ' old ; वर्षीयस् ; वर्षिष्ठ ; or
ज्यायस् । ज्येष्ठ.
वृन्दारक ' great ;' वृन्दीयस् ; वृन्दिष्ट.
स्थूल ' great ;' स्थवीयत् ; स्थविष्ठ.
स्फिर — large ;'' स्फेयस् ; स्फेष्ट.
हस्व
6
short ;' इसीयस् ; हसिष्ठ.
$ 178. The suffixes तर and तम are sometimes added to comparatives
and superlatives in ईयस् and इ.पू. पापीयस् , पापीयस्तर ; पापिष्ठ, पापिष्ठतर,
पापिष्ठतम श्रेष्ठ, श्रेष्ठतम ' the rery best.'

Compare कन्या . + Compare भूरि .

60 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR . [$ 177

CHAPTER V.
PRONOUNS, PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES, AND THEIR
DECLENSION.

1.- Personal Pronouns,

5177. Bases :
1. अस्मद् ' I ; special base for the Singular, मद्.
2. युष्मद् ' thou special base for the Singular, त्वद्.
The declension of these two pronouns is the same in all the three
genders.
Singular .
N. अहम् I स्वम् ' thon .'
Ac. माम् or मा त्वाम् or त्वा
I. मया त्वया

D. मह्यम् or मे तुभ्यम् or ते
Ab. मत् त्वत्
G. मम or मे तव or ते
L. मयि त्वयि
Dual.

N. आवाम् ' we two ;;'' युवाम् ' you two.'

Ac. आवाम् or नौ युवाम् or वाम्
I. आवाभ्याम् युवाभ्याम्
D. आवाभ्याम् or नौ युवाभ्याम् or वाम्
Ab. आवाभ्याम् युवाभ्याम्
G. आवयोः नौ युवयोः or वाम्
. आवयोः युवयोः
5179.] DECLENSION OF PRONOUNS, & c. 61

Plural.

N. वयम् ‘ ve;' यूयम् 'you..

Ac. अस्मान् or नः युष्मान् or वः
I. अस्माभिः युष्माभिः
D. अस्मभ्यम् or नः युष्मभ्यम् or व :
Ab . अस्मत् युष्मत्
G. अस्माकम् or नः युष्माकम् or वः
L. अस्मासु
युष्मासु
5 178. The optional shorter forms मा, खा, मे, ते, नौ, वाम् , and नः, वः
T:
are never used at the beginning of a sentence or of a verse. Moreorer
the fuller forms माम् , त्वाम् , & c. only are used before the particles च , वा.
ह , अह and एव ; e.g. खां मां च ' thee and me,' (not स्वा मा च ),
6

2 - Demonstrative Pronouns.
$ 179. Bases :
1.
त 'that' or 'he, she, it ' (who or which has been mentioned ) ;
2. एतद् this' (who or which is very near to the speaker);
3. FA 'this' (reſerring to what is near) ;
4. अवस् 'that' (referring to what is remote).
Base : तद् एतद् इदम् अदस्
Masculine.
Singular .
N.

सः एषः अयम् असो

Ac . तम् एतम् or एनम् इमम् or एनम् अमुम
I. तेन एतेन or एनेन अनेन or एनेन अमुना
D. तस्मै एतस्मै अस्मै अमुष्मै
Ab . तस्मात् एतस्मात् अस्मात् अमुष्मात्
G. तस्य एतस्य अस्य
अमुष्य
L. तस्मिन् एतस्मिन् अस्मिन् अमुष्मिन्
62 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR . [6179

Dual.

एतौ
N. तो इमो अमू
Ac. तो एतौ or एनी इमौ or एनौ अमू
1.D.Ab. ताभ्याम् एताभ्याम् आभ्याम् अमूभ्याम्
G. L. तयोः एतयोः or एनयोः अनयोः or एनयोः अमुयोः
Plural.

N. ते एते इमे अमी

Ac. तान् एतान् or एनान् इमान् or एनान् अमून
I. तैः एतैः एभिः अमीभिः
D. Ab . तेभ्यः एतेभ्यः एभ्यः अमीभ्यः
G. तेषाम् एतेषाम् एषाम् अमीषाम
L.

तेषु एतेषु एषु अमीषु

Feminine .

Singular.
N. सा एषा इयम् असौ
Ac. ताम् एताम् or एनाम् इमाम् or एनाम् अमूम्
I. तया एतया or एनया अनया or एनया अमुया
D. तस्यै एतस्यै अस्यै अमुष्यै
Ab. G. तस्याः एतस्याः अस्याः अमुष्याः
L. तस्याम् एतस्याम् अस्याम् अमुष्याम्
Dual.
20

N. एते इमे अमू

Ac. एते or एने इमे or एने अमू
I.D.Ab. ताभ्याम् एताभ्याम् आभ्याम् अमूभ्याम्
G. L. तयोः एतयोः or एनयोः अनयोः or एनयोः अमुयोः
 DECLENSION OF PRONOUNS , & c . 63
§ 181.]

Plural.

N. ताः एताः इमाः अमू :

Ac . ताः एताः or एनाः इमाः or एनाः अमू:
I. ताभिः एताभिः आभिः अमभिः
.D. Ab. ताभ्यः एताभ्यः आभ्यः अमूभ्यः
•G. तासाम् एतासाम् आसाम् अमूषाम्
L. तासु एतासु आसु अमूषु
Neuter.

Singular.

N. तत् एतत् इदम् अदः

Ac . तत् एतत् or एनत् इदम् or एनत् अद :

I. and the following cases like the fasc..
Dual.

N. ते एते इमे अमू

20

Ac. एते or एने इमे or

or एने अमू
1. and the following cases like the Masc.
Plural.

N. तानि एतानि इमानि अमूनि

Ac. तानि एतानि or एनानि इमानि or एनानि अभूनि
I. and the following cases like the Masc..
$ 180. The final Visarga of the N. Sing. Masc. # : and go is
dropped before words beginning with any other letter than ( short) ST ;
before words beginning with (short) अ, अः is changed to ओ and the
initial अ dropped ( 358); 8.9 सः + आह becomes स आह, सः + गच्छति
becomes स गच्छति, bnt सः + अब्रवीत् = सोऽब्रवीत्.
$ 181. The optional forms एनम , एनेन, & c., in the Accusatives Sing.
Du. and Piur ., the Instr. Sing, and the Gen. and Loc. Du. of एतद्
6-4 SANSKRIT GRANNAR . 3 182
and इदम् are used instead of एतम्, एतेन, & c., and इमम् , अनेन , & c., in a subse- .
quent clause, when the persons or things denoted by them have been
mentioned or spoken of in a preceding clause ; s.g. अनेन व्याकरणमधीत-
मेनं छन्दो ऽध्यापय ' he has studied grammar , teach him prosody .'
3. - The Relatire Pronoun.

5182. Base: - यद् ' who, which.'

Masc. Fem. Neut .

Singular.

N. यः या यत्
Ac. यम् याम् यत्
I. येन यया येन
D. यस्मै यस्यै यस्मै
Ab . यस्मात् यस्याः यस्मात्
G. यस्य यस्याः यस्य

L. यस्मिन् यस्याम् यस्मिन्

Dral.

N. Ac. यौ ये ये

I. D. Ab . याभ्याम् याभ्याम् याभ्याम्

G. L. ययोः ययोः ययोः
C

Plural .

N. ये याः यानि

Ac. यान् याः यानि

I. यैः याभिः यैः
D. Ab . येभ्यः याभ्यः येभ्यः
G. येषाम् यासाम् येषाम्
L. येषु यामु येषु
§ 189.] DECLENSION OF PROSOUNS, &c. 65

4 .-- The Interrogatire Pronoun .

$ 183. Base :-किम् ' who ? which ? what ?'
Masc. Fem. Neut.
Singular.
N. कः का किम्
Ac. कम् काम् किम
J. केन कया केन
The remaining cases are formed like those of tlie relative pronoun
182) ; e.g. D. Sing. कस्मै, कस्यै, कस्मै &c.
$ 184. कतर ' who or which of tro ?' and कतम ' who or which of
mauy ?' are in all the three genders declined regularly like यद् ( $ 182).
5.- Indefinite Pronouns.
§ 185. Indefinite pronouns are formed by the addition of fe, or of
चन , or of अपि, to the interrogatire pronoun किम् in all its cases : किंचिद्,
or किंचन, or किमपि ' some one, something ; any one , anything :
Masc. Sing. N. कश्चित् , कश्चन , कोपि( 33 cand350)
Ac. कंचित् , कंचन, कमपि ( 531 );
I.
केनचित् , केनचन, केनापि (518); & c.
$ 186. चिद्, चन , and अपि are in the same manner added to derira
tires ofकिम् ; ..कति ( 191) how many ? कतिचित् ' some;' का ( 194 )
' when ? कदाचित् , or कदाचन , or कदापि ' sometime , any time,' &c.
6. - Reflexire Pronouns.
$ 187. The meaning of the reflesire pronoun is in Sanskrit expressed
by the noun SICHT ' soul, self ' ($ 116) ; though itself always masculine,
it denotes all the three genders, and it is used only in the Singular,
eren when referring to screral persons. E.g. न शोचाम्यहमास्मानम् I
(i.e. Damayanti) do not sorror for myself ;' गोपायन्ति कुलस्त्रिय आत्मानम्
' noble women protect themselres.'
8 188. The indeclinable स्वयम् is employed, like the English • self,'
to express emphasis or distinction ; e.g. स्वयमहमवसम् I mrself dwelt .'
7. - Possessire Pronouns.
$ 189.मदीय masc. nent., मदीया fem .
मामक masc. neut ., HTÍHAT fem . ms, mine.'
मामकीन
99
masc . neut ., मामकीना fem. }
 66 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR . [S 190

खदीय masc. neut., स्वदीया fem.

तावक masc. ueut., arrat fem. thy, thine .'
तावकीन masc . neut., तावकीना fem.
अस्मदीय masc. neut , अस्मदीया fem..
आस्माक masc. neut ., Tehran fem.. our , ours .'
आस्माकीन masc . neut ., आस्माकीना fem.
युष्मदीय masc. neut . , युष्मदीया fem.
i यौष्माक masc . neut., यौष्माकी fem.. ' your , yours .'
।
यौष्माकीण masc. neut ., यौष्माकीणा fem.
-तदीय masc . neut., तदीया fem . ' his, her, hers, its,
their , theirs.'
masc. neut., एतदीया fem.. belonging to this
एतदीय (person or thing ).
masc . neut., getur fem.. belonging to whom
यदीय or which .'
masc . neut., ETT fem..

masc . neut., स्वीया fem . one's own.'.'

स्वीय
स्वकीय masc . neut., स्वकीया fem.

$ 190. All these possessire pronouns , except स्व , are declined regu.
larly like कान्त (6131) and नदी ($ 141). स्व follows $ 199.

8. - Correlative Pronouns .
$ 191. Correlatire pronouns are derived from the bases of the
pronouns तन्, एतद् इदम् , यद्, and किम् .
।
Base : तद् एतद् इदम् यद् किम्
तावत् एतावत् इयत् यावत् कियत्
• so much. ' . so much .' ' so much .' ' as much.' ' how much "
यति . कति
तति
• so many.' ' as many. how many ?'
तादृश् एतादृश् ईदृश् यादृश् कीदृश
or or or
or or

तादृश एतादृश ईदृश यादृश कीदृश

" such like.. such like.' ' such like .' ' what like.' ' what like ?'
§ 191.] DECLENSION OF PRONOUNS, & c . 67

5 192. तावत् , एतावत् and यावत् follow Declension VIII.18 109 ).

इयत् and कियत् are declined similarly ( Masc. Sing. N. इयान्, Ac. इयन्तम् ।
I. इयता : Fem. इयती ). तति, यति, and कति are declined only in the
Plural; they take no termination in the N. and Ac., in the remaining
cases they follow अग्नि ( 136); e. g. N. and Ac. तति , I. ततिभिः & c.- तादृछ ।
एतादृग् , &c., follow Decl. II . (576) ; e.g. Masc . Sing. N. तादृक, Ac. ता .
दृशम् & c.- तादृश, एतादृश, & c., are in the Masc. and Neut. declined like
कान्त ($ 131) ; in the Fem. the suffix ई is added, e.g. तादृश, Fem. base
तादृशी, and the base then declined like नदी (5 141).
9. - Reciprocal Pronouns.
$ 193. The reciprocal pronouns अन्योन्य, इतरेतर, परस्पर ' each other '
‘ one another,' appear commonly only in the Accusutire or adverbial form
अन्योन्यम् , इतरेतरम् , परस्परम् , or as first members of compounds : e.g.
अन्योल्यसंयोग, इतरेतरयोग , परस्परसंबन्ध ' mutual union . But other forms
occur occasionally ; e.g. Sing. I. अन्योन्येन ; G. अन्योन्यस्य ; L. अन्योन्य .
स्मिन ; Ab. परस्परात् ; G. परस्परस्य .
10. - Pronominal Idrerbs.

$ 194. The pronominal adverbs which are most commonly used, are
derived from the bases of the pronouns तद् , इदम् ( special base for several
forms, अ ), यद्, and किम् (in some adverbs कु ) :

Bases. इदम् ( अ)
तह यद किम् ( कृ ).

1. ततः thence, there- इतः । 'hence, यतः ' whence'' कुतः

upon, therefore.' 7 : ) therefore. since, because." ' whence !
why ? how !

2. lag ' there.' भत्र ' here .' यत्र ' where .''
कत्र }-where
3. तथा ' thus .' इत्थम् 'thus.'' यथा ' as. ' कथम् ' howr

4.
तदा । ' then, at
तदानीम् that time. इदानीम् ' nor.' यदा ' when.' कदा ' when ?

5. तर्हि 'then, there

fore.' यहि ' when.' कहि ' whenr
68 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [ $ 1954

11. - Pronominal adjectires.

$ 195. अन्य ' another,' अन्यतर ' either of two ' इतर ' other,' and एकतम
6
one of many,' are in all the three genders declined like a (S 182); e. g.
Sing. N. Masc..3774t :; Fem. अन्या ; Neut . अन्यत् .
D. अन्यस्मै अन्यस्यै अन्यस्मै.
Plur. N. अन्ये ; अन्याः अन्यानि, &c.
अन्यतम ' one of many ' is declined like कान्त (s 191).
$ 126. सर्व ' erery, all , विश्व ' erery , all,' सम when conreying the sense
' all,' सिम ' all,' एकतर ' one of tro,' follow the same declension, except
in the N. Ac. Sing. of the neuter gender, where they follow atat; e.g.
Sing. N. Masc. सर्वः Fem. सर्वा ; Nent. सर्वम्.
D. , सर्वस्मैः सर्वस्यै ; सर्वस्मै.
Plur. N. सर्वे ; सर्वाः; सर्वाणि , & c .
197. उभय ' both has according to the best authorities no Dual ; in
the Sing. and Plar. Masc. and Neut . it is declined like सर्व. The Fem. is
उभयी, declined like नदी (6141).- उभ ' both is inrariably dual, and
declined like arra ($ 131).
$ 193. नेम ' half,' is declined like सर्व ; but the N. Plur. Masc. is नेमे .
or नेमा..
$ 199. अधर ' lover, inferior,' अन्तर ' outer,' अपर 'other,' अवर 'poste
rior, western,' उत्तर ' superior, northern, subsequent,' दक्षिण ' right,
southern'( - not दक्षिण ' clerer,' which follows कान्त throughout ), पर uU
' subsequent ,' पूर्व ' prior, eastern,' and स्व ' own' are declined like सर्व,
but they may in the Ab. and L. Sing. Masc. aud Neut., and in the N.
Plur., optionally follor कान्त (6131);. g.
Masc . Sing. D. अधरस्मै ; Ab. अधरस्मात् or अधरात् ; Plur. N.
अधरे or अधरा .
8200. अर्थ - half,' अल्प - little, fer ,' कतिपय ' some, and चरम - last,'
fellow at throughout; but they may form the X. Plur. optionally
like सर्व ($ 196 ) ; e.g.
Masc. Plar. N. अर्धाः or अर्धे.
कतिपय forms its Feminine कतिपया or कतिपयी, the latter declined like नदी .
--

$ 201.] NUMERALS . 69

CHAPTER VI .
NUMERALS AND THEIR DECLENSION .
$ 201. Cardinals and Ordinale :
( a) 1 १ एक 'one.' प्रथम m . १. प्रथमा f. first .'
2 २ द्वि द्वितीय, या
3 ३ त्रि तृतीय , या
४ चतुर चतुर्थ,, orनुरीय, या; orतुर्व ,यो
5 ५ पञ्चन् पञ्चम , मी
6 ६ षष् षष्ट , टी
7 ७ सप्पन सप्तम , मी
8 ८ अष्टन् अष्टम , मी
9 ९ नवन् नवम , मी
10 १० दशन् दशम , मी
11 ११ एकादशन् एकादश, शी
12 १२ द्वादशन् द्वादश , शी
13 १३ त्रयोदशन् त्रयोदश, शी
14 १४ चतुर्दशन् चतुर्दश, ° शी
15 १५ पञ्चदशन् पञ्चदश, शी
16 १६ षोडशन षोडश, ° शी
17 १७ सप्तदशन् सप्तदश, शी .
18 १८ अष्टादशन् अष्टादश , शी
19 १ ९ नवदशन् or गवदश, शो ; or एकोनविंश, शी,
°
एकोनविंशति or शतितम , मी; or ऊनविंश, शी,
ऊनविंशति or शतितम , ' मी ; or एकानविंश
एकानविंशति ' शी, शतितम, ° मी.
70 SAXSKRIT GRAMMAR . [$ 201

20 २० विंशति . विंश, ° शी or विंशतितम, मी

22 २२ द्वाविंशति only. द्वाविंश, शी, or ° शतितम, मी
23 २३ त्रयोविंशति only. त्रयोविंश, ° शी,
26 २६ षड्रिंशति षड्रिंश, ° शी,
28 २८ अष्टाविंशति only. अष्टाविंश, ° शी,
30 ३० त्रिंशत् त्रिंश, ° शी or त्रिंशत्तम, मी
32 ३२ द्वात्रिंशत् only.
33 ३३ त्रयस्त्रिंशत् only.
36 ३६ षट्त्रिंशत्
38 ३८ अष्टाविंशत् only.
40 ४० चत्वारिंशत् . चत्वारिंश, ° शी or चत्वारिंशत्तम, मी
42 ४२ द्वाचत्वारिंशत् or
द्विचत्वारिंशत्
43 ४३ त्रयश्चत्वारिंशत् or
त्रिचत्वारिंशत्
16 ४६ षट्चत्वारिंशत्
48 ४८ अष्टाचत्वारिंशत् or
C

अष्टचत्वारिंशत्
50 ५० पञ्चाशत् f . पञ्चाश , शो or पञ्चाशत्तम, मी
52 ५२ द्वापञ्चाशत् or
द्विपञ्चाशत्
53 ५३ त्रयःपञ्चाशत् or
त्रिपञ्चाशत्
54 ५४ चतुष्पञ्चाशत् ( $ 37 note).
56 ५६ षट्पञ्चाशत्
 71
NONERALS .
Ś 201.]
58 अष्टापञ्चाशत् or
अष्टपञ्चाशत्
60 ६० षष्टि . षष्टितम , मी
61 ६१ एकषष्टि एकषष्ट, ° टी or एकषष्टितम, 'मी
62 ६२ द्वाषष्टि or द्विषष्टि
63 ६३ त्रयःषष्टि or त्रिषष्टि
( ६६ षट्पष्टि
68 ६८ अष्टाषष्टि or
अष्टषष्टि
70 ७० सप्तति . सप्ततितम, मो.
71 ७१ एकसप्तति एकसप्तत , ती or एकसप्ततितम, मी .
72 ७२ द्वासप्तति or
द्विसप्तति
73 ७३ त्रयःसप्तति or
त्रिसप्तति
76 ७६ षट्सप्तति
13 ७८ अष्टासप्तति or
अष्टसप्तति
80 ८० अशीति . अशीतितम, मो .
81 ८१ एकाशीति एकाशीत , ती or एकाशीतितम, मो .
82 ८२ यशीति only .
83 ८३ व्यशीति only.
86 ८६ षडशीति
90 ९ ० नवति f. नवतितम, °मो
9] ९ १ एकनवति एकनवत , तो or एकनवतितम , मी
72 SANSKRIT GRAMNAR , [ $ 202

92 ९२ दानवति or
द्विनवति
93 ९ ३ त्रयोनवति or
विनवति
96 ९ ६ षण्णवति
93 ९ ८ अष्टानवति or
अष्टनवति
100 १०० शत n . शततम, मी .
200 २०० द्विशत . or द्विशततम, मी.
हे शते
300 ३०० त्रिशत . or
वीणि शतानि
1000 १,००० सहस्र .. or दश सहस्रतम , मी. .

शत n . or दशशती .
10,000 १०,००० अयुत .
100,000 १,००,००० लक्ष क. लक्षा .
(6) The cardinal numbers from 21 to 99 not givca in this list are formed
by prefixing the word for the unit in accordance with the rules of Sandhi
to the words for 20, 30, &c ; before doing this, final of the unit is
c

dropped. But to denote 29, 39, &c., एकोन or ऊन or एकान may be

C

prefixed to the words for the higher numbers 30, 40, & c. E. g. 21 = 1 +
20= एकविंशति ; 25 = 5 + 20= पन् + विंशतिपञ्चविंशति ; 88 = 8 + 80 %=
अष्टन + भशीतिअष्ट + अशीतिअष्टाशीति ; 59 = 9 + : 0 = नवपञ्चाशन , or =3D60
-1 = एकोनषष्टि, ऊनषष्टि, or एकानषष्टि . The numbers for 400, 500, & c ., are
formed like those for 200 and 300; here too final न of the unit is dropped.
E. g. 700 %D7X100 = सप्तशत or सप्त शतानि . The ordinal numbers not
given in the list are always formed from the corresponding cardinals like
the ordinals immediately preceding them , which are given in the list ; e. g.
the 8Sth = अटाशीत, ती or अष्टाशीतितम , मी .
$ 202. The cardinal numbers between 100 and 200, 200 and 300,
Sc., are commonly expressed by means of this ' cxceeded by ;' e . 9.
पहाधिकं शतम् or पच्चाधिकशतम् 100 exceeded by , i... 105 ; पचदशा .
 DECLEXSION OF NUMERALS . 73
§ 207.)

धिकं शतम् or पञ्चदशाधिकशतम् 115 ; पञ्चाशदधिकं शतम् or पञ्चाशदधिकशतम्

.

150. Similarly ऊन is used to denote - diminished byi e.g. पञ्चोनं शतम्

o: पञ्चोनशतम् 100 diminished by 5 ,' i.e.95 .
6

8203. In order to denote the cardinal numbers 111-159,211-259,

&c., one may derive from the cardinals एकादशन 11, & c., an adjective
which is formally the saine as the shorter form of the corresponding
ordinal, and make it agree with the cardinal for 100, 200, & c ., in
gender, number, and case ; c.g. पञ्चदशं शतम् 115 ; पञ्चायं शतम् 150 ; पञ्चदर्श
द्विशतम् 215, & c.
Declension of the Cardinals and Ordinals.
$ 204. The cardinals for 1--19 are adjectives ; those from 20 ( includ .
ing एकोनविंशति, &c.) , are substantires, agreeing in case with the noun
numbered by them , or requiring the latter to be put in the Genitive case .
E. g. pertaréttby three women ;' but figur rétti.or figiar
नारीणाम् ' by 20 women .'
$ 205. एक ' one ' (Plur. 'some') is declined in the Sing. and Plur. in
all the three genders, and follows the declension of सर्व ( $ 196 ) ; e.g.
Sing. N. एकः m , एका f ., एकम् .
D. एकस्मै m. एकस्यै f, एकस्मै .
Plur . N. एके m. एकाः f ., एकानि .
5 206. द्वि tiro ' is declined only in the Dual.
N. V. Ac. द्वौ m.. द्वे . n.
I. D. Ab. द्वाभ्याम् m.f.
f.n.
G. L. द्वयोः m.f.n.
$ 207. वि ' three ' and चतुर् ' four ' are declined in the Plur. in all the
three genders.
Masc . Fem. Neut.

N. V. त्वयः चत्वारः ।
तिस्रः चतस्रः त्रीणि चत्वारि
Ac. त्रीन् चतुरः
I. त्रिभिः चतुर्भिः तिसृभिः चतसृभिः त्रिभिः चतुभिः
D. Ab. त्रिभ्यः चतुर्म्यः तिसृभ्यः चतसृभ्यः त्रिभ्यः चतुर्यः
G. त्रयाणाम् चतुर्णाम् तिसृणाम् चतसृणाम् त्रयाणाम् चतुर्णाम्
L. त्रिपु चतुर्यु तिसृषु चतसृषु त्रिषु चतुर्यु
10
24 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [3208
208. पञ्चन ' fire,' सप्तन् ' seven ,' नवन् ' nine ' and the following
cardinals up to 77717 hare one form only for all the three genders,
and are declined in the Plural, thus : N. V. Ac. 9 ; I. THPT:;
D. Ab. पञ्चभ्य : G. पञ्चानाम् L. पशम .
$ 209.99 ' six ' has one form for all the three genders and is
declined in the Plural, thus : N. V. Ac. षद्; I. षडि ; D. Ab. षड्भ्यः ;
G. पण्णाम् ; L. परसु or पदस.
$ 210. TET ' eight ' has one form for all the three genders and is
declined in the Plural, thus :
N. V. Ac . अष्ट or अष्टी
I. अष्टभिः or अष्टाभिः
D. Ab . अष्टभ्यः or अष्टाभ्यः

G. अष्टानाम्
L. अष्टसु or अष्टासु
$ 211. The cardinals from एकोनविंशति, &c., 19, विंशति 20, to नवनवति
39, are feminine substantives, and follow as sach Decl. XIII., or II.; e.g.
N. विंशतिः 20 , पञ्चाशत् 50 ; Ac. विंशतिम् , पचाशतम् ; I. विंशत्या , पञ्चाशता
& c.- शत 100, &c., follow कान्त ( 131).
$ 212. The ordinals follow in Masc. and Yeut. कान्त ($ 131 ), in the
Feminine either कान्ता, or नदी ( $ 141 ) . But प्रथम • the first ' may
optionally form the N. Plur., and conting and grira may optionally form
the D. Ab. and L. Sing. like सर्व ( 5 196 ) ; ..
Sing. N. प्रथमः an . प्रथमा 1. प्रथमम् ..
D. प्रथमाय m. प्रथमायै f. प्रथमाय n.

Plnr. N. प्रथमाः or प्रथमाः j . प्रथमानि .

प्रथमे m .

Sing. N. द्वितीयः m . द्वितीया j. द्वितीयम् n.

D. द्वितीयाय or द्वितीयायै or द्वितीयाय or
द्वितीयस्मै m. द्वितीयस्यै f. द्वितीयस्मै n. .

Plur. N. द्वितीयाः m. द्वितीयाः 1. द्वितीयानि ..

 CONJUGATION OY VERBS. 75
$ 215.]
§ 213. Numer 1 Alverbs and other Numeral Derivatives :
(a) सकृत् ' once ;' द्विः - twice ;' विः ' thrice ;' चतुः fourtimes;'पसकृतः
' five times ;' TEKST: sis times ,' & c.
(8) एकथा in one way; द्विधा or वेधा ' in two ways; त्रिधा or वेधा • in
three wars ; चतुर्धा in four ways ;' पञ्चधा ' in fire vars' षोठा or षड्धा
‘ in sis ways,' & c.
(c) TTT: singly, by ones ;' f T: ' two and two, by twos ;' PTT:
' three and three, by threes,' &c.
( d) rin. n. , o f., or read on . n ., featf. twofold, consisting of
two parts ;'
72 m. n , auts, or raad m . n ., faast f . ' threefold, consisting of
three parts ;
a 54 m. n., Egeaitfo fourfold , consisting of four parts ;'
T997 n. n. , 9gatf. ' fivefol.l, consisting of five parts,' & c .
These adjectives are declined regularly in the Masc. and Neut. like
Area (S 131 ), in the Fem. like tô ( $ 141) ; but in the N. Plur. Masc .
they may optionally follow a ($ 196) ; e. g .
Sing. N. 24 : m .; aft f .; 1944 .
Plur. N. : or him.; 61: f.; Tara n.
(6) द्वयं . or वयी ). or द्वितय . ' a pair.'
ac n. or aut f.or ratay n. ' a triad, or collection of three .'
चतुष्टय n. a collection of four.'
990'a pentad, or collection of fire.'
ven. ' a collection of six .'
FETEL . ' a decad, or collection of ten ,' & c.
/

CHAPTER VII.
CONJUGATION OF VERBS.
$ 214. Verbs are given in the dictionary in the form of roots; e. g.
' to be,' tę 'to eat,' & c.
$ 215. (a ) Conjugation consists in making the verbal root undergo
certain modifications, and in the additiou to it of certain prefixes and
terminations, which denote the various persons, numbers, voices, tenses,
and moods, and by which primitive verbs are distinguished from
derivative verbs.
.

76 BANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [$ 216–

(6) Some tenses are formed by means of ausiliary verbs ( Peri.
phrastic tenses).
$ 216 (a) Verbs have three Numbers, a singular number, a
dual number, and a plural number, and in each number three Persons,
a first person, a second person, and a third person. The dual number
denotes, as it does in declension, ' two.'
( ) The terminations which denote the persons in the different 1
numbers are called personal terminations.
§ 217. Verbs hare soven Tonses: a Present tense ; three past
tenses, viz., Imperfoct, Perfect, and Aorist ; two future tenses, riz.
a Simple Future and a Periphrastic Future ; and a Conditional
tense. — The Perfect and the Aorist are each formed in two ways (Redu .
plicated Perfect and Periphrastic Perfect, Radical Aorist and Sibi.
lant Sorist), but in either tense these two forms convey the same mean
ing. The Simple Future and the Periphrastic Future, on the other
hand, are two separate tenses, conveying distinctly different meanings.
$ 218. ( a ) The Present tense distinguishes three Moods, a Present
Indicative ( commonly called Present ), a Present Potontial or Opta .
tive (coinmonly called Potential or Optative ), and a Present Imper .
ative (commonly called Imperative ). The Imperfect and the Aorist
distinguish each an Indicative and a Subjunctive. The remaining
tenses hare only an Indicative. There exists, besides, the Benedictive,
which might be considered as a Potential of the Aorist, but is usually
treated as a separate tense .
(6) The Subjunctive of the Imperfect and of the Aorist is, in
classical Sanskrit, used only after the prohibitive particle AT and after HT
FH . It differs from the Indicative by the absence of the Augment which
is prefixed to the root in the Indicative ; e. g.
rt. I ' to be ;' Impf. Ind. 57777; Subj. .
Awr. Ind. start; Subj. a .
rt. To ' to wish ;' Impf. Ind. Tegni Subj. ro .
मा भूत् , मा स्म भवत् , he should not be.'
In the following it will be unnecessary to treat separately of the Impf.
Subj. and Aor. Suhj., au: d the terms Imperfect and Aorist will be used
for the Impf. Ind. and Aor. Ind . only for the meaning of the tenses
and moods the student is referred to Chapter X.
$ 219. A table showing the teases and moods which are in use in
classical Sanskrit :
 CONJUGATION OF VERBS, 77
$ 221.]
А B C D

Indicative. Subjunctive. Potential. Imperative.

1 . Present. Present. Present,

2. Imperfect. Imperfect.
3. Perfect.
(a) Reduplicated.
(6) Periphrastic.
4. Aorist. Aorist. Benedictive.
(a ) Radical,
(6) Sibilant.
5. Simple Future.

lll
6. Periphr. Future .
7. Conditional

§ 220. The conjugation of verbs is divided into :

I. - Conjugation of Primitive Roots ; and
II .-Conjugation of Derivative Vorbal Bases.
The conjugation of derivative verbal bases is subdivided into :
1. Conjugation of roots of the tenth ( churadi) class and of the
Causal.
2. Conjugation of the Desiderative .
3. Conjugation of the Frequentative.
4. Conjugation of Nominal Verbs.
1.-CONJUGATION OF PRIMITIVE ROOTS .
§ 221. Primitive Roots are the roots contained in the first nine
classes of the collections of roots compiled by the native grammarians.
They differ from derivative rerbal bases in this : —in the case of derivative
verbal bases the personal terminations and the characteristic marks of
the various tenses and moods are generally added to a verbal base,
derived from a root (or from a nominal base) by the nddition of certain
letters or other modifications which remain throughout in all tenses and
moods ; in the case of primitive roots the personal terminations and
the characteristic marks of the various tenses and moods are (with some
modifications in the Present and Imperfect) combined with the root
itself. E. g .
78 BANSKRIT GRANSAR . ($ 222
Prim root. Causal Base. Desid. Base. Rt. of cl. X. IT'to
steal . '
ar ' to go ;' यापि ' to cause यियास ' to wish Deris. Base. 11
to go.' to go.
Pres. Ind. erra यापयति यियासति rrera
yo-ti ; ydyo - ti ; yiyasu-to ; choruy.u - li.
Sim Fut. regra artisura faaraosia चोरयिष्यति
yu -wy:soli. yapıy -i-: hyo.ti. yiyús.i-shya-li. choray -i.shya.ti.
2:22. Primitive roots are conjugated in three Voicos, oir. :
( 1) In the Parismiipada or ' active voice' (literally ' voice for
another") ;
(1) In the Atmanepada or reflective roice' (literallyó roice for one's
self") ; and
(c ) In the Passive roice.
$ 223. In the Perfect, the Aorist, the two Futures, the Conditional,
aud the Benedictive, the formation of the Passive voice is , generally the
saine as that of the Atmanepada or reflective voice. In the three moods
of the Present tense, however, and in the Imperfect, the formation of
the Åtmavepada differs froin that of the Passive, and it is therefore
necessary to separate the conjugation of the Passive from that of the
Parasmaipada and Åtmanepada.
I. -TIE PARAS..APADA AND ATMANEPADA.
$ 22. Many roots are throughout all tenses and moods conjugated
both in Parasmaipada and in âtmanepada, others only in one voice ;
others again are conjugated in one voice, but they also forın some tenses
in the other voice ; soine are restricted to one voice or the other accord.
ing as certain prepositions are prefixed to them .
§ 225. The Parasinaipada may be said to be used, when the fruit or
consequence of the action expressed by the verb accrues to another
person or thing than the agent, whereas the Åtmanepada is employed
when the fruit or consequence of the action espressed by the verb accrues
to the agent; e.g.5 ' to do' ; Pres. Ind. Par. mūra he does' (for some
body else), Åtin. 77 . he does' ( for himself). TT '10 sacrifice ;
Pres. Ind. Par. qara ( the priest ) sacrifices (for somebody else) ; Atm.
an ( the sacrificer ) sacrifices ( tor himself ) Et to give ;' Pres. Ind.
Par min . he gives.' ter to take ;' Pres. Ind . Atm . str be takes.'
This rule is, however, by no means universally valid, and the right use
of the two voices must be learnt from the practice of the best writers
or from the dictionary.
 5229.] CONJUGATION OF VERBS . 79

§ 226. Th- Parusmaipada and Åtmanepada are formally distinguished

by two sets of Personal Terminations, one of which is added in the
Parasmaipada, whereas the other set is always added in the Atmanepada.
$ 227. The following table contains the personal terminations which,
with some mo.lifications, are added in the various tenses and moods in
Parasmaipada and Atmanepada. The first column contains the per
sonal terminations of the Present Indicative and of the Simple Future,
the second those of the Imperfect, the Present Potential, the Aorist,
the Conditional, and the Benedictive; the third those of the Redupli
cated Perfect, and the fourth those of the Present Imperative.
Personal terminalions of the various tenses and moods in
Parasmaipada and Åtmanepada.
I. II. III . IV.

Pres. Ind. & Simple Imperf., Pres Pot .,

Fut .
Aorist, Condit. * Redupl. Perfect. Pres. Imperat .
Benedict .

Par . Âtin. Par. Atm.. Par. âtm . Par . Atm..

444

-1. मि ए अम् इ अ ए आनि ऐ

. g
Sin

2. सि से ( स् ) थाः (थास्) थ से धि स्व

3. ति . ते त् त ए तु ताम्
आव आवहे
. l

-1 . वः (वस) वहे वहि व वहे

.Dun

2. थः (थस् । आये तम् आथाम् अथुः आये तम् आथाम्

3. तः (तस् ) आते ताम् आताम् अतुः आते ताम् आताम्
म

-1 . मः (मस् ) महे महि आम आमहे

.Plur

म महे
.

2 थ त ध्वम् अ त ध्वम्
3. अन्ति अन्ते अन् अन्त उः इरे अन्तु अन्ताम्
Note : -Terminations beginning with consonants may be called con .
Bonantal terminations, icrminations beginning with rowels vowel
terminations .

dugment and Reduplication.

$ 228. In order to sare repetition, we gire here the general rules
concerning the Augment and the Reduplication of roots.
$ 229. (a) The Augmont ( i.e. ' increase') consists in the romel 87.
prefised to the root ; e.g.
rt. g ' to strike ;' Impf. Par. 37Ta -tudat.
80 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR . [§ 230—
(8) When the augments is prefixed to a root commencing with a
rowel, the result of the combination of the two vowels is the Vriddhi.
rowel or Vșiddhi-syllable ( $ 10) of the radical rowel ; e.g.

rt . 37 ' to go ;' Impf. Par. आतत् ..

Impf. Åtm . STIET.
rt. 3TREE ' to sit ;'
rt. fatto see ;' Impf. Åtm . ऐक्षत.
rt. 3G7 ' to sprinkle ; ' Impf. Par. औक्षत् ..
rt. ऊ ' to comprehend ;' Impf. Åtm. औहत.
rt. Fer ' to go;' Impf . Par. 07147.
rt . एथ् • to grow ;' Impf . Åtm . ऐधत.
( c) When one or more prepositions are prefised to a root, the augment
takes its place after the preposition or prepositions and immediately before
the root ; e. g.

rt. पत् with prep. उद् ; Pres. Ind. Par. उत्पतति; Impf. Par. उदपतन ud -apatat
सम् and उद् ; Pres. Ind. Par . समुत्पतति ; Impf. Par.
wataa samud -apalat,
( 1) When the letter & is prefixed to 'to do,' or to 'to scatter'
(§ 487, c ), the augment takes its place immediately before the inserted
स ; e.g. संस्कृ , Pres. Ind. Par. संस्करोति , Impf. समस्करोत .
$ 230. ( a) Reduplication consists in the doubling of the first rowel
of a root together with any consonant that precedes it ; e. g.
rt. तुद् ' to strike ;' reduplicated To
rt. Oftet to be poor ;' ददरिद्रा.
(6 ) That portion of a reduplicated form which is prefixed to the root
is called the reduplicative syllable ; e . g. the first in gos, or the
first tin ददरिद्रा.
(c) Prepositions prefixed to reduplicated verbal forms take their places
before the reduplicative syllable ; e.g. It. 97 with prep. and 35 ,
Perf. Par. # 9997 samut-papáta.
(1 ) A reduplicated verbal form cannot be reduplicnted again ( see
§ 452).
§ 231. («) An aspirate letter of a root is in the reduplicative syllable
represented by the corresponding unnspirate letter ; e.g.
 CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 81
§ 231.]

rt. छिद् ' to split;' reduplicated ARTE. (8 54.)

rt. धा ' to place %3; दधा.

rt. भुज् ' to enjoy ;' बुभुज.

(6) A guttural by the corresponding palatal (guttural aspirate by
palatal unaspirate) ; by I ; e.g.
rt. कम् ' to love; reduplicated चकम् .
rt. गम् ' to go जगम् .
rt. खन् ' to digi' चखन् .
rt. घस् ' to eat ;' जघस् .
.

rt. ' to sacrifice ;' जुहु .

( c ) If a root commences with more consonants than one, only the
firet (or the letter which according to (a) and (6) ought to be substituted
for it) is repeated in the reduplicative syllable ; e.g.
rt . श्रु ' to hear ;' reduplicated TT.
rt. भ्राज् ' to shine;' बभ्राज् .
क्रम्
. still
rt. ' to go ;' चक्रम् .
( d ) But if a root commences with a sibilant which is followed im. .

mediately by a surd consovant, this surd consonant or its representative

must be repeated in the reduplicative syllable ; (the letter & prefired to the
roots oh and कृ (8 487 6)8 is treated as part of the root ); e.g.
rt. स्तम्भ ' to support; reduplicated तस्तम्भ .
rt . स्था ' to stand ;' तस्था .

rt . स्कन्द् ' to leap ; चस्कन्द् .

Rt. with prep. सम्=संस्कृ ; Perf. Par. संचस्कार.
(e) The reduplicative syllable must contain one of the three ( short)
rowels अ , इ, or उ ; of these, (short) अ represents radical अ , आ, कफ,
and ल : (short) इ radical इ, ई, ए, aid ऐ ; and (short ) उ radical 3, ऊ . भो .
and st; e.g.
rt. भ्राज् 'to shine ;' reduplicated बभ्राज् .
rt. कृ ' to do ;' चकृ.
rt. कूप चक्लप .
»

' to be fit ;
11 .
82 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR . [ § 282

rt. छिद् ' to split ;' reduplicated feug.

rt . shit ' to buy ;' चिक्री..
rt. वेप् ' to tremble ;' faan.
rt. लूI ' to cut ;'

>
लुलू .
rt. ढोक ' to approach ;' डुढौक्.
$ 232 , Roots commencing with , followed by a vowel or a
dental letter, and the roots FEA, F79 , and ferę, generally change their
initial Ę to ç ( FT to , fer to &, and a to 60 ) after any sowel of the
reduplicative syllable except 37 or 37. But this change does not take
place in roots containing the vowel For F. E. g . Rt. F , Redupl. Perf.
सिषाय; rt. स्मि, सिष्मिये; rt. सिन् , सिषेच; rt. स्वित्, सिष्वेदः rt. सु, सुषाव;
rt. स्वप् , सुष्वाप; rt. स्तु, तुष्टाव; rt. स्त्रिह, सिष्णेहः rt. सु, सुष्णाव.- But
rt. स्व . चुस्काव: rt. सु , सुस्राव ; rt. स्मद , पुस्फोट &c.
SPECIAL AND GENERAL TENSES.
$ 233. The Present tense in its three moods ( Indicative, Potential,
and Imperative) and the Imperfect are called Special Tenses ; the
remaining tenses and the Benedictive are called General Tenses.
This distinction is founded on the circuinstance that in the Present and
Imperfect the characteristic marks of the tenses and moods and the per
sonal terminations are mostly added to a spocial base, derived from the
root in various ways, while in the remaining tenses and moods those
marks and terminations are combined with the root itself.
A. - SPECIAL TENSES.

Present (Indicative, Potential, Imperative) and Imperfect.

§ 234. The special base of the special tenses is formed in nine
different ways. Accordingly all primitive roots have by the native
grammarians been divided into nine classes, each class being denomi
nated after the root which stands first in it.
§ 235. Formation of the Special Base in the nine classes :
1. Special base of roots of the first class (nata i. e. ' commencing
with C) :
(a) sp is added to the root ;
(6) The vowel of the root is gunnted ($ 10), except when it is proso
dially long ( $ 8) and not final ; (observe $ 46) ; e.g.
 CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 83
§ 235. ) .

बुध् ' to know ;'. special base बोध.

भू ' to be;' भो + अ = भव . ( $ 49. )
नी ' to lead ;' ने + अ- नय.
theto

03
he
' to call;' + अ = हय .

गै ' to sing;' > + अ = गाय .

वद.
"

»
वद् ' to speak;'
निन्द.
»

But forre to blame ;'

कूज् ' to singi कूज.
मुर्छ — to faint ;'' मूर्छ.
2. Special base of roots of the second class ( TEITE i. e. ' commencing
with ste'): the root remains unchanged ; e.g.
अद् ' to eat ;' special base अद्.
दुह to milk ;' " दुह् .
o ' to go ;' या .
3. Special base of roots of the third class ( stante i.e. ' commencing
with fira i.e. T' ) : the root is reduplicated according to $$ 230 and
231 ; but radical # and # are in the reduplicative syllable represented
by , not by 9; e.g.
हु to sacrifice; special base जुहु.
दा ' to give ;' ददा. ।

' to bear;' बिभृ.

4. Special base of roots of the fourth class (fara i.e." " commencing
with दि ') : य is added to the root (obserre $$ 46 and 48 ) :..
नह ' to bind ;' special hase नय .
तुष् to be pleased;' तुष्य.
fara ' to play ;' दीव्य .
M ' to grow old ;' जीर्य.
5. Special base of roots of the fifth class (Finla i.e. ' commencing
with a' ) : 1 (changeable to g by $ 58) is added to the root ; e.g.

।
84 SANSKRIT GRAYNAR . [$ 236

सु ' to squeeze out ;' special base सुनु

9.
' to obtain ;' आमु.
V ' to dare ;' you.
6. Special base of roots of the sixth class ( garie i.e. ' commencing
with gr') : 37 is added to the root; (before this sp, final 7 and
.
become
rų, final 3 and become 5 , final becomes itą , and final *
becomes 75; 1945, 47, 48) ; e.g.
IT'to strike;' special base T.
fe ' to go ;' > रिय.
नु ' to praise ;'
I नुव .
मृ to die ;' >
निय .
a ' to scatter;' किर.
7. Special base of roots of the seventh class (Fyre i. e . ' commencing
with ): a nasal homogeneous with the fuel consonant of the root
(Anusvåra before sibilants and ) is inserted between the radical vowel
and the final consonant, except in roots which already have a nasal for
their penultimate letter; e. g.
Y ' to obstruct ;' special base para
I to join ;' > यु .
force ' pound ;'
पिष् to 2 पिंष.
But उन् द् ' to moisten ;
soos " उन्द.
8. Special base of roots of the eighth class (aarte i. e. ' commencing
with a7): 3 is added to the root; e . g.
na ' to stretcb ;' special base .
9. Special base of roots of the ninth class (Fift i.e. 'commencing
with sit"): ft ( changeable to oft by $ 58 ) is added to the root ; before it
a penultimale radical nasal is dropped ; e g.
यु ' to join ;' special base युनी.
क्री ' to buy ; ' क्रीणी.
Fot ' to support ;' स्तनी.
$ 236. Some roots form their special base in two or more ways ; e. g.
I ' to join,' belongs both to the second (adádi) and to the ninth (kryádi)
class ; Spec. base and mat. są to go,' belongs to the first (bhrádi)
and to the fourth (divádi) class ; Spec. base are and #2 (both irro
 CONJUGATION OP VERBS . 85
§ 241.)
gular ). To which class or classes a root belongs, must be ascertaived
from the practice of the best writers or from the dictionary,
§ 237. Unchangeable special base and changeable special base.
The special base of roots of the first ( thoádı), fourth ( dirádi ), and sixth
( tudádi) classes (i.e., of those classes, in which the special base ends
in 37 ) remains, with some slight modifications, unchanged throughout
all the forms of the special tenses and moods in Parasmaipada and
Åtmanepada. The special base of the roots of the remaiuing six classes
has generally two forms, a strong base and a weak base. Accordingly
the conjugation of roots of the first, fourth, and sixth classes differs
in the special tenses from that of roots of the second (adúdt), third
( juhotyádi), fifth ( svádi ), seventh (rudhadi), eighth ( tanádt), and ninth
(kryadi) classes.
( a.) - Special Tenses of Rools with Unchangeable Special Base.
( 1st, 4th, and 6th classes.)
1.-PRESENT INDICATIVE.

$ 238. The personal terminations given in col. I. of $ 227 are added

to the special base ; e . g.
rt. ' I 1 cl. spec. B. 479 ; Pres. Ind. Par. Hila ; Atm. ad .
rt. दिव् 4 cl. दीव्य ;; goufa ; दीव्यते.
rt. IT 6 cl. » TT ; तुदति; तुदते.
§ 239. (a) Before terminations beginning with 4 or 7 the final
of the special base is lengthened ; e.g. 1 Sing. Par. TEITH.
(6.) The final 37 of the special base combines with initial ( short) *
of a termination to (short) 37, and with ( long) 34 org to g ; e.g. 3 Plur,
Par. nafa ; 1 Sing. Atm. ## ; ? Du. Åtm . aa.
2.- PRESENT POTENTIAL .
$ 240. (changeable to o before vowel-terminations) is added to
the special base, and to the base so modified the personal terminations
given in col. II . of $ 227 are added ; e.g.
rt. भू 1 cl. sp. B. भव ; Pot . P. भव +इ+ त् भवेत् ; A. भव + r + त -भवेत.
rt. दिव 4 cl . Toet; , दीव्य ++ त् -दीव्येत् , दीव्य + द + त - दीव्येत .
rt. तुद् 6 cl. » IT; " तुद + इ + त् - तुदेन् ; " तुद ++तन्तुदेत.
§ 241. J: is substituted for the termination ste of the 3 Plur, Par.,
for of the 1 Sing. Atm., and t for sp77 of the 3 Plur. Åtm.; e.g.
 86 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR . [ 5242

3 Plur. Par. भव + इय् + उ : = भवेयुः

1 Sing. Atm . भव + इय् + अ = भवेय.
3 Plar. Atm. भव +इ + रन् भवेरन्,
3.- PRESENT IMPERATIVE.
§ 242. The personal terminations given in col. IV. of $ 227 are added
to the special base ; e.g.
rt. भू 1 cl. spec. B. भव ; Imper. Par. भवतु ; Atm. भवताम्.
rt. दिव्4 cl. 2 ) दीव्य ; दीव्यतु दीव्यताम्.
rt. तुद् 6 cl. तुद ; तुदतु : तुदताम्.
$ 243. (a) The termination fo of the 2 Sing. Par. is dropped ; e.g.
2 Sing. Par. भव .
(6) The final अ of the special base combines with initial (short) अ of a
termination to ( short) 9 , and with the initial 34 of the terminations
आथाम् and आताम् to y : e.g. 3 Plur. Par. भवन्तु ; 2 Du. Atm. भवेथाम् 3
Du. Atm. भवेताम् .
(c) arc may optionally be substituted for the terminations and तु of
the 2 and 3 Sing. Par. when these two forms have a benedictive sense ;
e.g. भवतात् ' may you be !' ' may he be !'
4. - IMPERFECT.
$ 241. The special base receives the angment ($ 229), and the per
sonal terminations given in col. II. of $ 227 are added to it ; e.g.
rt. भू 1 cl. spec. B. भव ; Impf. Par. अभवत् ; Atm. अभवत.
rt. दिव् 4 cl. दीव्य ; अदीव्यत् ; अदीव्यत.
rt . तुद् 6 cl. तुद अतुदत् अतुदत.
8245. ( a) Before terminations beginning with म् or the final भ
of the special base is lengthened ; e.9.1 Du . Par. अभवाव ; Atm. अभवावहि.
(6) The final sp of the special base combines with initial ( short) * of
a termination to (short) 97, and with (long) T to ; e.g. 1 Sing. Par.
अभवम् ; 2 Da. Atm. अभवेथाम्.
Paradigme.
§ 246. The Special Tenses of c . l'to be ;' faz cl. 4 ( commonly
only P.) ' to play : 7 cl. 6 ' to strike.'
Root : भू दिव् तु
Spec. Base: भव दीव्य तुद
 CONJUGATION OF VERBS . 87
§ 246.)
1 .-- Present Indicalive .
Parasmai. Åtmane. Parasmai. Atmane. Parasmai. Atmane.
1. भवामि भवे दीव्यामि दीव्ये तुदामि तुदे
. ng

2. भवसि भवसे दीव्यसि दीव्यसे तुदसि नुदसे

Si

3. भवति भवते दीव्यति दीव्यते तुदति तुदते

1. भवावः भवावहे दीव्यावः दीव्यावहे तुदावः नुदावहे
Dual

2. भवथः भवेथे दीव्यथः दीव्येथे तुदयः तुदेथे

.

3. भवतः भवेते दीव्यतः दीव्येते तुदतः तुदेते

1. भवामः भवामहे दीव्यामः दीव्यामहे तुदामः तुदामहे
Plur

2. भवथ भवध्वे दीव्यथ दीव्यध्वे तुदय तुदध्वे

.

3. भवन्ति भवन्ते दीव्यन्ति दीव्यन्ते तुदन्ति तुदन्ते

2.-Present Potential .
1. भवेयम् भवेय दीव्येयम् दीव्येय तुदेयम् तुदेय
S. ing

2. भवः भवेथाः दीव्येः दीव्येथाः तुः तुदेथाः

3. भवेत् भवेत दीव्येत् दीव्येत तुदेत् तुदेत
1. भवेव भवेवहि दीव्येव दीव्येवहि तुदेव तुदेवहि
Dual

2. भवेतम् भवेयाथाम् दीव्येतम् दीव्येयाथाम् तुदेतम् नुदेयाथाम्

.

L3. भवेताम् भवेयाताम् दीव्येताम् दीव्येयाताम्नुदेताम् तुदेयाताम्

1. भवेम भवेमहि दीव्येम दीव्यमहि तुदेम . तुदेमहि
.
Plur

2. भवेत भवेध्वम् दीव्येत दीव्यध्वम् तुदेत तुदेध्वम्

.

3. भवेयुः भवेरन् दीव्येयुः दीव्येरन् तुदेयुः तुदेरन्

3. - Present Imperative.
1. भवानि भवै दीव्यानि दीव्यै तुदानि तुदै
2. भव भवस्व दीव्य दीव्यस्व तुद तुदस्व
. ng
Si

or भवतात् or दीव्यतात् or तुदतात्

3. भवतु भवताम् दीव्यतु दीव्यताम् तुदतु तुदताम्
or भवतात् or दीव्यतात् or तुदतात्
 1

88 SANSKRIT GRAMVAR [ 5247

Parasmai. Åtmane. Parasmai. Atmane. Parasmai. Åtmane.
1.भवाव भवावहै दीव्याव दीव्यावहै तुदा
तुदावव तुदावहै
Dual

2.भवतम् भवेथाम् दीव्यतम् दीव्येथाम् तुदतम तुदेथाम्

.

3. भवताम् भवेताम् दीव्यताम् दीव्येताम् तुदताम् तुदेताम्

1.भवाम भवामहै दीव्याम दीव्यामहै तुदतुदाम
ाम तुदामहै
.Plur

2.भवत भवध्वम् दीव्यत दीव्यध्वम् तुदत तुदध्वम्

3. भवन्तु भवन्ताम् दीव्यन्तु दीव्यन्ताम् तुदन्तु तुदन्ताम्
4. - Imperfect.
1 . अभवम् अभवे
अदीव्यम् अदीव्ये अतुदम् अतुदे
. g
Sin

2.अभवः अभवथाः
अदीव्यः अदीव्यथाः अतुदः अतुदयाः
13. अभवत् अभवत अदीव्यत् अदीव्यत अतुदत् अतुदत
1.अभवाव अभवावहि अदीव्याव अदीव्यावहि अनुदाव अतुदावहि
.Dual

H
2.अभवतम् अभवेथाम् अदीव्यतम् अदीव्येथाम् अतुदतम् अतुदेथाम्
.
3. अभवताम् अभवेताम् अदीव्यताम् अदीव्येताम् अतुदताम् अतुदेताम्
1.अभवाम अभवामहि अदीव्याम अदीव्यामहि अतुदाम अनुदामहि
Plur

2. अभवत अभवध्वम् अदीव्यत अदीव्यध्यम् अतुदत अतुदध्वम्

.

[ 3. अभवन् अभवन्त अदीव्यन् अदीव्यन्त अतुदन् अतुदन्त

Irregular roots of the 1st, 4th and 6th classes,.
$ 247. All roots of the 1st, 4th, and 6th classes form their special
tenses from their special bases exactly like भू. दिव , and तुद् , but some
are irregular as far as the formation of their special base is concerned .
Of these the more common are :
First Class ( Bhrádi).
5248. (a) गृह P. A. ' to hide,' चम् P. (with prep. आ) ' to sip,' and
POT P. ' to spue ' lengthen their vowel ; e . g. it. T , Spec. B. Te . Pres.
Ind. Par. गृहति . - क्रम् ' to go does the same in Par .; Par. कामति, Atm.
क्रमते . - मृज् P. ' to wipe ' (also cl. 2) substitutes Vriddhi for its rowel,
and सद् P. ' to sit' ( also cl. 6 ) changes it to ई ; मार्जति , and सीदति . (क्रम्
and fra also follow cl. 4; mata below , and goia ).
(6) met P.‘to bite,' a P. Â.‘to colour,' rą P. ' to adhere,' and
$ 250.] CONSOGATION OF VERBS . 89

स्वप्न Â.'to embrace,' drop their nasál; e . g. rt. *t, Spec. B. FT ,

Pres. Ind. Par. Tulat; ( 7 also follows.cl. 4 ).
.

( c) TE P. Â. " to go ,' an:1 77 P. ' to restrain ,' change their final to g ;

e. g. rt. Te , Spec. B. 783 ($ 5t), Pres. Ind. Par. Tegra.- P. ' to go,
forms as, Pres. Ind. Egia
( • ) ET P. ' to blour' au: ar P. ' to record ,' form yg and 97 ; Pres .
Ind. धमति , मनति .
>

( e) P. ' to smell,' or P. ' to drink ,' and Fur P. Â.'to stand form
जित्र,, पिब,, and तिm ; Pre3. Ind. Par. जिप्रति, पिवति, तिठति.- The spec.
ET P. ' to see' is 950 ; Pres. Ind. Par. quia .
base for दृश्
(s) et P. to give,' Ħ P. ' to run,' and T[] P. ' to fall,' form tay ,
धाव, and शीय At n. respectively ; e.g. यच्छति, धावति, शीयते.
(9) TC P. to guard' a :10 T P. to fumigate' add spre instead of ar ;
Pres. Ind. गोपायति and धूपयतिका A. “ to lore' forms कामय ; Pres. Ind.
कामयते .
Fourth Class ( Dirádi).
§ 249. (a) Roots ending in and a P. ' to be intoxicated ,'
lengthen their vowel ; ** P. ' to roam ' does it optionally. E.g.rt: P.
' to go,' Spec. B. क्राम्य, Pres. Ind. काम्यति ; मह , माद्यति ; भ्रम् , भ्रम्यति or
भ्राम्यति (or according to cl. 1 भ्रमात ).
(()) A P. ' to be unctuo: 13 ' guaites its rowel ; Spec. B. मे
Àqयः; Pres.
Iud. Hara .
( c ) जन् Â. ' to be born' forins FIT' ; Pres. Ind. area .
(111) Roots ending in si drop their sit; e.g. rt. ut P. ' to sharpen ,'
Spec. B. , Pres. Ind. era .
(e) * Tor E P.‘to fall,' and a P. Â. ' to colour , drop their
nasal ; e.g rt . * . Spec. B. YET, Pres. Ind. yufa .
.

( 5) 4 P. ' to strike' substitutes for its radical ; Spec. B. Ferne ,

Pres. Ind. a.
Sixth Class ( Tudádi).
§ 250. (a) TP.‘to cut,' FTP. A. ' to loosen,' ferq P. A. to •
anoint,' T P. Â . " to break;' fra P. Â . " to find,' and fat P. Å. “ to
sprinkle' insert a nasal before their final consonant ; e.g.rt. , Spec.
B. कृन्त, Pres. Ind. कृन्तति ; मुञ्चति i; लिम्मति &c.
(1 ) 13 P. ' to ask ,' TFT P. Â . ' to fry,' and N P. ' to tear , 6

substitute te for their radical t ; e.y.rt. 55 , Spec. B. Tey , Pres.. Ind.

gegra.--217 P. ' to surround substitutes ? for T ; Spec. B. Fra ;
FT.
(c) < P. to wish' forms 779 ; Pres. Ind. eufa .
12 %
90 SANSKRIT GRANMAR . [§ 251–

(6.) - Special Tenses of Roots with Changeable Special Lase.

(2nd, 3rd, 5th , 7th, 8th, and 9lh classes ).
$ 251. The special base of roots of the 2nd , 3rd , 5th, 7th, 8th, and 9th
classes has generally two forms, a strong and a weak base. The strong
base is used in the strong forms, the weak base in the weak forms.
The strong forms are
(a) The three persons of the singular of the Pres. Iudic. in Parasmai.
(6) The three persons of the singular of the Imperfect in Parasmai.
( c ) All the first persons of the Pres. Imperative in Parasınai, and
Atmane.
( 11) The 3rd person singular of the Pres. Imperative in Parasmai.
All the remaining forms are weak.
$ 252. Formation of the special strong base. The weak base does
not, in general, differ from the special base formed in accordance with
the rules laid down in § 235. The strong base is derived from it thus :
( a) In roots of the 2nd and 3rd (adádi and juholyadi) classes the
radicnl vowel is gunated (except when it is prosodially long and
not final) ; in routs consisting of two syllables the last rowel is
gunated ; e.g.
rt. इ cl . 2. ' to go ;' Spec .weak B. $ ; -Strong B. P.
rt. a cl. 2.‘to know ;' ,, >> fare ; वेद्..
rt. feu cl. 2. ' to hate ;" द्विष् ; ) द्वेष .
>

rt. cl. 2. to milk ;' » दुह ;i -

दोह्.
rt. El cl. 2. to wake ;' , जागृ " जागर .
rt. भी cl. 3. ' to fear ;' repit ; 99 बिभे.
cl. 3. to bear ;'
1

farm ; बिभर्.
"

rt. भृ
cl. 2. ' to go ;' al ;
19

rt. या »
-
या .

rt. $ cl. 2. to rule ;' $ T; ईश् .

rt. 7 cl. 3. to bring
forth ;' , ,, जजन- , जजन् .
(1) or roots the 5th and 8th (srádi and tanádi) classes the final
3 of the special base is gunated ; e.g.
 CONJUGATION OF VERBS . 91
1254.]

rt. सु cl. 5. ' tosqueeze out ;' Spec. weak B. सुनु ; -Strong B. सुनो.
.धृष्cl. 5. ' to dare ;' धृष्णु:- धृष्णो.
rt. तन् cl.8. ' to stretch ;' तनुः तनो.
(c) In roots of the 7th (rudhadt ) class Ti. e, na is substituted for
the penultimate nasal of the special base ; this 7 is liable to be changed
to | by 58 Beg.
rt. 54 cl. 7. ' to obstruct ;' Spec. weak B. 578 ;-Strong B. For
rt. युज cl. 7. ' to join ;' , युन् युनज .
rt. उन्l. 7. ' to moisten ; 9 उन्द् , उनद् .
(1) Of roots of the 9th (leryidiy class आ is substituted for the final
of the special base ; e.g.
rt. यु cl.9. to join ;' Spec.weak B. Tot; -Strong B. JA .
rt . क्री cl. 9. to buy ;' क्रीणी क्रीणा .
rt . स्तम्भ cl. 9. ' to support;' स्तनी- " स्तना .
$ 253. General rules of Sandhi for the combination of inal letters
of the special ( strong and weak) base with initial letters of terminations :
1. A final vowel of a special base combines with the initial vowel
of a termination according to the rules of Sandhi in st, &c. Initial
consonants of terminations after final rowels of special bases remain
unchanged, except that the स् of the terminations सि, से, and स्व is
changed to y after all rowels but HT ( S 59,) and that the termination f
of the 2 Sing. Pres. Imperat. Par. is after all rovels (and semirowels)
changed to fe ; e.g.
या cl. 2. 'togo3;' 3 Plur. Pres. Ind. Par. या + अन्ति - यान्ति
2 Sing . 9 या + सि = यासि
2 Imper. या + धि = याहि
इ cl. 2. ' to go ;' 2 Ind . " ए + सि = एपि
2 , Imper.. इ + घि हाहि
चि cl. 5. ' tocollect3 1 91 चिनो + आनि चिनवानि
§ 254. (2). When final consonants of special bases meet with initial
vowels, semirowels, or nasals of terminations, both the final letters of
the bases and the initial letters of the terminations remain unchanged
( 550 ) ; e.g.
92 SANSKRIT GRAUMAR . [ $ 255

युज cl. 7. ' to join ;' Strong base युनज् , Weak base युन् ।
1 Sing. Pres. Ind. Atm. युन् + एम्युझे
1 Dual Pres. Ind. Par. युञ् + वः -युवः
1 Sing. Pres. Ind . Par. युनज् + मि = युनजिम
$ 255. (3.) When final consonants of special bases meet with initial
न् , थ, ध , स् or Visarga of terminations, the rules laid down in $ 51, &c. ,
are observed . The following changes deserve special notice :
(a) The terminations: (a) and a of the 2 and 3 Sing. Iinpf. Par. are
dropped ($ 52); at the same time
final w and of the Spec. B. become क ;
final and
final of the Spec. B. becomes F. but in roots commencing with द
as ( obserre § 53);
it becomes
final of the Spec. B. becomes Visarga ;
final a , ( ), ,, and of the Spec. B. become in the 3 person,
and they may optionally become a or Visarga in the 2 person ; e.g.
3 Sing. Impf. Par. of हन् cl. 2 = अहन् ; of वच् cl. 2 = अवक ; of युज
cl. 7 = अयुनक ; of व cl. 2 = अवद ; of द्विश् cl . 2 = अद्वेद ; of लिह cl. 2
= अलेद; of दुह cl. 2 = अधोक् ; of भृ cl . 3 (strong B. बिभर्) = अविभः
( i.e. अविभर).
3 Sing. Impf. Par. of शास् cl. अशात् ; of भिद् ci. i = अभिनत ;
of रुप cl.7 = अरुणत्.
2 Sing. Impf. Par. of शास् - अशात् or अशाः; of भित् - अभिनत् or
अभिनः; of रु - अरुणत् or अरुणः.
( ) Before the स् of the terminations सि , से, and स्व
final च् , ज, श, ष, भ, and ह of the Spec. B. are changed to क
(observe $ 53), after which the initial स् of the termination becomes v
($ 59);
finale, ( थ ), , and o become t ( 551 );
final becomes Anusvârn ;
finals and remain unchanged, but a afterç is changed to ; 4.9.
2 Sing. Pres. Ind. Par. of युज - गुनक्षि ; of द्विष् - द्वेक्षि ; of दुह = धोभिः
of रुधरुणस्सि ; of हन = हंसि ; of q =विभर्षि ; of शास् - शास्सि.
2 Sing. Pres. Imper. Atn. of च . 2 = चन .
( d) Before terminations commencing with u and y
final 7 and 37 become ;
$ 256.] CONJUGATION OF VERBS .. 93

final , ( u ), and become a ( $ 51) ; final combines with the

initial a and 4 to Z ( 55 );
final is changed to T ($ 51) ; final < remains unchanged , and
final of and 4 are changed to q ; after { and & the initial Q and y
become and respectively ( 56 );
final ह of roots commencing with combines with the initiala
and L to ग्ध final ह of other roots combines with a aud u to ,
before which short vowels (except F ) are lengthened ; e.g.
3 Dual Pres. Ind. Par. of yazyk ; of parg cl. 2 ' to know ' =
ETT :; of purg :
3 Sing. Pres. Ind. Par. of pret; of y = ferta ; of ura =
Tita ; of Fig == are ;
3 Sing. Pres. Ind. Atm. of cl. 2. = ff ;
2 Dual l'res. Ind. Par. of r = :; of fore = rtti.
( 1) Before terminations cominencing with
final and 3 become at ;
final . ( ), 5, and y become 5 (951);
fival 2 , T.Ç, and et combine with us to ai
final Ę is dropped ;
final of roots commencing with a combines with y to t; fival
ह
of other roots combines with y to , before which short rowels (except
# ) are lengthened ; eJ.
2 Sing. Pres. Imper. Par. of q = ustry ; of nursing
?. Plur. Pres. Ind. Âtm. of 5 cl. 2 = ;
2 Sing. Pres. Imper. Par. of fac = pergi
2 Plur. Pres. Ind. Åtm. of Ty cl. 2 = te ; of stræ cl.2 = Stri;
2 Sing. Pres. Imper. Par. of E = gfrt; of fase = aft.
Before terminations beginning with the initial of roots ending
in ह ( हिह and दुह् ) is changed to u ; eg.
2 Plur. Pres. Ind. Atm. of fee cl. ? = fimi; but 2 Sing. Pres.
Imper. Par. Fany.
1.- PRESENT INDICATIVE,
$ 256. The personal terminations given in col. I. of $ 227 are added
to the special strong base in strong forms, to the special weak base in
weak forms ($ 251) ; e.g.
 94 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR . [$ 257

Root. Sp. Strong B. 1 Sing. Par. Sp. Weak B. 1 Plur. Par.

द्विष् cl. 2. द्वेष द्वेष्मि ; द्विषः द्विष्मः.
cl. 8. जुहो ; जुहोमि ; जुहु ; जुहुमः
सुनोमि ;
444

cl. 5. सुनो। सुनु सुनुमः.

रुथ् cl. 7. रुणध्ः रुणधिमा रुन्धः रुन्ध्मः.

तन् cl . 8. तनो तनोमि ; तनु तनुमः

क्री cl. 9. क्रीणा ; क्रीणामि ; क्रीणी क्रीणीमः.
$ 257. ( a) The term . pad of the 3 Plur. Atm. loses its q in all
classes, and the term. Stiaat of the 3 Plur. Par. loses its after roots
of the 3rd Gnhotyidh) class, and after the roots चकास् , जस् , जागृ, दरिद्रा ,
and ur of the 2nd ( adúdi) class ( compare § 106 ) ; e.g.
विष 3 Plar. Atm. द्विषते. हु 3 Plur. Par. जुह्वति.. शास् 3 Plar. Par.
शासति.
( 6) Final 7 and 3, 3 and 5 , and of special wenk bases of roots
of the 2nd class are before rowel -terminations changed to इय, उद्, and
ç respectively ; final 7 and 4, 3 , and te of special wenk bases of roots
of the 3rd class are before vowel -terminations changed to 4 , 4, and 5
the ot' * t cl. 3 (being preceded by two consonants ) is changed to reg.
3 Plur. Par. of cl. 2 = अवन्ति ; of जागृ cl. 2 = जापति ; of भी cl. 3)
= बिभ्यति ; of ही cl. 3 जिहियति .
( c) The final 3 of the special wenk base of roots of the 5th (svadi)
class is before rowel-terminations changed to 39 , when it is preceded by
more than one consonant ; otherwise it is changed to q ; e.g.
3 Plur . Par . of आपआमुवन्ति ; of F = मुन्वन्ति.
( 4 The final f of the special wenk base of ruots of the 9th (kryadi)
class is dropped before vowel-terminations ; e.g.
3 Plar. Par. of क्री - क्रीणन्ति .
(c) The final 3 of the special weak base of roots of the 5th ( srúdi)
and 8th (lanadi) classes may optionally be dropped before terminations
beginning with or 4, provided 3 be preceded by only one consonant ; eg.
1 Plur. Par. of T = सुनुम: or सुन्म ; but of आप only आमुमः.
2.- PRESENT POTENTIAL
8258. या is added to the special weak base in Parasmaipada, and t
(changeable to ईय् before rowel-terminations) to the special weak base
in Åtmanepada ; to the base so modified the personal terminations given
$ 261 .] COXJUGATION OF VERB3. 95

iu col . II. of $ 227 are added. Final vowels of the special weak base
undergo before the changes specified in $ 257 ( 6), (c ), and (d ). E.g.
Root .. Spec. Weak B. 3 Sing. Par . 3 Sing. Atm.

द्विष् cl. 2. द्विष् द्विष्यात् द्विषीत

cl. 3. जुहु जुहुयात् जुहीत.
सु cl.. सुनु सुनुयात् सुन्वीत.
रुथ् cl. 7. रुन्धः रुन्ध्यात् रुन्धीत.
तन् cl. 8. तनु तनुयात् । तन्वीत.
at cl. 9. क्रीणी ; क्रीणीयात् ; क्रीणीत .
8259. ( 0) उ: is substituted for the termination अन् of the 3 Plur.
Par., अ for s of the 1 Sing. Atm., and रन् for अन्त of the 3 Plar. Atm.
(6) The 37t of the characteristic or is dropped before the termina.
tion : of the 3 Plur. Par.; e. g.
द्विष्, 3 Plur. Par. विष्युः; 1 Sing. Atm. द्विषीय ; 3 Plur. Atm. द्विषीरन्.
3.--PRESENT INPERATIVE.
§ 260. The personal terminations given in col. IV. of 6 227 are
added to the special strong base in strong forms, to the special weak base
in weak forms ($ 251) ; e.g.
Root. Sp. Strong B. 3 Sing. Par. Sp. Weak B. 3 Sing. Atm.

द्विष् cl. 2. वेष् ; द्वेष्ट द्विषः द्विष्टाम:

हु cl. 3. जुहो ; जुहोतु ; जुहुः जुहुताम्.
सु cl. 5. सुनो । सुनोतु; सुनु सुनुताम्.
रुथ् cl. 7.रुणः रुणदुः रुन्धः रुन्द्धाम .
तन् cl. 8. तनो ; तनोतु ; तनु तनुताम्.
क्री cl. 9. क्रीणा ; क्रीणातु क्रीणी ; क्रीणीताम् .
§ 261. (a) The term. For of the 2 Sing. Par . is (as stated in § 253)
changed to fe after special bases ending in rowels (except in un from
5) and semivowels. It is dropped after the special bases of roots of the
5th and 8th classes, when the final ofthese bases is preceded by only
96 SANSKRIT GRAMUAR . [$ 262
one consonant. Roots of the 9th class that end in consonants substitute
in the 2 Sing. Par. आन ( or आण ) for नीहि ( or णीहि .) E.g.
या cl. 2, याहि भृ l. 3, विभूहिः- मु cl. 5, Spec. weak base सुनु , 2 Sing.
Par. सुनु; but आप् cl. 5, Spec. weak base आमु, 2 Sing. Par. आमुहि :
भश् cl. 9, Spec. weak base अभी , 2 Sing. Par . अशान ( not अभीहि ) ; but
क्री , क्रीणीहि.
(6) The 7 of the terminations Seary and stag is dropped as in the
Pres. Ind . (6257 a) ; e.g.
विष, 3 Plur. Atm. द्विषताम् ; हु, 3 Plur . Par. जुह्वतः शास् , 3 Plur . Par.
शासतु.
( c) Pinal vowels of special weak bases are before rowel-terminations
changed as in the Pres. Ind. ( $ 257, b, c , d ).
( d ) arc may optionally be substituted for the terminations and of
the 2 and 3 Sing. Par. when these two forms hare a benedictive sense .
In both persous this arg is added to the spec. weak base ; c.9. SITC cl. 5 ,
2 or 3 Sing. Par. आमुतात् ' may you obtain !' ' may he obtain ?
4. - INPERFECT.
§ 262. The special basc receives the augment ($ 229), and the per
sonal terminations given in col. II. of5227 are added to the special
strong base in strong forms, to the special weak base in weak forms
($ 251); e.g.
Root .
Sp. Strong B. 1 Sing. Par . Sp. Weak B. 1 Plur. Par.
द्विप cl. 2. द्वेष अद्वेषम् । द्विषः अद्विष्म.
hooI

cl. 3. जुहो ; अजुहवम् जुहु । अजुहुम .

सु cl. 5. सुनो । असुनवम् सुनु असुनुम .
रुध् cl. 7.रुण अरुणधम् । रुन्धः अरुन्धम .

नन् cl . 8. तनो ; अतनवम् तनु अतनुम .

क्री cl. 9. क्रीणा ; अक्रीणाम् । क्रीणी ; अक्रीणीम.
5263. (a) The term. अन्त of the 3 Plur.Atm. loses its finall
classes, and the term. अन् of the 3 Plur. Par. becomes उ: after roots of
the 3rd inhotyadi ) class and after the roots चकाम् , जस् , जाग, दरिद्रा,
शाम् and विद् of the 2nd ( adādi) class ; उः is substituted for अन् also
optionally after roots of the 2nd class that end in आ , and after द्विष . A
final rovel of the special base is gunated before 3:; a final 2 is
dropped. E.g.
 § 264.) CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 97

द्विष 3 Plur. Atm. अद्विषत ; शास् 3 Plur. Par. अशासः ह 3 Plur.

Par. अजुहवुः ; या 3 Plur. Par. भयान् or भयु :.
(6) The rules specified in 6 257 (6), ( e), ( d ), ( e) apply also in the
Imperfect.
Paradigms :
$ 264. The Special Tenses of द्विष cl. 2 ' to hate ' r cl. 3 ' to
sacrifice ,' स cl . 5 to squeeze out,' रुघ cl. 7 ' to obstruct,' तन् cl.8 " to
stretch,' की cl.9 ' to buy.
Root : द्विष cl . 2. हु cl. 3.*
Spec . St. Base : दे जुहो
Spec. W.Base : हिष जुहु

Parasmai. Atmane. Parasmai. Atmane.

1. - Present Indicatire.

1 देष्मि द्विषे जुहोमि जुहे

Sing
..

2 इक्षि विक्षे जुहोषि जुहुषे

3 द्वेष्टि विष्टे जुहोति जुहुते
1 द्विष्वः द्विष्वहे जुहुवः जुहुवहे
Dual

2 विष्टः द्विषाथे जुहुथः जुह्वाथे

.

3 द्विष्टः द्विषाते जुहुतः जुहाते

1 द्विष्मः द्विष्महे जुहुमः जुहुमहे
Plur

2 द्विष्ठ हिड्वे जुहुथ जुहुवे

.

3 द्विषन्ति द्विषते जुह्वति जुड़ते

2 ..- Present Potential..

1 द्विष्याम् द्विषीय जुहुयाम् जुहीय

. ng
Si

2 द्विष्याः द्विषीथाः जुहुयाः जुहीथाः

3 द्विष्यात् द्विषीत जुहुयात् जुहीत
* The rt. 5 is really conjugated only in Parasmaipada. The Atmanepada forins
aro given here merely in order to show the difference between Par. and Atm.
in one and the same verb .
138
 93 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR . [ 264
Parasmai. Atmane.. Parasmai.. Atmane.
द्विष्याव द्विषीवहि जुहुयाव जुह्वीवहि
Dual

2 द्विष्यातम् द्विषीयाथाम् जुद्रीयाथाम्

.

जुहुयातम्
3 द्विष्याताम् द्विषीयाताम् जुहुयाताम् जुहीयाताम्
1 द्विष्याम द्विषीमहि जुहुयाम जुहीमहि
.Plur

2 द्विष्यात द्विषीध्वम् जुहुयात जुद्दीध्वम्

3 द्विष्युः द्विषीरन् जुहुयुः जुह्वीरन्
3. - Present Imperatire.

----
1 द्वेषाणि द्वेष जुहवानि जुहवै
2 द्विडि or .
विश्व जुहुधि or जुहुष्व
. .ng
Si

द्विष्टात् जुहुतात्
8 बेष्टु or विष्टाम् जुहोतु or जुहुताम्
द्विष्टात् जुहुतात्
1 द्वेषाव द्वेषावहै जुहवावहै
.Dual

जुहवाव
2 विष्टम् द्विषाथाम् जुहुतम् जुह्वाथाम्
3 द्विष्टाम् द्विषाताम् जुहुताम् जुह्वाताम्
1 ईषाम द्वेषामहै जुहवाम जुहवामहै
Plur

2 विष्ट हिड्ठम् जुहुत जुहुध्वम्

.

3 द्विषन्तु द्विषताम् जुह्वतु जुह्वताम्

4. - Imperfect..
1 अद्वेषम् अद्विषि अजुहवम् अजुद्धि
Sing

2 अहेद अद्विष्ठाः अजुहोः

:!

अजुहुथाः
3 अबेद अद्विष्ट अजुहोत् अजुहुत
1 अद्विष्व अद्विष्वहि अजुहुव अजुहुवहि
Dual
..

2 अद्दिष्टम् अद्विषाथाम् अजुहुतम् अजुह्वाथाम्

3 अद्विष्टाम् अद्विषाताम् अजुहुताम् अजुह्वाताम्
 § 264.] CONJUGATION OF VERBS . 99

Parasmai . Atmane. Parasmai. Atmane.

1 अद्विष्म अद्विष्महि अजुहुम अजुहुमहि
.Plur

2 अद्विष्ट अद्विड्दम् अजुहुत अजुहुध्वम्

8 अद्विषन् or अद्विषत अजुहवुः अजुह्वत
अद्विषुः
Root : सु cl.. रुध् cl. 7 .
Spec. St. Base : सुनो रुण
Spec. W. Base : सुनु रुन्ध
1 .-- Present Indicative,

1 सुनोमि सुन्वे रुणध्मि रुन्धे

. ng
Si

2 सुनोषि सुनुषे रुणत्सि रुन्त्से

3 सुनोति सुनुते रुणद्धि रुन्दे
रुन्ध्वहे
.
1 सुनुवः or सुनुवहे or रुन्धः
. l

सुन्वहे
Dua

मुन्वः

2 सुनुथः सुन्वाथे रुन्द्रः रुन्धाथे

( 3 सुनुतः सुन्वाते रुन्द्रः रुन्धाने

1 सुनुमः or सुनुमहे or रुन्धमः रुन् महे

सुन्महे
Plur

सुन्मः
.

2 सुनुथ सुनुध्वे रुन्द्रे

3 सुन्वन्ति सुन्वते रुन्धन्ति रुन्धते
2.- Present Potential.

1 सुनुयाम् सुन्वीय रुन्ध्याम् रुन्धीय

. ng
Si

2 सुनुयाः सुन्वीथाः रुन्ध्याः रुन्धीथाः

3 सुनुयात् सुन्वीत रुन्ध्यात् रुन्धीत
 100 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR . [8264
Parasmai. Atmane . Parasmai. Atmane.
1 सुनुयाव सुन्वीवहि रुन्ध्याव रुन्धीवहि
.Dual

2 सुनुयातम् सुन्वीयाथाम् रुन्ध्यातम् रुन्धीयाथाम्

3 सुनुयाताम् सुन्वीयाताम् रुन्ध्याताम् रुन्धीयाताम्
1 सुनुयाम सुन्वीमहि रुन्ध्याम रुन्धीमहि
Plur

2 सुनुयात सुन्वीध्वम् रुन्ध्यात रुन्धीध्वम्

.

3 सुनुयुः सुन्वीरन् रुन्ध्युः रुन्धीरन्

3. - Present Imperative.
1 सुनवानि सुनवै रुणधानि रुण
१ सुनु or सुनुष्व रुन्द्धि or रुन्तस्व
.Sing

सुनुतात् रुन्द्वात्
3 सुनोतु or सुनुनाम् रुणदु or रुन्दाम्
सुनुतात् रुन्द्वात्
1 सुनवाव सुनवावहै रुणधाव रुणधावहै
Dual

१ सुनुतम् सुन्वाथाम् रुन्दम् रुन्धाथाम्

.

3 सुनुताम् सुन्वाताम् रुन्ताम् रुन्धाताम्

1 सुनवाम सुनवामहै रुणधाम रुणधामहै
Plur

2 सुनुत सुनुध्वम् रुन्दम्

.

3 सुन्वन्तु सुन्वताम् रुन्धन्तु रुन्धताम्

4.-— Imperfect.
1 असुनवम् असुन्वि अरुणधम् अरुन्धि
अरुणः or
.Sing

2 असुनोः असुनुथाः अरुन्धाः

अरुणत्
3 असुनोत् असुनुत अरुणत् अरुन्

1 असुनुव or असुनुवहि or अरुन्ध्व अरुन्ध्वहि

Dual

असुन्व असुन्वहि
.

१ असुनुतम् असुन्वाथाम् अरुन्दम् अरुन्धाथाम्

3 असुनुताम् असुन्वाताम् अरुन्ताम् अरुन्धाताम्
 CONJUGATION OF VERBS . 101
§ 264.]
Parasmai . Atmane. Parasmai . Atmane.

( 1 असुनुम or असुनुमहि or अरुन्धम अरुन्धमहि

Plur

असुन्म असुन्महि
.

असुनुध्वम् अरुन्द्ध अरुन्दम्

2 असुनुत
(3 असुन्वन् असुन्वत अरुन्धन् अरुन्धत

Root : तन् cl . 8. क्री cl . 9 .

Spec. St. Base : तनो क्रीणा
Spec. W. Base : तनु क्रीणी
1. - Present Indicative.

1 तनोमि तन्वे क्रीणामि क्रीणे

. ng

क्रीणासि क्रोणीषे
Si

2 तनोषि तनुषे
3 तनोति तनुते क्रीणाति क्रीणीते

1 तनुवः or तनुवहे or क्रीणीवः क्रीणीवहे

Dual

तन्वः तन्वहे
.

2 तनुथः तन्वाथे क्रीणीथः क्रीणाथे

तन्वाते क्रीणीतः क्रोणाते
3 तनुतः
( 1 तनुमः or तनुमहे or क्रीणीमः क्रीणीमहे
Plur

तन्मः तन्महे
.

तनुध्वे क्रीणीथ क्रीणीध्वे

2 तनुथ
13 तन्वन्ति तन्वते क्रीणन्ति क्रीणते
2.- Present Potential.

] तनुयाम् तन्वीय क्रोणीयाम् क्रीणीय

. ng

क्रीणीयाः क्रीणीथाः
Si

2 तनुयाः तन्वीथाः
3 तनयात् तन्वीत क्रीणीयात् क्रोणीत
 102 SAXSKRIT GRAUNAR . [ $261
Parasmai, Atmane. Parasmai. Atmane.
तन्वीवहि क्रीणीयाव क्रोणीवहि
Dual

1 तनुयाव
2 तनुयातम् तन्वीयाथाम् क्रीणीयाथाम्
.

क्रीणीयातम्
3 तनुयाताम् तन्वीयाताम् क्रीणीयाताम् क्रीणीयाताम्
1 तनुयाम तन्वीमहि क्रीणीयाम क्रीणीमहि
Plur

2 तनुयात तन्वीध्वम् क्रीणीयात क्रीणीध्यम

.

3 तनुयुः तन्वीरन् क्रीणीयुः क्रीणीरन

3. - Present Imperatire.
1 तनवानि तनवै क्रीणानि क्रीण
2 तनु or तनुष्व क्रीणीहि or क्रीणीव
. ng
Si

तनुतात् क्रीणीतात्
3 तनोतु or तनुताम् क्रीणातु or क्रीणीताम्
तनुतात् क्रीणीतात्
तनवावहै क्रीणाव क्रीणावहै
Dual

1 तनवाव
क्रीणीतम् क्रोणाथाम्
.

2 तनुतम् तन्वाथाम्
3 तनुताम् तन्वाताम् क्रीणीताम् क्रीणाताम्
तनवामहै क्रीणाम क्रीणामहै
.Plar

1 तनवाम

2 तनुत तनुध्वम् क्रीणीत क्रीणीध्वम्

3 तन्वन्तु तन्वताम क्रीणन्तु क्रीणताम्
4. - Imperfect..
।

1 अतनवम् अतन्वि अक्रीणाम् अक्रीणि

.Sing

2 अतनोः अतनुथाः अक्रीणाः अक्रीणीथाः

1

3 अतनोत् अतनुत अक्रीणात् अक्रीणीत

1 अतनुव or अतनुवहि or अक्रीणीव अक्रीणीवहि

Dual

अतन्व अतन्वहि
.

2 अतनुतम् अतन्वाथाम् अक्रीणीतम् अक्रीणाथाम्

3 अतनुताम् अतन्वानाम् अक्रीणीताम् अक्रीणाताम्
 CONJUGATION OF VERBS . 103
§ 265.]
Parasmai. îtmane. Parasmai. Atmane.

1 अतनुम or अतनुमहि or अक्रोणीम अक्रीणीमहि

अतन्महि
Plur

अतन्म
अक्रीणीत अक्रोणीध्वम्
.

2 अतनुत अतनुध्वम्
3 अतन्वन् अतन्वत अक्रोणन् अक्रोणत
$ 265. In order to exemplify the rules contained in $$ 253, & c., we
proceed to give some forms of the regular rerbs या , वी , जागृ, ई , चश् .
आस्, दुह , लिह ; ही, भृ ; शक्युज , पिष , हिंस् ; and बन्ध . The student may
conjugate each of these roots in full.
1. या cl. 2. P. ' to go ;' Pres. Ind. यामि , यासि, याति ; यावः, याथः,
यातः; यामः, याथ , यान्ति. Pres. Pot. यायाम. Pres. Imperat. 2 Sing. याहि.
Imperf. 3 Plur. अयान् or अयुः.
2. वी cl. 2. P. ' to go ; Pres. Ind. वेमि , वेषि , वेति ; वीवः, वीयः, वीतः
वीमः, वीय, वियन्ति . Pres . Pot. वीयाम्. Pres. Imperat. वयानि, वीहि, वेनु .
Imperf. अवयम् ; 3 Plur. अवियन् (or, according to some , अव्यन् ).
3. जागृ cl. 2. P. ' to wake%3' Pres. Ind. जागर्मि , जागर्षि , जागति :i जा
गृवः; 3 Plur. जागति . Pres. Pot. जागृयाम् . Pres. Imperat. जागराणि , जा .
गृहि, जागर्तु; 3 Plur. जाग्रतु. Imperf. अजागरम् , अजागः, अजागः; अजागृव ;
3 Plur. अजागरुः
4. ईर् cl. 2. A. ' to go; Pres. Ind. ईर, ईर्षे, ईत ; 3 Plur. ईरते. Pres.
Pot. ईरीय. Pres. Imperat. ईरे, ईल, ईर्ताम्. Imperf. ऐरि.
5. चक्ष cl. 2. A. ' to speak ;' Pres. Ind. चक्षे , चो , चष्टे ; चवहे ; 2 Plar.
चड्ढ़े ; 3 Plur. चक्षते. Pres. Pot . चक्षीय. Pres. Imperat. च :, चश्व , चष्टाम्.
Imperf. अचक्षि , अचष्ठाः, अचष्ट . (This root is conjugated only in the
special tenses, and optionally in the Perfect.)
6. आस् cl. 2. A. ' to sit ;' Pres. Ind. आसे, आस्से , आस्ते ; 2 Plur .
आध्वे. Imperf. आसि .
7. दुह cl . 2. P. A. to milk ;' Pres. Ind. Par.दोसि , धोशि , दोन्धि; दुहः,
दुग्धः, दुग्धः; दुह्मः, दुग्ध , दुहन्ति . Pres. Ind. Atm. दुहे, धुक्षे, दुग्धे ; 2 Plur.
धुग्ध्वे. Pres. Imperat. Par. दोहानि, दुग्धि, दोग्धु. Imperf. Par. भदोहम् ,
अधोक, अधोक ; अदुह.
8. लिह cl. 2. P ... to lick ;' Pres. Ind. Par. लेझि, लेसि, लेदि; लिगः
लीटः, लीदः लिमः, लीट, लिहन्ति. Pres. Ind. Atm . लिहे, लिखे , लीडे; 2 Plur.
लीदे. Pres. Imperat. Par. लेहानि, लीढि, लेदु. Imperf. Par. अलेहम् , भलेह,
अलेद; अलिहु.
9. ही cl . 3. P. ' to be ashamed ;' Pres. Ind. जिइनि , जिषि. जिहोते ;
जिहीवः ; 3 Plur. निहियति . Pres. Pot. जिहीयाम्. Pres . Imperat . जिइयाणि ,
जिहीहि. Imperf. अजिइयम , अजिहेः, अनिइत् ; अजिहीव ; 3 Plur. अजिइयुः.
104 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [8266

10. भृ cl. 3. P. A. ' to bear ;' Pres. Ind. Par . विभार्मि, बिभार्षि, विभर्ति ;
बिभूवः; 3 Plar. विधति . Pres. Ind. Atm. विभ्रे, विभृषे. Pres. Pot. Par.
वियाम ; Atm . विधीय. Pres. Imperat. Par. विभराणि, विभृहि; Atm. बिभरे,
बिभृष्व. Imperf. Par. अविभरम् , अबिभः, अविभः, अबिभूव; 3 Plur. अविभरुः;
Atm. अविनि , भविभृथाः.
11. शक् cl. 5. P. ' to be able ;' Pres. Ind. शक्रोमि , शक्रोषि , शक्नोति
शक्नुवः (only); 3 Plur. शक्नुवन्ति . Pres. Pot . शकुयाम्. Pres. Imperat.
शकवानि , शक्नुहि, शक्नोत; 3 Plur. शक्नुवन्तु. Imperf. अशकवम्: 1 Du. अशक्नुवः
3 Plur . अशक्नुवन् .
12. युज cl. 7. P. A. ' to join ;' Pres. Ind. Par. युनज्मि, युनक्षि, युनक्ति ;
युज्वः युक्थः, युक्तः ; युञ्जमः, युक्थ, युञ्जन्ति. Pres. Ind. Atm. युने :
2 Plur. युग्वे. Pres. Pot. Par. युज्याम् ; Atm. युञ्जीय. Pres. Imperat .
Par. युनजानि , युग्धि, युन : Atm. युनजे. Imperf. Par. अयुनजम् , अयुनक,
अयुनक ; अयुज्त्र; Atm. अयुश्चि .
13. पिए cl. 7. P. ' to pound ;' Pres. Ind. पिनष्मि, पिनभि , पिनष्टि ; पिष्वः,
पिंष्ठः , पिष्टः , पिष्मः, पिष्ठ, पिंषन्ति . Pres. Pot. पिंष्याम्. Pres. Imperat.
पिनषाणि, पिण्ड्डि, पिनष्टु. Imperf. अपिनषग , अपिनद्, अपिनदः अपिध्व.
14. हिंस् cl. 7. P. ' to strike ;' Pres. Ind. हिनस्मि, हिनस्सि . हिनस्ति; हिंस्वः
Pres. Pot. हिंस्याम. Pres. Imperat. हिनसानि, हिन्धि , हिनस्तु. Imperf.
अहिनसम् , अहिनः or अहिनत, भहिनत्.
15. cl. 9. P.'to bind ;' Pres. Ind. THTH; 1 Plur, auta , Pres.
Pot . बन्नीयाम. Pres. Imperat. वनानि , वधान , बनातु. Imperf. अवधाम् ;
1Plur. अवधीम .

Irregular roots of the 2nd, 3rd, 5th , 7th, 8th and 9th classes.
Second Class ( .ldidi).
5266. Roots ending in 7 substitute Vriddhi instead of Guna in strong
forms before consonantal terminations ; e.g. I P. ' to join ;'. Pres. Ind.
यौमि, यौषि, यौति; युवः. Pres. Imperat. यवानि, युहि, यौतु; यवाव, युतम् . Pres.
Pot. युयाम् . Imperf. अयवम् , अयोः, अयोत् ; अयुव. ( See $ 272 and $ 273.)
5267. अद् P. ' to eat, forms the 2 Sing. Imperf. आदः, and the 3 Sing.
Imperf. आदत् (instend of आः or आत् , and आन् ).
$ 268. अन् P. ' to breathe,' जम् P. ' to eat,' रुद् P. 'to reep,' श्वम् P.
to sigh ,' and FTC P. ' to sleep,' insert between the root and termina
tions beginning with consonants, except य ; before the terminations :
(ie. A ) and a of the 2 and 3 Sing. Imperf. they insert optionally either
Kor Beg. Pres. Ind. रोशिम, रोशिषि, रोदिति रुदिवः; 3 Plur. रुदन्ति. Pres.
Pot. रुद्याम् . Pres. Imperat. रोहानि , रूदिहि ( 5253) , रोदितु. Imperf. अरोदम् ,
भरोदीः or अरोदः, भरोतीत् or अरोदन : अरुदिव.-Rt. जभ , 3 Plur. Pres. Ind.
जक्षति (6257 a), & c.
 COXJUGATION OF VERBS . 105
§ 272.)
$ 269. अस् P. (and, when used as an auxiliary rerb, A. in Pres.
Ind.) ' to be,' drops its radical अ in weak forms except when it is com
bined with the augment, and is otherwise irregular :
Pres. Ind. Pres. Pot. Pres. Imperat. Imperf.

Par. Atm. Par . Par. Par.

Sing

-1 अस्मि है स्याम् असानि आसम्

2 असि से स्याः राधे आसीः
.

3 अस्ति स्ते स्यात् अस्तु आसीत्

Dual

1 स्वः स्वहे स्याव असाव आस्व

2 स्थः साये स्यातम् स्तम् आस्तम्
.

3 स्तः साते स्याताम् स्ताम् आस्ताम्

1 स्मः स्महे स्याम आस्म

Plur

असाम
2 स्थ ध्व स्यात आस्त
.

L3 सन्ति सते स्युः सन्तु आसन्

$ 270. P. ' to go,' changes its to in the 3 Plur. Pres. Ind. and
Imperat . When combined with the preposition sy, in the sense of ' to
go over, to read, to study ,' it is Åtm. and changes its before rowel.
terminations regularly to इय . E.g. Pres. Ind. Par. एमि. एषि , एति इवः
3 Plur . यन्ति. Pres . Pot. इयाम् . Pres. Imperat. अयानि , इहि, एतु :
3 Plur . यन्तु . Imperf. आयम् , ऐः, ऐत् ; ऐव.- Atm. with अधि ; Pres . Ind.
.

अधीये , अधीषे , अधीते ; अधीवहे, अधोयाथे. Pres. Pot. अधीयीय. Pres . Imperat.
अध्ययै , अधीष्व . Imperf . अध्याय, अध्यैथाः, अध्यैत ; अध्यवाह, अध्यैयाथाम् ,
अध्ययाताम् ; अध्यमहि , अध्यध्वम् , अध्ययत.1

$ 271. ईश् A. ' to rule,' and ई A. “ to praise,' insert r between the

root and the terminations से, स्व , वे, and घम् of the 2 Sing. and 2 Plur.
Pres. Ind. and Imperative (not the Iinperfect); e.g. ft , Pres. Ind.
ईशे, ईशिषे, ईटे; 2 Plur. ईशिध्वे Pres. Pot. ईशीय. Pres. Imperat. ईशै,
ईशिष्व, ईटाम् ; 2 Plur . ईशिध्वम्. Imperf. ऐशि ; 2 Plur. ऐड्दम् . - ईद
Pres. Ind. ईडे, ईडिषे, इंटे. ; 2 Plur. ईडिवे. Pres. Pot. ईडीय. Pres.
Imperat. ईडै, इडिष्व, ईडाम् ; 2 Plur. ईडिध्वम् . Imperf. ऐडि 2 Plar.
ऐइटुम्.
$ 272.. अM P. A. ' to cover,' may optionally substitute Vriddhi for
its final 3 in strong forms before consonantal terminatious, except in the
2 and 3 Sing. Imperf. Par. E.g. Pres . Ind. Par. Fift or ritta,
ऊोषि or ऊौषि , ऊोति or ऊोतिः ऊर्गुवः : 3 Plur . ऊर्गुवन्ति . Pres . Pot.
अणुयाम्. Pres . Imperat. ऊर्णवानि , ऊर्गुहि , ऊणांतु or ऊर्णोतु. Imperf. औणवम् ,
औणोः, औोत ; भौणुव . Pres . Ind. Atm. ऊर्युवे
14 3
106 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR . [ $ 273—
$ 273. a P.'to grow ,' & P. to sound ,' and en P. A.'to praise ,' op
tioually prefix to all terminations beginning with consonants, including
य ; observe $ 266. Eg. Pres. Ind. Par. स्तौमि or स्तवीमि, स्तौषि or स्तवीषि ,
स्तौति or स्तवीति ; स्तुवः or स्नुवीवः; 3 Plur. स्तुवन्ति . Pres. Pot. स्तुयाम् or
स्तुवीयाम्. Pres. Imperat. स्तवानि , स्तुहि or स्तुवीहि. स्तोतु or स्तवीतु. Imperf.
अस्तवम्, अस्तौः or अस्तवीः. Pres. Ind. Atm.स्तुवे, स्तुषे or स्तुवीपे. Pres. Pot.
स्तुर्वाय. Pres. Imperat. स्तवै, स्तुष्व or स्तुवीप्व. Imperf. अस्तुवि.
5274. दरिद्रा P. ' to be poor, drops its final आ in weak forms before
vowel-terminations, and substitutes 7 for it in weak forms before con .
sonantal terminations ; e.g. Pres. Ind. दरिद्रामि , दरिद्राति , दरिद्राति ; दरि
द्रिवः : 3 Plur . दरिद्रति. Pres. Pot. दरिद्रियाम्. Pres. Imperat. दरिद्राणि ,
दरिदिहि , दरिद्रातु; 3 Plur. दरिद्रतु. Imperf. अदरिद्राम् , अदरिद्राः , अदरिद्रान् ,
अदरिद्रव ; 3 Plur. अदरिदु :.
§ 275. I P.A. to speak' (used only in the special tenses) prefixes
in strong forms t to consonantal terminations ; e.g. Pres. Ind. Par .
प्रवीनि, ब्रवीषि, ब्रवीति ; ब्रूव : 3 Plur. झुवन्ति. Pres. Pot. याम् . Pres. Im.
perat. अवाणि , ब्रूहि, ब्रवीतु. Impert. अत्रवम् , अब्रवीः, अब्रवीत् । अव
3 Plur. अब्रुवन्. Pres . Ind. Atm. अवे. Pres. Pot. ब्रुवीय. Pres. Imperat. अवे.
Imperf. अवि.
$ 276. PP. ' to wipe,' substitutes Vriddhi instead of Guņa in strong
forms ; Vriddhi is optionally substituted also in weak forms before
vowel -terminations. The final it is treated like before terminations
beginning with त , थ , ५ , and स् . Eg. Pres. Ind. मामि, माक्षि , मार्टि
मृज्वः , मृष्ठः , मृष्टः ; सज्मः मृष्ठ, मृजन्ति or मान्ति. Pres . Pot. मृज्याम् . Pres .
Imperat. मार्जानि , मृड्डि, मार्दुः मार्जाव, मृष्टम् , मृष्टाम् ; मार्जाम , मुष्ट , मजन्तु or
मार्जन्तु. Imperf. अमार्जम , अमाई , अमाई अमृज्व ; 3 Plur. अमृजन or अमार्जन्.
8277. वच् P. ' to speak,' is deficient in the 3 Plur. Pres . Ind. ,
according to others in the whole Plural; according to others all third
persons of the Plur. are wanting. Otherwise it is regular. E.g. Pres. Ind.
वच्मि, वक्षि , वक्ति ; & c. F :.
5278. वश् P. ' to wish,' contracts its radical a to उ in all weak
forms; e.g. Pres. Ind. वश्मि, वक्षि , वष्टि ; उश्वः , उष्ठः , उष्टः ; उइमः , उठ,
उशन्ति . Pres. Pot. उझ्याम् . Pres. Imperat. वशानि, उहि वधु ; वशाव . उष्टम् .
Imperf. अवशम् , अवद , अवद औध, भीष्टम् .
5279. विद P. ' to know,' is conjugated regularly ( cf.5263, Imperi.
3Plur.) ; .. Pres. Ind. वेमि , वेरिस , वेत्ति ; विक्षः : 3 Plur. विदन्ति . Pres. .

Pot. विद्याम्. Pres. Imperat. वेदानि , विद्धि, वेत्तु. Imperf. अवेदम् , अवे: or
अवेत , अवेत् । अविदः 3 Plur. अविदुः. But in the Pres. Ind.. it may
optionally take the Perfect terminations given in 227, col. III.; वेक
 § 285.] CONJUGATION OP VERBS . 107

वेस्थ, वेर : विद,विस्युः, विस्तुः; विम, विद, विदुः. The Pres. Imperat. may
optionally be formed periphrastically by adding the termination 9777 to
विद् ( विदाम् ) and by combining विदाम् with the Pres. Imperat. Par. of
rt. कृ ($ 293) ; e.g.विशंकरवाणि , विशंकुरु, विदांकरोतु: 26.
$ 230. शास् P. ' to command,' is changed to शिष् in weak forms
before consonantal terminations, except in the 2 Sing . Pres. Imperat. ( cf.
8255, d ) ; ... Pres. Ind . शास्मि , शास्सि , शास्ति ; शिष्यः , शिष्ठः , शिष्ट
.

शिष्मः , शिष्ठ, शासति. Pres. Pot. शिष्याम् . Pres. Imperat. शासानि , शाधि ,
शास्तु शासाव . शिष्टम् ; 3 Plur. शासतु. Imperf. भशासम् , अशाः or अद्यात् ,
अशात् ; आशिष्व ; 3 Plur. अशासः.
6
§ 231. T } Å. ' to lie dowa ,' gunates its vowel in all the forms of the
special tenses ; in the 3 Plur. Pres. Ind., Imperat., and Imperi. ris
prefixed to the terminations. E.g. Pres. Ind. शये, शेषे. शेते ; शेवहे ;
3 Plur. शेरते. Pres. Pot शयोय .. Pres. Imperat.. शयै,, शेष्व ; 3 Plur . शेरताम् .
Imperf. अशयि, अशेयाः 3 Plar. अशेरव .
$ 282. Å . to bring forth ,' does not gunate its rowel in strong
forms, but changes it to उर : e.g. Pres. Ind. सुवे, सूषे. Pres. Pot. सुवीय.
Pres. Imperat. सुवै, सूष्व, सूताम्; सुवावहै. Imperf. असवि, भसूया:.
$ 283.67 P. (rarely A.) ' to strike,' drops its final7 in weak forms
before consonantal terininations except those commencing with 7 , ( or
य : in weak forms before vowel -terminations it drops its radical अ , and
changes its ह to घ्. The 2 Sing. Pres. Imperat. Par. is जहि (instead of
हहि) E.g. Pres. Ind. Par. हन्मि, हसि, हन्ति ; हन्वः , हथः, हतः हन्म :, हय ,
प्रन्ति . Pres. Pot. हन्याम्. Pres. Imperat. हनानि, जहि. हन्तु ; हनाव , हतम् :
.

3 Plur. धन्नु . Imperf. महनम् , अहन् , अहन् : अहन्व , अहतम् : 3 Plur. भवन,
(3 Sing. Atm . Pres. Ind. हते ; Pot. प्रीत &c.)

Third Class ( Juhotyadi).

$ 284. P. ' to go,' forms its special strong base इयर , its special
weak base इयू ; .g. Pres. Ind. इयर्मि, इयर्षि, इयात इयवः ; 3 Plur. इयदि .
i

Pres. Pot. इययाम्. Pres. Imperat. इयरागि, इयहि, इयतु: 3 Plur . इयतु.
Imperf. ऐयरम् , ऐयः, ऐयः : ऐयव ; 3 Plur. ऐयरु:. :
$ 285. दा P. A. ' to gire,' and धा P.A. “ to place,' form their special
weak bases दर
y and cut ; the final y of my combines with and to t
and cŲ . Whenever the final y of qy becomes a or , the initial इ
changed to u . The 2 Sing. Pres. Imperat. Par. is देहि (of दा ) and
धेहि (of धा ). E.g. दा ; Pres. Ind . Par. दशमि , ददासि , ददाति ; दहः , हत्या ,
इत्तः : दमः , दस्य , ददति. Pres. Pot. दद्याम् . Pres. Imperat. इसनि, देहि. दातु.
1

Imperf. अश्वाम् ,भदवशः , अरदात्; अद ; 3 Plur. अयुः. Pres . Ind. Atm.

108 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR . [$ 288
दो दरले, दत्ते. Pres. Pot. ददीय. Pres. Imperat. द . दत्स्व . Imperf. अददि
अवस्थाः; 2 Plur. अरबुम् . - धा ; Pres. Ind. Par. दधामिः Du. दमः, धव्यः,
O

धनः; 3 Plur. दवति. Pres. Pot. दध्याम्. Pres. Imperat. स्थानि , धेहि,
धातुः धाव, धत्तर. Imperf. अदधाम ; Plur. अदध्म, अधत्त, अरधुः. Pres.
Ind. Atm. धे , ध , धते 2 Plur. धड़े Pres. Pot. दधीय. Pres. Imperat.
इये, धस्व. Imperf. अधि, अधव्याः, अधत्त; 2 Plur. अधद्धम् .
$ 286. FK P. . 'to cleanse,' fra P. Å. ' to separate,' and pag
P. Å . ' to perrade,' gunate the vowel of the reduplicatire syllable
in all special forms, and do not gunate their radical vowel in strong
forms before vowel -terminations ; e.g. Pres. Ind. Par. नेनेजिम , नेनेक्षि .
नेनेति नेनिमः. Pres. Pot. नेनिन्यान्. Pres. Imperat. नेनिजानि , नेनिधि,
नेनेनु, नेनिजाव. Imperf. अननिजम्, अनेनेक. अनेनेक ; अनेनिज्य; 3 Plur.
अनिः. Pres. Ind. Atm. नेनिजे. Pres. Pot. नेनिजीय. Pres. Imperat.
नेनिजै. Imperf. अनेनिजि .
$ 287. I P.'to fill,' is conjugated regularly like at ; e.g. Pres. Ind.
पिरामि, पिपार्ष, पिपति; पिवः पिपृथः, पिपतः; पिप्रमः, पिपृथ, पिप्रति. But पृ
P. " to fill,' changes its final # in weak forms before vowel-terminations
(except in the 3 Plur. Imperf.) to उर , and before consonantal terminations
to अर (546) ; e.g. Pres. Ind. पिपमि, पिपर्षि, पिपतिः पिपूर्वः, पिपूर्यः, पिपूनः;
सिर्गिशिपुरति. Pres. Pot. पिपूर्याम्. Pres. Imperat. पिपराणि, मिपूर्ति,
सिगर्नु: पिपराव. पिर्तम् ; 3 Plar. पिपुरतु. Imperf. अपिपरम् , अपिपः, अपिपः
भपिपूर्व 8 Plur. अपिपरुः.
8288. भी P. ' to fear,' optionally shortens its radical rowel in
weak forms before consonantal terminations ; e.g. Pres. Ind. fatia;
Du. विभीवः or विभिवः, विभीयः or विनियः, विभीतः or विभितः; 3 Plar.
बिभ्यति . Pres. Pot. विभीयाम or विभियाम् . Pres. Imperat. विभयानि .
विभीहि or रिभिहि. Imperf. भविभयम् , अविभेः; 1 Du. अविभीव or भविनिक
3 Plur. अविभयुः
$ 289. HTÅ. ' to measure,' and ET Å. ' to go.' form their special
bases before consonantal terminations मिमी, जिही, before rowel-termi
nations मिम , जिहः .g. मा . Pres. Ind. मेम, मिमीषे. मिमीते; मिमीवहे , मिमाये.
Pres. Pot. मिमीय. Pres. Imperat. मिमै, मिमीव, मिमीताम्; मिमावहै.
.

Imperf. भमिमि, अमिमीथाः, अमिमीत; 3 Plur. अमिमत . - हा, Pres. Ind. जिहे,
.
-

जिहीषे, जिहोते; जिहीवहे , जिहाये; 3 Plur. जिहते .

$ 290. ET P.‘to abandon,' forms its special weak base before con
sonantal terminations, except in the Pres. Pot ., जही or जहि, before
rowel-terminations and in the Pres. Pot. जहः the ? Sing. Pres.
Imperat. is जहाहि or जहीहि or जहिहि . Eg. Pres. Ind. जहामि , जहासि,
जहाति; जहीवः or जहिवः, जहीयः or जहिथ : 3 Plur. जहति . Pres . Pot.
जह्याम्. Pres. Imperat. जहानि , जहाहि or जहीहि or जहिहि, जहातः जहाव
 8297.] CONJUGATION OF VERBS . 109

जहीतम् or जहितम् : 3 Plur. जहतु . Imperf. अजहाम् : 1 Plur. अजहीव

or अजहिव; 3 Plur. अजहुः
Fifth Class ( Stadt).
$ 291 , P. ' to hear,' substitutes in the special base for ;
eg. Pres. Ind. शृगोमि, शृगोषि, शृणोतिः शृणुवः or शृण्वः &c.
Serenth Class ( Rudhath).
5292. वह P. ' to kill,' forms its special strong base before conso
nantal terminations zoa. before rowel- terminations regularly Ture :
e.g. Pres. Ind. G णेनि, तृणेशि. तृणेटिड, तृण्ड, 3 Plar. ढेहन्ति . Pres.
Pot. ढेह्याम् . Pres. Imperat. तणहानि, वण्ठि, राणेदु. Imperf. अणहम् , भव.
णे , अणेहः अहह 3 Plur . अहन् .
Eighth Class ( Tanádi).
1293. कृ P.A. ' to do ,' forms its special strong base करो, its special
weak base F6; the final 3 of the latter is dropped before terminations
begioning with < or Æ, and in the Pres . Pot. Par. E.g. Pres. Ind. Par.
करोमि, करोषि, करोति कुर्वः कुरुथः कुरुतः; कुर्मः कुरुय , कुर्वन्ति. Pres.
Pot. कुर्याम्. Pres. Imperat. करवागि, कुरु, करोतुः करवाव, कुरुतम्.Imperi.
अकरवम् , अकरोः, अकरोत् ; अकुर्व, अकुरुतम्. Pres. Ind. Atm. कुर्वे, कुरुपे.
Pres. Pot. कुर्वीय, Pres. Imperat. करवै. Imperf. अर्वि, अकुरुया .
Nioth Class (Kryádi).
§ 294. The roots y P. Â. " to sh.ake ,' q P. Â. ' to purify,' & P. Å.
' to cut,' री P. ' to go,' & c., ली P. ' to attain,' प्ली P. ' togo ,' &c., and all 1
।

roots ending in F shorten their radical rowel in the special tenses ; e.g.
पू. Pres. Ind. Par. पुनामि; Atm. पुने . - स्तृ to cover,' Pres. Ind. Par.
स्तृणामि ; Atm. स्तुणे.
5 295. ग्रह P. . ' to seize ,' and ज्या P. ' to grow old ' contract
their radical र and या to a and r respectively; e.g. प्रह, Pres. Ind . Par.
गृह्मामि; Pres. Imperat. गृहानि, गृहाण, गृहातु . - ज्या , Pres. Ind. जिनानि ,
जिनासि, जिनाति & c.
§ 296. AT P. Â. " to know ,' drops its radical nasal ; e.g. Pres. Ind.
Par. 3 Sing. जानाति : Atm. जानीते .
B. - GENERAL TENSES..
Perfect, Aorist, the two Fulures, Conditional, Benediclive.
$ 297. (a) The rules for the formation of the general tenses apply
to all primitive roots, i.e. to all roots of the first nine classes .
(6) Roots ending in ए, ऐ, and ओ are henceforth in every respect
treated as roots ending in 8.
Bhanda kasd Secons Booka Sansarit , pino ,
Jercath Elt

110 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR . [3 298

The intermediate F.
§ 298. In the general tenses, and in the formation of verbal derivatives
generally, terminations beginning with consonants (except u ) are some
times added immediately to the root ; far more frequently the vowel
must be inserted between the root and the termination ; and in the case
of a limited pumber of roots may be inserted optionally. Thus the root
Farę forms its Simple Fut. Berufa bhet-syati, fara cl. 2 to know ' forms
वैदिष्यति ved-i-shyati, and क्लिद् forms क्लेत्स्यति klet-syati or कैदिष्यति
kled -i-shyali; similarly, the same three roots form the Infinitives itat
bhet.tum , afegt red -i -tum , and pH kle:-lum or asiaankled - i- tum . It
is, then, most important to know , after which roots this intermediate
may or should be inserted, and after which roots it ought not to be
inserted, because without such knowledge bardly any tense or verbal
derivative can be formed correctly ; and from this point of view all roots
may be divided into three classes : (a) roots after which the intermediate
ris forbidden (anit * roots); (6) roots after which the intermediate
may optionally be prefixed to terminations beginning with consonants
(optionally anit roots ); and (c) roots after which the intermediate
must be prefixed to terminations beginning with consonants (set
roots ).
(a) The intermediate is forbidden after the following roots (anit
roots ): —
1. All monosyllabic roots ending in romels, except roots ending in 5
or # , and except Ry, Fag; et, eft; . I. 1. ' to mix ,' F, in Par.); 5.
2. The following 100 roots ending in consonantst : ; TT, ,
• It means ' i profixed ;' ani! and set are compounds of a + il and sa + iļ and
mean therefore, the former, ' not having i prefixed ' to the termination, and the
latter, ' with i prefized ' or ' baving i prefixed ' to the termination.
+ These roots ( except * ) are contained in the following momorial rorson
which the student may learn by heart
शक पच् मुच् रिच वच् विच् सिच्पच्छि त्यज निजिर्भजः ।
भन् भुज् भ्रस् मस्जि यज युज् रुज्र विजिर् स्वञ्जि सन् घजः ॥१ ॥
अटु क्षुद खिद् छिट् नदि नदः पप भिद वियतिर्विदः । :
शाद सदी स्वियतिः स्कन्दिहदी क्रुध् क्षुधिबुध्यती ॥२ ॥
बन्धियुधिरुधी राधि न्यथ शुधः साधिसिध्यती ।
मन्य हनापक्षिप् हुपि तप तिपस्तृप्यतिदप्यती ॥३ ॥
लिप लए वप् शप् स्वप् मृपि यभ्रम् लभ् गम् नम् यमो रमिः ।
कुशिशि.देशी १ मा रिश्रु लि विश् सशःकृषिः ॥४ ॥
विषु तु दिष् टुप् पुष्य पिष् विष् शिष् शुभ लिष्यतयो घसिः ।1
वसतिदेह दिन हो नहमिहरु लिह वहिस्तथा ॥ ५ ॥
For 79 and 59 sec (6) 3.
$ 300.) COXJOGATION OF TERBS . 111

रिच , वच , विच् , सिच ; प्रत्यज्ञ, निज , भज , भ . भुज्ञ, भ्रज्ज, मज्ज् , यज ,

युज , रन् , रुज , विज् ' to separate,' सन् , सृज , स्वञ् अद् , क्षुद्, खिद्, छिद्,
.

तुद् , नु , पद् , भिद् , विद् (विद्यते ' to be found, to be.' विन्दति ), शद्, सद्
.
.

स्कन्दू, स्विद्, हा क्रुध , क्षुध , बन्ध ,बुध् (बुध्यते).युध , राध , रुध , व्यध , शुध , साथ ,
सिध (सिध्यति); मन् ( मन्यते ), हन् ; आप , क्षिप् , छुप , तप , तिप् , लिए , लप् , वप् ,
शप , सृप , स्वप ; यम् , रम् , लम् ; क्रम् (in Atm.), गम् , नम् , यम् , रम् ; कुध ,
देश , विश्, दृश , मृश् , रि , रु , लिए, विश् , स्पृश ; कृष , तुष , विष , दुष ,
द्विष , पिष् , पुष् ( पुष्यति ), विष् , शिष् , शुष्, निष्ः घस् , वस् ( वसति
' to dwell') ; दह्. दिह्, दुह्, न, मिह्, रुह् लिङ्, वह
(6) The intermediate ( may optionally be prefixed to terminations
beginning with consonants after the following roots ( optionally anit
roots):
1. धू , सू (सूते and सूयते ), and . स्वृ .
2. तञ्च ( तनक्ति ), श् ; अञ्ज , मृज ; क्लिन , स्यन्द सिध ( सेधति to govern');
क्लप , गुप , वप् ; क्षम् ; अश् ( अभुते ), क्लि अभ , तम् (' to cut'), व गाह्, गृह,
ग्लह्. टह्, तूंह, माह्, वृह, स्तृह्.
3. तृप्, दृप , दुह्, नश् , मुह, रथ , सिह, सुह.
( c) After all other roots the intermediate 5 must be prefised to
terminations beginning with consonants (set roots ).
Note. - Special rules for the insertion of the intermediate y will be
given below .
1. - THE
PERFECT .
C..36
§ 291. The Perfect is formed either by reduplication (Reduplicated
Perfec!) or by means of certain auxiliary verbs ( Periphrastic Perfect).
§ 300. (a) The Reduplicated Perfect is formed
1. Of all monosyllabic roots beginning with consonants, except arg Â
' to cough,', and दय् A. ' to pity ;'
2. Of all monosyllabic roots beginning with st or 511, except at Å.
' to go,' and आस् Å . ' to sit ;'
6

3. of all monosyllabic roots beginning with इ, उ, or ऋ , provided

these rowels are prosodially short ($ 8), and of ऊर्गु P.A. ' to corer .'
(6) The Periphrastic Perfect is formed Kuri1

1. Of all roots which contain more than one syllable, except in

(a, 3) ; ag . of चकास् ;
2. Of all roots which commence with a rowel that is prosodially
long, except and आ, and of अय् and आस् (a, 2 ) ; ..g. of इन्ध , उन् ,
ईड् , उह , ईक्ष , ए y & c.
112 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR . [$ 301

3. Of काम् and दय् (a, 1) .

( c) Both Perfects may optionally be formed
1. OfTc P.‘to burn,' Pay P. ' to know ,' sro P.‘to wake,' aftur P.
to be poor ;'
2. Ofaff P.'to fear,' , P. Â. " to bear,' P. ' to sacrifice , and it
P. ' to be ashamed ;' these four roots are reduplicated even in the Peri.
phrastic Perfect, and they then take the same reduplicative syllable
which they take in the Present tense. ( $ 235, 3 ; rt. I, Red . Perf. aTTIT,
but Periph. Perf. fortita ).
( a .) - The Reduplicated Perfect.
$ 301. The base is formed by reduplication of the root.
( a ) Roots beginning with consonants are reduplicated according to
the rules laid down in $ 230, &c. ; final , and , being by $ 2976
treated as 87 , are in the reduplicative syllable represented by 97; e.g.
Perf. Base TS 3 Plur. P. :
rt. Vi
rt. छिदः 9) perovę; . Fareggio
91 चकम् । 3 Sing. A. a .
rt . कम्
चक्रम् : 3 Plur. P. .
rt. ; 9

95 चस्कन्द; 99 चस्कन्दु:
rt . स्कन्द
rt. $ ; चकृ : 1 Plur. P. 57 .
rt. सिचा FANTE (S 232) ; 3 Plur. P. fafor .
sto FT ; » 9) (S 232) ; 1 Plur. P. gen .
.

rt. गै ; जगा ; 2 Sing. P. TRY .

(6 ) When roots begin with < or 3, these rowels are doubled ; sub
sequently 7+ and 3 + 3 unite to { and 5 ; but when the radical ç and
I are changed to any vowel not homogeneous (§ 9) with them, the first
and are changed to go and 57 respectively ; e.g.
rt. T ; Perf. B. 7 + ; 3 Pl. P.5 + 79: = fg: ; 3 Sg. P. (+4 = rea.
उ + उख् ॥ " उ + उखुःखुः। 90 उ + ओख - उबोख.
rt . उख्ः
+7 i 95 » T + 79 : = f4 ; 19 " + आय = इयाय .
rt . fi
( ) Initial at remains unchanged ; initial y , when prosodially short,
is changed to af ; e...
rt. 379; Perf. Base 3979; 3 Plur. P. 475 :.
rt. STE : आस्, " " " आमा.
( d) To roots beginning with 37, prosodially long, and to roots
beginning with the syllable 377-7 is prefixed ; c.g.
 COXJCGATION OF VERBS . · 113
§ 304. )
rt. अन्: Perf. Base आनन् ।; 3 Plur. P. आनः.
rt. ऋज् आनृज् 3 Sing. A. आनृजे.
§ 302. Strong and weak forms: The base of the Redupl. Perf. bas
often two forms, a strong base and a weak base . The strong base is
used in the strong forms, the weak basc in the wenk forms. Strong
forms are the three persons of the Singular in Parasmai.; the remain
ing forms of the Parasmai. and all the forms of the Âtmane, are weak .
$ 303. The weak base generally does not differ from the base formed
by $ 301. The strong base is formed from it thus :
( a ) For penultimate (prosodially short) इ, उ , and a Guna ( ए , ओ ,
and 376 ) is substituted ; e.g.
rt . भिद् ; Weak B. विभिन् ; Strong B. विभेद् 3 Sing. P. विभेद.
rt . तुद 3
तुतुद तुतोद् नुतोद.
. चकृष्
चकर्षः ॥ 95चकर्ष.
rt. कृष्
But rt. निन्द् . only Perf. Base निनिन्, , निनिन्द .
rt. मील मिमील ; " 11 , मिमील .
(B) For final इ , ई, उ, ऊ, क , ऋ, Gupa or Vriddhi is substituted in the
1 Sing ., only Guna in the 2 Sing ., and only Vriddhi in the 3 Sing. Par.; e.g.
rt . ft ; Weak base fait ; Strong base fra or fat; 1 Sing .
Par. निनय or निनाय ; 2 Sing. निनेय or निनयिय ; 3 Sing.
निनाय .
rt. दु ; Weak base दुद्रुः Strong base दुद्रो दुद्रौ; 1 Sing. Par.
or

दुद्रव or दुद्राव ; 2 Sing:. तुद्रोथ :; 3 Sing. दुद्राव.

rt. कृ ; Weak base चकृ ; Strong base चकर or चकार : 111Sing.
Par. चकर or चकार 2 Sing. चकर्य ; 3 Sing. चकार .
(c) Penultimate (prosodially short) 37 is in the 1 Sing. Par. option
ally lengthened ; in the 2 Sing. it remains unchanged ; in the 3 Sing.it
must be lengthened ; e.g.
rt. पच् ; l Sing. Par. पपच or पपाच ; 2 Sing. पपक्थ (or पेचिय,
$ 317) ; 3 Sing. पपाच .
But rt. बन्ध् ; 1 Sing. Par. बबन्ध ; 2 Simg. बबन्छ or बबन्धिय ;
3 Sing. बबन्ध .
8304. Personal terminations and intermediates : The reduplicated
(strong or weak ) base takes the personal terminations given in col. III.
of $ 227. To the consonantal terminations (थ, व, म, से, वहे, महे, and )
the intermedinte į must be prefised , except in the comparatively rare
cases where s is absolutely forbidden ($ 305), or only optionally permitted
(6306 ). E..
15
114 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR , [$ 305

rt. भिंद् । Str. B. विभेद, 2 Sing. P.विभेदिय ; W. B. बिभिद्, 1 Plur.P. विनिदिम.

rt . तुद तुतोद्, " , तुतोदिय; , , तुतुद, 99 तुनुदिम.
rt. कृष चकर्ष, चकर्षिय 3 " चकृष् , चकृषिम.
rt. निन्द, निनिन्दिथ, निनिन्दिम ; rt. मील , मिमीलिथ, मिमीलिम .
§ 305. (a) 7 is never prefixed to the consopantal terminntions when
they are added to the eight roots :
' to do' (except when it is changed to F ; see $ 487, 1), y'to bear ,'
6
7 ' to choose,' a ' to go,' g ' to run,' x'to bear,' q ' to praise ,' and &
• to flow ;' e.g.
rt. ; Weak B. चकृ ; 1 Pl. P. चकम ; Strong B. चकर; 2 Sg. चकर्य. .

rt . " बुद्धः ॥ " " बुद्रुमः छुद्रो; दुद्रोथ.

(But of संस्कृ 2 Sing. P. संचस्करिय . वृ likewise forms the 2 Sing.
Par. in classical Sanskrit ववरिथ. )
(6) Besides, T is never prefixed to the termination y after monosyl
labic roots ending in F , except to go,' and ef'to sound ;' e.g.
rt. म्मू 2 Sing. P. सस्मर्य.
§ 306. ( a) y may optionally be prefixed to the consonantal termina
tions when they are added to the optionally -anit roots enumerated in
8298,6, 2 and 33; e.g.
rt. सिध; Weak B. सिषिध 1 Plur. P. सिषिम or सिषिधिम ; Strong
B. सिषेध ; 2 Sing. P. सिषेद्ध or सिषेधिथ.
(B) Besides, may optionally be prefixed to the termination थ , when
it is added to ani! roots ending in rowels (except + ), or to anit roots
which contain the vowel + ($ 298, a ); r is optionally prefixed to y also
after Fy and e.g.
rt . नी ; Strong B. निने ; 2 Sing. P. निनेथ or निनयिय .
rt . हन ; " जघन् ; जघन्थ or जपनिय .
rt. स्थ 97 सस्वा सस्वर्थ or सस्वरिय .
Exception : अद् to eat,' and ध्ये ' to corer ,' must insert r before थ ;
2 Sing. P. आदिथ , विष्ययिथ.
§ 307. Rules of Sandhi :
Before rowel- terminations (including here the consonantal terminations
when y is prefised to them ) final vowels of the reduplicated base undergo
the following changes:
( c) sand , when preceded by one consonant , are changed to ai
when preceded by more ccnsonants, to 52 ; e.g.
 CONJUGATION OF VERBS . 115
$ 309.]
rt. चि ; Weak B. चिचि : 2 Plur. P. चिच्य ; 1Pler. P. चियिम .
rt . नी ; निनी ; " निन्य ; " निन्यिम .
rt . क्षि i: चिक्षि " चिक्षिय विक्षियिम.
rt. प्री ; पिप्री ; " पिप्रिय ; " पिप्रियिम .
(6) 3 and 5 are always changed to JF ; e.g.
rt. तु ; Weak B. दुदु ; 2 Plur . P. दुनुव ; 1 Plur. P. दुदुविम.
rt . पू . " " प्पू: " पुपुविम.
पपुवः ,.

( c) F , when preceded by one consonant, is changed to s ; when

preceded by more consonants, to अर ; e.g.
rt. धृ ; Weak B. द ; 2 Plur. P. दभ्रः 1 Plur. P. दधिम.
rt . स्मृ सस्मः ॥ 99 सस्मर ; सस्मरिम .
(IVhen कृ by $ 487, 8, is changed to स्कृ, it is in the Redupl. Peri.
treated like a root commencing with two cousonants ; e.g. 2 Plur. Par.
संचस्कर ,; 1 Plur. Par. संचस्करिम .)
( d) ऋ is changed to अर् ; optionally to अर् or r in .. and शु; e.g.

rt. कृ ; Weak B. चक ; 2 Plur . P. चकर ; 1 Plur. P. चकरिम.

rt. ॥ ददर or दद्र , 95 ददारिम or दद्रिम.
ह. दहा
3)

(e) ए, ऐ , ओ, and औ, substituted for final इ, ई, उ, and i , are changed

to अय, आय, अन्, and आव , respectively ; e.g.
• rt. नी ; Strong B. निने or निनै 1 Sing. P. निनय or निनाव .
rt . स्तु तुष्टो or तुष्टी ", तुष्टव or तुष्टाव.
5 308. The rules which regulate the euphonic changes which take
place when final consonants of the reduplicated base come in contact with
initial letters of terminations apply equally to the finals of roots and to
the initial letters of terminations in other general tenses and in the forma
tion of words generally . They are therefore, in order to make them more
widely applicable, and to save repetition, giren bere somewhat more fully
than would have been necessary for the Reduplicated Perfect. With some
of these rules the student has been made acquainted in 5 255.
§ 309. When final consonants of roots mect with initial letters of ter.
minations the rules given in $$ 50-59 must be observed. Moreover
(a) Final L and c are dropped before all initial consonants except
य / t.g.
पूय् + त = पूत ; तु + न = तूर्ण ($$ 46; 58).
(6) Final F is changed to 7 before all initial consonants except q and
स् ; c.g.
जगम् + वस् = जगन्वस् ; गम् + तुम् = गन्तुम् ; चक्षम् + ud = चक्षन्थे ।
चक्षम् + बहे = चक्षण्वहे (658.)
116 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR, [$ 310

$ 310. Before initial -

(a) Final च् , ५. छ , ज्, ज, , , भ, and & are changed to क
(observe $ 53), after which is changed to C ( $ 59 ); the final of T ,
however, is changed to ; c.g.
पच् + स्यति = पक्ष्यति ; तश् + स्यति व्रक्ष्यति ; आनश् + से आन ।
जगाह् + से = जपाक्षे नह + स्यति = नस्थति.
( 5 ) Final Fand are changed to Anusrâra ; e.g.
चशम् + से = चक्षसे ; मन् + स्वते = मस्यते.
( c) l'inal # is changed to ; e.g.
वस् + स्यतिवत्स्यति ; अवास् + सीत् = अवारसीन .
§ 311. Before an initial surd dental ( a ore )
( a) Final 2, F (except of the roots mentioned under 6 ), and the
final5 of 5 are changed to a; e g.
मुच् + तमुक्त ; पपच +थपपक्थ ; युज् + त - युक्त ; तत्यज + 2 %
fr
तत्यक्थ. !

( ) Final श्, छ, , , , the final r of भ्राज्, मृज्, यज, राज, सूज , 13 ) ,

and the final 5 of 5 are changed to q , after which the initial dental
is changed to the corresponding lingual (8 56) ; e.g. arists
वत्र +थवव्रष्ठ ; दृश् + त = दृष्टः दद्रम् + थ = द्रष्ठ ; आन + थ
भानष्ठ ; सृज् + त सृष्ट ; सस्रज +थसबष्ठ .
(c) Final 7 of roots beginning with a combines with initial 7 or to
ग्ध ; g.
वह + त = दग्धः दद + थ = ददग्ध.
( a) Final ह of other roots combines with initial oor u to , before
which (short) 87, , and 3 are lengthened, except in वह apd सह . tlie
of which is changed to sit; e.g.
लिह + त = लीढ ; वव t + य = ववढे ; उवह् + य = उवोट ; वह + तुम् = वोदुम्,
( e) The final of g , , fag, and Ty may follow either ( c) or ( d) ;
the final of 7 combines with it or up to Ti e.g.
द्रोह + तुम् = द्रोग्धम् or द्रोदुम् ; मुह + त = मुग्ध or मूट ; नह +तना
नन + = ननद्ध.
§ 312. Before initial up
(u) The finals mentioned in § 311 (a) are changed to 7, those men
tioned in 9 311 ( 6) to 3 ; after the latter, 4 is changed to e.g.
अमुच् + ध्वम् = अमुग्धम् ।
आनश + id = आनड्डे.
 COXJCGATION OF VERBS . 117
§ 314.)
( 6) Final &ह combines with the ध of as it combines with an initial
surd dental ( 311 c,, d , e) ; but here § 53 must be obserred ; c.9 .
अह् + यम् = अयुग्धम् ।
जगाह् + = जपाडे.
8 313. The initial 5 of the termination et of the e Plur. Pert. Atm.
(a) must be changed to { when it is preceded by (radical) 3 or
क ; ..
rt. स्तु ; तुष्टु + = तुष्टुडे
rt. कृ ; चकृ + वेचकृढ़े .
(6) may optionally be changed to when the intermediate r is
prefixed to it, prorided this &इ be preceded by a semirowel or ; e.g.
rt. लू; लुलू + इवे (by $ 307 8) = लुलुक् + इमेलुलुविध्ये or ललुविढे. .

Paradigme:
5 314. The Reduplicated Perfect of भिद् P. A. 'to split.' तुद् P.A.
' tc strike;' निन्द् P. ' to blame,' क्रम् P. A. 'to go,' अस् P.A. ' to be' (only
used as an auxiliary verb), अ P. ' to anoint,' इष् P. ' to wish,' ऋच.
' to praise,' ft P. Â . ' to lead,' * P. Â. " to buy,' I P. Å ' to join.'
स्तु P. A. 'to praise,' कृ P. A. 'to do,' F A. ' to die ' ( which forms the
Redupl. Perf. in Par ), स्मृ P. ' to remember ,' कृ P. AÅ . to
' scatter :.
1. Rt. भिद्. 2. Rt. तुइ .
Strong B. बिभेद्. Strong B. तुतोद.
Weak B. विभिद्. Weak B. तुतुद्.
Par. Atm . Par . Atm.
1.बिभेद बिभिदे तुतोद तुतुदे
. ng

2. विभेदिथ
Si

बिभिदिषे नुतोदिथ तुनुदिषे

3. विभेद विभिदे तुतोद तुतुदे
1.बिभिदिव बिभिदिवहे नुतुदिव तुनुदिवहे
Dual

2. विभिदथुः बिभिदाये
.

तुतुदथुः तुतुदाये
3. विभिदतुः बिभिदाते तुतुदतुः तुतुदाते
1.विभिदिम बिभिदिमहे तुतुदिम तुतुदिमहे
.Plar

2.बिभिद विभिदिध्वे तुतुद नुतुदिध्वे

3. विभिदुः विभिदिरे तुतुदुः तुतुदिरे ।
 118 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR . IS 314–

3. Rt. निन्द्. 4. Rt. क्रम. 5. Rt. अस् .

Perf. B. निनिन्द्. S. B. चक्रम् or चक्राम्. Perf. B. आस्.
W..B. चक्रम् .
Par. Par. Atm. Par . Atm.
1.निनिन्द चक्राम चक्रमे आस आसे
or चक्रम
.Sing

2.निनिन्दिथ चक्रमिथ चक्रमिषे आसिथ आसिषे

.
3.निनिन्द चक्राम चक्रमे आस आसे
1.निनिन्दिव चक्रमिय चक्रमिवहे आसिव आसिवहे
Dual

2.निनिन्दथुः चक्रमथुः चक्रमाथे आसथः आसाथे

.

3.निनिन्दतुः चक्रमतुः चक्रमाते आसतुः आसाते

1. निनिन्दिम चक्रमिम चक्रभिमहे आसिम आसिमहे
Plur

2.निनिन्द चक्रम चक्रमिध्ये आस आसिवे

.

3.निनिन्दुः चक्रमुः चक्रमिरे आमः आसिरे

6. Rt. अन्. 7. Rt. इष्. 8. Rt. ऋच. Q. Rt. नी.
Perf. B. आनन्. S. B. इयेष. S. B. आनर्च. S. B. निने or निन.
W.B. ईष्. W.B. आनृच् . W. B. निनी.
Par. Par . Par. Par . Atm.
( 1.आनच इयेष आनर्च निनाय निन्ये
or निनय
. g
Sin

2. आननिथ इयेपिथ आनर्चिथ निनयिथ निन्यिषे

or आनङ्क्थ or निनेथ
(3. आनञ्ज इयेष आनर्च निनाय निन्ये
1. आनन्निव ईषिव आनृचिव निन्यिव निन्यिवहे
Dual

orआनङ्ग्व
.

2. आननथुः ईषथुः आनृचथुः निन्यथुः निन्याथे

3. आनञ्जतुः ईषतुः आनृचतुः निन्यतुः निन्याते
 § 31 l.) CONJUGATION OF VERBS . 119

(1.आनश्चिम ईषिम आनृचिम निन्यिम निन्यिमहे

Plur

or आनज्म
.

2. आनञ्ज ईष आनृच निन्य निन्यिध्वे or द्वे

( 3. आनन् ः ईषुः आनृचुः निन्युः निन्यिरे
10. Rt. क्री. 0
11. Rt. यु .
Strong B. चिक्रे orचिकै . Strong B. युयो or युयौ. Mik
Weak B. चिक्री. Weak B. युयु .

Par. Atm. Par. Atm.

1.चिक्राय or चिक्रय चिक्रिये युयावorयुयवयुयुवे
. ng

युयुविषे
Si

2.चिक्रयिथ or चिक्रेथ चिक्रियिषे युयविथ

3.चिक्राय चिक्रिये युयाव युयुवे
1. चिक्रियिव चिक्रियिवहे युयुविव युयुविवहे
Dual

2. चिक्रियथुः चिक्रियाथे ययुवथुः युयुवाथे

.

3.चिक्रियतुः चिक्रियाते युयुवतुः युयुवाते

1.चिक्रियिम चिक्रियिमहे युयुविम युयुविमहे
.Plur

2.चिक्रिय चिक्रियिध्वे or द्वे युयुव युयुविध्वे or ढे

3. चिक्रियुः चिक्रियिरे युयुवुः युयुविरे
12. Rt. स्तु. 13. Rt. कृ.00)
Strong B. तुष्टो or तुष्टी. Strong B. चकर् or चकार .
Weak B. तुटु. Weak B. चकृ .

Par. Atm . Par. Atm.

1. तुष्टाव or तुष्टव तुष्टुवे चकार or चकर चक्र

. ng

चकृष
Si

2. तुष्टोथ तुटुषे चकर्थ

3. तुष्टाव तुष्टुवे चकार . चके
 120 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR . [ $ 315—

तुष्टुवहे चकृव चकृवहे

Dual

1.तुष्टुव
..

2.तुष्टुवथुः तुष्टुवाथे चक्रथुः चक्राथे

3. तुष्टुवतुः तुष्टुवाते चक्रतुः चक्राते
.तुष्टुम तुष्टुमहे चकृम चकृमहे
2.तुष्टुव तुष्टुडे चक्र चकृढे
( 3.तुष्टुवुः तुष्टुविरे चक्रुः चक्रिरे
14. Rt. मृ. 15. Rt. स्मृ. 16. Rt. कृ. Acaller
Strong B. FTTT Strong B. HEHT Strong B. चकर
or ममार्. or सस्मार . or चकार.
Weak B. ममृ. Weak B. सस्मृ . Weak B. 75: scatter
Par . Par. Par .. Atm.
1.ममार ममर सस्मार or सस्मर चकार or चकर चकरे
. .ng

2. ममर्य
Si

सस्मर्थ चकरिथ चकरिषे

3.ममार सस्मार चकार चकरे
1.मम्रिव सस्मरिव चकरिव चकरिवहे
Dual

चकराये
..

2 मम्रयुः सस्मरथुः चकरथः

3.मम्रतुः सस्मरतुः चकरतुः चकराते
'1. मम्रिम सस्मरिम चकरिम चकरिमहे
Plur

2. मन सस्मर चकर चकरिवे or

.

( 3. मनुः सस्मरः चकर चकरिरे

The Reduplicated Perfect of Rools the Reduplicated Base of which is
weakened in the sceak forms.
5315. Roots in भा , ( ए. ऐ, and भो , cf. $ 297,0 ) drop their final
rowel in all weak forms, and before the termination of the 2 Sing. Par .,
when it has the intermediater prefixed to it. In the land 3 Sing. Par.
the final radical sf combines with the termination 3 to sit. E.g. P. A.
' to gire, ' A P. to sing;'
 CONJUGATION OF VERB8 . 121
§ 317. )
17 Rt. दा 18 गै.
Strong B. ददा जगा .

Weak B. दद् जग .
Par . Atm. Par.
1. ददौ ददे जगी
.Sing

2. ददाथ or ददिथ ददिषे जगाथ or जगिय

3. ददौ ददे जगी
1. ददिव ददिवहे जगिव
Dual

2. ददथुः ददाथे
.

जगयुः
13. ददतुः ददाते जगतुः
1. ददिम ददिमहे जागम
.Plur

2. दद ददिध्वे जग

. ददुः
13. ददिरे जगुः
ia 5316. The roots गम् ' to go,' हन् ' to strike,' जन् ' to be born,' खन्
' to dig,' and घस् ' to eat ' drop their radical rowel in weak forms only:
the ह of हन् is changed to L in all reduplicated forms. E.g. rt. गम् ,
Strong B. जगम् or जगाम् , Weak B. जगम् ।
Par. Atm.
Sing. Dual. Plur. Sing. Dual. Plur.

1. जगाम or जगम जग्मिव जग्मिम जग्मे जग्मिवहे जग्मिमहे

2. जगन्थ or जगमिथ जग्मथुः जग्म जग्मिषे जग्माथे जाग्मध्वे
3. जगाम जग्मतुः जग्मुः जग्मे जग्माते जग्मिरे
Perf. Par. of हन् जघान or जघन , जघन्य or जपनिथ, जघान ; जानिय & c.
Perf. Atm. of जन् = जने; Perf. Par. of घम् = जघास or जघस, जभिव ,
जक्षिम &c.
§ 317. Roots which contain the vowel 3 between two simple radical
consonants, and which do not begin with a guttural, nor with an aspirate
letter, nor with 7, instead of taking reduplication, change their radical
16 s
.
122 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR . [ $ 318—

vowel to g in all weak forms, and before the termination of the 2 Sing.
Par., when it has the intermediate a prefixed to it. Eg. rt. पच् P.A..
' to cook, ' Strong B. पपच or पपाच , Weak B. पेच,

Par. Atm..

Sing . Dual. Plur . Sing. Dual.. Plur.

1. पपाच or पपच पेचिव पेचिम पेचे पेचिवहे पेचिमहे

2. पपक्थ or पेचिथ पेचथुः पेच पेचिषे पेचाथे पेचिध्वे
3. पपाच पेचतुः पेचुः पेचे पेचाते पेचिरे
Perf. Par. of पत् = पपात or पपत, पेतिथ ( only ), पपात ; पेतिव & c .
5318. (a) The roots वा A. ' to be ashamed ,' फल P. ' to burst,' भञ्
P. Â. " to share.' I P. •to-cross'( by $ 303 6 and § 307 d changeable to
a in the 2 Sing. and in weak forms ) and the in the sense of .to injure '
likewise follows317 ; e.g.
1. भज् ; 3 Sing. Par. बभाज, Du. भेजतुः, Plur. भेजुः; 3 Sing. Atm. भेजे .
rt. त : 3 Sing. ततार, Du. तेरतुः, Plur. तेरुः.
(8) The roots वस् P. ' to tremble, ' भ्रम् P. ' to roam,' स्यम् P. ' to
sound,' 777 P. ' to sound ', P. ' to grow old ,' u Â."to shine,'
राज् P.A. ' to shine'; अन्य P. ' to tie,' and दम्भ P. ' to deceive ' follow
5317 optionally. अन्य and दम्भ , when they follows 317, drop their
nasal. E.g.
rt. बस् तवास , तत्वसतुः or वेसतुः, तवसः or वेस:
rt . जा जजार जजरतुः or जेरतुः, जजरुः or जेरु
rt . राज रराज , रराजतुः or रेजतु , रराजुः or रेजुम
rt . ग्रन्थ जमन्या जगन्यतुः or प्रेयतुः, जमन्युः or प्रेयुः.
( c) शस् P. ' to strike ' forms its Perfect ( against $ 317 ) according to
the general rule ; e.g.
3 Sing. शशास , Du. शशसतुः, Plur. शशसुः..
5319. ( a ) The roots वच् ' to speak,' व ' to say,' वर ' to sow, ' वर ..
' to wish,' वस ' to dwell,' and वह ' to carry' substitute उ for the redu
plicative syllable व ( e.g. वच् , reduplicated उपच ); in the weak forms
( but not in 2 Sing. Par .) they further substitute उ also for the radical
, and contract the reduplicative 3 and the radical 3 to 5 ( 3 + 19 =
क ). E.. rt. व P.A., Strong B. उवच or उवाच, Weak B. अच :
 CONJUGATION OF VERBS . 123
5322.]
Par . Atm.
Dual. Plur. Sing . Dual. Plur .
Sing .
1. उवाच or उवच ऊचिव ऊचिम ऊचे ऊचिवहे उचिमहे
2. उवक्थ or उवचिथ ऊचथुः ऊच ऊचिषे ऊचाथे ऊचिध्वे
3. उवाच ऊचतुः ऊचुः ऊचे ऊचाते ऊचिरे
Perf. Par. of वह = उवाह or उवह , उवोट (8311, d) or उवहिथ, उवाहा
-

अहिव &c.; Atm. ऊहे &c.

( 8 ) Similarly यज् ' to sacrifice ' forms its strong bose इयज् or इयात्र
and its weak base ईज ; e.g. Par. इयाज or इयज, इयष्ठ or इयजिथ, इयाज :
ईजिव & c.
§ 320. ( a) The roots 627 P. ' to surround ,' py P. ' to strike,' sen
P.‘to grow old,' and FT9 P. ' to sleep ' substitute in weak forms
and 3 for 7 or at and a respectively, and they have the same rowels
in the reduplicative syllable.of the whole of the Perfect ; e.g.
rt. व्यध ; विव्याध, विविधतुः, विविधुः।
rt. स्वप् ; सुष्वाप, सुषुपतुः, सुषपुः ( 5232 );
rt. ज्या ; Sing. जिज्यो, जिज्याय or जिज्यिय, जिग्यो; Du. जिज्यिव .
(6 ) 46 P. Â. ' to seize ' substitutes in weak forms # for t; e.g.
जमाह , जगृहतः, जगृहः.
Irregular Reduplicated Perfects.
$ 321. भू P. A. ' to be' forms its Reduplicated Perfect thus :
Par. Atm.
Sing. Dual. Plur. Sing. Dual. Plur.

1. बभूव बभूविव बभूविम बभूवे बभूविवहे वभूविमहे

2. बभूविथ बभूवथुः बभूव. बभूविषे बभूवाथे बभूविध्वे or ?
3. वभूव बभूवतुः बभूवुः बभूवे बभूवाते बभूविरे
5 322. (a) द्युत् A. ' to shine ' and व्यय A. ' to suffer ' take in the
reduplicatire syllable the vowel se.g. 3 Sing. विद्युते, विव्यये.
(6) Svät  . ' to pervade ' forms its Perfect base strast ; e.g. 3 Sing.
आनथे ; 2 Sing. आनशिषे or आनक्षे (6 306 a); &c.
(c) + P. ' to go ' and ऋछ P. ' to go ' form their Perfect bases भार
and आनई respectively ; e.g. rt. *, Sing. आर, आरिथ, आर ; 3 Plur. भारु ,
rt. छ , 3 Sing. आनर्छ; Du. आनई तुः ; Plur. आनई .
124 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR .
[ § 328–
( P P. A. "to conquer ' and R P. to throw'substitute T and
respectively for their radical consonant; P P. & . ' to gather' optionally
substitutes . E.g. Pot, Perf. B. FEFT; 3 Sing. Par. Fotora, Atm.
जिग्ये . - हि, Perf. B. जिपि 3 Sing. जिघाय, Plur. जिप्यु:: - चि , Perf. B.
चिचि or चिकि ; 3 Sing. Par. चिचाय or चिकाय, Atm. चिच्ये or चिक्ये.
§ 323. to be crooked ' and certain other roots of the sixth
( tudådi) class retain their radical vowel unchanged in the 2 Sing. Par.
and optionally in the l Sing. Par., e.g. धुकोट or चुकुट , चकुटिय, चुकोट. The
same roots retain their vowel unchanged also in other tenses which
usually require the radical vowel to be gunated.
§ 324. P. ' to see ' and P. to emit ' form the 2 Sing.
बदर्शिय or दद्रष्ठ, सर्जिय or सम्रष्ठ; otherwise they are regular ; eg. 1 Sing:
ददर्श, Du. ददृशिव, & c.
§ 325. (a) cara Å . to grow ,' and a P. Â. " to call' form their Per
fects from f and respectively ; P P. to swell ' optionally forms its
Perfect from Ę: È.g. 22 , 3 Sing.face- , 3 Sing. Par. JET "; Âtm .
जुहवे . - धि , 3 Sing. शिवाय or गुचाव.
(6 ) 59 P. Å . ' to cover ' forms the strong base Faroera, and the weak
base fait ; e.g. Par. Pacar or free, foury (8 306 ), fair , faites & c .
Atm. विन्ये.
( c) P. A. ' to weave ' is regular ; or forms its strong base IT .
and its weak base जय or अद . E.. 3 Sing. Par. वो or उवाय; 3 Du.
ववतुः or जयतुः or अवतुः.
§ 326. (a) FTEÅ. " to embrace ' optionally drops its nasal ; e.g.
3 Sing , सस्वखे or सस्वजे.
() Å. " to guard ’ forms its Perfect base fatit ; c.g. 3 Sing. Art.
$ 327. Of the Perfect of STE ' to say only the following forms of
the Parasmai. are in use :
Sing. Dual. Plur..
2. BTC आहथुः:
3. STIE STIES : आहः
All these forms conrey the sense of a Present tense ( 'he says' & c. )
and are considered as optional substitutes for the corresponding forms of
the Present tense of rt. ( $ 275 ).
6.- The Periphrastic Perfect .
$ 328. The Periphrastic Perfect is formed by affixing MTR to the
root and by adding to the base formed in this manner the Redupl. Perl,
 $ 330.) CONJUGATION OF VERBS . 125

Parasmai. or Atmane. of ' to do ' ( 8314, 13 ), or the Redupl.

Perfect Parasmai. of अस् ' to be ' ( 83145 ) or of भू ' to be ' ( $ 321 ).
The Red . Perf. Parasmai, of is employed after verbs which are con .
jugated in the Parasmaipada, the Red. Perf. Atmane. of after verbs
which are conjugated in the Atmanepada. The Perf. Par. of 97 # and
भू is used both after Parasmai. and after Atmanepada verbs. E.g.
उन्द् P. ' to moisten ,' 3 Sing. उन्दांचकार, or उन्दामास,orउन्दांबभूव .
PU Å. ' to grow ,' 8 Sing. एधांचक्रे, or एधामास, orएधांवभूव.
§ 329. A penultimate ( prosodially short ) vowel or a final vowel is
gunated before आम् , except in विद् ' to know ' (63000); e.g. भोषांचकार
( or उपोष ), जागरांचकार ( or जजागार ), विभयांचकार ( or विभाय ), विभरांच
कार ( or बभार ); but विदांचकार ( or विवेद ).
Paradigms :
5 330. The Periphrastic Perfect of उन्द P. ' to moisten ,' and ot
भास् A.'to site
Parasmai.

1. उन्दांचकार or ° चकर or उन्दामास or उन्दांवभूव

. ng
Si

2. उन्दांचकर्य उन्दामासिथ उन्दांवभूविथ

3. उन्दांचकार उन्दामास उन्दांबभूव
1. उन्दांचकृत उन्दामासिव उन्दांबभूविव
Dual

2. उन्दांचक्रयुः उन्दांवभूवथुः
.

उन्दामासथुः
3. उन्दांचक्रतुः उन्दामासतुः उन्दांबभूवतुः
1. उन्दांचकृम उन्दामासिम उन्दांवभूविम
.Plur

2. उन्दांचक्र उन्दामास उन्दांवभूव

3. उन्दांचक्रुः उन्दामासुः उन्दांबभूवुः
Atmane.

1. आसांचक्रे or आसामास or आसांबभूव

.Sing

2. आसांचकृषे आसामासिथ आसांबभूविष

3. आसांचके आसामास भासांबभूव
 126 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR . [ $ 331—

1. आसांचकृवहे or आसामासिव or आसांबभूविव

2. आसांचक्राथे आसामासथुः आसांबभूवयुः
13. आसांचक्राते आसामासतुः आसांबभूवतुः
1. आसांचकृमहे आसामासिम आसांबभूविम
Plur

2. आसांचकृढे आसामास आसांबभूव

.

13. आसांचक्रिरे आसामासुः आसांबभूवुः

2. - THE AORIST .
41 $ 331. ( a) The common characteristic of all Aorists is the augment
भ , prefixed to the root (6229) .
(0) The personal terminations are either added immediately to the
root or to a base formed from the root by the addition of 97 ( Radical
Aorist ), or a Sibilant is prefired to them before they are added to the
root ( Sibilant- Aorist ). There are three varieties of the Radical
Aorist (Forms I. , II., and III.) and four varieties of the Sibilant- Aorist
( Forms IV ., V., VI., and VII.)
8332. A few general remarks may help the student to master the
special rules, to be given below, according to which a root must take
one or another of the seven forms of the Aorist :

॥ Blıform1., sitforThe)anięandmostroots,
general and important forms are Form IV. ( in sam ,
Form V. ( in işham , iḥ, it ). Porm IV. is the common
and Form V. the common form for seg roots ( $ 298).
Optionally -anit roots would of course take either form.
। 2. Exceptions: ( a) Roots ending in आ ( ए, ऐ, and ओ ) and a fer
other anit roots, take Form VI . ( in sisham, sth , sit ). As this
form is used only in Parasmai., the same roots will take Form IV., the
ordinary form for anit roots, in Atmane.
(6 ) Anit roots ending in a sibilant or X, preceded by 5, 7 , ore,
take Form VII. (in sam, sah , sat) both in Parasmai. and Atmane.
3. Exception to 2 (a): Eleven roots, specially to be enumerated, which
according to 2 (a) would take Form VI., and the se! root , which should
take Form V., take Form I. (in am , h, t). As this form too is used only
in Parasmai., the same roots will in Âtmane. take Forms IV. or V., accord
ing as they are anit or sel.
4. There remain Form II . ( in am , aḥ , at) and the roduplicated
Form III. (also in am , aḥ , at). Of these, Form III. is peculiar to only very
few primitive roots. Form II . is peculiar chiefly to certain roots of the 4th
 $ 336. ) CONJUGATION OF VERBS . 127

( divadi) class, and to roots of the 1st (Chvádt) and 6th (tudådi) classes
which form the special base irregularly ; most roots take it only in Paras
mai., while in Åtmane. they take Forms IV. or V., according as they are
anit or set..
2. - The Radical Aorist .
1. - Firat Form ( only Parasmaipada ).
§ 333. The personal terminations given in col. II. of § 227 are
added immediately to the root; in the 3 Plur. 3: is substituted for 97 ,
and before it a final radical vowel is dropped.
$ 334. Paradigms: The first Form of the Radical Aorist of a P.
' to drink,' धे P. to suck,' सो P. 'to finish' ( see $ 297, 6 ).
Parasmaipada.
1. अपाम् अधाम् असाम्
.Sing

2. अपाः अधाः असाः

3. अपात् अधात् असात्

1. अपाव ' अधाव असाव
Dual
..

2. अपातम् अधातम् असातम्

3. अपाताम् अधाताम् असाताम्
1. अपाम अधाम असाम
.Plur

2. अपात अधात असात

3. अपुः अधुः असुः

5335 Irregular Aorists of the first Form :
(a) भू 'to be' retainsthe termination अन् in the 3 Plur. and changes |
its finals before rowel -terminations to ऊर (as in the Perf.) ; eg. अभूवम् ,
अभूः, अभूत् 3Plur. अभूवन् .
(6 ) r ' to go ' forms this Aorist from TT; e. g. 3 Sing. TTT . ॥
§ 336. Only twelve roots take this form of the Radical Aorist in Paras
mai., vir. the anit roots r ' to go ' ( अगात् ), प्रा to smell ' to cut,' दा
21 ' to give,' दो ' to cut ' धा ' to place, ' धे ' to suck, ' पा ' to drink, ' शो
'to sharpen, ' सो 'to finish,' and स्था ' to stand, ' and the set root भू
to be. ' Of these, प्रा , छो, शो, and सो take also Form VI. ( अघ्रासीत् , अच्छा .
सीत् & c) ; धे takes also Forms III. and VI. ( अदधत् and अधासीत् ).- दा, धा , 147
and स्था take in Atmane. Form IV. ( अदित, अधित, भस्थित ) - andstakes
in Atmane. Form v . ( अभविष्ट ).- The root ( with the prep. अधि takes in
Atmane. Form IV . (अध्यगीष्ट or अध्यैष्ट —he has studied' ).
să 11

... )
TO
16 .
128 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR . [ 6397
II . - Second Form ( Parasmai., and rarely Atmane.).
$ 337. ( e) sp is added to the root and the base so formed takes the
personal terminations given in col II. of 8227.
(8) A final a or is gunated before अ .. मृ असरत् नृ , अजरन ।
a penultimate nasal is dropped, e.g. स्कन्द, अस्कदत .
(c) The rules given in $ 245 apply to the final 87 of the base and the
initial letters of the terminations ; e. 9. असिच् + अ + = असिचत
भसिच् + अ + अम् = असिचम् । असिच् + अ + म = असिचाम ; असिच् +
भ + आताम् = असिचेताम् .
8338. Paradigm : The second Form of the Radical Aorist ofसिर
P.A. ' to sprinkle.'
Parasmai. Atmane.

Sing .. Dual.. Plur .' Sing. Dual. Plur .

1. असिचम् असिचाव असिचाम असिचे असिचावहि असिचामहि

2. असिचः असिचतम् असिचत असिचथाः असिचेथाम् असिचध्वम्
8. असिचत् असिचताम् असिचन् असिचत असिचेताम् असिचन्त
§ 339. Irregular Aorists of the second Form :
1. अस् ' to throw,' 3 S. P. आस्थत्. 4. शास् ' to rule,' 3 S. P. अधिषद
2. एया ' to speak, 91 अख्यत् . 5.वि ' to swell,' , अश्वत्।
.
3.दृश • to see , " अदर्श 6.है ' to call,' " " महत्.
5340. 1. The following roots must take this form of the Radical
Aorist in either Pada in which they may be used : भस् ' to throw ,
cl. 3, ख्या . शास् , and सृ cl. 3 (0.9. cl. 3,असरत्; but al.1, असापति ).
2. The aniſ roots Frasq , pag, and must take this form in Par.; in
Åtm. they may optionally take this form or Form IV .; e.g.
rt. लिप , Par. अलिपत् ; Atm. अलिपत or अलिम .
3 The following are the common roots, which must take this form
in Parasmai.:
( a) of roots of the lst class : लप , भुभ (also when belonging to cl.49
but when belonging to cl. 9, अक्षोभीत् ), द्युत्, धम् , भ्रंश (also when belong .
ing to cl. 4.), मिद् ( also wben belonging to cl. 4 ), रुच, वृत , ष , शुभ .
गृथ , वित् , स्यन्द , संस्, स्विद् ( also when belonging to cl. 4 ).
(8) Of roots of the 4th class : उच् , ऋ ( but ऋ v cl. 5 &c. भार्थीन ),
कुप , कृश , कुध , लम्, क्लिन् , क्षम् , क्षुध , स्विद् , गृध , तम् , नुष , हप् (but a
cl. 5 or 6, अतासीत् or अवाप्सीत् or अतीत् ), तृष , वम् , दुष , प ( or like
तृप् ) हह , नप , पुष (but पुष cl. 9 or 1, अपोषीत् ), धम् ( but भ्रम् cl.1 , अब
मीत् ),मद् , मुह , यम् (but यम् cl. 1 or 6, अयसीत), रघ , रुप (but रुप cl.1,
भरोपीत ), लुट् (but लुट cl. 1, अलोटीत ), लुए (also when belonging to cl. 6),
$ 342.] CONJUGATION OF VERBS . 129

लुभ् (but लुभ cl. 6 अलोभीत् ),शक् ( also when belonging to cl. 5), शम्, शुध ,
>
शुष , श्रम् , लिष् ( except in the sense of ' to embrace , see 6366 ), सिध
6
(but सिध् cl. 1 — to gorern,' असैत्सीत् or असेधीत् , and सिधू cl. 1 • to go '
असेधीत् ), स्निह्, हष् .
(6)c The roots आप , गम्, घस् , पिष्, मुच, विद् cl. 6, शद्, शिष्l. 7, सद्, सप.
Those of the roots enumerated under a, b, c, which are aniļ, take in
Atm. form IV.; e.g. rt. मुच् , अमुक्त ; those which are optionally-uni , take
in Atm . form IV. or v .; e.g. rt. स्यन्दु, अस्यन्त or अस्यन्दिष्ट ; the remaining
(se! ) roots take in Atm . form V.; e.g. rt. द्युत् , अद्योतिष्ट .
4. (a) The anik roots क्षुद्, छिद्, दृश, निज, भिद् , युज् , रिच , रुप, विच,
and स्कन्द may optionally take this form or form IV. in Par.; in Atm. they
can take onlyform IV.; e.g. rt. क्षुद्, Par. अक्षुदत् or अक्षौत्सीत् ;Atm. अक्षुत्त .
.
४ The set roots घुष् , च्युत् , कृद् , , टद्, बुध् cl. 1 ,रुद्, शुच् cl.4, भ्युन् ,
(b)
and fat may optionally take this form or form V. in Par. ; in Åtm .
they can take only form V .; c.g. rt. छु, Par. अच्छत् or अच्युरींत ;
Atm. अच्छर्दिष्ट .

(c) pa takes in Par. optionally this form or form III. or form V .;

अश्वत् . अशिश्वियत् , or अश्वयीत् in Atm. it would not take this form.
1

III. — Third Form (Parasmai. and Âtmane.).

§ 341. (a) The root is reduplicated before it takes the augment.
(6) 37 is added to the root and to the base so formed the personal
terminations given in col. II. of $ 227 are added as they are added in
form II .

(c) Final s and उ are changed to इय् and उ before t3; final ( for
ए) is dropped ; e.g. कम् , 3 Sing. Atm. अचकमत ; श्रि, 3 Sing. Par. अधि .
श्रियत् ; धे, 3 Sing. Par. अदधत् .
5342. Paradigm : The third Form of the Radical Aorist of श्रि P.A.
'to go.'
Singular. Duul. Plural .
Parasmai .

1. अशिश्रियम् अशिश्रियाव अशिश्रियाम

2. अशिश्रियः अशिश्रियतम् अशिभिंयत
3. अशिश्रियत् अशिश्रियताम् अशिश्रियन्
178
 130 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR . [ $ 343—

Âtmane..
1. अशिश्रिये अशिभियावह अशिश्रियामहि
५. अशिश्रियथाः अशिश्रियेथाम् अशिश्रियध्वम्
3. अशिधियत अशिश्रियेताम् अशिभियन्त
5 343. श्रि P. A. ' to go,' द P. ' to run,' नु P. to flow,' and कम् A. to
lore,' take only this form of the Aorist. PP. 'to swell,' takes this form ,
or form II . or V. ($ 340 , 4, c ) ; # P. to suck,' takes this form, or form
1. or VI. (5336 ).
5344. पन् ' to fall,' forms irregularly अपप्तत ; and वच् ' to speak,'
अवोचत् .
४. - The sibilant- dorist .
$ 345. The four forms of the Sibilant- Aorist have this in common
that the sibilant # or a syllable containing the sibilant & ( changeable to
« ) is prefixed to the personal terminations giren in col. II. of g 227,
before they are added to the root.
IV.-Fourth Form ( Parasmai. and Âtmane.).
5346. ( a ) The sibilant स् (changeable to in accordance with 59)
is prefixed to the personal terminations giren in col. II. of $ 227, before
they are added to the root. In the 2 and 3 Sing. Par., ई is inserted
between this e or v and the terminations : ( स्) and त , to prevent the
loss of these terminations. In the 2 Plur. Atm. स् is dropped before
ध्वम् . In the 3 Plur. Par. and Atm. T: and अत are substituted for अन्
and अन्त .
( 6 ) Table showing the terminations of form IV. of the Aorist :
Parasmai. Atmane.
Sing. Dn. Plur . Sing. Du . Plur.

1. सम् स्व स्म सि स्वहि स्महि

2. सी स्तम् स्त स्थाः साथाम् ध्वम्
3. सीत् स्ताम् सुः स्त साताम् सत
TH : $ 347. (a) The terminations beginning with Fa and r drop their )
-st her short vowels and consonants (except nasals and ti e. g. rt. Ti
T-
3 Sing. Atm. अ + स्त = अकृत; t.क्षिप् . 2 Sing. Atm . अक्षिप + स्थाः =
अक्षिप्याः ; but rt. हे, 3 Sing. Atm . अह्वा + स्त = अह्वास्त ; rt. क, 2 Plur.
T - TF- Par. अकार + स्त = भकाई . .
any -5-6
nm.ssata
aiar
an t.
amank- sota
arsh sota
--
--

1
 § 349.] CONJUGATION OF VERB8. 131

( 6) Final radical consonants combine with the initial letters of the

terminations according to the rules given in $ 309 &c.; c.g. poze 116 lei

।
rt. पच ; 3 Sg. P. अपाच् + सीत् अपाक्षीत् ; 3 sg. A. अपच् + स्त अपक्त .
rt. " ,, अत्रा + सीत् अवाक्षीत; 3 Du. P. अवाश् + स्ताम् अत्राष्टाम् .
rt. प्रछ " ,, अप्राछ + सीत्- अप्राक्षीत् ; 3 Du. P. अपाछ् + स्ताम् -अप्राष्टाम्. piscal
rt . दह " अदात् + सीत् - अधाक्षीत् ; 3 Du. P. अदाह् + स्ताम् - अदाग्धाम्.
rt . न अना + सीत्- अनात्सीत; 3 Sg. A. अनह् +स्त -अनद्ध.
rt . वह " "
अवाह् + सीत् अवाक्षीत् ; 3 Sg. A. अवह + स्त = अवोट..
. वस् ;
,, अवास् + सीत् अवात्सीत्; 3 Du. P. अवास् + स्ताम् - अवात्ताम्.
( c) The initial of the termination is changed to after all
vowels except 37 and 3 , and after 5{ ; e.g.
rt. चि%3B; 2 Plur. Atm . अचे + ध्वम् अचेटुम्,
rt . कृ ; " अकृ + ध्वम् - अकृढम्.
rt. स्तु " अस्तीर + ध्वम् - अस्तीर्दम् . (548.)
But rt. पच् " अपच् + ध्वम् - अपग्ध्वम् .
§ 318. (a) In Parasmaipada Vriddhi is substituted for the rowel of
the root ; eg. rt .. चि, 3 Sing. Par . अचैषीत् ;; rt . नी, अनैषीतः rt . श्रु , अश्रौषीत.
rt.कृ, अकार्षीत् ; rt. भज , अभाक्षीत् ; rt. भ , अभाजीत् ; t. भुज, अभौक्षीत.
(i) In Atmanepada Guna is substituted for final radical r , ई, उ
and ऊ ; e.g. rt. चि, 3 Sing. Atm. अचेष्ट ; rt. नी, अनेष्ट ; rt . च्यु , अच्योष्ट ;
rt . सू, असोष्ट ; other radical rowels remain unchanged in Atmanepada ;
e.g. rt. कृ, 1 Sing:. Atm. अकृषि ; rt. पचपत्र , अपक्षि . But finals is liable
to be changed to ईर् or ऊर् by $ 48 ; eig. rt वृ, भवूर्षि.
e.g. rt. स्तृ, अस्तीषि ; t.
दृश ' to see,' and सृज् ' to emit,' substitute रा for the Vriddhi भार
(c) दृश्
in Par., and other roots with penultimate Fe do optionally the same ;
e.g. दृश् , 3 Sing. Par. अद्राक्षीत् ; rt. कृष् ' to draw,' अकार्षीत् or अक्राक्षीत्.
$ 319. Paradigms: The fourth Form of the Aorist ( i.e. the first
Form of the Sibilant-Aorist ) of नी P. A. ' to lead,' कृ P.A. 'to do,' तुर्
P. Â. * to strike.
Parasmai . Atmane.

अनैषम् अकार्षम् अतीत्सम् अनेषि अकृषि अनुत्सि

. ng
Si

2. अनैषीः अकार्षः अतीत्सीः अनेष्ठाः अकृथाः अतुत्थाः

3. अनेषीत् अकार्षात् अतीत्सीत् अनेष्ट अकृत अतुत्त
 132 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR . [ 5350
1. अनेष्व अकार्य अतौत्स्व अनेष्वहि अकृष्वहि अतुत्स्वहि
Dual

2. अनेष्टम् अकार्टम् अतौत्तम् अनेषाथाम् अकृषाथाम् अतुत्साथाम्

.

3. अनेष्टाम् अकार्टाम् अतीत्ताम्अनेषाताम् अकृषाताम् अतुत्साताम्

1. अनेष्म अकार्म अस्म अनेष्महि अकृष्महि अतुत्स्माहि
.Plur

2. अनैष्ट अकार्ट अतीत्त अनेदम् अकृतम् अतुम्

3. अनैषुः अकार्युः अतौत्सुः अनेषत अकृषत अतुल्सत
§ 350. Irregular Aorists of the fourth Form :
1. गम् + to go, drops its final c optionally in Atmanepada ; e.g.
Sing . अगंसि, अगंस्थाः, अगस्त ; Du. अगस्वहि &c. or Sing. अगसि , अगथाः
अगत ; Du. अगस्वहि &c. In Par . गम् takes form II ., अगमत्..
2. यम् in the sense of ' to marry,' follows the analogy of गम् , e.g.
with prep. उप , उपायसि or उपायसि. In Par. यम् takes form VI., अयसीत्.
3. दा ' to give,' दे ' to protect,' धा ' to place,' स्था ' to stand ' ( and
likewise दो ' to cut,' and धे ' to suck,' when they take the forms of the
Atmane.) change their final to g in Atmanepada ; afterwards § 347 (a )
applies to the terminations beginning with fa and re ; e.g. Sing.
अदिषि, अदिथाः, अदित; Du. अदिष्वहि; 2. Plur. अदिदम् ( 6347, ). When
used in Parasmai ., these roots take form I., अदात् , अधात् , अस्थात् ,
4. पद् A. ' to go,' is regular ( e.g. अपत्सि ) except in the 3 sing.
A., where it takes the passire form अपादि बुध ( बुध्यते ) to awake;'
does the same optionally ; 3 Sing. अबुद्ध or अबोधि .
5351. Prorided that they are not specially restricted to Form I., II.
III., VI., or VII.
1. All anit roots must take this form of the Sibilant - Aorist ; e.g.
rt. कृ, Par. अकार्षीत् , Atm. अकृत ; rt . पच, Par. अपाक्षीत, Atm. अपक्त ;
except
( a) FT and e'to squeeze out,' which take form V. in Par.; e.g. Par.
अस्तावीत , Atm. अस्तोष्ट ; and
(6) roots in Fe preceded by more consonants than one, which may take
form IV. or v. in Atm.; eg.rt. स्मृ, Par. अस्मार्षीत, Atm. अस्मृत or अस्मरिष्ट .
2. All optionally-anit roots may optionally take this form or form
V.; e.g. rt. 7 , Par. starting or ta ; except
=

( a)
अ . which takes only form V., आसीत् ; and
-
 .
CONJUGATION OF VERBS.
133
8354.]
( 6) y , which takes only form V. in Par.; Par. starefa, Atm . spire or
अधविष्ट .
3. The ( set) root a and all (set ) roots ending in a optionally take
form IV. or v. in Atm.; e.g. rt. कृ, Par. अकारीत्, Atm. अकोर्ट or
अकरिष्ट , अकरीष्ट.
v . - Fifth Form ( Parasmai. and Atmane.).
$ 352. (a) The terminations of this form of the Sibilant- Aorist are
obtained by prefixing the intermediate to the terminations of form IV .
(observe $ 59) ; the terminations of the 2 and 3 Sing. Par, however are
&: and $ 2.
(6 ) Table showing the terminations of form V. of the Aorist:
Parasmai. Åtmane.
Sing. Du. Plur. Sing. Du. Plur.

1. इषम् इव इष्म इषि इष्वहि इष्महि

2. ईः इष्टम् इष्ठा इषाथाम् इध्वम्
३. ईत् इष्टाम् इषुः इषाताम् इषत
$ 353. (a) The initial of these terminations may optionally be
lengthened in the Atmane. of ( and of roots ending in ; e.g. it. ,
3 8ing. Atm. अवरिष्ट or अवरीष्ट ; स्तृ , अस्तरिष्ट or अस्तरीष्ट ; { must be
lengthened in the Par. and Atm. of ग्रह ' to seize ;' e.g. 1 Sing. Par . ग्रह
अग्रहीषम् , Atm. अमहीषि.
(6) The of the termination of the 2 Plur. Atm. इध्वम् or ईध्वम्
optionally changed to when the termination is immediately preceded
by asemivowel
? | अस्तविम् or हू;cg. rt. स्तृ, 2 Plur. Atm. अस्तरिध्वम् or भस्तरिम्,
orअस्तरीदम्.
$ 354. (a) Vriddhi is substituted for final radical vowels in Parasmai
pada, and Guņa for final radical vowels in Åtmanepada ; e.g. rt.
i sing. Par. अली + इषम् - अलाविषम् ; Atm. अलो + इषि = अलविपि.
(6) Guņa is substituted for penultimate ( prosodially ) short radical
vowels in Parasmai. and Atmane.; ey. rt. बुध , 1 Sing. Par. अबोधिषम् ; t.
कृप , 1 Sing. Atm. अकल्पिषि.
(c) The penultimate अ of roots ending in अर् and अल् , and of वद्
to speak,' and व्रज् ' to go,' is lengthened in Parasmai.; e.g. rt. ज्वल,
1 Sing. Par. अज्वालिषम् ; rt. वद्, अवादिषम्. Other roots with penulti
mate 37, provided they begin with a consonant, lengthen their rowel
optionally in Parasmai. ; e.g. rt. पद , 1 Sing. Par. अपठिषम् or अपाटिषम्.
 134 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR . [ $ 355—

1
But roots ending in हु , म् , or यू , श्वस् ' to breathe,' हम् ' to laugh,' and
some other less common roots do not lengthen their penultimate 97 ; e.g.
rt. प्रह, 1 Sing. Par. अग्रहीषम्: rt. क्रम् , अक्रमिषम् & c.
.
5 355. Paradigms : The fifth Form of the Aorist ( i.e. the second
Form of the Sibilant-Aorist) of लूP. Â. " to cut,' F P. X. ' to spread,'
6

बुध P. ' to know,',' कूप A. ' to be fit.''

Parasmai.

1. अलाविषम् अस्तारिषम् अबोधिषम्

Sing

2. अलावी: अस्तारीः अबोधीः

.

3. अलावीत् अस्तारीत् अबोधीत्

'1. अलाविष्व अस्तारिष्व अबोधिष्व
Dual

2. अलाविष्टम् अस्तारिष्टम् अबोधिष्टम्

.

3. अलाविष्टाम् अस्तारिष्टाम् अबोधिष्टाम्

।
1. अलाविष्म अस्तारिष्म अबोधिष्म
Plur

2. अलाविष्ट अस्तारिष्ट अबोधिष्ट

.

3. अलाविषुः अस्तारिषुः अबोधिषुः

Atmane.
1. अलविषि अस्तरिषि or अस्तरीषि अकल्पिषि
. ng

2. अलविष्ठाः अस्तरिष्ठाः
Si

अस्तरीष्ठाः अकल्पिष्ठाः
3. अलविष्ट अस्तरिष्ट अस्तरीष्ट अकल्पिष्ट
1. अलविष्वहि अस्तरिष्वहि अस्तरीष्वहि अकल्पिष्वहि
Dual

2. अलविषाथाम् अस्तरिषाथाम् अस्तरीषाथाम् अकल्पिषाथाम्

.

3. अलविषाताम् अस्तरिषाताम् अस्तरीषाताम् अकल्पिषाताम्

1. अलविष्महि अस्तरिष्महि अस्तरीष्महि अकल्पिष्महि
. ur

2. अलविध्वम् अस्तरिध्वम् अस्तरीध्वम् अकल्पिध्वम्

Pl

or दुम् or द्वम् or दम्

3. अलविषत अस्तरिषत अस्तरीषत अकल्पिषत
$ 360. ) CONJOGATION OF VERBS. ' 135

$ 356. Irregular Aorists of the fifth Form :

1. Preto swell,' Par, apata : ( see $ 340, 4, c ).
2. Roots of the 8th ( tanádi ) class in Tor 7 optionally drop their
final consonant and substitute YT: aud a for the terminations 981: and
in the 2 and 3 Sing. Åtmane. only; e.g.rt. 117.2 Sing. Atm .safagt:
or अतथाः ; 3 Sing. अतनिष्ट or अतत . सन् lengthens its radical vowel when
is dropped e.g. 2 Sing . Âtm. Taf8T: or STERIT :.
3. The roots to ' to shine ,' 3 ' to be born,' ' to be full,' arą
‘ to spread ,' and calz'to grow ,' optionally form the 3 Sing. Atm. like
the Passive; (5393); e.g. अदीपिष्ट or अदीपि ; अजनिष्ट or अजनि & c.
4. fast ' to tremble,' retains its radical vowel unchanged in this form
of the Aorist, and in other tenses and derivative rerbal forms the termi
nations of which take the intermediate ; e.g. 3 Sing. Aor. Par.afrit ;
Simple Fut. farsbara .
§ 357. All roots that are not restricted to any other form of the
Aorist take this form . Accordingly, it is specially peculiar to set roots $ 298
( see § 351).
VI. - Sixth Form ( only Parasmaipada ).
§ 358. ( a ) The terminations of this form of the Sibilant-Aorist are
derived from the Parasmaipada -terminations of the fifth form by prefis
ing to them .
(6) Table showing the terminations of form VI. of the Aorist :
Parasmai,

Sing. Dual. Plur.

1. सिषम् faca सिष्म

2. fit: सिष्टम् सिष्ट
3. सीत् सिष्टाम् fang :
$ 359. Final radical vowels remain unchanged (but observe § 297, 0 );
final Æ is changed to Anusvâra ($ 310, 6) ; e.g. rt. II, 1 Sing. Par.
भयासिषम् ; rt. गै, अगासिषम् ; rt. नम् , अनंसिपम्.
§ 360. Parudigms : The sixth Form of the Aorist ( i.e. the third
Form of the Sibilant-Aorist) of ar P. ' to go,' A P.'to sing,' TP.
' to bend .'
136 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR . [ $ 361–
Parasmaipada.

1. अयासिषम् अगासिषम् अनंसिषम्

S. ing

2. अयासी: अगासीः अनसी:

3. अयासीत् अगासीत् अनसीत्
1. अयासिष्व अगासिष्व अनंसिष्व
Dual
..

2. अयासिष्टम् अगासिष्टम् अनंसिष्टम्

3. अयासिष्टाम् अगासिष्टाम् अनंसिष्टाम्
1. अयासिष्म अगासिष्म अनंसिष्म
Plur

2. अयासिष्ट अगासिष्ट अनसिष्ट

3. अयासिषुः अगासिषुः अनंसिषुः
8361. All roots ending in आ , ( ए, ओ , and ऐ, see $ 297,0) which
are not restricted to form I., II. , or III., and the roots f ' to throw '
मी ' to destroy' (which change their final to आ . 8403), नम् , यम्, and रम्
take this form of the Sibilant - Aorist in Par ; e.g. rt . ज्ञा ' to know,'
अज्ञासीत् ; rt . पा ' to protect,' अपासीन्; rt. मि ' to throw ,' अमासीत; & c. The
root ली ($ 403) may optionally take this form or form IV. in Par.,
अलासीत् or अलैषीत्. When used in Atmane., all these ( anit ) roots take
form IV .; .. ज्ञा , अज्ञास्त ; नम् , अनंस्त .
VIL . - Serenth Form ( Parasmai. and Atmane.).
$ 362 . ( a) The syllable # ( changeable to by $ 59) is prefixed to
the personal terminations given in col . II. of $ 227, before they are
added to the root. The 37 ofis dropped before rowel- terminations,
and lengthened before terminations beginning with or 5 .
( 6) Table showing the terminations of form VII. of the Aorist:
Parasmai. Atmane.

Sing. Du . Plur. Sing.. Du . Plur.

1. सम् साव साम सि सावहि सामहि
2. सः सतम् सत सथाः साथाम् सध्वम्

3. सत् सताम् सन् सत साताम् सन्त

8363. Final radical श, ष, and ह combine with the initial स् of the

terminations to v (6 310, a ) ; afterwards initial - and of roots
 CONJUGATION OF VERBS . 137
§ 367. ]
ending in become g and ($ 53); e.g. rt. fest, 3 Sing. Par. Hat ;
rt. द्विष्, अद्विक्षन् ; rt. दिह्, अधिक्षत्; rt. लिह, अलिक्षत् .
§ 364. Paradigm : The seventh Form of the Aorist ( i.e. the fourth
Form of the Sibilant-Aorist) of farm P. . " to show .'
Parasmai.. Atmane.
Dual .. Plur. Sing. Dual.. Plur .
Sing.
आदिक्षाव अदिक्षाम अदिक्षि अदिक्षावहि अदिक्षामहि
1. अदिक्षम् आदिक्षाव
2. अदिक्षः अदिक्षतम् अदिक्षत अदिक्षथाः अदिक्षाथाम् अदिक्षध्वम्
3. अदिक्षत् अदिक्षताम् अदिक्षन् अदिक्षत अदिक्षाताम् अदिक्षन्त
§ 365. Irregular Aorists of the seventh form :
The roots गुह ' to hide,' विह् ' to smear,' दुह ' to milk,'and लिह ' to lick ,'
may optionally drop the initial स ( or सा ) of the terminations of the 2 and.
3 Sing., 1 Du , and 2 Plur. in Âtmanepada ; e.g.
गुह्, 2 Sing. अघुक्षयाः or अगूढाः; 3 Sing. अघुक्षत or अगूढ
1 Du. अघुक्षावहि or अगुह्वहि ;
2 Plur. अघुक्षध्वम् or अघूढम् ( 5 3128).
दुह, 2 Sing. अधुक्षयाः or अदुग्धा , 3 Sing. अधुक्षत or अनुग्ध ;
1 Du. अधुक्षावहि or अदुहहि
2 Plur. अधुक्षवम् or अधुग्ध्वम् (83126).
§ 366. This form of the Sibilant-Aorist is peculiar to aniļ roots which
end with one of the consonants et, g, or , immediately preceded by one
of the rowels 1, 3 , or F. The following roots take only this form : .
कुश्, दिश्, रि, रुश् , लिए , विश्, विष, विष् , विश, विह, दुह, मिह, रुह, and
लिह. The roots मुश् , स्पृश्, and कृष् optionally take this form or form IV.
(e.g. अमृक्षत्, or अमात्,or अम्रासीत् ). The optionally-anit roots क्लिश् P.,
गुह , टह, वृह, and स्तृह optionally take this form or form V. ( 6.g.
अक्लिक्षत् or अक्लेशीत् ). The root लिष् takes this form when it means ' to
embrace' ( अनिक्षत् ) ; otherwise it takes form II. ( अनिषत् ; 8340, 36.)
The root दृश् cannot take this form (6340,4, a ).
3.-THE Two FUTURES.
$ 367. As there are two forms of the Perfect - a Reduplicated Perf .
and a Periphrastic Perf.-, and tro Aorists - a Radical Aor . and a
Sibilant-dor.-, so there are also two forms of the Future, a Simple
Future and a Periphrastic Future ; unlike, howeyer, what is the case in
the Perfect and Aorist, neither of these Futures is restricted to a limited
188
138 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR . [ $ 368—

number or a particular class of verbal roots, but all roots may equally
furin both the Simple and also the Periphrastic Future.
a . - The Simple Future.
§ 368. (a) The syllable Ft (changeable to ct in accordance with
$ 50) is added to the root ( e.g. rt . दा , Future base दास्य) , and to the
base formed in this manner the personal terminations given in col. I. of
$ 227 are attached in Par. and Atm. (e.g. 3 Sing. Par. दास्य + ति =
दास्यति ; Atm . दास्य + ते दास्यते). The rules laid down in $ 239 apply
to the vowel sy of Fu and the initial letters of the personal terminations ;
cg. दास्य + मि = दास्यामि ; दास्य + अन्ति = दास्यन्ति ; दास्य + ए =
दास्ये दास्य + आते = दास्येते .
(6 ) Table showing the terminations of the Simple Future :
Parnsinai. Atmane .

Sing. Du. Plur . Sing. Du. Plur .

1. स्यामि स्यावः स्यामः स्ये स्यावहे स्यामहे
2. स्यसि स्यथः स्यथ स्यसे स्येथे स्यध्वे
3. स्यति स्यतः स्यन्ति स्यते स्येते स्यन्ते..
§ 368. Fival radical consonants combine with the initial ą of these
terminations according to the rules given in $ 309 & c.be.g.
rt . शक 3. Sing. Par. शक् + स्यति = शक्ष्याति .
rt. पच् ॥ पच् + स्यति = पश्यति .
rt. " प्रश् + स्यति = वक्ष्यति .
rt. प्रछ " " प्रछ् + त्यति = प्रायति .
rt. त्यज " त्यज् + स्यति = त्यस्यति.
rt. लम् " 19
Atm . ल + स्यते = लप्स्यते .
rt. गम् . गम् + स्यते = गस्यते .
rt . विश् ,9 Par. वेश् + स्यति = वेक्ष्यति.
rt. वस् " , वस् + स्यति = वत्स्यति .
rt . दह ॥ " दह + स्यति = धक्ष्यति .
rt. लिह 99 लेह + स्यति = लेश्यति.
rt. नह " नह + स्यति = नत्स्यति .
$ 370. (a) Se! roots must, and optionally-uni! roots may , insert the
intermediate y before the terminations Fall & c. of the Simple Future
fubservc however (l), (c ), and ( d ) ; e.g.
 CONJIGATION OF VERBS , 139
$ 372.)
rt. पत् , 3 Sing. Par. पत् + इ + स्यति = पतिष्यति .
rt. कृ. कर + इ + स्यति = करिष्यति .
rt . क्लि , क्लेद् + इ + स्यति = क्लेदिष्यति;
or क्लेद् + स्यति = क्लेत्स्यति.
(6) Roots ending in # , and Ft ' to strike,' though otherwise ani!,
always insert in the Simple Future ; e.g.
rt . कृ. 3 Sing. Par. कर + इ + स्यति = करिष्यति .
rt . हन् , " हन् + इ + स्यति = हनिष्याति .
(c) The se! roots 67 P. ' to cut,' a P. ' to kill,' P. A. ' to
play;' हद् P.A. “to kill,' and नृत् P. ' to dance, ' may optionally omitrey .
rt. कृत् , 3 Sing. Par. कतिष्यति or कस्यति .
(d ) गम् inserts s only in Parasmai. ; वृत्, वृध , स्यन्दु, and शृथ् insert it
only in Ätmane.; e.g.
rt. गम् ,3 Sing. Par. गमिष्यति ; Atm. ( with prep. सम् ) संगस्यते.
rt. वृत्, वस्यति । वतिष्यते.
(e) The intermediate 7 must be lengthened in the Simple Fut. of
97, and it may optionally be lengthened in the Simple Fut. ofą, and of
roots ending in ; e.g.
rt. ग्रह, 3 Sing. Par. ग्रहीष्यति ..
rt . कृ. 19 करिष्यति or करीष्यति .
5371. (a) Final radical इ , ई , उ, ऊ, ऋ, and ऋ, and penultimate
( prosodially ) short rowels are gunated ; e.g. rt. नी, 3 Sing. Par. नेष्यति
rt. भि , भेत्स्यति ; rt. तुन्, तोत्स्यति ; rt. बुध्, बोधिष्यति . But rt . निन्द, निन्दि.
प्यति ; rt . जीव, जीविष्यति.
(७) दृश् ' to see ' and सज् ' to emit' must substitute र for the Guna
अर् ; other anit roots with penultimate ऋ . and the roots तृप् and दृप when
without the intermediate इ, may do the same optionally : e.g.rt. दृश ,
3 Sing. Par. द्रक्ष्यति : rt. सप् , सति or लप्स्यति; rt. तृप, तय॑ति or वस्यति
(or तर्पिष्यति ).
$ 372. Puradigms : The Simple Future of दा P.A. ' to gire,' भू P.A.
' to be, ' तद् P. A. ' to strike,' ब P.A. ' to know,' गै P. 'to sing,' and
HIT P. to live, '
 140 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [ $ 372

Rt. दा. Rt. भू .

Par. Atm. Par . Atm.

1. दास्यामि दास्ये भविष्यामि भविष्ये
Sing

2. दास्यसि दास्यसे भविष्यसि भविष्यसे

.

3. दास्यति दास्यते भविष्यति भविष्यते

1. दास्यावः दास्यावहे भविष्याव: भविष्यावहे
.Dual

2. दास्यथः दास्येथे भविष्यथः भविष्येथे

3. दास्यतः दास्येते भविष्यतः भविष्येते
1. दास्यामः दास्यामहे भविष्यामः भविष्यामहे
Plur

2. दास्यथ दास्यवे भविष्यथ भविष्यध्वे

.

3. दास्यन्ति दास्यन्ते भविष्यन्ति भविष्यन्ते

Rt . तुद् . Rt. बुध .

Par.. Atm. Par. Atm.

1. तोत्स्यामि तोत्स्ये बोधिष्यामि बोधिष्ये
. .ng

2. तोत्स्यसि
Si

तोत्स्यसे बोधिष्यसि बोधिष्यसे

3. तोत्स्यति तोत्स्यते बोधिष्यति बोधिष्यते
1. तोत्स्याव: तोत्स्यावहे बोधिप्यावः वोधिष्यावहे
Dual

2. तोत्स्यथः
..

तोत्स्येथे बोधिप्यथः बोधिष्येथे

3. तोत्स्यतः तोत्स्येते बोधिप्यतः बोधिप्येते
1. तोत्स्यामः तोत्स्यामहे बोधिष्यामः बोधिष्यामहे
.Plur

2. तोत्स्यथ तोत्स्यध्वे बोधिष्यथ बोधिष्यध्वे

3. तोत्स्यन्ति तोत्स्यन्ते बोधिष्यन्ति बोधिष्यन्ते
 51
$ 374. ) CONJUGATION OF VERBS . 161

Rt. गै. Rt. जी .

Par. Par.

1. गास्यामि जीविष्यामि
.Sing

2. गास्यसि जीविष्यसि
3. गास्यति जीविष्यति
1. गास्यावः जीविष्याव:
Dual
..

2. गास्यथः जीविष्यथः
3. गास्यतः जीविष्यतः
1. गास्यामः जीविष्यामः
Plur

2. गास्यथ जीविष्यथ
.

3. गास्यन्ति जीविष्यन्ति

b . - The Periphrastic Future.

$ 373. (a) The terminations of the 3 Sing., Du., and Plur ., both in
Par. and in Atm ., are at, aret, arc: ( i.e. the Nom . Sing., Du., and Plur.
Masc. of the Saffix & ; § 149); in the remaining forms ar is affixed to the
root and to the base formed in this manner the corresponding forms
ofthe Present Ind. Par. and Atm. of अम् ' to be ' ( 8269 ) are added.
( 6) Table showing the terminitions of the Periphrastic Future :
Parasmai. Atmane.

Sing. Dual. Plur . Sing. Dual. Plur.

1. तास्मि तास्वः तास्मः ताहे तास्वहे तास्महे

2. तासि तास्थः तास्थ तासे तासाये तावे
3. ता तारी तार ता तारी तार :

§ 374. Final radical consonants combine with the initial त् of these

terminations according to the rules given in $ 309 etc.; e.g. it. T ,
 142 SANSKRIT GRAUMAR , [ $ 375
3 Sing. शक्ता ; rt. पच् , पत्ता ; rt. प्रछ , प्रष्टा : rt. त्यज , त्यक्ता ; rt. यज् ,
या ; rt. लम् , लब्धा ; rt. गम् , गन्ता ; rt. दह् , दग्धा ; rt. नह , नद्धा; rt. वह
वोडा ; etc.
5. 375. ( a) Set roots must, and optionally -anil roots may, insert
the intermediate before the terminations arren etc. of the Periphrastic
Future ( but observe ( 6 ); e.g.rt. भू, 3 Sing. भविता; rt. श्रि , अयिता; rt. जागृ ,
जागरिता ; rt. पत् , पतिता; rt . स्तृ , स्वर्ता or स्वरिता ; rt. व्रश्च, ब्रष्टा or व्रश्चिता: rt.
दुह, द्रोग्धा or द्रोढा, or द्रोहिता. But rt. दा, दाता ; rt जि , जेता ; rt. गै, गाता :
rt . शक , शक्ता etc.
(8) The sut roots इष ( इच्छति ) P. ' to wish,' रिए P. ' to hurt,' रुष P.
'to hurt,' लुभ् P. ' to desire, and सह A. ' to bear,' may optionally omiti..
e.g. rt. इए , 3 Sing. एषिता or एटा; rt. सह , सहिता or सोढा ( $ 311, d ).
( c) The intermediate 7 is lengthened as in the Simple Future ($ 370, e );
e.p. rt. ग्रह , 3 Sing. ग्रहीता; rt . कृ. करिता or करीता.
$ 376. The rules given in § 371 apply also in the Periphrastic Fature;
e.g.
(a) rt. नी, 3 Sing. नेता; rt. मिह, ता ; rt. तुद, तोत्ता ; rt. बुध, बोधिता.
But rt. निन्द, निन्दिता ; rt. जीव, जीविता.
( ) rt. दृश, 3 Sing. द्रष्टा ; rt . सप्, सप्र्ता or सप्ता ; rt. तृप , तप्त or वप्ता
( or तर्पिता ).
$ 377. Paradigms: The Periphrastic Future of er P. Â. '10 gire,
भू P. A. to be,' तद् P. A. 'to strike,' and » P. “ to sing.'
Rt. दा. Rt . भू .
Par . Atm. Par. Atm .
1. दातास्मि दाताहे भवितास्मि भविताहे
.Sing

2. दातासि
.

दातासे भवितासि भवितासे

3. दाता दाता भविता भविता
1. दातास्वः दातास्वहे भवितास्वः भवितास्वहे
Dual

2. दातास्थः दातासाथे भवितास्थः भवितासाथे

.

3. दातारी दातारी भवितारी भवितारी

 $ 379.] CONJUGATION OF VERBS . 143

1. दातास्मः दातास्महे भवितास्मः भवितास्महे

.Plur

2.दातास्थ दाताध्ये भवितास्थ भविताध्ये

43. दातारः दातारः भवितारः भवितारः

Rt . तुद. Rt. गै .

Par. Aim. Par .

1. तोत्तास्मि तोत्ताहे गातास्मि

. ng
Si

2. तोत्तासि तोत्तासे गातासि

3. तोत्ता तोत्ता गाता

1. तोत्तास्वः तोत्तास्वहे गानास्वः

Dual

2. तोत्तास्थः तोत्तासाथे गातास्थः

.

3. तोत्तारौ तोत्तारो गातारी

1. तोत्तास्मः तोत्तास्महे गातास्मः

Plur

2. तोत्तास्थ तोत्ताध्वे गातास्थ

.

43. तोत्तारः तोत्तारः गातारः

1. - THE CONDITIONAL.

$ 378. The Conditional is derived froin the Simple Future by the

addition of the augment ( 6229 ) and the substitution of the personal
terminations अम् , त् &c. in col. II . of 5 227 for the terminations मि , सि ,
ति & c.be.g. rt . दा, Simple Fut. Par. दास्यति , Condit. अदास्यत्; Atm.
दास्यते, अदास्यत ; rt. इष् ' to vish,' Simple Fut. एषिष्यति ; Condit.
ऐषिष्यत् & c.
6 379. Paradigms: The Conditional of P. A. to gire,' भू P.A.
' to be,' तुद् P. A. ' to strike,' गै P. ' to sing, and ए ५ A. 'to grow.'
 144 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR . [8 380—
Rt. दा . Rt. भू .
Par. Atm.. Par.. Atm.
1. अदास्यम् अदास्ये अभविष्यम् अभविष्ये
. g
Sin

2. अदास्यः अदास्यथाः अभविष्यः अभविष्यथाः

3. अदास्यत् अदास्यत : अभविष्यत् अभविष्यत
1. अदास्याव अदास्यावहि अभविष्याव अभविष्यावहि
Dual

2. अदास्यतम् अदास्येथाम् अभविष्यतम् अभविष्येथाम्

.

3. अदास्यताम् अदास्येताम् अभविष्यताम् अभविष्येताम्

1. अदास्याम अदास्यामहि अभविष्याम अभविष्यामहि
Plur

2. अदास्यत अदास्यध्वम् अभविष्यत अभविष्यध्वम्

.

3. अदास्यन् अदास्यन्त अभविष्यन् अभविष्यन्त

Rt. तुद. Rt. गै. Rt. ए .
Par. Atm. Par. Atm.
1. अतोत्स्यम् अतोत्स्ये अगास्यम् ऐधिष्ये
. g
.Sin

2. अतोत्स्यः अतोत्स्यथाः अगास्यः ऐधिष्यथाः

3. अतोत्स्यत् अतोत्स्यत अगास्यत् ऐधिष्यत
[1. अतोत्स्याव अतोत्स्यावहि ऐधिष्यावहि
Dual

अगास्याव
..

2. अतोत्स्यतम् अतोत्स्येथाम् अगास्यतम् ऐधिष्येथाम्

3. अतोत्स्यताम् अतोत्स्येताम् अगास्यताम् ऐधिष्येताम्
1. अतोत्स्याम अतोत्स्यामहि अगास्याम ऐधिष्यामहि
. r
Plu

2. अतोत्स्यत अतोत्स्यध्वम् अगास्यत ऐधिष्यध्वम्

3. अतोत्स्यन् अतोत्स्यन्त अगास्यन ऐधिष्यन्त
5. - THE.BE NEDICT IVE .
$ 380. (a) In Parasmai , area is affixed to the root, and to the base
formed in this way the personal terminations of the Parasmai. giren in
$ 381.) CONJUGATION OP VERBS . 145

col.II. of $ 227 are added ; in the 3 Plur., howerer, उ . is substituted

for अन् . In the 2 and 3 Sing. यास् + : and यास् + त् become या and यान .
(6) Iu Âtmane. at ( changeable to off by $ 59) is affixed to the root,
and to the base formed in this manner the persoval terminations of the
Atmane. giren in col. II. of $ 227 are added ; but tis substituted for
इ, रन् for अन्त, and a sibilant is prefixed to the dental of the terminations
a

था त भाथाम् andआताम्.| Before personal terminations rommencing ।

with a towel ait (or ot ) is changed to Hitz (or ota ).
(c) Table showing the terminations of the Benedictire :
Parasmai . Åtmane.

Sing. Dual. Plur. Sing. Dual. Plur.

1. यासम् यास्व यास्म सीय सीवहि सीमहि
2. याः यास्तम् यास्त सीष्ठाः सीयास्थाम् सीध्वम्
3. यात् यास्ताम् यासुः सीष्ट सीयास्ताम् सीरन्
( 1) The ध्
1 5 of the termination सीध्वम् ( or षीध्वम् ) must be changed to
when the termination is immediately preceded by any radical rowel
except i or आ, or by : . rt. प्ल, प्लोषीटम्; rt. स्तू, स्ती ( दम्. It may
optionally be changed to a when the termination is preceded by the
intermediate and this intermediate y again is preceded by a semirowel
or ; e.g. rt . लू , लविषीध्वम् or लविषीदुम् . But rt. तुद् , तुत्सीवम् ; rt . बुध
बोधिषीध्वम् &c.
( a).- Parasmaipada.
§ 381. (a) The terminations are added immediately to the root; e.g.
rt. भू , 3 Sing. भूयात् ; rt. नृत् , नृत्यात् .
( 6) The following changes take place in the root :
1 . A penultimate nasal is generally dropped ; e.g. rt. देश , दश्यान् ;
rt . बन्ध , बध्यात्.- But rt. नन्द, नन्द्यात्; rt. निन्दु, निन्द्यात् & c.
( Note : The following are the common roots that drop their penul.
timate pasal by this and similar rules that will be given below (S$ 387,
161 , & c .) : अञ्ज, भ , रञ्ज, स , स्व ग्रन्थ, मन्य ; उन् , स्कन्द, स्यन्द्र इन्ध ,
बन्ध; दम्भ, स्तम्भ ; दंश , भ्रंश or धंस् ; ध्वंस्, शंस्, संस् ; and ह ).
2. Final इ and उ are lengthened ; e.g. rt. चि , चीयात्; rt. स्तु, स्तूयात.
3. Final ऋ, when preceded by one radical consonant, is changed to
f;whenprecededby moreconsonants, andin rt. to go," to STT: 2.9.arqit11
rt . कृ, क्रियात्; rt. स्म, स्मर्यात; rt . क , अर्यात्. ( Here the स् prefixed to
by 6487, is not treated as a radical consonant ;; संस्कृ, संस्क्रियार ).
19 g
146 SAXSKRIT GRAMMAR , [5382

4. Final is changed to ईर् ; but when preceded by a labial, to कर

(548) ; g . rt. कृ. कीर्यान्; rt. पृ. पूर्यान्.
5. The final rorel of दा ' to gire,' दो, धा , धे, मा, स्था , गै, पा ' to drink,'
हा ' to abandon,' and सो , must be changed to ए ; and final आ ( or ऐ
preceded by more radical consonants than one may optionally be changed
to ए or remain आ ($ 297,1) ; eg. rt. दा, देयात्; rt . गै, गेयात् ; rt. ग्लै ,
ग्लेयात् or ग्लायात; but rt. पा ' to protect,' पायात् &c.
6. The rootsवच्,वद्, वा, वश, वस् 'toavell,' वह,and स्वप् substi. LP...]
tute उ for a; यज् , व्यन्, and व्यऽ substitute इ for य ; ग्रह, प्रछ, भ्रज , and
वश् substitute for R; वे है, and a substitute a for and वि व्ये and
ज्या substitute t for ये and याः शास् substitutes इ for आ; e.g. rt. वच् ।
उच्यात्;rt.यञ्
rt. शास् , शिष्यान्
इज्यान :t. ग्रह गृह्यात् t. द्वे, हयान् ;rt. व्ये, वीयात् ।
7. Obserre 5 48 ; e.g. rt. दिव,दीयात् ]
( 6 ).- Atmanepada .
5382. (a) In general, set roots must, and optionally -anil roots mar ,
prefix the intermediate z to the Atmane. terminations of the Benedictire
before they are added to the root ( $ 298 ). But the following special
rule must be obserred :
(6) Roots ending in # preceded by more consonants than one, the
root J, and roots ia may prefix to the terminations optionally;. e.g.
1.स्मृ, 3 Sing. स्मृपीट or स्मरिषीष्ट; t. स्तृ, स्तीढुष्ट or स्तरिपीट ; ( संस्कृ , only
संस्कृषीट ).
(c) The intermediate ş is lengthened only after the root h ; e.g.
ग्रहीषीष्ट .
$ 383. (u) When the intermediate 7 is prefixed to the terminations ,
final radical vowels and penultimate ( prosodially ) short rowels are
gunated ; eg. rt. लू; लविषीट; rt. वृध , वर्धिषीष्ट. (Compare Aorist, Form V.,
5354, a and b ).
(6) When the terminations are added without the intermediate ,
final इ. ई, उ, and I are gunated ; final ऋ is changed to ईर्, or when
preceded by a labial, to T ( § 43) ; other rowels remain unchanged
(but observe $ 297, 6) ; e.J. rt. जि, जेषीट; rt. स्तृ, स्तीढुष्ट (or स्तरिषीष्ट); rt.
पृ. पूर्षीट ( or परिषीट ); rt. दा , दासीट; rt. वै, वासीट; rt. कृ, कृषीष्ट . (Compare
Aorist, Form IV., 8348, 6) .
( c) Final radical consonants combine with the initial æ of the termi
nations according to the rules in $ 309, &c.; e.g. rt. बुध cl. 4, अस्सीट;
t . युज , युक्षीट; rt . लिह, लिक्षीष्ट &c.
5334. Paradigmi : The Benedictire of जि P. A. 'to conquer,' ५
P. A. to be,' बुध cl. 1, P. A. ' to know, ' तुद् P.A. : to strike:
 § 385.) CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 147

Rt. जि . Rt. भू .
Par. Atm. Par. Atm.
1. जीयासम् जेषीय भूयासम् भविषीय
. ng
Si

2. जीयाः जेषीष्ठाः भूयाः भविषीष्ठाः

3. जीयात् जेषीष्ट भूयात् भविषीष्ट
1. जीयास्त्र जेषीवहि भूयास्व भविषीवहि
Dual

2. जीयास्तम् जेपीयास्थाम् भूयास्तम् भविषीयास्थाम्

.

3. जीयास्ताम् जेषीयास्ताम् भयास्ताम् भविषीयास्ताम्

1. जीयास्म जेषीमहि भुयास्म भविषीमहि
.Plur

2. जीयास्त जेषीदम् भूयास्त भविषीध्वम् or दुम्

3. जीयासुः जेपोरन् भूयासुः भावषीरन्
Rt . बुध. Rt. तुद् .
Par . Atm . Par. Atm.
1. बुध्यासम् बोधिषीय तुद्यासम् तुत्सीय
.Sing

2. बुध्याः बोधिषीष्ठाः तुद्याः तुत्सीष्ठाः

3. बुध्यात् बोधिषीष्ट नुद्यात् तुत्सीष्ट
1. बुध्यास्व बोधिषीवहि तुत्सीवहि
Dual

तुद्यास्व
2. बुध्यास्तम् बोधिषीयास्थाम् तुशास्तम् तुत्सीयास्थाम्
.

3. बुध्यास्ताम् बोधिषीयास्ताम् तुद्यास्ताम् तुत्सीयास्ताम्

1. बुध्यास्म बोधिषीमहि तुद्यास्म तुत्सीमहि
Plur

बोधिषीध्वम् तुत्सीध्वम्
.

2. बुध्यास्त तुद्यास्त
(3. बुध्यासुः बोधिषीरन् तुद्यासुः तुत्सीरन्
8 385. Irregulur Benedictires :
1. इ ' to go,' Par. ईयात्; but after prepositions, इयात् , ... समियात् ;
Atm . एषीष्ट .
 148 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR . [ $ 386
2. The roots खन् ' to dig,' जन् ' to beget,' and सन् ' to obtain '
optionally drop their final and at the same time lengthen their rowel
in Parasmai ; e.g. 3 Sing. Par. खन्यात् or खायात्.
3. गम् ' to go ' drops its final c optionally in Atmane.; गंसीट or
गसीष्ट . ( Compare $ 350,1 ).
II.-THE PASSIVE.
§ 386. With the exception of the Present Indicative, Potential, and
Imperative, and of the Imperfect , the forms of the Passive are generally
the same as those of the Aimaropada or reflective voice. The Present
and In:perfect of the Passive differ commonly from the Present and
Imperfect Âimare.;. they are formed in one and the same manner of all
primitive roots of all the nine classes.
A. - THE PRESENT (Is Dic., POTENT., IMPERAT.) AND IMPERFECT.
§ 387. Formation of the Passire Base :
(a) The syllable य is added to the root ; e.g. rt. भू, Pass. base भूय ;
rt . तुद् , नुय : rt . द्विष , द्विष्य .
(७) Before य roots ( except those ending in आ , ए , ओ, and ऐ ) under
go the enme changes which they undergo before the terminations of the
Fenedictire Par. ( 5381 , 8, 1-4 and 6 , 7 ) ; g . rt. बन्ध् , Fass. base
बध्य; ( but rt . निन्द् ,निन्द्य); rt . चि, चीय; rt. स्तु, या कृ, क्रिय ; ( संस्कृ ,
सस्क्रिय ); rt. स्मृ , स्मर्य; rt. ऋ , अर्य; rt. कृ, कीर्य; rt. , पूर्य; rt. वच् , उच्य :
rt . यज , इज्य ; rt. ग्रह , गृह्य ; rt . हे, ह्य ; rt. दिव, दीव्य.
(c) The inal rowel of दा ' to gire,' दे, दो, धा , धे, मा, स्था , गै, पा ‘ to
drink ,' हा ' to abandon,' and सो, is changed to ई; the final आ ( ए, ओ,
and ऐ, 6297, b ) of other roots remains भा ; 4g. rt. दा , Pass. base दीय ;
rt. गै, गाय ; rt . सो , सीय ; but rt . ज्ञा, ज्ञाय ; rt. ध्ये, ध्याय.
$ 388. The Passive base is conjugated like the special base of a root
of the fourth (dirudi) class in Âtmane.; e.g. rt . , Pass. base f * 2 ; 3 Sing.
Tres. Ind. क्रियते ; Pres. Pot . क्रियेत ; Pres. Imperat. क्रियताम् ; Imperf.
अक्रियत.
5 369. Paradigm: The Present and Imperfect Pass. of तुद् ' to
strike .''
Pres. Ind Pres. Pot . Pres . Imper . Imperf..
1. नुये तुद्येय तुबै अतुये
.Sing

2. तुद्यसे तुद्येथाः तुद्यस्व अतुद्यथाः

3. तुद्यते तुद्येत तुद्यताम् अतुद्यत
 $ 393. ] CONJUGATION OP VERBS . 149

1. तुद्यावहे तुद्येवहि तुद्यावहै अतुद्यावहि

2. तुयेथे तुयेयाथाम् तुद्येयाम् अतुयेयाम्
3. तुद्येते तुयेयाताम् तुशेताम् अतुताम्
1. तुद्यामहे तुमहि तुद्यामहे अतुद्यामहि
Plur

2. तुद्यध्वे तुयेध्वम् तुयध्वम् अतुयध्वम्

.

3. तुद्यन्ते तुरन् तुयन्ताम् अतुयन्त

$ 390. Irregular Presents and Imperfects of the Passive : The
following roots forin their Passive base irregularly :
6
1. The roots ख ' to dig. ' जन् ' to beget,' सन् ' to obtain' ( see
$ 335, 2) , and तन् ' to stretch ' optionally drop their final न , and at
the same time lengthen their rowel when they do so ; e.g. rt. खन् , Pass.
base खन्य or खाय, Pres . Ind. खन्यते or खायते.
2. शी ' to lie down ' forms शय्य, Pres. Ind. शय्यते.
3. जह
57 ' to understand ’ shortens its , when a preposition is prefixed
to it ; e.g. Pres. Ind. Pas. of समूह, सनुयते ; but ofऊह, जयो.
B.- THE PERFECT , THE AORIST, THE TWO FUTURES, THE CONDI.
TIONAL, AND THE BENEDICTIVE.
( a ).- The Perfeot.
$ 391. (a) The Reduplicated Perfect of the Passive is formed from
the same roots and in the same mauner as the Redupl. Perf. of the Atm.;
e. g. rt . मिड, 3 Sing. Red. Perf. Pass . घिमिरे ; rt.. तु , तुतुरे ; rt. निन्, निनि.
e

नदे ; rt. क्रम् , चक्रमे ; rt. अज , आनन्छे , rt. इष , ईषे & c.

$ 392. ( 3) The Periphrastic Perfect of the Passive is formed from
the same roots and in the same manner as the Periphrastic Perf, of the
Atm., except that all the three auxiliary rerbs कृ, अस् , and भू are con
jugated only in Atmane. ; e . g. rt. उन्द, 33 Sing. Periph. Perf. Pass . उनां
चक्रे, or उन्दामासे, or उन्दांबभूवे ; rt. ईश, ईक्षांचके, or ईशामासे, or ईशांबभूवे & c .
( b ).- The Aorist.
1. - The 3rd Pers. Sing.
$ 333. The 3rd Pers. Sing. of the Aor. Pass . is formed in one and
the same manner of all roots, by prefixing to the root the augment and
by adding to it the termination इ ; e.g. rt. निन्द , 3 Sing. Aor . Pass.
अनिन्दि ; rt. सेब , असेवि .
150 SANSKRIT GRANNAR . [ $ 394–
5394. Before the termination इ the root undergoes the following
changes:
(a) Guna is substituted for a penultimate (prosodially) short rowel ;
e.g. rt. भिद्, अभेदि ; rt. तद्, भतोदि rt. कृत् , अकर्ति.
(७) Vriddhi is substituted for a final rovel ; e.g. rt. चि, अचायि ;
rt. नी , अनायि ; rt. स्तु , अस्तावि ; rt. लू, अलावि; t. कृ , अकारि ; rt. कृ,अकारि .
(c) A penultimate ( prosodially short ) अ is lengthened, except of
rt. जन् and of roots ending in अम्; ey. rt. वर्, अवादि ; rt. पर, अपाठि
but rt. दम्, अदमि ; rt. जन् , अजनि .
Erception : The penultimate of कम् , गम् , नम् , यम् , रम् , वम् , and of
चम् when preceded by the Prep. आ, is lengthened ; e.g. अकानि, अगामि ,
अनामि : आचामि & c .
( a) Roots ending in आ (ए, ऐ and ओ, $ 297, 0 ) insert य् between the
root and the termination ; e.g rt. दा, अदायि ; rt . धे, अधायि ; rt. गै, अगायि .
$ 395. Irregular 3rd Persons Sing. of the Aor. Pass. :
1. The roots र ' to kill ' and रम् ' to desire, ' instead of lengthening
their rowel, insert a nasal before their final consonant ; अरन्धि , अरम्भि .
". लम् ' to take ' optionally does the same ; अलाभि or अलम्भि . When
a preposition is prefixed to लम् , it forms only अलम्भि , e.g. प्रलम् , प्रालम्भि .
3. भञ् ' to break ' forms अभञ्जि or अभाजि .
2. - The remaining Persons of theorist Pass.
( a) Rules applicable equally to all roots.
$ 396. Those roots which actually take Form IV., V., or VII. of the
Aor. in Atmane.. or which, if they were used in Atmane , would take
those forms in Atmancpada, use the same forms of the Aor. Âimanc.
for the Passive ; e.g. rt. कृ, I Sing. Aor. Pass. अकृषि ; rt. दा, अदिषि; rt.
मुन् , अमुक्षि ; rt. लू, अलविषि ; rt. भू, अनविषि ; rt . द्विष्, अदिक्षि .
5 397. Forms II. and III . of the Aor. Atmane. are not used for the
T'assive ; the roots which in Åtmane. take Form II. or III., or which
would take these forms if they were conjugated in Ātmane., take in the
Passive Form IV. or v. of the Aor. Atmane. according as 6 351 or
8357 is applicable to them; e.g. set rt . अस् 'to throw;' 1 Sing. Aor. Atm.
आस्ये ; Pass. आसिषि ; anit rt. ख्या , Atm. अण्ये ; Pass. अख्यासि; set rt .
श्रि, Atm. अशिश्रिये ; Pass. अयिषि ; anit rt . W, Atm. अमुघुवे; Pass. अस्रोषि .
 $ 399 .] CONJUGATION OF VERDS. 151

( 8) Optional forms of roots ending in romels, and of ग्रह, दृश , and हन .

5398. All roots ending in romels, and the roots ग्रह ' to seize, ' दृश्
to see, ' and 7 ' to strike' may optionally form the Passive Aorist
(except in the 3 Sing .) by augmenting the root and adding to it the
terminations of Form V. of the Aor. Atmane ; before these termina.
tions the root undergoes the same changes which it undergoes before
the termination s of the 3 Sing. Aor. Pass. The initials of the termi.
nations इषि &c. is not liable to be lengthened. E.g.rt. चि , 1 Sing.Aor.
Pass. अचायिषि ( or अचेषि ) ; rt. नी , अनायिषि ( or अनेषि ); rt. ग्रह, अपा.
हिषि ( or अग्रहीषि ); rt. दृश्, अवशिषि ( or अदृक्षि ).
$ 399. Paradigms : The Aorist Pass. of कृ to do , ' तुद् ' to strike,
दृश् ' to see, and लू ' to cut. '

Rt. कृ. Rt . तुद्.

1. अकृषि or अकारिषि अतुल्सि

. ng
Si

2. अकृथाः अकारिष्टाः अतुत्थाः

3. अकारि अतोदि
1 अकृष्वाहि अकारिष्वहि अतुत्स्वहि
Dual

2. अकृषाथाम् अकारिषाथाम् अतुत्साथाम्

.

3. अकृषाताम् अकारिषाताम् अतुत्साताम्

1. अकृष्महि अकारिष्महि अनुत्स्महि
Plur

2. अकृढम अकारिध्वम् or 'हम् अतुम्

.

3. अकृषत अकारिषत अतुत्सत

Rt . दृश. Rt . लू .

1. अदृक्षि or अशिपि अलविषि or अलाविषि

. ng

अशिष्ठाः अलविष्टाः अलाविष्ठाः

Si

2. अदृष्टाः
3. अदर्शि अलावि

।
 152 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR . [ $ 400

1. अदृत्वहि or अदर्शिष्वहि अलविष्वहि or अलाविष्वहि

Dual

2. अदृक्षाथाम् अदर्शिषाथाम् अलविषाथाम् अलाविषाथाम्

.

3. अदृक्षाताम् अदर्शिषाताम् अलविषाताम् अलाविषाताम्

1. अदृक्ष्महि अशिष्महि अलविष्महिं अलाविष्महि

2. अदृड्डम अदर्शिध्वम् अलविध्वम् अलाविध्वम्

or द्वम or "दम्
3. अदृक्षत अदर्शित अलविषत अलाविषत
( 0).- The two Futures, the Conditional, and the Benedictive .
(a) Rule applicable equally to all roots .
$ 400. The formation of the two Futures, the Conditional, and the
Benedictive of the Passive does not differ from the forination of the same
forms of the Atmanepadh ; e.g. rt. दा , 3 Sing. Simple Fut. Pass. दास्यते ;
rt . भू , भविष्यते ; rt.नुद् , तोत्स्यते ; rt. बुध, बोधिष्यते ; - rt. दा , 1 Sing. Periph.
-

Fut. Pass. दाताहे ; rt. तुह. तोताहे ; -rt. जि, 3 Sing. Bened. Pass. जेषीष्ट
rt . बुध , बोधिषीष्ट ; rt . तुद्, तुस्सीष्ट.
(3) Optional forms of roots ending in rowels, and of ग्रह , दृश्, and हन .
$ 401. All roots ending in rowels and the roots प्रह , दृश् , and हर may
optionally form the two Futures, the Conditional, and the Benedictive of
the Passive by adding to the root the terninations of the corresponding
tenses of the Atinanepada with the vowel , which is not liable to be
lengthened, and by changing the root in the same manner in which it is
changed before the terminations of the 3 Sing. of the Aor. Pass.; e.g.
rt . दा, 3 Sing. Siunple Fut. Pass. दायिष्यते (or दास्यते ); Periph. Fut. दायिता
(or दाता) ; Condit. अशयिष्यत (or अगस्यत ) ; Bened. दायिषीष्ट ( or दासीट) ;
rt . ग्रह , Simple Fut. ग्राहिष्यते (or ग्रहीयते ); rt. दृश , Simple Fut. दर्शिष्यते
(or द्रक्ष्यते ), & c.
Paradigm .
$ 402. Conjugation of the set rt. बुध cl. 1, P. A. ' to know,' in
Parasmai., Atmane., and Passire :
Parasmai. Atmane . Passire .
Present Indicatire .
1. बोधामि • I knor.' बोधे Anow.: बुध्ये ' I am known .'
. ng
Si

2. बोधसि बोधसे बुध्यसे

3. बोधति बोधते बुध्यते
 CONJUGATION OF VERBS . 153
§ 402.]
Parasmai. Atmane . Passive .

1. बोधावः बोधावहे बुध्यावहे

. l
Dua

2. बोधयः बोधेथे बुध्येथे

3. बोधतः बोधेते बुध्येते
1. बोधामः बोधामहे बुध्यामहे
Plur

2. बोधथ बोधध्वे बुध्यध्ये

.

3. बोधन्ति बोधन्ते बुध्यन्ते

Present Potential.

1. बोधेयम् I may knor.' बोधेय I may know.' बुध्येय ' I known

may .'bo
. ng

2. बोधेः बोधेथाः बुध्येथाः

Si

3. बोधेत् बोधेत बुध्येत

1. बोधेव बोधेवहि बुध्येवहि
Daal

2. बोधेतम् बोधेयाथाम् बुध्येयाथाम्

.

3. बोधेताम् बोधेयाताम्. बुध्येयाताम्

1. बोधेम बोधेमहि बुध्येमहि
Plur

2. बोधेत बोधेध्वम् बुध्यध्वम्

.

3. बोधेयुः बोधेरन् बुध्येरन्

Present Imperative.

1. बोधानि • May I know.' बोधै — May I knor.' बुध्यै May I be known.'

4
. ng

2. बोध or बोधतात्
Si

बोधस्व बुध्यस्व
3. बोधतु or बोधतात् बोधताम् बुध्यताम्
1. बोधाव बोधावहै बुध्यावहै
Dual

2. बोधतम् बोघेथाम् बुध्येथाम्

.

3. बोधताम् बोधेताम् बुध्येताम्

208
 154 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR . [$ 402–
Parasmai. Atmane. Passire.

[1. बोधाम वोधामहै बुध्यामहै

. r
Plu

2. बोधत बोधध्वम् बुध्यध्वम्

3. वोधन्तु वोधन्ताम् बुध्यन्ताम्
Imperfect.

1. अबोधम् ' I knev.' अबोधे 'I knew: अबुध्ये 'I ras known
2. अबोधः अबोधथाः अबुध्यथाः
3. अबोधत् अबोधत अबुध्यत
1. अबोधाव अबोधावहि अबुध्यावहि
Dual

2. अबोधतम् अबोधेथाम् अबुध्येथाम्

.

3. अबोधताम् अबोधेताम् अबुध्येताम्

( 1. अवोधाम अबोधामहि अबुध्यामहि
. r
Plu

2. अबोधत अबोधध्वम् अबुध्यध्वम

3. अबोधन अबोधन्त अबुध्यन्त
Reduplicated Perfect.

1. बुबोध 'I knew .' बुबुधे । knew.' बुबुधे ' I was known.'
.Sing

2. बुबोधिय बुबुधिषे Conjugated like

the Atmane.
3. बुबोध वुबुधे
Dual

1. बुबुधिव बुबुधिवहे
.

2 बुबुधथुः बुबुधाये
3. बुबुधतुः बुबुधाते
1. बुबुधिम बुबुधिमहे
Plu r

2. बुबुध वुवुधिध्वे
.

3. वुबुथुः वुवुधिरे
 § 402.) CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 153

Parasmai.. Atmane. Passire.

Aorist .
Form II . or Form V.

[1. अबुधम् अवोधिषम् known

I haro.' अबोधिषि 'Tharo अबोधिषि I haro
.Sing

known .'' been

2. अबुधः अबोधीः अवोधिष्ठाः Hallerat: known.
3. अबुधत् अबोधीत् अबोधिष्ट अबोधि
1. अवुधाव अबोधिष्व अबोधिष्वहि अबोधिष्वाह
Dual
. .

2. अबुधतम् अबोधिष्टम् अवोधिषाथाम् The rest = Atm.

3. अबुधताम् अबोधिष्टाम् अबोधिषाताम्
1. अबुधाम अबोधिष्म अबोधिष्महि
.Plur

2. अबुधत अबोधिष्ट अबोधिध्वम्

3. अबुधन् अवोधिषुः अबोधिषत
Simple Future .
1. वोधिष्याम I shall वोधिष्ये ' I shall aire ' I shall
. ng

know .' know .' be known. '

2. बोधिष्यसि बोधिष्यसे
Si

Conjugated like
3. बोधिष्यति वोधिष्यते the Atmane.
1. बोधिष्याव: बोधिप्यावहे
Dual

2. बोधिष्यथः बोधिष्येथे
.

3. बोधिष्यतः बोधिष्येते
1. बोधिष्यामः बाधिष्यामहे
Plur

2. वोधिष्यथ बोधिष्यध्वे
.

3. बोधिष्यन्ति वोधिष्यन्ते
Periphrastic Future.
1. बोधितास्मि
' I shall बोधिताहे 'Ishan बोधिताहे ' Ishall
know .' know.' be known .'
. g
.Sin

2. बोधितासि बोधितासे Conjugated like

3. बोधिता बोधिता the Atmane.
 156 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR . [ $ 402—
Parasmai. Atmane . Passire .
1. बोधितास्वः बोधितास्वहे
Dual

2. वोधितास्थः बोधितासाथे
.

3. वोधितारी बोधितारी
1. बोधितास्मः बोधितास्महे
Plur

2. बोधितास्थ बोधिताध्ये
.

3. बोधितारः बोधितारः
Conditional.
1.अबोधिष्यम्' Ishould अबोधिष्ये ' Iknow
should.' अबोधिष्ये be' Ikaown
should. '
.Sing

know .'
2. अबोधिष्यः अबोधिष्यथाः
Conjugated like
3. अबोधिष्यत् अबोधिष्यत the Atmane.
1. अबोधिष्याव अबोधिष्यावहि
.Dual

2. अबोधिष्यतम् अबोधिष्येथाम्
3. अबोधिष्यताम् अबोधिष्येताम्
अबोधिष्याम अबोधिष्यामहि
Plur

2. अबोधिष्यत अबोधिष्यध्वम
.

3. अबोधिष्यन् अबोधिष्यन्त
Benedictive .

1. बुध्यासम् 'knowMay ! ' बोधिषीय ' May I बोधिषीय ' May I bo

Sing

know !' known!'

2. बुध्याः बोधिषीष्ठाः Conjugated like
.

the Atmane.
3. बुध्यात् बोधिषीष्ट
1. बुध्यास्त्र बोधिषीवहि
Dual

बोधिधीयास्थाम्
.

2. बुध्यास्तम्
(3. बुध्यास्ताम् बोधिषीयास्ताम्
1. बुध्यास्म बोधिषीमहि
.Plur

2. बुध्यास्त बोधिषीयम्
3. बुध्यासुः बोधिधीरन्
 Passiv
.a, nd
iParasm
in
Tenses
princip
their
with
Verbs
Irregul
some
List ai
lmaneeal
Alphabe
4of
§03. ar tical
resent
.PVoice
.FFutut
eriph
BPSimple
. Aorist
.enedictive
. erfect
Root
or
वेष्यति
IV
अवैषीत्
.,oIc'P.अor जति
Pविवय
r.lar
*विवाय
.1.अज वीयात्
वेता
वेष्यात
or § 403.)
आजीत्
V.
विवेथ
or
विवायथ अजिता
अजिष्यति
t.brow
,to
.'go
oआrजिय
विवाय
विव्यिय
विव्यथुः
विव्यतुः
विव्यिम
विव्य
विव्युः
CONJUGATION OF VERB8 .

oवेrष्यते oवेrता वे
orषीष्ट
विव्ये
.वीयते
Pass अ.Sg
3.वायि
or
Sg
.अ1.वेषि or
अजिषीष्ट
अजिता
or
अजिष्यते
आजिषि
or वायिषीष्ट
वायिता
वायिष्यते
अवायिषि
may
it
,Ior
avwith
be nd
beginni ng
owel tions
termina
beforo
atfor
substitu ted
must
of
tonses
general
the
•In
L.
except
any
with
beginni nt
ng
consonations
termina
before
substita
bo
optional ted
ly
157
 PVoice
resent
.Root
. erfect Aorist
eriph
BPSimple
.enedictive
ut
.FFut
cl.2PPar
2.
अद्र
अआ or gद
अ.त्ति
II त्स्यति
.1Sअघसत्
अत्ता
अद्यात् 158
eat
't. o )(9267 ज
orघस
जघास
3o)$(आदिथ
2r06
जघसिथ
3" आद
or
जघास
.आ
Du
orदिव
8$(जक्षि
.c)&16 व
यते
.अद्ss जक्षे
or
आदे आ
.Sg
3.दि
Pa अत्स्यते अत्ता अत्सीष्ट
"1. आत्सि
wAअ3. धीते
ith
इprep
.अधिजग
tm े अध
.i}y
or्यष्ट अध्येष्
अध्येत यते
अध्येषीाष्ट
.IV
SANSKRIT GRAMMAR .

A2.ctअधि
)(3l.270 ध्यष्यत
.अध्यगोष्ट
अCond
read
t', oo अध्
or यगीप्यत
.' dy
stu
धीय
अ.Pas s ते or
अ.Sg
3.ध्यायि
अध्यगा
. यि
substitu
for
the is
in र
optional
.,aअद्
Aor
tho•घnd
Perf ted
ly
snbstitated
+
for
arra
aafter
Perf
Aor
WCond
.thend
optionally
in nd
hen
substitution
ttakes
,this
place
Iishu
Cond
the nd
formod
irregularly
shown
,.aAor
Åsro
above
[ $ 403
 4.2cd
ऊर्णोत
ऊर्ग
or
Pऊ.ऊर्जु
और्ण
or नाव
ावीत ्
ऊर्णुनव
lar विता
विष्
ि यति
or ऊोत or
ऊर्ण यात्
t'P.A.
cove
ऊर्जु
और्ण
or r थ
. o ुनवि
नुविथ
वीत्
.v
ऊऊर्ज
orणुवि
ऊर्ण
िष्यत
विता ि
272 व
800
a,ऊ.)(8वMऔर्जुना
ीत्
§ 403.)
ऊर्गु
.c& नुविव
ऊ.Atm
ऊर्जु
र्गुतेनुवे ओर
or्णविष्ट ऊर्णव िष्यते ऊर् ता
or णविor ऊर्णविषीष्ट
or
वMऔिष्ट .-V ऊVण.ुविष्यते ऊर्णविता
ऊ.र्णविषीष्ट
ऊ.Pass
यते
ऊर्जुनुवे Sg
औ3.. र्णावि ऊर्णव
or
ऊर्ण िष्यत
ऊविषविता
ीष्टे
or
. र्णविषि
1.औSg ऊणुविष्यते
ऊर्णविता
ऊर्गुविषोष्ट
or
or

or
औ िषि
ऊर्णाविष्यते
Mवऊर्णाविता
ऊर्णाविषीष्ट
और्णावि
or षि
A1.c।कम्
कAtm
.oc&कामयांच
5.lr.ामयतेक्रे अ
orचीकमत कामयिष
कामयि
or ीष्ट्यते
ता
.'tlove
o कम8,े9
.8)च(24 कमि
अच
कमिष्य
III कम
ता
. षीष ते
्टत
Pas
TÅ.=irae
tms rator .Sgकामि
अ3. = .Atm
=
.ÅA
= tm
tm
tm
कम्यते
CONJUGATION OF VERBS .

अ1.
. कामयिषि
Sg
or or or
अकामिषि
or
कामिष्यते
कामिता
कामिषीष्ट
अकमिषि
or
t.PAor
final
vowel
chang
I•is
Vridd to nar hi
orhe
B.Guņa ed
rales
shoul termi
with
inter
Guņn , eforenatio
he
which medianste
be
subst
optio
the
redup itute
d d
nal
sotice
licat by
tother
i,.in
Nthe.Perf ion
+.(गुप
form
the
कNgenor म्and
m7)tonse
from
their specia
bascs .o.ay sall
159
 .Rootresent
erfect
VP. oice Aorist
. erip
. ened
ut le
PBF.Fut
Simp h ve
icti
क्लप
aकचलप pttmेे
6..-(o)Anit
ल्पत V.
oअक
, rल्पिष्ट कल्पिष्
1.Sg.
कल्पिता
कल्पिषी
or ष्ट यते
हे
o(A1.ci.p चक्लपिष
or
चक्लप्से
भक्कम
o.,IV
r े 160
कलor्प्स्यते कल
or्माहे क्लप्सीष्ट
.
Par
in
P.
tionally
.II पत्
अल कल्प्स्यति कल्म
or ास्मि
tAorhe
.,two
Fut
&
C.
.) ond
.'tbe
fit
o
ple
1.nil
ar
Pao.)-(गुप् अगोपायति
V. गोपायीत्
,&c.गोपायांचकार गोप
orगोप
or ायि
or ाय्
गोप ष्य
ायियात
ता्ति
cl
t'P1. o. अग
,or
V.
.जुग orोपोप
5() 248 ,9ीत् गोपिष्
गोप तायति
or or गुप्यात्
.'(Com
guard अगोप्सीत्
or
IV
.or
ज2Sुगोपिथ
g गोप्स्यति
गोप्ता
.)
कम्
5.
pare जुगोप्य
गोपायांचक्रे
Pass
.गscोपाय्यते अ.Sg
3.गोपायि or
गोप यिष्तायते
गोपाायि गोपायिषीष्ट
or
or
जुग ्यते
गुपुपे अorगोपि गो
orपिष्यते गो
or पिता गोपिषीष्ट
or
or
गोप
गुप
अSg गो
्सी
पा
SANSKRIT GRANNAR ,

.1.गा ष्टयतेयिषि
्स्ना
अगोपि
or
अगुप्सिषि
aगुह ar
-.o("8.ग.P)ptnit
ृहति
जुगृह oV.
,अगृहीत
r ् गृहिष्य
गृहिता ति
or गुह्यात्
cl
1
.'toP.A. VII
अघुक्षत्
जुगोढ
or
ुगूहिथ
48
.,a)ज($2घोक्ष्यति
गाढा
.'
hide
जुगृह
जुगुहिव
जुगुह
.&cor
substituting
Guņa
vowel
its of
longthous
w,I
ithe
(
vfollowed
afinal
I.by f
hen
•snstead
owel
[ $ 403—
 जुगुहे
.गूहते
Atm अगृहिष्ट
oV.
,r गूहि
or ष्यते गृहिता
or गुहिपोष्ट
or
&c.घुक्षत
अor
जुघुले
जुगुहिषे
.
VII
गोढा े
घोक्यत घुक्षीष्ट
5403.]
अगढ़ ).(8365
or

21 s
.गुह्यते
Pass g
Sअ.3;गृहि A
.=tm Åtm
.= . tm
Å=
A.=tm
.A
=tm
rest
the
जागर
Par
cअजाग जागर्
&V. ज.rागति
lजागर
oज.P2k9.जागृ यात्
ागरििता
रीन्
ष्यतारि
ांचक
wake
't. o
.Sg
.P3)($2= 300
c, ass
जजागार
65,3
अजा
ज.D u रिव
1 जाग गार ि
दरिद
VI
.अदर
दरि ्रित
रिष्
द्र
रिद्
rarिद्
्रा
द.Pclo&cरिद्
ददरिद
10. रास
ांच
राति ीत्
ायतिकार दरिद्रयात्
v.दरिद्रौ
2($).द3,coअदरिद्र
'tr00
P.74o ीत्
poor
.'be
दास्यते दासीष्ट
.ददिदीये
Atm .
.4Aदी ीयते
cl11. .
IV
अदास्त
.'tperish
o
द्योतिषी
गोतिता ष्ट
CUNJUGATION OF VERBS .

अद्योतिष्ट
V.
(,3a).or
यदिद्युते
द्युत् ोतते
.22
cl.1AAtm
12. योतिष् यते
P.ptionally
o(.Par .II
अयुतत्
t'.)Ao
ino r
.' ine
sh
Ptho
Aor
.in
Perf
tako
must
aor
may
it
whoro
finalnd
Vriddhi
xcept
etongcs
gonoral
,tho
in
vowol
its
for
Guņa
substitutos
M
•Tass
Perf
.in
Aor ot
ptionally
tonsos
goneral
;nothe
final
its
drops
+fta treated
wtoare
they
,afor
substituted
oughtitbe
Vriddhi
or
Guna
भा
rowel
final
,their
change
मी
17
a1then nd
nd
मि.*दी8horover
Port
.in
isirregular
optionally
.दsame
thedoss
ली
endingी0
;2like
roota
161
 PVoice
.Root
resent
erfect PAorist
Fut
.BFSimple
.enedictive
eriph
ut
'(opt.-
नश्
.न18.
Par
ननाश
or
ननश
श्यति नशिष्यति
नशिता
or
.
II
अनशत्
नश्यात्
l.
P.4c)anit नेशिथ
or
ननंष्ठ 162
नष्टा
नझ्यति
•tperish
.' o ननाश
शि
orनेश्व व
.c&
बभर्
बभ्रज
al.भ6Por
Ut
14.
अभ्राक
।ृज्ज ्जति
ar ज्षीत् भ्रक्ष्यति
or
भ्रष्टा भृज्ज्यात्
.
IV
tP.A.
'fry
:o िभर्जिय
बभ्रज्जिय
ब).2($50,6 अभाीत्
orभय॑ति
भष्टी ,b6).($381
। बर्छ
Lor
बभ्रष्ठ
or
बभर्ज
or
बभ्रज्ज
बभ्रज्ज
वर्जिविव
.&cor
बभर्जे
or
बभ्रज्ज
.भृज्जतेे
Atm "} or
अभ्रष्ट भ्रक्ष्यते
भ्रष्टा
or भ्रक्षीष्ट
or
IV भयंते
अभष्ट
भष्टी भीष्ट
.A=
Pa tm
ssयते
भृज् g रज्जि
SANSKRIT GRAMMAR .

अ.S8भ् .Å=tm Atm

.=
).(8387,6 अर
;or ्जि
A
.=tm
rest
the
ममज्ज ज्जति
lar
P.म6*c15.
मज्ज IV
अमासीत्
झ्यति
मङ्का
.ममज्ज्यात्
to
.'P.
dive
ममज
or ्जि
मम थथ
ममज्ज
c.&
followed
acthe
.by Vriddhi
or
Guņa
requiro
that
nforms
insert
your
,wand
immodiacoly
is
root
,T•Iasal
nhen
T
onsonant
isto
( $ 403

econtracted
may xcept
substitute
+पभ,wherer
r.्रज्ञ्
 ममी
िनोति
म.Par म.VI
ास्यतित्
अमासी माता
मीयात्
cl.5
मि
16.
throw
o
.'tP.
A.
ममिथ
or
ममाथ § 403.)
दी
C(11
). ompare ममी
मिम्यिव
.&c
मिम्यथुः
मिम्ये
. िनुते
मAtm .
IV
अमास्त
मास्यते माता
मासीष्ट
मिम्ये
म. ीयते अ.3Sgमायि मास्यते
or माना
or
मासीष्ट
Pass or

अor
.1Sgमासि मायिष्यते मायित
मायिषीाष्ट
अमायिषि

मPar
.9cl.A.
मीीनाति
P17. .मि
like
rest
the
des
At.'मoीनी ते y
tmtro
6
CONJUGATION OF VERBS.

11ompare
C(.)दी

6. .
cl
Aमृ
18. ममार
or
ममर
नियते IV
. ृत
अम मृषीष्ट
.मास्मि
1.Sg
मरिष्यति
मम र्4थ
5.() 81
Per
in
P.
(b,. ut f
a nd
.Fut
two
the
'.die
a

o d
t)Con
169
 Roo
. t erfoct
resent
P.Voice Aorist
. Penedictive
eriph
ut
B..FSimple
Fut
भमार्जीन्
V.
or
मार्जिष्यति
ममार्ज
मार्जिता
मृज्यात्
ar
pt.rani
.)(ार्टि
मPo19.मृज् 164

cl.
t'P.
o 2
अमार्सीत्
.or
ममा
मIV मार्जिय
276
)(8मार्श
मार्क्ष्यति
wipe
.' ममार्ज
ममार्ज
or
ममृजििवव
ममृज्व
or
ममार्जथ
or
ममृजथुुःः
ममार्जत
or
ममृजतुुःः
ममार्ज
or
ममृजििमम
ममृज्म
or
SAXSKRIT GRAINAR .

मम
or ज
ममारृ्ज
ममा
'oःr
ममृजु
or
ममार्जे
or मार्जिषीष्ट
मार्जिष्यते
ममृजे ृज्यते
.मार्जिता
मPass मार्जि
g
अ.S3or or

अ. मार
S1मार ्जिे षि माट
g ्यत .
मृक्षीष्ट
or
अमृक्षि
osubs
Vrid
4h,;of
iopti
wea
befoGun very
ridd
isValso
in
form dhi
hi
atitu
konal
owel
.avnste sad
re tes
wher
tita ly
tede
[ $ 403
 cl
ली
9.िनाति
.ल20.
Par
or
} Pलिलय अलैषीत्
.oIVr
लेष्यति लoेrता लीयात्
or
oलrलौ
attain
t'; o िल4ाय
ल6.() 29 अलासीत्
.VI लास्यति लाता
§ 103.)
'Â
.4clu
tad लिलयिथ ललिथ
or
.'
here or O
• r

(Compare
दी
.)11 लिलेथ ललाथ
लिलालली
or य
लिल्यिव
.&cलिल्यथः

Atm
ल. ीयते
लिल्ये अल
IV
o. rेष्ट लेorष्यते लेता
or oलेrषीष्ट
अलास्
.IV त
लास्
। यते लाता लासीष्ट
CONJCGATION OF VERBS .

Pass
.लीयते
लिल्ये g ि
अ.S3 लाय लेorप्यते oलrेता oलेrषीष्ट
अ. gलेषि
S1or लoाrस्यते लाता
or ला
orसीष्ट
अorलासि लायिष्
लायितयते
ा लायिषीष्ट
अलायिषि
165
 resent
.PVoice
. erfect
Root Aorist
. . enedictive
eriph.Fut
.BFut
PSimple
1.
.वृत्
cl21. वर्tततmे
.A ववृते भव
oV.
, rतिष्ट वर्तिषीष्ट
वर्तिता
वर्तिष्यते 166
or

oP.
( ptionally Par. .II ृतन्
भव वयंति
Aor
., imple
Sin
Fut
a.Cond
) nd
o
t.'be
'tliko
वृध्oonjugated
,c22.
.grow
वृत्
स्यन्दे
स.Atm ्यन्दते
pt
..o(स्यन्द्
23. अस्यन्दिष्ट
स्यन्दिष्यते
V.
,or
स्यन्दिता
or
स्यन्दिपीष्ट
)c.1Al.
anit सस्यन्दिषे
सस्यन्त्से
IV
o.,अस्यन्त
orr स्यन
स्य
or न्त
्त्सा्यते स्यन्त्सीष्ट
.Par
in
P.
(optionally सअस्यदत्
. ्यन्त्स्यति
II
Fut
Aor
:.,Simple .),d3*($ 70
Cond
.)'o
tand
tflow
,o
.'drop
SANSKRIT GRAMMAR..

Par
2.24.
*cP.
हन .lन्ति
हअवधीत्
हनिष्यति
V. जघान
or
जघन वध्यात्
wpr h
( itep .)2($ 83 जघनिथ
or
जघन्य .),b(870
.)
Å
sometimes जघान
8).( 316
strike
't. o c& ्निव
.जग
,•substitutes
Benedictives
the
Pay
Å
Aor
in
.Ta.;optionally
Pass
lengtboned
not
is
TV
of
vowel
nd
ar
he
tm
Tirregular
Åin
Aor
the
,iw.;and
Pis 7
of
.formod
tm
ar
he
hen
aA8Sslso
ing
ass
or
[ $ 4034
ह. ते
Atm जने अवध
.v िषि हनिष्यते वधिषीष्ट
अह
or
IV
. सि § 403.]
अवध
or
अहथिष्
ाः ठाः
अवध
अह
or तिष्ट
अवधिष्वहि
or
अहस
c.&. ्वहि

जने
ह. न्यते
Pass 3 हनिष
or ि
अ.3Sgघान्यते वधिषीष्ट
or
or हन्ता
or
घानि
घान धि
अविताष्यते घानिषीष्ट
398
($or घान
g िषि
अ.)1S4,$01
अवधिषि
or
CONJUGATION OF VERBS .

अहसि
167.
163 SANSKRIT GRANNAR . [ $ 404

II .-CONJUGATION OF DERIVATIVE VERBAL

BASES .
1. - CONJUGATION OF THE ROOTS OF THE TENTH CLASS
AND OF THE CAUSAL OF ALL ROOTS.
A.-The Roots of the Tenth Class.
§ 404. The Conjugation of the roots contained in the tenth class
( denominated gre, i.e. ' commencing with y ' ) of the vative gram .
5

marians differs from that of the primitive roots collected in the first vive
classes in this, that the personal terminations and the characteristic
marks of the various tenses and moods are not added immediately to the
root, but to a derivative base previously derived from the root. This
derivative base appears not merely in the special tenses, but remains,
with few exceptions, throughout the whole conjugation. E.g. rt.
• to steal;' Derivative base ift; Pres. Ind. Par. Truſa choray -ati;
Perf. iraia ir choray -ásichakára ; Simple Fut. Trgoera choray .
ishyuti; Periph. Fut. Trruar choray-ità ; Bened. Par. iria chor-yút ;
Bened. Atm . perete choray -ishishța; Pass. Pres. Ind. Trta chor.
yate , & c.
(a) Formation of the Derivative Base.
§ 405. 1. The rowel is added to the root ; e.g. rt. 1977, Deriv .
Base चिन्ति ; rt . पी. पीडि ; rt . अर्थ , अथि .
2. The root undergoes the following changes :
(a) Guna is substituted for a penultimate i prosodially ) short vowel ;
e.g. rt: 177 , ifa; rt. 71, ft; rt. gu
3 gfu .
पृथ , afů
(6) Vriddhi is substituted for a fiual vowel; e.g. rt. fa , fa; r. st.
पायि; t. यु, यावि ; rt. धू , धावि ; rt. गृ, गारिः rt. i पारि .
( c) A penultimate ( prosodially short ) is lengthenedl;e.y.rt.
काणि ; rt . मन् , मानि .
( 4)
) era, कीर्त
Penultimate is changed to $ T; e.g. rt. कृत Fifa.ि.
§ 406. The following are the cominou ronts in which the radical vowel
(against § 405. 2, a, e) remains unchanged : rt. qre ( Deriv. Base sítr ),
मुख,र.-स्पृहः कर ( Deri v . Base कथि, ), गण , वन, मह, रच, रस् , रह, वर, स्तन ,
स्व ms
Rt. कन् for opti onally कलि or कालि .
$ 407. Some roots may optionally add stig to the root, instead of :
e.y. rt, ops, afy or spuiia ; rt. 17. nfo or trofa .
 CONJUGATION OF VERBS . 169
§ 414. ]
( 6) Conjugation of the Derivative Base.
§ 493. Roots of the 10th ( churádi) class are like roots ofthe first pine
classes conjugated in three roicos, the Parasmaipada, the Atmanepada,
and the Passive voice, and the remarks in $$ 224 and 225 apply to them
as they apply to primitive roots.
1.-THE PARASMAIPADA AND ATMANEPADA .
A. - THE PRESENT ( INDIC., Potent., IMPERAT.) AND IMPERFECT.
§ 409. The Derivative Base is conjugated like a primitive root in
of the 1st (Chrûdi) class, the final of the deriv. base being treated like a
final of such a root; e. g. rt. ur, Deriv. Base Tift; Special Base ha ;
Pres. Ind . Par. चोरयति, Atm. चोरयते; Pres. Pot. Par. चोरयेत, Atm. चोरयेत:
Pres. Imper. Par. चोरयतु or चोरयतात्, Atm . चोरयताम् ; Imperf. Par . अचो
रयत् ,, Atm. अचारयत .
B. - Tue PERIPHRASTIC PERFECT, The Two FUTURES, TUE CONDI.
TIONAL, AND THE BENEDICTIVE.
$ 410. Roots of the 10th (churadi) class form the Perfect from their
derivative base by means of the ausiliary verbs , f , or at, according to
the rules given in $ § 328 and 329. E. 9. rt. , Deriv. Base ;
Periphrastic Perf. Par. चोरयांचकार, or चोरयामास , or चोरयांबभूव ; Atm.
चोरयांचक्रे , or चोरयामास , or चोरयांबभूव.
§ 411. In the two Futures the terminations given in $ 368, 6, and
$ 373, 6, are added to the derivative base with the intermediate , before
whiclt the final of the derivative base is gunated; e. 9. rt. ur, Deriv.
Base Simple Fut. Par. Torsefa ; Atm. tristà ; Periphr. Fut.
1 Sing. Par. Tergarfen; Atm . sirare.
§ 412. The Conditional is derived from the Simple Future accord
ing to the rule given in $ 378 ; e. g. Condit. Par. Hirtz
, Átm .
अचोरयिष्यत..
§ 413. In the Benedictive Par. the Parasmai. terminations given in
§ 330 , c, are added to the derivat. base, the final 3 ofwhichis dropped ;
e. g. rt. 25, Deriv. Base Tift, Bened. Par. Trata. In Atmane , the
Âtmane. terminations given in § 380, c, are added to the derivat. base
with the intermediate , before which the final of the derivative base
is gunated ; e.g. Bened. Atm . triadite .
C.-THE AORIST.
$ 414. Roots of the 10th ( churidi ) class always take the third or
reduplicated form of the Aorist . The derirative base is reduplicated,
22 .
170 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR . [ $ 415
and the augment is prefixed to the reduplicated form . The terminations are
the same as those of the third forin of the Radical Aorist of primitive roots
(6341,0), and before them the final s of the derivative base is dropped.
B.g. rt. चिन्त , Deriv. Base चिन्ति ; with redupl. and augment अचिचिन्ति ;
with termination of the 1 Sing. Par. अचिचिन्ति + अम् = अचिचिन्तम्; Atm.
अचिचिन्ते . Rt. सूच , 3 Sing. Par. असुसूचत् ; rt. कथ् , अचकयत्.
Note: In the following rules it will be convenient to call the derivative
base, after its final 7 has been dropped , the base - syllable ;; e.g. चिन्त
19
will be called the base -syllable of चिन्ति, चोर् the base- syllable of चोरि
( Deriv. Base of rt. चुर ).
$ 415. The rowel of the base -syllable of a base which begins with a
consonant undergoes in the reduplicated Aorist the following changes :
(a) A penultimate आ is shortened ; penultimate ई, ए, and ऐ are reduc
ed to ç, penultimate 5, 7 and 8t, to 3 ; e.g.
rt. 157; Derir. B. जाथि : Aor. Tar. अजिजयत्.
rt . युः यावि Atm . अयीयवत .
rt. : पारि Par. अपीपरत् .
rt . चित् । चेति Atm. अचीचितत.
rt. सूद . सूदि ; Par. असूषुदत् .
rt . चुर चोरि , अचूचुरत् .
99

(6 ) The penultimate rowel of the base-syllable of rs and certain

other roots may optionally follow ( u ), or remain unchanged ; e.g.
rt. पीड ; Deriv. B. पीडि ; Aor. Par. अपीपिडत or अपिपीडत्.
(c) The penultimate rorel of the base-syllable of सूच , स्तेन् , लोक,
14 and certain other roots must ( against a ) remain unchanged; e.g.
rt. सूच ; Derir. B. सूचि ; Aor. Par. असुसूचत् .
rt. स्तेन् ; स्तेनि : अतिस्तेनत् .
rt . लोच् ; " लोचि ; अलुलोचन .
»

( a ) Penultimate अर , आर , ईर , ( and अल् ) of the base.syllable, being

substitutes for original क, ऋ, (and ल ), remain either unchanged, or अर ,
भार, and ईर are reduced to ( short ) क ( and अल् to ल );.9.
rt. पृथ; Dreir. B. पर्थिः Aor. Par. अपपर्थत् अपीपृथत् .
. , कीर्तिः . अचिकीर्तत् or भचीकृतत् .
$ 416. When the rules giren in the preceding paragraph bave been
applied to the base- syllable, the following rules must be applied to the
vowel of the reduplicative syllable :
 CONJUGATION OF VERBS . 171
$ 417.]
(a) The rowels इs and 3 of the reduplicative syllable are lengthened,
when the base-syllable is prosodially short and commences with only one
consonant ; e.g.
rt. चुर; Deriv. B. चोरि; reduplicated चुचोरि ; by $ 415 ( 2 ) changed to
चुचुर:; becomes चूचुर ; Aor. Par.. अचूचुरत्.
rt. चित् ; Derir. B. चेति, reduplicated चिचति; changed to चिचित्;
becomes चीचित ; Aor. Atm. अचीचितत.
But rt. सूच;; Deriv. B. सूचि:; Red. सुसूवि; remains सुमूच ;; Aor. Par. असुसूचत्.
rt. स्तेन् ; स्तनि ; तिस्तनि; तिस्तेन् : अतिस्तेनन्.
rt. पीड् , पिपीडि ; when remainingपिपीड् अपिपीडत् .
पीडि;
changed to पिपिइ ,, अपीपिडत्.
(6) The vowel st of the reduplicative syllable is changed to , when
the base -syllable is prosodially short and begins with only one consonant ;
and to g, when the base- syllable is prosodially short and begins with more
consonants than one; e.g.
Rt . Deriv . B. Rod . changed to becomes Aor .

मन् मानि ; ममानि ; ममन् ; मीमन् Atm. अमीमनत.

पृ पारि पपारि पपर ; पीपर ; Par. अपीपरत्.
जि ; जाय . जजायि ; जिज्रय " अजिज्रयत्
जजयः
पृथः पर्थि ; पपर्थि ; पपृथ् पीपृथ ; अपीपृथत
but when it rem:.ins पपर्थ , the base -syllable is prosodially long, and
the t of the reduplicated syllable remains unchanged; Aor. Par. अपपर्यत्.
Rt. लक्ष; Aor. Par. अललक्षत्&c .
(6) The vowel of the reduplicative syllable of कथ, रह , स्वर , प्रथ ,
and certain other roots remains unchanged ; that of 79 remains af or is
changed to ई; e.g.
rt . कय ; Aor. Par. अचकथत् ; rt . प्रथ्, अपप्रथत्; rt. गण , अजगणत् or
अजीगणत् .
5417. Derivative bases commencing with vowels are reduplicated thus:
(u ) When the initial vowel is followed by only one consonant, or by
a conjunct the first part of which is neither a nasal nor one of the
consonants corç, the consonant which immediately follows the initial
vowel ( or the substitute of that consonant, see 5 231 ), together with
the vowel s, is inserted after the initial vowel ; e.g.
rt . इल , Derir . Base एलि, without इ, एल; rith reduplic. एलिल; with
auginent ऐलिल; Aor. Par. ऐलिलत्.
 17
.
172 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR . [$ 418—
(6) But when the initial vowel is followed by a conjunct the first part
of which is a pasal or orç, the second consonant of the conjunct or
its substitute , together with the vowel , is inserted after the first
>

consonant of the conjunct ; e.g.

rt. 7o ; Deriv. Base 31751' ; without , 375 ; with reduplic. aprI;
with augment आजिज् ; Aor. Par. आर्जिजन.
rt. 37 € ( for 3767 ) ; Aor. Par, siera ( for pręfaza ).
(e) The roots 557, spel, spa , uş and certain other roots substitute.
37 for the vowel g of the reduplicative syllable ; e.9 .
rt. 57, Aor. Par. 311977 ; rt. Stry, 31rave;rt. 17 , ngho ; rt.
अर्य, Aor. Atm. आर्तथत.
2.-THE PASSIVE.
A.-THE PRESENT (INDIC., POTENT., IMPERAT.) AND IMPERFECT .
§ 418. The Present in its three moods and the Imperfect are formed
from the derivative base in the same manner in which the Present and
Imperfect of the Passive of a primitive root are formed from the root ;
the final of the derivative base, however, is dropped before the charac
teristic syllable 7 of the Passive. E.g. rt. Et,
चुर Deriv. Base iſt ; Pres
Ind. Pass. Fra ; Pres. Pot. Fira ; Pres. Imper. Frgarn ; Imperf.
अचोर्यत ;-rt. पृ, Deriv. Base पारि ; Pres. Ind. Pass. पार्यते; —rt . कृत् ,
Deriv. Base mita ; Pres. Ind. Pass. antozla .
B. - THE PERIPHRASTIC PERFECT, TIE Aorist, The Two FUTURES,
THE ConditioNAL, AND THE BENEDICTIVE.
( a ) .-- The Perfect.
§ 419. The Perfect of the Passive is formed like the Perf. Atmane.,
except that all the three auxiliary verbs , STA , and must be con
jugated in the Atmane. ; e.g. rt . 7, Perf. Pass. inaith, or TT ,
or चोरयांबभूवे.
( ) .- The dorist.
§ 420. The 3rl Pers. Siny.
( a) The 3 Pers. Sing. of the Aor. Pass, of roots of the 10th (churádi)
class is formed by prefixing the augment to the derivative base ; e.g. rt.
चुर , Deriv. B. चोरि ; 3 Sing. Aor. Pass. अचोरि; rt. पी अपीडि; rt. अर्थ ,
rt पृ,
आर्थि ;; t. rt मन् , भमानि.
Vi अपारि ; t.
(6) The rowel op of tę and certain other roots which do not lengthen
their sy in the derivative base, may optionally be lengthened in the
3 Sing. Aur. Pass ; e.g. Start or store.
 $ 423.] CONJUGATION OF VERBS . 173

$ 421. The remaining persons of the Aor. Pass. are formed optionally,
either by augmenting the derivative base and by the addition to it of
the Âtmanepada terminations of the fifth form of the Aorist ( $ 352, 6 )
before which the final इ of the deriv. base is gunated ,-or by adding
the same terminations, without their initial , to the 3 Sing. of the
Aor . Pass . ; e.g.

rt. चुर ; Deriv. Base चोरि ; ISg. Aor. Pass. अचोरयिषि ; or अचारिषि .
rt. पीड़ा पीडि ; भपीडयिषि ; or अपीडिषि .
rt . . > पारि; अपारयिषि ;
t. 1
or अपारिषि .
rt . रह रहि; भरहयिषि ; or अरहिषि ,
or अराहिषि .
( 0 ).- The two Futures, the Conditional, and the Benedictive.
$ 422. The Atmanepada forms of these tenses are likevise used for
the Passive . But the Passive may also be formed from the corre
sponding forms of the Atmane . by leaving out the syllable ore of the
latter, and by changing the vowel of the derivative base as it is changed
in the 3 Sing. of the Aor. Pass.; e.g.
rt. चुर् , Simple Fut. Pass, चोरयिष्यते or चोरिष्यते ।
Periph . Put . चोरथिता or चोरिता :
Condit. अचोरयिष्यत or अचोरिष्यत ;
Bened . चोरयिषीष्ट or चोरिषीष्ट .
rt. रह, Simple Fut. रहयिष्यते or राहिष्यते ;
or रहिष्यते
Periph . Fut . रहयिता or रहिता or राहिता :
Condit. अरहयिष्यत or अरहिष्यत or अराहिष्यतः
Bened. रहयिषीष्ट or रहिषीष्ट or राहिषीष्ट .
Paradigm.
$ 423. Conjugation of rt. चुर् cl. 10. P. A. ' to steal,' in Parasmai.,
Atmane., and Passive:
Parasmai. Atmane . Passive.
Present Indicative.
1. चोरयामि चोरये चोर्ये
S. ing

2. चोरयसि चोरयसे चोर्यसे

3. चोरयति चोरयते चोर्यते

।
 174 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR .
[ § 423—
Parasmai .. Atmane. Passive.
1. चोरयावः चोरयावहे चोर्यावहे
.Dual

2. चोरयथः चोरयेथे चोयेथे

3. चोरयतः चोरयेते चोयते
1. चोरयामः चोरयामहे चोर्यामहे
Plur

2. चोरयथ चोरयध्वे चोर्यध्वे

.

3. चोरयन्तिं चोरयन्ते चोर्यन्ते

Present Potential.

1. चोरयेयम् चोरयेय चोर्येय

S. ing

2. चोरयः चोरयेथाः चोर्यथाः

3. चोरयेत् चोरयेत चोर्यंत
1. चोरयेव चोरयेवहि चोयैवहि
Dual
..

2. चोरयेतम् चोरयेयाथाम् चोर्येयाथाम्

3. चोरयेताम् चोरयेयाताम् चोर्येयाताम्
1. चोरयेम चोरयेमहि चोर्यमहि
.Plur

2. चोरयेत चोरयेध्वम् चोर्यध्वम्

3. चोरयेयुः चोरयेरन् चोर्येरन्
Present Imperative.
1. चोरयाणि चोरयै चोर्य
. g
Sin

2. चोरय or ° यतात् चोरयस्व चोर्यस्व

3. चोरयतु or °यतात् चोरयताम् चोर्यताम्
1. चोरयाव चोरयावहै चोर्यावहै
.Dual

2 चोरयतम् चोरयेथाम् चोयेथाम्

3. चोरयताम् चोरयेताम् चोर्येताम्
चोरयाम चोरयामहै चोर्यामहै
[1 :
Plur

2. चोरयत चोरयध्वम् चोर्यध्वम्

.

3. चोरयन्तु लोरयन्ताम् नोर्यन्ताम्

 CONJUGATION OF VERBS . 175
$ 423.]
Parasmai.. Âtmane. Passire.

Imperfect..
1. अचोरयम् अचोरये अचोर्ये
.Sing

2. अचोरयः अचोरयथाः अचोर्यथाः

3. अचोरयत् अचोरयत अचोर्यत
[ 1. अचोरयाव अचोरयावहि अचोर्यावहि
Dual

2. अचोरयतम् अचोरयेथाम् अचोर्येथाम्

.

13. अचोरयताम् अचोरयेताम् अचोर्येताम्

. अचोरयाम अचोरयामहि अवोर्यामहि
. r
.Plu

2. अचोरयत अचोरयध्वम् अचोर्यध्वम्

3. अचोरयन् अचोरयन्त अचोर्यन्त

Periphrastic Perfect.

Parasmai. Par. or Atm.

1. चोरयांचकार चोरयामास चोरयांबभूव

S. ing

or चकर
2. चोरयांचकर्थ चोरयामासिथ चोरयांबभूविथ
3. चोरयांचकार चोरयामास चोरयांबभूव
1. चोरयांचव चोरयामासिव चोरयांबभूविव
Dual

2. चोरयांचक्रथुः चोरयामासथः चोरयांबभूवयुः

.

3. चोरयांचक्रतुः चोरयामासतुः चोरयांबभूवनुः

चोरयांचकृम चारयामासिम चोरयांबविम
.Plur

2. चोरयांचक्र चोरयामास चोरयांबभूव

3. चोरयांचक्रुः चोरयामासुः चोरयांबभूवुः
 176 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR . [ $ 423

Periphrastic Perfect ( continued ).

Atm . or Pass . Passire.

1. चोरयांचके चोरयामासे चोरयांबभूवे

. g
Sin

2. चोरयांचकृषे चोरयामासिषे चोरयांबभूविषे

3. चोरयांचवे चोरयामासे चोरयांबभूवे
1. चोरयांचकृवहे चोरयामासिवहे चोरयांवभूविवहे
Dual

2. चोरयांचक्राथे चोरयामासाथे चोरयांबभूवाथे

.

13. चोरयांचक्राते चोरयामासाते चोरयांबभूवाते

1. चोरयांचकृमहे चोरयामासिमहे चोरयांबभूविमहे
Plur

2. चोरयांचकृढे चोरयामासिध्वे चोरयांबभूविध्वे or

.

13. चोरयांचक्रिरे चोरयामासिरे चोरयांवभूविरे

Aorist.

Parasmai. Atmane. Passive .

अचूचुरम् अचूनुरे अचोरयिषि or अचोरिषि

. ng

अचोरयिष्ठाः अचोरिष्ठाः
Si

2. अचूचुरः अचूचुरथाः
3. अचूचुरत् अचूचुरत अचोरि
1. अचूनुराव अचूनुरावहि अचोरयिष्वहि अचोरिष्वहि
.Dual

2. अचूचुरतम् अचूचुरेथाम् अचोरयिपाथाम् अचोरिषाथाम्

3. अनूचुरताम् अचूनुरेताम् अचोरयिषाताम् अचोरिषाताम्
11. अचूनुराम अनुरामहि अचोरयिष्महि अचोरिष्महि
. r

2. अचूनुरत अचूनुरध्वम् अचोरयिध्वम् अचोरिध्वम्

Plu

or दम् or शुम्
3. अचूचुरन् अचूचुरन्त अचोरयिषत अचोरिषत
 § 423. ) CONJUGATION OF VERBS . 177

Simple Future.
Parasmai . Atm. or Pass.. Passive.

1. चोरयिष्यामि चोरयिष्ये चोरिष्ये

. ng

2. चोरयिष्यसि चोरयिष्यसे
Si

चोरिष्यसे
3. चोरयिष्यति चोरयिष्यते चोरिष्यते
1. चोरयिष्याव: चोरयिष्यावहे चोरिष्यावहे
Dual

2. चोरयिष्यथ: चोरयिष्येथे चोरिष्येथे

.

3 चोरयिष्यतः चोरयिष्यते चोरिष्येते

1. चोरयिष्यामः चोरयिष्यामहे चोरिष्यामहे
Plur

2. चोरयिष्यथ चोरयिष्यध्वे चोरिष्यध्वे

.

3. चोरयिष्यन्ति चौरयिष्यन्ते चोरिष्यन्ते

Periphristic Future.
Parasmai . Atm . or Pass. Passire.
1. चोरयितास्मि चोरयिताहे चरिताहे
Sing

2. चोरयितासि चोरयितासे चोरितासे

.

3. चोरयिता चोरयिता चोरिता

चोरयितास्व : चोरयितास्वहे चोरितास्वहे
Dual

2. चोरयितास्थः चौरयितासाथे चोरितासाथे

.

चोरयितारी चोरयितारी चोरितारी

1. चोरयितास्मः चोरयितास्महे चोरितास्महे
. r
Plu

2. चोरयितास्थ चोरयिताध्ये चोरिताध्वे

3. चोरयितारः चोरयितारः चोरितारः
Conditional.
Parasmai. Atm . or Pass. Passive .

1. अचोरयिष्यम् अचोरयिष्ये अचरिष्ये

. ng
Si

2. अनारयिष्यः अवारयिष्यथाः अचोरिष्यथाः

3. अवोरयिष्यत् अवोरयिष्यत अचोरिष्यत
238
 ।

178 SANSKRIT GRANNAR . ( $ 424

1. अचोरयिष्याव अचोरयिष्यावहि अचोरिष्यावहि

Dual

2. अचोरयिष्यतम् अचोरयिष्येथाम् अचोरिष्येथाम्

.

3. अचोरयिष्यताम् अचोरयिष्येताम् अचोरिष्येताम्

1. अचोरयिष्याम अचोरयिष्यामहि अचोरिष्यामहि
.Plur

2. अचोरयिष्यत अचोरयिष्यध्वम् अचोरिष्यध्वन्

3. अचोरयिष्यन् अचारयिष्यन्त अचोरिष्यन्त
Benedictive.
Parasmai. Atm . or Pass. Passive

1. चोर्यासम् चोरयिषीय चोरिषीय

. ng

चोरयिपीष्ठाः चोरिषीष्ठाः
Si

2. चोर्याः
3. चोर्यात् चोरयिषीष्ट चोरिषीष्ट
1. चोर्यास्व चोरयिषीवहि चोरिषीवहि
Dual

2. चोर्यास्तम् चोरयिषीयास्थाम् चोरिषीयास्थाम

.

3. चोर्यास्ताम् चोरयिषीयास्ताम् चोरिषीयास्ताम्

1. चोर्यास्म चोरयिषीमहि चोरिषीमहि
Plur

2. चोर्यास्त चोरयिषीध्वम् or ढम् चोरिपीध्वम्or हम्

.

3. चोर्यासुः चोरयिषीरन् चोरिषीरन्

B. The Causal.
8424. A causal form, conjugated in all the tenses and moods of the
three roices, may be derived from any root of the ten classes . It con
reys the notion that a person or thing causes or makes or orders
another person or thing to perform the action or to undergo the state
denoted by the root . E.g.
Rt. Pres. Ind. Par. Prcs. Ind. Caus. Par.
बुध ' to know%3;' बोधति ' he knows;'बोधयति ' he causes to know.'
विष् ' to hate ;' देष्टि ' he hates ;' द्वेषयति ' he causes to hate.'
भू ' to be ; ' भवति ' he is ; '
. भावयति ' he causes to be.'
पन् ' to fall ;' पतति • he falls' पातयति ' he causes to fall, he fells.'
६ 425. The conjugation of the Causal agrees almost entirely with the
conjugation of the roots of the 10th (churádi) class ; it differs from it mainly
§ 429.] CONJUGATION OF VERBS . 179

in this, that causal forins are derivative both in form and in meaning, and
that they may be formed of all roots. The Causal of roots of the 10th
( churâdi) class generally does not differ from the simple verb ; e.g.
rt. ' to steal ;' Pres. Ind. Par. Trafa.he steals ;' Pres. Ind. Caus.
l'ar. artara he causes to steal.'
$ 426. To express the notion of causality a causal baso is derived
from the root ; to this base the terminations of the tenses and moods are
attached in the same manner in which they are attached to the derivatire
base of a root of the 10th (churidi) class ; e.g.
rt. ; Causal Base at; Pres. Ind. Caus. Par. Fría ; Imperf.
अबोधयत् ; Perf. बोधयांचकार, & c.
(a)—Formation of the Causal Base.
§ 427. The Causal base is formed like the derivatire base of a root of
the 10th (churúdi) class ($ 405, 1 and 2) ; e.g.
1. Rt. Te ' to speak ;' Caus. B. O'to cause to speak ;' -- t. Fin
to live ;' Caus. B. f ' to cause to live ;' - rt. and to bind ;' Caus. B.
prov'to cause to bind .'
2. (a) Rt. FATE ' to split ;' Caus. B. Are to cause to split ;'-— rt.
' to know ;' Caus. B. a ' to cause to know ;'-rt. a ' to grow ;'
Caus. B. ar to cause to grow ;' — rt. pg, ' to be fit ;' Caus. B. atq
' to make fit .'

(6) Rt. Tr'to send ;' Caus. B. Tre to cause to send ;' - rt. off ' to
lead ;' Caus. B. TIT ' to cause to lead ;' - rt. Ed ' to praise ;' Caus. B.
Fala ' to cause to praise ;'-- rt. to cut ;' Caus. B. e ' to cause to
cut;'- rt. ñ ' to do,' or rt. ee ' to scatter ;' Caus. B. erit ' to cause to
do,' or ' to cause to scatter.'
( c) Rt. qa ' to fall ;' Caus. B. qTfa ' to cause to fall .'
( 1) Rt. Fat ' to strike ;' Caus. B. Falta " to cause to strike .'
§ 428. Exceptions to $ 105, 2, (6) : Guņi is substitut :d , instead of
Vriddhi, for the final vowel of zą cl. 4;- 'to grow old ,' and of Fe in the
sense of ' to regret, to remember with tenderness ; ' Causal bases sft ' to
cause to grow old,' sai ' to cause to regret.' But ty to remember,'
regularly FINT.
§ 429. Exceptions to § 405, 2, ( c) : The following are the most com .
mon roots which do not lengthen their penultimate y in the Causal:
( a ) rt . 'to strive ;' Caus. B. oft ' to cause to strive .'
130 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR . ( $ 430—
rt. Tak , when it means ' to shake or tremble ;' Caus. B. fas ;
otherwise चालि .
rt.FT ' to be born ;' Caus. B. stit ' to beget, to bring forth .'
rt. TTT, ' to be diseased, as with fever ;' Caus. B. syft.
rt.675 ' to hurry ;' Caus. B. cf.
rt. 277, when it means ' to sound ;' Caus. B. eft ' to cause to sound,
to ring ( a bell ) ;' but infatto articulate indistinctly .'
rt at wheu it means ' to dance ;' Caus. B. aft; but when it means
' to act,' Caus. B. ft.
rt. pe to be famous ;' Caus. B. qfi .
rt. H ?, when it means ' to rejoice ;' Caus. B. Aft; otherwise art.
rt. Wp'to rub ;' Caus. B. aft.
rt, satu ' to suffer pain ;' Caus. B. sefy .
rt. Farr to shine,' when a preposition is prefised to it, forms ;
otherwise it forms optionally ज्वलि or ज्वालि .
(6) Roots ending in 374 (except those mentioned under c below ) ; e.g.
rt. TA ' to go.” Caus. B. TTTA ' to cause to go;' rt. 4 ' to stride,' Caus. B.
in ' to cause to stride.'
( c) The roots sta'to go,' &c., 4 ' to love,' and 94 ‘ to eat,' & c .,
follow the general rule ; Caus. bases आनि, कामि, and चामि . The roots
77'to bend' and ' to vomit ,' when a preposition is prefixed to them,
form नमि, वमि ; otherwise they form optionally नमि or नामि, वनि or वामि .
The rt. 27 , when meaning ' to eat,' forms in the Causal Oft ; otherwise
it forms A. The rt. Tg in the sense of ' to see,' forms in the Causal
शामि ; in other senses it forms शमि .
( 1 ) Exceptions to the abore rules are found in the works of the best
writers.
§ 430. (a) Most roots ending in 5T ( 5,9, or sit, $ 2970), and the
rcots fa ' to throw,' ' to destroy,' ' to perish ,' the final of which is
changed to ST ( note on $ 403, 11 ), insert the consonant q between their
final 91 and the vowel 7 of the causal base ; e.g.
rt. T‘to give ; Caus. B. irfa • to cause to give.'
rt. ' to suck ;' Caus. B. yra ' to cause to suck .'
rt. * ' to sing ;" Caus. B. tria ' to cause to sing.'
rt. ' to cut ; ' Caus. B. eiro ' to cause to cut.'
rt. For to throw ; Caus. B. Aria ' to cause to throw.'
 CONJOGATION OF VERBS . · 181
§ 431. ]
( 6 ) The roots ar to drink,' ' to weave,' o ' to cover,' q ' to call ,'
सै ' to waste,' छो ' to cut,' शो ' to sharpen,' and सो ' to finish' insert
the consonant q; e.g.
rt. पा ' to drink;' Caus. B. पायि ' to cause to drink .'
rt. to call ;" Caus. B. gife ' to cause to call.'
cut ;'
rt. छो ' to cut3B Caus. B. छायि ' to cause to cut.'
( c) Some roots shorten their 34T before the inserted :
rt. * ' to waste away ;" Caus. B. 479.
rt. fr or to cook ;' Caus, B. 9 .
rt. FTT forms Fing in the sense of to cause to see, to exhibit ; to slay ;
to gratify ;' but Fifa ' to cause to know ;' & c.
rt. ग्ला or ग्लै ' to be languid' and it. ना ' to bathe' optionally form
ग्लापि or ग्लपि, and खापि or सपिः but when a preposition is prefixed to
them, only one and ana.
§ 431. The following roots form their Causal Base irregularly :
1. इ ' to go' forms its Caus. B. from गम् , गमि ; e.g. 3 Sing. Pres. Ind .
Caus. Par. गमयति ' he causes to go ; but when it means ' to understand ,'
it forms regularly आयि ( eg. Caus. of s with प्रति, प्रत्याययति ' he
causes to understand' ); and when with tho it means ' to read , it forms
आपि ( e.g. अध्यापयति ' he causes to read or study, he teaches ' ).
Root. Caus. Base.. 3 Sing. Pres. Ind. Caus.
6
2. ऋ to go ;' अर्पि ; Par. अर्पयति • he causes to go, he moves .'
3. क्रूय् ' to be wet' &c.; कोपि ; " tara he makes wet,' & c.
4. की ' to buy ; क्रापि ; , क्रापयति ' he causes to buy.'
5. माय् ' to tremble ;' भ्मापि ; मापयति ' he causes to tremble.'
6. गुह् ' to hide ; ' गृहि ; गृहयति ' he causes to hide.'
7. चिcl.5."to gather ;' चायि or " चाययति
he causes to gather.'
चापि ; » चापयति
cl. 10. " ;
S चयि or चययति ।
9 9

एचपिः चपयति ।
8. जागृ ' to wake; जागरि ; जागरयति । he rouses...'
9. जि ' to conquer ;' जापि ; जापयति —he causes to conquer.'
10. दरिद्रा to be poor ;' दरिद्रि ; दरिद्रयति ' he makes poor.'
11. दुष् ' to sin ;' दूषि ; दूषयति ' he causes to sin%3' in the
serse of ' to make deprared ' it forms optionally दूषि or दोषि ( दूषयति
or दोषयति ).
182 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR . [ $ 431
Root. Caus. Base. 3 Sing. Pres. Ind. Caus.
12. धू ' to shake ;' धूनि ; rar. धूनयति ' he causes to shake.'
13. पा ' to protect ;' पालि ; " पालयति ' he protects.'
14. प्री ' to dclight ;' प्रीणि " मीणयति • he causes to delight.
भायि : भाययति ' he frightens with.'
15. भी ' to fear ;' भापि ; Atm. भापयते
भीषि : भीषयते } " he inspires fear.'
भ्रज्जि ; Par. भ्रज्जयति
16. भ्रज् ' to fry ;' ' he causes to fry .'
भर्जि ; 19 भर्जयति
17. मृज् ' to wipe%3;' मार्जिा मार्जयति
' he causes to wipe.'
18. र ' to colour ;' रश्चि : " रञ्जयति he colours ;' but in the
sense of ' to hunt deer,' it forms रजि , रजयति.
Root. Caus. Base. 3 Sing. Pres. Ind. Caus.
19. रथ् ' to perish ;' रन्धि ; Par. रन्धयति « he subdues.'
20. रम् ' to desire%3;' रम्भि : " रम्भयति • he makes desirous.''
21. री to go,' & c.; रोपिः रेपयति • he causes to go.''
22 . • to
रोहि or , रोहयति
• he causes to grow.'
रुह gror ;' { रोपि रोपयति }
ि ' he causes to obtain.'.'
23. लम् 'to obtain ; लम्भि ; " लम्भयत
लायि or लाययति used in various senses, for
लीनि or लीनयति which see the Diction
24. ली to attain%3'
लापि or . लापयति
ary .
लालि " लालयति
' he causes to blow,' &c.
वा 'to blor;' {ववाापिज वापयति
25. वा ' to blow ;' वाजयति • he shakes.'
or , वाययति
26 . ; {वायि
# ' to conceire ;{ वापः वापयति } ' he causes to conceire ;'
in other senses it forms regularly only वायि, वाययति .
Root. Caus. Basc. 3 Sing. Pres. Ind. Caus.
27. to select ;' प्लेपिः ar. ब्लेपयति he causes to select .'
( शाति ; शातयति ' he causes to fall.'
28. शा ' to fall ;' { शादि शादयति • he causes to go.'
साधि साधयति he accomplishes, he pre
29. सिथ् 'to be accom . pares.''
plished ,' &c.; संधिः सेधयति be niakes perfect' (only
used of sacred things).
 CONJOGATION OF VERBS. 183
§ 433.]
Root.. Caus . Base . 3 Sing. Pres. Ind. Caus.
30. स्काय् ' to swell ;' स्फावि ; Par.स्फावयति ' he causes to swell.'
स्फोरयति
131.. स्फुर् ' to shine ;' { स्फोरि or
स्फुर %' स्फारि स्कारयति
' he causes to shine.'

इस्मायि ; स्माययति he causes a smile by .'

32. स्मि ' to smile3B स्मापि ; Atm. स्मापयते ' he astonishes.'
33. हन् ' to strike;' घा ति ; Par. घातयति ' he causes to strike .'
31. ही 'to beashamed;' इपि " इपयति he inakes ashamed .'
( 0) -Conjugalion of the Cuusal Base.
$ 432. The Causal Base is conjugated like the Derivatire Base of
a root of the 10th ( churádi ) class in all the teases and moods of the
Parasmaipada, Âtmanepada, and Passive ; e.g. rt. ' to do,” Caus. B.
कारि ; Pres. Ind. Par. कारयति ' he causes ( a person) to do (something for
somebody else); Atm. कारयते ' he causes (a person) to do (something for
himself ) '; Pass. कार्यते • he is made to do.'
§ 433. Paradigm : The 3 Sing, of all the tenses and moods in Par.,
'Atm., and Pass., of the Causal of rt. बुध् ' to know , Causal Base बोधि .
Parasmai. Atmane.. Passirc.

Pres . Ind.. बोधयति बोधयते बोध्यते

Pres. Pot. बोधयेत् बोधयेत बोध्येत
Pres. Imp. बोधयतु or यतात् बोधयताम् बोध्यताम्
Imperf. अबोधयत् अबोधयत अबोध्यत
Par. Far. or Atm. Atm. or Pass. Pass..

Per. Perf. बोधयांवकार बोधयामास, बोधयांचक्रे वोधयामासे,

बोधयांबभूव बोधयांबभूवे
Par. Atm. Pass .

Aor. 1 Sing. अबूबुधम् अबूबुधे अबोधयिषि or अबोधिषि

3 Sing. अबुबुधत् अवधत अबोधि
Parasmai . Atm. or Pass.. Passive .

Simple Fut. बोधयिष्यति बोधयिष्यते बोधिष्यते

Periph. Fut. बोधयिता बोधयिता बोधिता
Condit. अबोधयिष्यत् अबोधयिष्यत अबोधिष्यत
Bened . बोध्यात् बोधयिषीष्ट बोधिषीष्ट
184 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR . [ $ 434
( c)-Further Illustrations of the Rules concerning the Formation of
the Aorist ($ 414 ), and some additional Rules :
$ 434. (a) Examples of $ 415 ( a ) :
rt. पत् ; Caus. B. पाति ; Aor. Par . अपीपतत् .
rt . नी : नायि ; अनीनयत् .
rt . लू लावि अलीलवत् .
rt . कृ कारि ; . अचीकरत् .
rt. भिन् भेदि अबीभिदत.
rt . तुः तोदि । .
अतूतुदत् .
(8) The penultimate rowel of जीव ' to live,' दीप् ' to shine, ' पीह
' to press,' भाष ' to speak,' भास् ' to shine,' भ्राज् ' toshine,' मील् ' to close,
कण् ' to sigh,' रण् 'to sound,' भण् ' to speak ,' लुप् ' to break' and some
other roots may optionally follow ( a ), or remain unchanged ; e. g .
rt. जीव ; Caus. B. जीवि; Aor. Par. अजीजिवत् or अजिजीवन.
rt . भाष्क 11 भाषि; अबीभषत् or अबभापत् .
rt . भ्राज् , भ्राजि ; 95 अबिभ्रज or अबभ्राजत्.
rt . भा ; ,, भाणि अबीमणत् or अबभाणत्.
rt . लुप लोपि ; अललपत् or अलुलोपत्.
(c) The penultimate rowel of शाम् ' to command, वाथ् ' to hurt,' याच
to ask,' टोक् ' to approach' and some other roots must remain
anchanged ; c. g .
rt. शाम् Caus. B. शासि ; Aor. Par. अशशासत्.
rt. ढोका टोकि अडुढौकत्.
( d ) Examples of 8415 ( 4) :
rt . कृत ; Caus. B. कति ; Aor. Par. अचकर्तत् or अचीकृतत.
rt . स्तृह स्तीहि ; 99
अतिस्तीहत् or अतिरतृहत्
rt . मृत मार्जि अममा त् or अमी मृजत्.
१. क्लप कल्पि ; ॥ अचकल्पत् or अचीलपन.
5435. (a) Examples of $ 416 (0) :
rt. भिद् Caus. B. भेदि ; Aor. Par. अबीभिदत् .
rt . तु तोदि ; .
अनतुदन .
( 8 ) Examples of $ 416 (8) :
rt . पर ; Caus. B. पाठि ; Aor. Par. अपीपटत.
rt . नी : नायिः अनीनयन .
§ 437.) CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 185

rt. कृ ; Caus. B. कारि ; Aor. Par. अचीकरत् .

rt . त्य " , त्याज , अतित्यजत् .
( c) The roots T'to hasten,' & 'to purify,' *' to be,' L ' to bind ,' I
' to bind' &c., f'to sound,' and ' to cut' take regularly the rowel
in the reduplicative syllable ; e.g.
rt. भू ; Caus. B. भावि ; Aor. Par . अबीभवत् .
The roots Ey ' to more,' I ' to run, ' ! ' to go ' g ' to swim , '
' to hear,' and a ' to flow ' take in the reduplicative syllable optionally .
or J; e.g.
rt. च्यु ; Caus. B. च्यावि ; Aor. Par. अचिच्यवत् or अचुच्यवत्.
Other roots in 3 or 5 take in the reduplicative syllable F if the root
begins with one consonant, and 3, if it begins withmore consonants ; e.g.
rt. Caus. B. दावि Aor. Par. अदूदवत् .
rt . गुः , यावि , अदुद्यवत् .
(c The vowel sy of the reduplicatire syllable of ca ' to hurry ,'
'to burst,' प्रथ् ' to be famous,' अद् 'to rub,' स्तु to spread ,' स्सा to
restrain,'and स्मृ to remember' remains unchanged ; e.g.
rt. स्वर , Caus. B. स्वरि Aor. Par. अतत्वरत् .
rt . स्तृः 7 स्तारि " अतस्तरत .

5 436. ( a) Examples of $ 417 (0) :

rt. अद ; Caus. B. आदि; Aor. Par. आटिटत.
rt. अथा आशि; आशिश .
rt. इष एषि ऐषिषत् .
rt . ईभ 9 ईक्षिा ऐचिक्षत.
(७) Examples of $ 417 (8) :
rt . उन्द्र Caus. B. उन्दि ; Aor. Par. औन्दिदन .
rt . अञ् । अश्चि ; आश्विजन्,
rt. अर्च; 99 अचि ; आर्चिचत .
rt. उज् (for उद्ज्ञ ) , उब्जि ; औजिजत्.
rt. ऋ ; अर्पि ; आर्पिपत्.
§ 437. Alphabetical list of roots, the Reduplicated dor. of the Causal
of which is formed irregularly :
1. rt. E with prep. अधि ' to read , Caus. B. अध्यापि ; Aor. Par. अभ्या .
पिपत् or अध्यजीगपत् ( compare $ 403, 3 ).
24 •
186 SAXSKRIT GRINNAR . [ § 435—
ई! ' to enry ;' Caus. B. इप्य ; Aor. ऐषिष्यत् or ऐध्यियत्.
2. rt . ईर्ण्य
3. rt . 3o to cover ;' ऊर्णावि ; . औणूनवत्.
9)

4. ' to snell ;'

rt . घ्रा घ्रापि ; अजिघ्रपत् or अजिघ्रिपत् .
5 . rt . चेट् ' to stir ;' चेष्टि ; अचिचेष्टत् or अचचेष्टन्.
6. rt . द्युत् 'to shine ; द्योति ; अदिद्युतत्.
7. rt . पा to drink ;' पायि ; अपीप्यत्.
8. rt. वेष्ट ' to surround :,, वेष्टि अविवेष्टत् or अववेष्टत् .
9. rt. वि to grow ;' श्वायि ; अशिश्वयत् or अशूशवत् .
10. rt. Fer ' to stand ;' 9) स्थापि : अतिष्ठिपत्.

11. rt . स्फुर् ' to shine; ' { कोरि

स्फारि or अपुरफरन.
12. rt. स्वप् ' to sleep :' स्वापि ; असूषुपत्.
13. rt. हे to call ;" द्वायि ; अजूहवत् or अजुहावन्.
§ 438. The 3 Sing. Aor. Passire :
(a) Examples of 8420 ( a) :
rt. भि ;: Caus. B. भेदि ; 3. Sing. Aor. Pass. अभेदि.
rt . बुधः बोधि 9 , 9 अबोधि .
rt . दा ; दापि , अवापि .
(0) The rowel s7 of roots which retain this rowel unchanged in
the Causal base ($ 429) while according to the general rule they ought
to lengthen it, and the ( short) 37 of the Causal bases of the roots enume
rated in § 430 (c), is optionally lengthened in the 3 Sing. of the Aor.
Pass. of the Causal ; e.g.
rt. घर : Caus. B. पटि ; 3. Sing. Aor. Pass. अपटि or अघाटि .
rt . श्रा ; श्रपि ; " " अश्रपि or अश्रापि .
2. -THE DESIDERATIVE .
$ 430. A desideratire form, which likewise is conjugated in all the
tenses and moods of the three voices, may be derived from any primitive
root of the first nine classes, from the deriratire base of any root of the
10th ( churidi) class, and from any causal base. It conveys the notion that
a person or thing wishes or is about to perform the action or to undergo
the state expressed by the root or the derivative base. E.g.
Rt. Pres . Ind . Par . Pres. Ind. Des. Par.
en ' to do ;' करोति ' he does%3' चिकीर्षति + he wishes todo.
L ' to be ;' भवति ' he is%3 बुभूषति • he wishes to be.'
बुध ' to know ;' बोधति · he knows ;' बुधोधिषति he wishes to know. '
गम् 'togo ; गच्छति ' he goes%3;' जिगमिषति •' he wishes to go.'
पत् ' to fall ;' पतति • he falls ;' पिपतिषति ' he is about to fall .'
 § 443. ] COXJCGATION OF VERB3 . 137

Derir. B. ( of rt. I cl. 10 ) ' to steal ;'

Pres. Ind. Par. Ticara ‘ he steals ;'
Pres. Iud. Des. Par. Titaa he wishes to steal.'
Caus. B. a ( from rt. n ) to cause to know ;'
Pres. Ind. Caus. Par. artea " he causes to know ;'
Pres. Ind. Des. Par. of Caus. Jauregia ' he wishes to cause
to know. '

§ 410. In order to impart to a root or verbal base the pecaliar sease

of wishing, desiring, &c ., which is denoted by the Desidcrative, a desi.
derative base has to be derived from it, to which base the terminations
of the tenses and moods are attached according to certain rules which
will be given below ; e.g. rt. ap; Desid. Base Try , Pres. Ind. Des. Par.
बुभूषति ;; Impf.. अत्रुभूषत् ; Perf. भूषांचकार , etc.
(a) -Formation of the Desiderative Buse .
$ 441. The Desiderative Base is formed by adding to the root or base
the syllable # ( changeable to by $ 59 ), and by at the same time
reduplicating the root or base ; e.g.
rt. Farg'to split ;' Desid. B. rahatca ' to wish to split.'
rt. IIT ‘ to enjoy ;' " बुभुक्ष to wish to enjoy.'
rt . op ' to be ;' ' to wish to be .'
Caus. B. ar to cause to kuo ;' Desid. B. FT to wish to
cause to know.'
$ 412. In the application of the preceding general rule it is necessary
to observe the following special rules, which will show , (1 ) when the inter
mediate rowel z must or may be inserted before the syllable # ( or );
(2) what changes the letters of the root or base undergo ; and (3)
how the general rules of reduplication ( $ 230) are modified in the
formation of the desiderative base.

1. - Jilition to the root or base of the syllable & ( or ).

§ 4:13. The syllable æ is added without the intermediate -
(a) To ani! roots ($ 298, a), and to all roots ending in 3 or 5,
escept those to which any of the following special rules apply ; e.g.
rt. qp ' to drink ;' Desid . B. FTITE ' to wish to drink, to thirst.'
rt . f ' to lead ;' Fonts to wish to lead .'
rt . 97'to cook ;' 1997 ' to wish to cook .'
.)
188 SANSKRIT GRAUMAR . ($ 444–

rt. I ' to praise ;' Desid . B.TR ' to wish to praise .'
rt. 'to cut;' » Song ' to wish to cut.'
(6) To the roots IT'to hide' and TE ' to seize;' ( Desid . Bases :
जुघुक्ष and जिवृक्ष ).
( e) To the five roots to be fit,' 77 ' to be,' q ' to grow ,' TU ,
pra'to drop,' in Parasmai.
and Feren In Âtmane. the first four roots must
insert , and Ferry may do so optionally. E.g.
Pres. Ind . 17 cata ;
rt. 7 ; Desid . B. in Par. fia ;; Pres.
Atm . विवर्तिषः विवर्तिषते .
rt. स्यन्द " Par. सिस्यन्त्स ; " सिस्यन्त्सति :
Atm. सिस्यन्त्स or , सिस्यरसते or
सिस्यन्दिष : सिस्यन्दिषते.
$ 414. The syllable a may be a dded with or without the inter
mediate -
( a) To all optionally -anit roots ($ 298, ), except 37 , TT ( $ 145),
गुह , and except tre
स्यन्द in Parasmai. ($ 443 ); e.g.
rt. ay ' to tear ; ' Desid . B. faf ve or fer ' to wish to tear .'
rt. to enjoy ;' तितर्पिष or तिप्स ' to wish to enjoy .'
( ) To the root 7, and to all roots ending in F, except कृand I
($ 445) ; the intermediate / may optionally be lengthened after these
roots ; e.g.

rt. I ' to choose ;' Desid. B. fagfter or fatte or 394'to wish to choose .'
rt. g ' to cross ;' तितरिष or हितरीष or कितीर्ष ' to wish to crost. '
(e) To roots ending in : when & is added without , the final
of these roots is changed to y; e.g.
rt. Fer ' to play ;' Desid. B. Fazite or gas to wish to play.'
( 1) To Foto corer,' v'to prosper,' ' to cut,' z 'to kill,'
' to play,' (deriv. B. of rt. 779 cl. 10 and optional causal B. of
6
rt. 7 ),a7 ' to stretch,' TE ' to kill,' 774 ' to deceive,' a ' to be poor,'
ga ' to dance,' qq ' to fall,' ' to bear,' ' to fry,' I ' to join,' fine
' to go,' 7 ' to obtain ;' e.g.
rt. 7 ' to cut ;' Desid . B ftarac or ' to wish to cut.'
rt. Fise ' to go ;' Parufiq or feruite ' to wish to go. '
( e) # is added with in Parasmai., but without g in Âlmane, to the
roots op ' to stride,' 74 ' to go,' and < ' to flow ;' e.g.
 CONJUGATION OF VERBS .
189
§ 446.]
It. 9 ; Desid. B. in Par. Po ; Pres. Ind . 17 * ra ;
9 in Âlm . F * ; चिकंसते .
§ 445. The syllable is added with the intermediate -
To the roots na ' to anoint,' arst ' to pervade,' te ' to go,' 'to
scatter,' I ' to derour,' Į ' to respect,' q ' to hold,' & (cl. 1) ' to purify.'
93 ' to ask ,' PER ' to smile,' to all roots which do not fall under $6 443 and
4 + 1, and to all derivative bases of roots of the 10th (churáli) class and all
causal bases (exceptafa ); e.g.
rt . कृ ; Desid. B. चिकरिष .
rt. FEH ; सिस्मयिष ..
rt. क्रीड़ ; . „ faisy ' to wish to play. '
Note: The intermediate į is not lengthened in the Desid . B. of
and T.
2. - Changes of the root or base before # ( or ) .
§ 419. Vowels of roots and bases undergo the following changes
before the syllable a (or ) :
( a ) Final 7 and 3 are lengthened, and final # and are changed
to šs or, after labials, to I , when the syllable # is added without
intermediate ; e.g.
rt. f'to conquer ;' Desid . B. its ' to wish to conquer.'
' to wish to run .'
rt. I ' to run ;' 9)

rt. 5 ' to do ;' चिकीर्ष ' to wish to do .'

fants ' to wish to cross.'
et. to cross ;'
rt. to die ;'
मुमूर्ष ' to be about to die .'
' to wish to fill.'
rt. q ' to fill ;' पुपूर्ष
(6) Final , $ , 3, 5 , +, and Ę are gunated , when the syllable & is
added to the root or base with the intermediate Tic.g.
rt. FFH ' to smile ;' Desid . B. faenfers ' to wish to smile.'
rt . ' to join ;' यियविष ' to wish to join.'
rt. g (cl. 1) ' to purify ;' पिपविष ' to wish to purify.'
rt. 'to respect;' ,1 दिदरिष
99
to wish to respect .'
Paafts or faada 'to wish to cross.'
r. o ' to cross ;'
Caus. B. II 'to cause to know ;' TANT ' to wish to cause to know.'
190 SANSKRIT GRAVUAR . [$ 447–

(c) Penultimate ( prosodially short) 3, 3 , + , and are gunated,

when # is added to the root with the intermediate ; e.g.
rt. ' to wish ;' Desid. B. Trong ' to desire to wish.'
विवर्तिष ' to wish to be .'
rt. 7वृन् ' to be ;'
rt.com ' to be fit ;' faqe to wish to be fit.'
6

rt. fae ' to play ;' दिदेविष “ to wish to play .'

The same rowels remain unchanged when # is added to the root with.
out 7 ( Desid. B. fizia, 1955, & c.). Obserre § 444, c (Desid. B. gan).
दुयूष
(c ) The substitution of Guņa for penultimate or 3 , taught under (c),
is optional in the case of roots beginning with consonants and ending
with any consonant escept ; e.g.
rt . ga ' to shine ;' Desid. B. faqjag or faarfag ' to wish to shine.'
rt . is to be moist ;' , ,, चिक्लिदिष or चिक्केदिष ' to wish to be moist.'
The same rovels remain unchanged when # is added without g
( Desid. B.forgia ).
Exception : The penultimate ronel of faç'to know ,' ' to steal,' and
रुद'10 weep' remains unchanged: Desid . B. falaren, gafar, Frfeq.
§ 447. (a) Radical vowels of roots which do not fall under any of the
rules given in the preceding paragraph, remain unchanged (final ,
and sit being sur by $ 297, ) ; e.g.
rt. 97 ' to cook ;' Desid . B. 1996 ' to wish to cook .'
rt. 95 ' to read ;' > ragita ' to wish to read .'
rt. sta ' to live ;' 9 99 जिजीव
Hatay िष ' to wish to live .'
rt. a ' to smell ;' जिघ्रास ' to wish to smell.'
rt. # ' to sing ;' जिगास
" PETITIE " to wish to sing .'
it. at ' to perish ;' दिदीष ' to wish to perish .
(6) Final radical consonants combine with the F of the syllable
according to the rules in 8 309 ff.
3.- Special rules of Reduplication .
§ 448. Roots or bases beginning with consonants, after they have
undergone the changes required by the preceding paragraphs, are
reduplicated according to the general rules laid down in $ $ 230 and 231 ;
afterwards is substituted for the rowel of the reduplicatire
syllable. E.g.
rt. प ; by $ 445 & 447 पठिष ; by $ 231, पपटिष ; Des. B. पिपटिष .
rt. 9 ; $ 443a & 447 पास : $ पपासः " पिपास .
S

rt. त्य , 1967 ; तत्यक्ष तित्यक्ष.

a
$ 450.] CONJUGATION OF VERBS . 191

st. & ; by $ 444 6 & 446 a ats; by $ 231, e prats.

rt . Di § 443 a & 446 a ; $ मुमूर्ष.
rt. दिव § 444 c यूष $ यूष .
Derir. B. if (of rt. 7 cl. 10); by $$ 445 and 445,6 ;
Desid. B. चुचोरयिष.
Caus. B. Ale (from rt. at) ; by SS 445 and 446, 6 araieta ; bs ;
$ 231 , e Tarafs ; Desid. B.Fardian.
Note : The change of initial radical to į taught in § 232 does not
take place in the DesiJ . of a primitivc root when the characteristic of
the Desid. is changed to t ; e.g. rt. FF , feel fat ; rt. FFA, Ferraga ; rt.
सु , सुसूपति.-- But rt. स्था , तिष्ठासति ; rt . सद्, सिषत्सति ; and Desid. of the
Causal base of सु, सुषावयिषति, & c . - But स्तु forms तष्टूपति.
§ 140. Causal Bases in 31ra , derived from roots in 3 or 5 , are
slightly irregular as far as regards the rowel of the reduplicatire syllable
of the Desid. Basc (compare § 435, c) :
(a) The causal bases of , L, I , I, 1 , 5 , and is follow the general
rule ( $ 418 ) ; c.g.
Caus. B. wrê ( from rt. 11 ) ; Desid. B. of the Caus. Paprasta.
(6) The causal bases of 2, 5, 9, , P, and g follow the general rule
or take the vowel in the reduplicative syllable ; e.g.
Caus. B. anh ( froin rt. 5 ) ; Desid. B. of the Caus. ferare or
मुद्रावयिष.
(c) The causal bases of other roots in 3 or 5 take the romel 3 in
the reduplicatire syllable; e.g.
Caus. B. erca (from rt. g ); Desid. B. of the Caus. gerarea.
§ 450. Roots or bases beginning with vowels, after having undergone
the changes required by the preceding paragraphs, are reduplicated
according to the rules in § 417 a and 6 (not c) ; e.g.
rt. syf ' to go ;' Desid . B. Hier to wish to go.'
rt. 59 ; by SS 445 and 446 ; Desid. B. grafore.
rt. SGT to see ;' Desid . B.Ara.
rt. F ' to go ;' by $$ 445 and 446 (6) TRT ; Desid . B. stitit .
rt. 379L ' to anoint ;' Desid. B. Haha.
rt. #st ' to go ;' by $$ 445 and 446 ) Tre; Desid. B. STAT .
192 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR . [$ 451

Caus. B. एषि ( from rt. इष् ) ; by $$ 445 and 416 ( 8) एषयिष ; Desid.
B. एषिषयिष.
$ 451. The following roots and bases form their Desiderative Base
irregularly :
1. अद ' to eat' forms its Desid. B. from घस्, जियत्स (5310,0) ;
3 Sing. Pres. Ind. Par. जियत्सति ' he wishes to eat.'
2. Sirg‘to obtain,' Desid. B. SCH ; 3 Sing. Pres. Ind. Par. scara
• he wishes to obtain .'
3. ç'to go forms its Desid. B. from t ; e.g. 3 Sing. Pres. Ind.
Par. जिगमिषति, Atm. जिगांसते ' he wishes to go.' But when it means
'to understand,' it is regular ; e.g. Desid. of 5, with yra , garrafa he
wishes to understand.' When इ. with अधि, means ' to read ,' it forms
जिगांसते ; e.g. अधिजिगांसते ' he wishes to read.:-The root गर ' to go;
when it is not a substitute for g, forms in Åtm. regularly fataa ;
... संजिगंसते ' he wishes to meet.'
The Desid. of the Causal of s, with prep . अपि (5 431, 1 ), is either अ .
ध्यापिपयिषति or अविजिगापयिषति ' he wishes to teach' (compare $ 403, 3) .
4. ईर्ण्य 'to enry ;' Desid. B. ईय॑यिष or ईय॑षिष ; 3 Sing. Pres. Ind.
Par. friginal or freagra.he wishes to envy.'
Root. Desid. B. 3 Sing. Pres. Ind. Des.
ऊर्जुनूष or अर्जुनूषति he wishes to
5. ऊ M to cover ;' ऊर्जुनविष or अर्जुनविषति
अर्जुनविष ; ऊर्गुनविपति } cover .'

ईसति • he wishes to pros

6. ऋ to prosper ;' { अदिधिष; अर्दिधिषति per .'
y जिगरिष or जिगरिषति • he wishes to
7. to swallow ;'
7. Pto जिगलिष ; जिगलिषति } swallow.'
8 प्रह ' to seize ;'
जिघृक्षः जिघृक्षति ' he wishes to seize.'
चिचीष or चिचीपति
१.चि 'to gatheri ' he wishes to gather.''
विकीष चिकीपति
10. जि ' to conqueri' जिगीष जिगीषति ' he wishes to conquer .'
11.ज्ञपि base of cl. 10.or ( जीप्स or ज्ञीप्सति :
optional Caus. B. of जिज्ञपयिष ; जिज्ञरयिषति .
ज्ञा ; but ज्ञापि opt.
Caus. B. of ज्ञाः जिज्ञापयिष जिज्ञापयिषति.
 CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 193
$ 451.)
Root. Desid . B. 3 Sing. Pres. Ind. Des.
तितंस or तितंसति
12. तन् ' to stretch ; तितांस or तितांसति ' he wishes to stretch .'
तितनिष : तितनिषति
तिवृक्ष or तितृक्षति
13. लंह ' to kill ;' { तिरीहिष : तितहिषति } • he wishes to kill .'
धिप्स or चिप्सति
14. दम्भ् ' to deceive ; धीप्स or धीप्सति ' he wishes to deceive.
विम्भिष ; दिदम्भिषति
दिदरिद्रास or दिदरिद्रासति he wishes to be
15. दरिद्रा 'to be poor ;' { रितिष; दिदरिद्विषति poor.'
16. दा ' to give ;' दित्सति —he wishes to give.'
17. दे ' to protect ;' दित्स ; दिसते " he wishes to protect .'
6

18. दो ' to cut ;' { दित्सति - he wishes to cut .'

19. द्युत् ' to shine3 ' दिद्युतिष or दिद्युनिषते

दिद्योतिष }· he wishes to shine.'
दिद्योतिषते
20. धा ' to place%3;' he wishes to place ,
21. घे ' to suck ;' }धित्स; धित्सति । or to suck.'
wishes
' he is
22. नश् 'to perish ;'
निनङ्क or निनङ्कति Or

निनशिष ; निनशिषति } about to perish.'

6
पित्स or पित्सति • he wishes or is
23. पत् ' to fall ;'
{ पिपतिष पिपतिषति about to fall.'

24. पद् ' to go ;' पित्स ; पित्सते ' he wishes to go.'

25. प्रछ ‘ to ask ;' पिच्छिष ; पिच्छिषति '· he wishes to ask.'
बिभ्रक्ष or बिभ्रक्षति
विभः or बिभःति
26. भ्रज 'to fry ;' he wishes to fry.'
बिभ्रजिष or बिभ्रजिषति
( विभाजिष ; विजिषति
27 . मन ito dive ;'
मिमङ्कः मिमति ' he wishes to dive .'
28. मा ' to measure ; ' मित्सति - he wishes to measure .'
6
29. मि ' to throw ;' मित्सति he wishes to throw .'
मित्स :
30. मी ' to destroy ;' FACH ' he wishes to destroy .'
31. मे ' to exchange ;' मित्सते ' he wishes to exchange.'
32. मुच् when used मुमुक्षते ' he longs for final
intransitively ; {मोक्ष ; मोक्षते liberation.'
otherwise only मुमुक्ष ; मुमुक्षति ' he wishes to free .'
25 8
 194 SAXSKRIT GRAMMAR. [5452
Root . Desid. B. 3 Sing. Pres. Ind. Des.
मिमृक्ष or मिमृक्षति he wishes to
33. मृज् ' to wipe ;'
6
मिमाजिष; मिमार्जिषति } wipe.'
34. रम् ' to desire ; रिप्स : ftcha he wishes to desire.'
35. रा ' to injure%3;' रित्स ; freeâ ‘ he wishes to injure .'
otherwise रिरास्स ; रिरात्सति ' he wishes to farour .
30. लम् ' to obtain%3B लिप्सः Fischat he wishes to obtain.'
37. शक् to be able; शिक्षः farurat 0he wishes to be able .'
33. श्वायि,
m'to Caus. B.;'of
swell " erator forurarara । 'he wishes to cause
शुशावयिषः দুशुशावयिति }} toswel :
सिषास or सिषासति · he wishes to
39. सन् to obtain%3;'
सिसनिष ; सिसनिषति obtain .'
40.कारि ,optional Caus.. he wishes to cause
B.of For'to shine ;' S
41. स्वप् ' to sleep%3;
पुस्फारयिष; पुस्कारयिषति {
}सुषुप्स to shine.'
: सुषुप्सति
agcara ‘ he wishes to sleep .' ..
42. स्थापि. Cus. B. of ' he wisbes to cause
F7 ' to sleep ;' } सुष्वापयिष; सुध्वापयिषति । to sleep .'
43. हन् ' to kill ;' जिघांस जिघांसति ' he wishes to kill.'
41. हि ' to throw3B जिघीष istotara ‘ he wishes to throw .'
45. हायि , Caus. B.of. he wishes to cause
to call ;' } जुहावयिष; जुहावयिषति { to call.'
46. हे ' to call ;' जुहषः
जुहषति - he wishes to call .'
$ 452. A Desiderative Base which, howerer , does not convey a desi
derative sense , is derived from the following roots :
rt . yg, Desid. B. जगुप्स • to blame ; ' Pres. Ind . जुगुप्सते.
rt. तिज, तित िक्ष
Farater ' to endure ;' तितिक्षते.
rt. कित् , ATTRICH ' to heal ;' & c. चिकित्सति, 'ते.
rt, मान्, PHIE
मीमांस ' to inrestigate :' मीमांसते.
rt . ब . बीभत्स ' to feel disgust ;' बीभत्सते .
rt . दा . दीदांस ' to straighten ;' दीदांसते.
rt . शान् , शीशांस ' to sharpen %3 शीशांसते.
As these seven desiderative bases are looked upon as primitive verbs,
new desiderative bases may be derived from them ; e.g. Desid . of
हुगुप्स, जुगुप्सिषते ' he wishes to blame ' ( see $ 230 , d ). From other
desideratire bases no new Desideratives can be formed .
 CONJUGATION OF VERBS . 195
§ 453. )
( )-Conjugation of the Desiderative Base.
$ 453. The Desiderative Base, after it has been prepared in the
manner described in the preceding section, may be conjugated in all the
three voices ; as regards, however, the Parasmaipada and Âtmanepada,
the Desiderative Base is restricted to the same voice to which the root
or base from which it is derived, is restricted (provided there be such
restriction ); e.g.
Rt. 97 ' to sacrifice;' Pres. Ind. Par. Af he sacrifices' ( for some
body else ) ;
Âtm . n'he sacrifices' (for himself);
3

.
.

> Pass. इज्यते.

Desid. B. यियक्ष to
wish to sacrifice ; Par. FIETETIC he wishes to sacrifice
( for somebody else );
Átm . fastera ' he wishes to sacrifice
21

( for himself ) .
Pass. यियक्ष्यते.
»

17

Rt. to grow ;' Â

Átm. qua ' he grows.'
6
Desid . B. iering ' to
wish to grow ;' Átm. pertoa he wishes to grow.?
6

$ 454. Exceptions: (a) The Desid. Bases of F ' to know' (unless

ita be prefised to it), y ' to hear' ( unless the prepos. afat
the prepos.. अनु 6

or 57 be prefixed to it, ) to remember,' and ET ‘ to see' are conju .

gated only in the Atmanepada ; e . g.
Pres. Ind. of Desid. of IT, THShe wishes to know.'
*, M'he wishes to listen to, he is obedient.'
1

(6) The Desid. Bases of क्लप, वृत्, वृध, शृ , and स्यन्द् (6 443, c) may
optionally be conjugated in the Parasmaipada; e . g.
rt. pl'to grow;' Pres. Ind. (only) Atm. Tifa he grows,' Pres. Ind.
of Desid . Par . or Âtm . fazara or afina.he wishes to grow.'
§ 455. In the three moods of the Present tense and in the Imperf.
l'ar. and Atm . the Desid. Base is conjugated like the special base of a
root of the 6th ( tudúdi) class. In the remaining tenses of the Par, and
Atm . and in the Passive the final sy of the Desid. Base is dropped; subse
quently the tenses are formed from the base, as remaining after the
loss of its anal 57, in the manner stated below. It must, howerer,
be borne in mind that, whererer the characteristic Ħ ( or ) of the
196 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR . [$ 456—
Desiderative is added to a root or base by means of the intermediate or
ई, this sort is liable to no change whaterer.
1. The Parasınai. and Åtmane.
(u) The Perfect is formed by means of the auxiliary verbs , STEL ,
and भू according to $ 328.
(6) In the Aorist the Desid. B. takes the augment , and the termi •
nations of Form V. (8 352, 6).
( c) In the Simple and Periphrastic Futures the terminations given in
$ 368, 6, and § 373, 6, are added with the intermediate .
(1 ) The Coaditional is formed according to $ 378.
( e) In the Benedictive the terminations given in § 380, c are added
to the Desid. Base, those of the Atmane. with the intermediates.

2. The Passire.
(a) The Present and Imperfect are formed from the Desid. Base
according to the rules in $ 387, a and $ 388.
(८) The Perfect is formed by means of the auxiliary verbs . कृ. अस् ,
and भू according to 5 392.
(c) The 3 Sing. of the Aor. is formed according to the rule giren
in $ 393.
( d ) The remaining forms of the Aorist and all the other tenses of the
Passive do not differ from the corresponding forms of the Atmanepada.
456 . Paradigm: The 3 Sing. of all the tenses and moods in Par.
Atm. , and Pass. , of the Desider. of rt . बुध ' to know,' Desid. Base बुबोधिष
or बुबुधिष. ( .Note : It will be sufficient to give the forms of only one of
these two bases, because those of the other base are formed iu exactly the
same manner.)

Parasmai.. Atmane. Passive .

Pres. Ind ..
बुबोधिषति बुबोधिषते बुबोधिष्यते
Pres. Pot.. बुबोधिषेत् बुबोधिषेत बुबोधिप्येत
Pres. Imper. बुबोधिषतु or षतात् वुबोधिषताम् बुबोधिष्यताम्
Imperf. अवुबोधिषत् अवुवोधिषत अबुबोधिष्यत
 CONJUGATION OF VERBS . 197
§ 458.]
Par. Par. or Atm.
Periph . Perf. बुबोधिषांचकार बुबोधिषामास or बुबोधिषांबभूव
Atm . or Pass. Pass .

Periph. Perf. बुबोधिषांचक्रे बुधोधिषामासे or बुबोधिषांबभूवे

Par. Atm. Pass .

Aor. 1. Sing. अबुबोधिषिषम् अबुबोधिषिषि अबुबोधिषिषि

8. Sing. अबुबोधिषीत् अबुबोधिषिष्ट अबुधिषि
Parasmai. Atmane. or Passive.
Simple Fut. बुबोधिषिष्यति बुबोधिषिष्यते
Periphr. Fut. बुबोधिषिता बुबोधिषिता
Condit. अबुबोधिषिष्यत् अबुबोधिषिष्यत
Bened . बुबोधिष्यात् बुबोधिषिषीष्ट
3. - THE FREQUENTATIVE.
$ 457. A Frequentative may be derived from any monosyllabic root
of the first nine classes which begins with a consonant. It conveys the
notion that a person or thing performs the action or undergoes the state
which is expressed by the root, repeatedly or intensely. E.g.
Rt. Pres. Ind. Par . Pres. Ind. Frequent..
कृ to do ;' करोति ' he does ;' चेक्रीयते or चर्करीति ' he does repeatedly
or intensely .'.'
भू ' to be ; भवति ' he is ;' बोभूयते or बोभवीति ' he is repeatedly.'
But no Frequent. can be derived, e.g., from जागृ ' to wake,' because
this root has two syllables, nor from 37 ' to anoint' because this root
commences with a vowel.
$ 458. (a) Exceptionally a Frequentative may be formed from the
roots अट् ' to go,' क ' to go,' अश् ' to pervade, अ M to cover ,' सूच cl. 10.
' to indicate,' मूत्र cl. 10., and सूत्र cl. 10. ' to string together.'
(6) The Frequentative of a root signifying motion conveys the im
port of tortuous motion ; e.9. Frequ. of rt. व्रज् ' to walk,' वाव्रज्यते ' he
walks tortuously' ( not ' he walks repeatedly ' ). The Frequentatives of
the roots लुप् ' to cut ,' सद् ' to sit, ' चर् ' to go, ' जप् ' to mutter , ' जम् ' to
yawn,' दह् ' to burn,' दंश् 'to bite,' and गृ ' to sirallow' conrey the notion
of reproach, & c .; e.g. Frequ. of 19, rajczà ‘he cuts disgracefully .'
198 SANSKRIT GRAYMAR . [$ 459

$ 459. In order to impart to a root the peculiar meaning which is

denoted by the Frequentative, a frequentative base bas to be derived
from it, to which base the terminations of the various tenses and moods
are attached in the manner stated below ; e.g.
rt. भू; Freq. B. बोभूय ; Pres. Ind. Freq. Atm. बाभूयते ; Impf. अबोभूयत &c.
or बोभूः Par, antia ; ,
1) Harita ;
or gratia ; , satura &c .
§ 460. The Frequentative Basc has two forms ; both agree in a
peculiar reduplication of the root ; they differ from each other in this,
that one form ends in g and is conjugated in the Atmanepada only,
while the other form does not end in 2 and is conjugated in the
Parasmaipada only .* It will be convenient to call the first form the
Åtmane pada Frequontative Base, and the second the Parasmaipada
Frequentative Base . E.y.

rt. afभू , Atmanepada Freq. B. aiaga .

Parasmaipada Freq. B. iroda
rt. Frę, Âlmanepada Freq. B. afra .
Parasmaipada Freq. B. arr .
1. (a) – Formation of the Atmanepada Frequentative Base.
$ 161. ( a ) The syllable u is added to the root ; e.g. rt. ft, fra ;
rt. भू , भूय ; rt. भिद् , भिय : rt. व्रज् , व्रज्य.
( ) Before this a the root undergoes the following changes :
1. Final , 3 , # , and † are changed as they are changed before
the syllable 7 of the Passire ($ 387), except that final # , when preceded
hy only one radical consonant, is changed to tt (not to ft ); e.g. rt. 14,
श्रीय ; rt. दु, दूय ; rt. कृ, क्रीय ; t. स्मृ, स्मर्य : t. कृ , कीर्य ;;rt..पृ. पूर्य.
2. The final rowel of दा ' to give ,' दे, दो, धा, धे, मा, स्था, गे,1 पा
6
to drink , ' T ' to abandon , ' HT, and of a to smell ' and LAT to blow '
is changed to f. The final sTT ( , I, and si , 297, b) of other roots
remains ir ( see, however, 4 ) ; e.g. rt ., 12 ; rt. . ; rt. , ;
rt . सो , सीय ; rt. ज्ञा, ज्ञाय : rt. ग्ले, ग्लाय ; rt. छो, छाय.
3.3 A penultimate nasal is generally dropped (see § 381) ; e.g. rt. L ,
वध्य. But rt . नन्द , नन्य .
4. The roots ध्यच् , व्य , and स्यम् substitute { for य ; ज्या and व्ये
• Some grammarians admit also the Atmavepada.
§ 463 ]. CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 199

substitute ई for या and ये ; स्वप् substitutes उ for a ; हे substitutes for

वे ; ग्रह , प्रछ , भ्रज्ज् and व substitute for र 3; and शास् substitutest
for भा ; e.g. rt. व्यच्, विच्य ; rt. ज्या , जीय ; rt. स्वप , सुप्य ; rt. हेहूव ;
rt. ग्रह , गृह्य ; rt. शास्, शिष्य.
5. Observe $ 46 ; e.g. rt. दिव , दीव्य.
$ 462. The form in य, derived from the root according to the rules
of the preceding paragraph, is reduplicated according to the general rules
of reduplication ( $$ 230 and 231 ) ; subsequently the rowels and उ
of the reduplicative syllable are gunated, and the rowel 37 of the re
duplicative syllable is lengthened ; e. g.
rt. दा ; by $ 461 दीय ; by $ 231 दिदीय ; A. Freq. Base देवीय .
rt . ज्ञा ; " ज्ञाय ; " जज्ञाय ; 1) 99 जाज्ञाय .
rt. धे ; धाय : >) 99 दिधीय ; » देधीय.
rt . भूः " भूय ; " " " बुभूय 99 बोभूय .
rt . कू ; 93 क्रीय ; " " , चिक्रीय ; 99 , चेक्रीय .
rt .. पुपूर्य: पोपूर्य.
पूर्य ;
.

rt. जी ; जीव्य , " , जिजीव्य ; " जेजीव्य .

rt. ढोक् टोक्य " डोटौक्य .
3

डुढौक्य; 99

rt. व्यच् ; " " विच्या , विविच्य ; 95 " वेविच्य..

rt . स्वप " सुप्य : " " सुषुप्या सोषुप्य .
rt . शास् ; " " 17 शिष्य ; शिशिष्य ; " 9 शेशिष्य .
§ 463. (a) When a root ends in a nasal preceded by the rowel ,
the rowel st of the reduplicative syllable is (against § 462) not length
ened, but Anusrâra, or the nasal of that class to which the first radical
consonant belongs, is inserted between the vowel 37 of the reduplicatire
syllable and the first radical consonant ; this rule applies, however, only
when the final radical nasal remains unchanged before the syllable y of
the Frequent. base. E.g.
rt . भ्रम् ; by $ 461 भ्रम्य ; by 8231 बभ्रम्य %3; . Freq. B. बंभ्रम्य or बम्भ्रम्ब .
rt . यम् ; " यम्य ; " " " ययम्य ; " , यंयम्य or यम्यम्ब .
rt . जन् ; " , जन्य ; " " जजन्य ; " जंजन्य or जञ्जन्य .
But when जन् combined with य becomes जाय ($ 474), the A. Frey.
Base is जाजाय.

(1) The same rule applies to the roots जप् , जभ् , दह , दंश , भञ् ' to
break, ' and 9 : 7 cl. 1 ' to restrain'; e.g.
rt . दह ; by $ 461 दह्य ; by $ 231 ददा ; A. Freq. B. देवह्य or दन्दह्य.
200 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR . [$ 464

(c) The syllable oft is inserted between the powel 37 of the redupli
cative syllable ( which against 9 462 remains short) and the first radi
cal consonant in the frequentative base of वच्च् to go,' संस् ' to fall,' ध्वंस्
' to fall,' भ्रस् ' to fall,' कस् ' to go,' पत् ' to fall,' पद् ' to go,' and स्कन्द
te step ;' e.g.
rt. वस् ; by $ 461 वच्य ; by $ 231 ववच्य ; A. Freq. B. वनीवच्य.
rt . पत् ; " Touti "1 पपत्यः पनीपत्य .
§ 464. The syllable is inserted between the sowel sy of the re
duplicative syllable (which against $ 462 remains short ) and the first
radical consonant in the Atmane. frequentative base of roots which after
the addition of contain the vowel + . Similarly is inserted in the
Âtmane. frequentative base of rt. 4. B.g.
rt. वृत् ; by $ 461 वृत्य ; by $ 231 ववृत्य ; Â. Freq. B. TECH.
rt . प्रछः " " पृच्छप , Troyli ," परीपच्छच.
rt . क्लप " कृप्य ;; 96 चक्लप्य ;; .
चलीलप्य..
Note : -A list of irregular Âtmanepada Frequentative Bases will be
given in 474.

1. (6) — Conjugation of the Atmanepada Frequentatite Base.

§ 465. In the three moods of the Present tense and in the Imperfect
of the Atmanepada, the Âtm. Frequent. Base is conjugated like the
special base of a root of the 4th (divâdi) class in Atmanepada. In the
remaining tenses of the Atmanepada, and in all the tenses of the Passive,
the base loses its final of when the final 7 is preceded by a vowel, and it
loses its final 2 , when y is preceded by a consonant ; e.g. are becomes
चोभूय ; बोबुभ्य becomes बोबुध. The base changed in this way can
undergo no further changes, and the Perfect and the remaining tenses are
formed from it thus :
1. The Atmanepada.
(a) The Perfect is formed by means of the auxiliary verbs F, 9H
and according to 6 328 .
( ) In the Jorist the base takes the augment, and the Atmanepada
terminations of Form V. ( $ 352, 6 ).
(c) In the Simple and Periphrastic Futures the Atmanepada termi
nations given in § 368, 6, and 373, 6, are added to the base with the
intermediate
( 1 ) The Conditional is formed according to $ 378.
§ 466.] CONJUGATION OP VERBS . 201

(e) In the Benedictive the Atmanepada terminations given in $ 380 ,

c, are added to the base with the intermediate .
2. The Passive.
( a ) The Present and Imperfect are formed from the base according
to the rules in $ 387 , aa and 6388.
( 8 ) The Perfect is formed by means of the auxiliary rerbs कृ , अस्,
and according to $ 392.
(c) The 3 Sing. Aor. is formed from the base according to the
rule given in § 393.
( d ) The remaining forms of the Aorist and all the other tenses
of the Passive do not differ from the corresponding forms of the
Atmanepada.
§ 466. Paradigms : The 3 Sing. of all the tenses and moods in
Âtmane. and Passive of the Atmanepada Frequentative of rt.
' to know,' A. Frequent. Base बोबुध्य, and of rt. y to be,' A. Frequent.
Base बोभूय.
Atmanepada.
Pres. Ind. बोबुध्यते बोभूयते
Pres . Pot. बोबुध्येत बोभूयेत
Pres . Imper . बोबुध्यता बोभूयताम्
Imperf. अबोबुध्यत अबोभूयत
Periph . Perf. बोबुधांचक्रे &c. बोभूयांचक्रे & c.
Aorist 1. Sing . अंबोबुधिषि अबोभूयिषि
3. Sing. अबोबुधिष्ट अबोभूयिष्ट
Simple Fut. बोबुधिष्यते बोभूयिष्यते
Periph Fut. बोबुधिता बोभूयिता
Condit. अबोबुधिष्यत अबोभूयिष्यत
Benedict. बोबुधिषीष्ट बोभूयिषीष्ट
Passive.

Pres . Ind . बोबुध्यते बोभूय्यते

Pres . Pot. बोबुध्येत बोभूय्येत
26 8
202 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR .
[ $ 467
Pres. Imper. बोबुध्यताम् बोभूय्यताम्
Imperf.. अबोबुध्यत अबोभूय्यत
Periph. Perf. बोबुधामासे & c. बोभूयामासे &c.
Aorist 1. Sing. . अबोबुधिषि अबोभूयिषि
3. Sing. अबोबुधि अबोभूयि
Simple Fot..
Periph. Futo
Condit .. like Atmanepada.
Benedict .

2. ( a) -Formation of the Parasmaipada Frequentatire Base.

5467. The root is reduplicated according to the general rules of
reduplication (S$ 230 and 231); subsequently the vowels and 3 of
the reduplicative syllable are gunated, and the rowel of the
reduplicative syllable is lengthened ; e.g.
rt. T ' to give ;' by 8231 ददा ; Par. Frequ. B. दादा .
rt. TI ' to know ;' जज्ञा ; 90 > जाज्ञा .
rt. ' to go ;' 95 शिश्रि ; " " शेश्रि .
rt. of ' to lead ;' निनी ; नेनी .
.

it. I ' to agitate ;' 91

दोदु.
rt. भू ' to be3 '
भूः " बोनू.
st. ' to scatter ;' 9
चकृः 90 9
चाकृ .
rt . गै 'to sing:' (5297,8 ) , जगा ; जागा .
rt. भिद् 'to split ;' बिनि । बेभित् .
rt. बुध् ' to know%3' बुबुधः ॥ बोबुध .
§ 468. The rules giren in § 463, ( a ), (C ), and ( c), apply likewise to
the Parasmai. Frequ. base ; e.g.
rt . भ्रम् ; by $ 231 बभ्रम् ; Par. Freq. B. बंभम् or बम्भ्रम् .
rt. दह: " " 9 हंदह or दन्द
rt . वञ् " " वव च्ः वनीव.
5469. The letter , or the syllable रि or री, is inserted between
the vowel अ of the reduplicatire syllable ( which against 6 467 re
mains short ) and the first radical consonant in the Parasmai. Fre
quentative base of roots which end with (short) € or have ( short ) E
 COXJOGATION OF VERBS . 203
§ 472.)
for their penultimate letter ; similarly for pros or eft is inserted in the
Par. Frequ . base of rt. 4.
क्लप E.g.
rt. कृ ; by $ 231 चकृ ; Par. Freq. B. चर्क, or चरिक , or चरीकृ .
rt . वृत् ॥ ववृत् वर्वत, or वरिवृत् , or वरीवृत्.
. क्लप
rt . : चक्लप : ॥ , चल्लूप , or चलिकूप, or चलीक्लए.
95

2. ( 1)-Conjugation of the Parasmaipada Frequentative Base .

5 470. In the three moods of the Present and in the Imperfect Par .
the Parasmai. Frequent. base is conjugated like the special base of a
root of the 3rd ( juhotyádi) class. The terminations of the Singular Pres.
Ind ., of the 2 and 3 Sing . Imperf., and of the 3 Sing. Pres. Imperat.
may be attached to the base with or without f ; when they are added
withç, a penultimate short rowel of the base cannot be gunated . E.g.
s Sing. Pres. Ind. Freq. Par. of rt, भू ( Par. Freq. B. बोभू ) बोभोति or
बोभवीति ; of rt. बुध् ( Par. Freq. B. बोबुध् ) बोबोद्धि or बोबुधीति ; of rt. हा
( Par. Freq. B. दारा) दादाति or दाति ; of rt . वृत् ( Par. Freq. B. वर्तृत , or
वरिवृत् , or वरीवृत् ) वर्वत्ति or वरिवर्ति, or वरीवति, or वर्वृतीति, or वरिवृतीति,
or वरी वृतीति ; of rt. कृ ( Par. Freq. B. चर्क, or चरिकृ , or चरीकृत ) चर्ति,
or चरिकर्ति, or चरीकर्ति, or चर्करीति, or चरिकरीति, or चरीकरीति.
$ 471. About the formation of the Perfect and the remaining tenses
grammarians do not always agree, the chief cause of all difficulties
being the doubt, whether the rules which apply to a primitive root, 1

.
apply also to its Parasmaipada Frequentative Base. As this form of
the verb is of very rare occurrence, it will be sufficient to conjugate one
paradigm throughout all its tenses and moods. For special and de
tailed information on this subject the student must consult the works
of the native grammarians .
$ 472. Paradigm : The Parasmaipada Frequentatire of rt . भू- to
be, ' Par. Freq. B. बोभू.
Parasmaipada.
Pres . Ind . Pres . Pot. Pres. Imper . Imperf.
1. बोभोमि or बोभूयाम् बोभवानि अबोभवम्
बोभवीमि
2. बोभोषि or
. ng

बोभूयाः बोभूहि अबोभोः or अवोभवीः

Si

बोभवीषि
3. बोभोति or
बोभूयात् बोभोतु अबोभोत् or अबोभवीत्
बोभवीति बोभवीतु
 204 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR .
[8 472–

1. बोभूवः बोभूयाव बोभवाव

.Dual

अबोभूव
2. बोभूयः बोभूयातम् बोभूतम् अबोभूतम्
3. बोभूतः बोभूयाताम् बोभूताम् अबोभूताम्
1. बोभूमः बोभूयाम बोभवाम अबोभूम
Plur

2. बोभूथ बोभूयात बोभूत अबोभूत

.

8. बोभुवति बोभूयुः बोभुवतु अबोभवुः

Perfect .

1. बोभवांचकर or चकार &c., or बोभव or बोभाव, or बोभूव

. ng
Si

2. बोभवांचकर्थ बोभविथ बोभूविथ

13. बोभवांचकार बोभाव बोभूव
Dn. 1. बोभवांचकृव बोभुविव बोभूविव
& c. & c. & c.
Aorist.
1. अबोभाविषम् or अबोभूवम्
. ng
Si

2. अबोभावी: अबोभूः or अबोभूवी: or अबोभोः or अबोभवी:

3. अबोभावीत् अबोभूत् or अबोभूवीत् or अबोभोत्or अबोभवीत्
Du. 1. अबोभाविष्व अबोभूव
Pl. 3. अबोभाविषुः अबोभूवुः or अबोभवुः
Simple Fut. Periph. Fut. Condit. Bened .

Sg. 1. बोभविष्यामि बोभवितास्मि अबोभविष्यम् बोभूयासम्

Atmanepada. Passive.
Pres. Ind. 3. Sg. बोभूते बोभूयते
Pot. बोभुवीत बोभूयेत
Imp. " " बोभूताम् बोभूयताम्
Impf. " " अबोभूत अबोभूयत
Perfect. बोभवांचक्रे ke. बोभवांचक्रे & c.
 CONJUGATION OF VERB8. 205
§ 474.]
Atmanepada.. Passive

Aorist. 8. Sg. अबोभविष्ट अबोभावि

Simple Fut.. बोभविष्यते बोभविष्यते or बोभाविष्यते
Peripb. Fnt. " "
बोभविता बोभविता or बोभाविता
Condit. अबोभाविष्यत अबोभविष्यतor अवोभाबिष्यत् .
Bened. "
बोभविषीष्ट
"
बोभविषीष्ट or बोभाविषीष्ट
$ 473. The four roots अट्, ऋ, अश् , and अ M, mentioned in $ 458, a ,
form their Frequentative thus :
rt . अट् '' to go ;' A. अटाटते.
rt. ऋ ' togos > अरार्यते ; P. अरति or अरियति &c
rt. अग् ' to pervade ;' अशाश्यते.
rt. अणु ' to corer ;' ऊर्गोनूयते.
$ 474. The following roots form their Frequentative irregularly :
Root. Atm. Frequ. Par. Frequ.
1. कु cl. l ' to sound ;' कोकूयते .
2. खन् to dig ;' चहन्यते or चकनीति or चढन्ति &c
चंखन्यते or
चाखा यते।
• to swallow ;' जेगिल्यते ; जागर्ति .
3. गृ
4. चर् ' to walk चर्यते or चक्षुरीनि or चर्ति & c.
चंचूर्यते;
5. चाय् ' to worship ; चेकीयते ; चेकयीति or चेकेति.
6. जन् ' to be born%3; जञ्जन्यते or जञ्जनीति or जञ्जन्ति & e.
जजन्यते or
जाजायते ;
7. गुत् ' to shine ; ' देद्युत्यते देद्युतीति or देयोति.
8. फल — to burst ;' पम्फुल्यते or पम्फुलीति or पम्फुल्ति &c.
पंफुल्यते
9. शी ' to lie down ; शाशय्यत शेशयीति or शेशेति .
10. वि ' to swell ; शेश्वीयते or शेश्वयीति or शेश्धेति .
शोशूयते ;
11. सन् ' to obtain%3' संसन्यते or संसनीति or संसन्ति.
सासायते
12. हन् ' to injure :; ' जेनीयते
otherwise : जकन्यते
जंघन्यते ;
or

}जनीति or जडन्ति.
206 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [$ 475

4. - NOMINAL VERBS.
$ 475. Verbs are formed from nominal bases by adding to them the
characteristic marks of the tenses and moods and the personal termin .
ations, or, more commonly, by deriving, with the help of some suffix,
a rerbal base from the nominal base, and by adding the characteristic
marks of the tenses and moods and the personal terminations to the deri
ratire verbal base formed in this manner. Thus from the nominal base
for a bird,' we may form tofa'he behaves like a bird,' by adding to fa
the personal termination fa and by changing for before this termination
just as a root of the 1 st (bhrádi) class would be changed in the Pres.
Iudic.; or we may form , e.g. from ga'a son,' galera.he wishes for a
son ,' by deriving, with the help of the suffis 7 , from the nominal base ga
the derivative verbal base gata ' to wish for a son ,' and by forming from
this base a Pres. Indic. just as it would be formed from the special base
of a root of the 1st class. Verbs thus derived from nominal bases are
called nominal verbs; they generally coprey the notion that a person
or thing behares or is like, or treats aa person or thing like, or wishes for,
that which is expressed by the nominal base. As these verbs are of com
paratively rare occurrence, especially in the general tenses, all the rules for
their formation and conjugation need not be given here ; it will suffice to
indicate generally the manner in which , and to point out the principal
suffixes by which , verbal bases are derived from nominal bases, and to
illustrate the formation and conjugation of the various classes of nominal
verbs by a few examples.
VERBS DERIVED FROM NOMINAL BASES :
( a) Wilhoui a derivative suffix, and conjugaled in Parasmaipada.
476. Nominal verbs may be formed from nominal bases without
any special derivative suffix, the characteristic signs of the tenses and
moods and the personal terminations being added immediately to the
nominal base. The penultimate vowel of a nominal base which ends in
a nasal must be lengthened. The rerbal bases formed in this manner
are conjugnted in the Parasmaipada, and convey the notion that a person
or thing behares or is like that which is expressed by the nominal base.
In the special tenses the nominal base is treated like a root of the 1st
(Chvádi) class ; when it contains more than one rowel, its last rowel only
undergoes the changes which the rowel of a root of the 1st class has to
undergo. A final of a nominal base is dropped before the of which is
added to it in the special tenses. E.g.
$ 477.] CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 207

Nominal Base. Derivat. Verbal Base. Pres. Ind. Par .

fe'a bird ;' f ' to behare like a pura • he behares like a bird .'
bird ; ( Perf. विवाय Aor. अवायीत्
or अवयीत् ; Bened . वीयात . )
te'a poet ;' afe ' to behave like ara " he behaves like a
a poet ;' poet .'
xft . Lakshmi; sft to behare like L. sara ' she bebares like L.'
the earth ;' ' to behave like the yarê ‘ she behaves like the
earth ;' earth.' ( Perf. TAR ; Aor.
अभावीत. )
fra ' a father ; पितृ 'to behare like a पितरति ' he behares like a
father ;' father.'
कृष्ण ' Krishna ;' कृष्ण ' to behare like कृष्णति ' he behares like
Kșişhņa ;' Krishna .'
HTCT'a garland ;' Art ' to be like a Arsifa .it is like a garland .'
garland ;' ( Perf. Arrigore ; Aor.
अमालासीन् . )
T'a king : राजान् ' to behare like राजानति • he behares like a
a king ;' king .'
( 6 ) By means of the suffix 2, and conjugated in Parasmaipada.
§ 477. Nominal verbs may be derived from nominal bases ( except
those that end in 7 and those that are indeclinable ) by adding to them
the suffix , and by conjugating the derivative verbal base formed in this
manner in the Parasmaipada only. Before the suffix o final letters of
nominal bases undergo the following changes :
Final 37 and 37T are changed to { ; e.g. Nom. B. , Deriv. V. B. gr.
Final g and 3 are lengthened ; e.g. 95 कवि,, कवीय ..
Final is changed to ft ; e.g. कर्द, कीय..
Final 311 and sit are changed to 377 and respectively ; e.g.
Nom . Base TT ; Deriv. Verb. Base Toy
नौti 764 .

A final nasal is dropped and the preceding vowel changed as an origi

nally final vowel would be changed ; e.g.
Nom . Base THT ; Deriv, Verb. Base Tita.
Other final consonants remain unchanged ; e.g.
203 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [ $ 478–

Nom. Base at ; Deris . Verb. Base T54 .

" समिधः 99 समिध्य.
Penultimate 7 and 3 of norninal buses in 5 orç are generally
lengthened ; e.g.
Nom. Base Fort ; Derir. Verb . Base ofte .
» TT ; पूर्य.
$ 478. Derivative verbal bases formed in this manner courey the
notion that a person wishes for that, or treats a person or thing like that,
ur looks upon a person or thing as upon that, which is expressed by the
nominal bases ; e.g.
Non . Base. Deriv. Verb . Base . Pres. Ind. Por.
r'a son ; gata ' to wish for a går ta ' he wishes for a son .'
son ;' ( Perf. gardiat ; Periph.
Fut . galfaar.)
' a poet; offre to wish for a #frara • he wishes for a poet .'
poet ;'
TI ' a cow ;' TET to wish for a tota " he wishes for a cow.'
cow ;' (Perf. Toni Tort ; Periph .
Fut. गन्यिता .)
T'a king ;' trira'to wish for a tatara'he wishes for a king .'
king ;'
arany fuel ;' समिध्य ' to wish for समिध्यति • he wishes for fuel .
fuel ;' (Periph . Fut. Hraratat or
afatirar .)
ranny Vişhņu ;' Foot ' to treat like pomara ‘ he treats (somebody)
Vişhņu ;' like Vishạo.'
प्रासादीयति ' he looks upon ( a
TATT'a palace ;' rarere to look upon atarstafa
(anything) as upon hut, &c.) as if it were a
a palace ;' palace .'
$ 479. In instances like the folloring the verbal base formed by
conreys a different meaning :
Xom . Base. Derir . Verb . Base . Pres. Ind. Par.
794 ' penance ;' तपस्य ' to practise arrira he practises penance'.
penance ;'
77 % ' adoration ;' TAFZ'to adore ;' fa ' he adores .'
§ 482. ) CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 209

(c) -By means of the suffix atsz , and conjugaled in Parasmaipada.

§ 480. To express the notion of wishing for that which is denoted by
a nominal base, a verbal base may be derived from the latter by adding
to it the suffis fit, and by conjugating the derivative verbal base so
formed in the Parasmai. ; e.g.

Nom . Base. Derir. Verb. Base . Pres. Ind. Par.

पुत्र ' a son ;' पुत्रकाम्य ' to wish for a son; पुत्रकाम्यति ' he wishes for a
son.' ( Perf. HEIITATT ;
Periph. Fut. Thar .)
T & ' fame ;' TETETT ' to wish for fame ;' 7TFnTrifa ' he wishes for
fame.'

( d) -By means of the suffixes Fu or 3771, and conjugated in

Parasmipada.
§ 481. Verbal bases are also derived from nominal bases by the
addition of the suffixes fat or feet. They are conjugated in the Paras
maipada only, and conres the notion of wishing ardently for that which
is expressed by the nominal base. B.g.
Nom . Base. Derir. Verb . Base. Pres. Ind. Par .

मधुस्य ' to wish ardently cyrafa

मधुस्यति he wishes
'honey ;' ardently for
{ or

मध्वस्य } for honey ;'

or

}
मध्वस्यति honey .'
6

अश्व 'a horse ;' अश्वस्य — to long ardently for अश्वस्यति (the mare) longs
the horse ;' for the horse .'

(e)—By means of the suffix 2, and conjugaled in Åtinanepada.

§ 482. By adding to nominal bases the suflis , and by conjugating
the derivative verbal bases so formed in the Âtmane., nominal verbs are
formed which convey the notion of behaving like that which is expressed
by a noninal base . Before the suffix J of this class of nominal verbs,
the final 37 of a nominal base is lengtbened ; TT remains unchanged ;
other final letters undergo the same changes which they undergo before
the suffis J in 477. The final sta of sport and it must, the
final 377 of other nominal bases may optionally, be changed to HT .
When the suffis J is added to a feminine base, the corresponding mascu -
line base is generally substituted for the latter. E.g.
27 8
 210 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR . [8 483
Nom. Base . Deriv. Verb . Base. Pres. Ind . Åtm .
759 Krişhņa ;' Forry ' to behare
behave prea " he behaves like
like Kțişhộa ;' Kțişhņa .'
STCHTEL ' an Ap- अप्सराय ' to behave अप्सरायते ' she behares like
saras ;' like an Apsaras ;' an Apsaras .
T'fame,' or यशाय ' to behave यशायते • he behaves
• famous ;' or like one or like one who
यशस्य famous ; ' यशस्यते is famous .'

Farat'a girl ;' कुमाराय ' to behare like कुमारायते ' he behares like
a girl ;' a girl.'
युवति ' a maiden ;' युवाय ' to behare like युवायते - he behares like a
a maiden ;' maiden ."
$ 483. The same suffis y is also added to a few nominal bases such
as श ' frequent,' मन्द ' slow ,' पण्डित ' learned ,' सुमनस् 'benerolent,' उन्मनस्
agitated,' &c., to convey the notion of being or becoming like that, or
becoming that, which is expressed by the nominal base . A final consonant
of nominal bases to which may be added in this sense, is dropped. E.g.
Nom. Base. Deriv. Verb. Base . Pres. Ind . Åtm .
IT frequent ;' भृशाय ' to become arga ' it becomes fre
frequenti quent.'
उन्मनम् ' agitated , उन्मनाय ' to become agi- उन्मनायते ' he becomes
tated ;' agitated
(Imperf. उदमनायत .)
§ 484. The following are a few instances in which the suffis y con .
reys a different meaning :
Nom . Base, Deriv . Verb . Base. Pres. Ind. Atm.
' pain ; giera ' to suffer pain ;' serà ' he suffers pain .''
Tiny ruminat. arry'to ruminate ;' urga 'he ruminates.'
ing ;'
aroq 'a tear ;' a76479 ' to shed tears ;' ararua he sheds tears .'
TU ' a sound ;' Torg ' to make a sound ;' Torca he makes a sound.'
agpleasure ;' Targ ' to show one's uurd'he shows his plea
pleasure ; ' sure .'

( S ) -By means of the suffix y or sig.

§ 485. Some verbal bases are formed from nominal bases by the
addition of the suffix or sta ( 407 ) ; they convey various meanings,
 PREPOSITIONS AND OTHER TERBAL PREFIXES. 211
§ 486.)
and are conjugated like the deriratire bases in or snit of roots of the
10th (churûdi) class or of Causals. When the suffix or snit is added
to the bases of adjectives, the latter generally undergo the same changes
which they undergo before the Comparative and Superlative suffixes fa
and y8 ( § 173) ; when it is added to a feminine base, the corresponding
masculine base is substituted for the latter. E.g.
Nom. Base. Derir . Verb . Base, Pres. Ind. Par.
9 7'shaven ;' gros ' to shave ;' gefa he shaves.'
AT'true ;' Harra'to declare as true ;' Frarrafat'he declares as true.'
Ty ( $ 174, c ) gru ' to declare as broad ;' tua'he declares (anything)
• broad ;' broad
एनी ( Fem. pfa ' to declare as varie. Caefat ' he declares ( her )
of ga , $ 135) gated ;' variegated .'
variegated ;'

CHAPTER VIII.
PREPOSITIONS AND OTHER VERBAL PREFIXES.
§ 486. ( a) The following are the prepositions which are commonly
prefised to verbal roots and their derivatives :
sa ' over, beyond ;' e.g. na ' to overstep, to go beyond, to
transgress, to surpass.'
TRT ' over, above, on ;' e.g. 3-5'to place over, to appoint ;' TTT
' to rise abore, to ascend ; STT TE ' to obtain .'
377'after, along, near to ;' e.g. 376 TH to go after or along ;' 379
to do after, to imitate .'
379 ' away, off ;' e.g. 379 - TE ' to go away ;' 979 ft to lead off.'
3179 (sometimes fo ) near to, on ;' e.g. 19 - TÆ'to approach ;' TT -VT
or f9 - T to put on, to shut.'
TFT towards, to, upon ;' e.g. Hitta ' to go towards or to ;' 77-96
" to fall upon .'
577 ( sometimes ) ' away, off, down ;' e.g. 877-Peor ($ 38 , a ) ' to cut .
off;' 97 - ' to descend ;' 379 - TĘ Or 7 - TE 'to plunge down into .'
ST'towards, to, at ;' .e.g. - ' to draw towards, to attract ;' 3
sing ' to shout at."
Ję'up, on, out ;' e.g. 57-1'to go up, to rise ;' 39- ' to pour out.'
 212 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR .
[$ 487–
39 ' near to, under ;' e.g. 39- TA ' to go near to ;' 39.64T ' to stand
near or under.'
Fã down, into ;' e.g. Fit- ($ 41, a) ' to sit down ;' .96 ' to hold
down, to suppress ;' F ($ 41, a) ' to pour into .'
fa : ' out of, forth from ;' e.g. fac.th ' to go out ;' fìq.9€ ($ 37, note)
' to spring from .'
91T away, back ;' c.g. 977-98 ' to turn away or back.'
aft round, about ;' e.g.qft- ' to go round ;' qfi oft ($ 40 , a) ' to lead
>

round ;' of ' to roam about.'

q'forth, forward , pro- ;' e.g. 9-4 ' to step forth , to proceed ;' T TYT
' to set out ;' 9-07 ($ 40, a) ' to bend forward, to bow down before.'
ofa ' back , re- ;' e.g.gfa - t'to repel ;' apa -ap'to respond. '
Po 'apart, dis- ;' e.g. f - E ' to take apart ;' fa -41'to dispose.'
# ' together, con . ;' ' to go together, to assemble ;' ' to
collect .'
(6) Two or more of the above prepositions may be combined ; e.g.
समुपा ( i.e. सम् + उप + आ ) -गम् ' to come together near to ;' अभिसमा
(i.e. अभि + सम् + आ ) -गम् ' to approach together,' & c.
$ 487. ( a ) The initial & of the roots For ' to stand,' and First ' to
support,' is dropped when it is immediately preceded by the preposition
; e.g. Periph. Fut. of Far with 3 , curar ; but Pres. Ind. Par. -
ठामि ; Perf. Par. उत्तस्थौ Aor. Par. उदस्थात्,
(6 ) The sibilant # ( changeable to by $ 41, a) is prefixed to the rt. 5
to do,' after the preposition # , and after the prepositions 39 and oft
in the sense of to decorate, ornament,' & c.,; likewise to the rt.
' to scatter' after the prepositions 39 and gia, in the sense of ' to cut,
to hurt ;' ( see $$ 229 d, 231 d ).
$ 488. The following words are prefixed to certain roots only ,' and
they share in the peculiarities of prepositions ( $$ 229, 230, and 513)
when they are so prefixed :
1. Stey is prefised to me and to roots which mean ' to go ;' e.g.
अच्छ - गम् ' to go towards,' Gerund अच्छगम्य or अच्छगत्य ; अच्छ-वद्
6
' to salute ,' Gerund reta .
2. Stras is prefixed to T , TA , YT, L , and similar roots ; e.g. sias- >
or s -at - TH ' to go between, to disappear ;' ag yr ' to conceal ;'
अन्तर् -भू-to be within Gerund अन्तरिय, अन्तर्गम्य or अतर्गत्य &c.
3. अलम् , सन् , असन् , जरी, खात् and certain other words which are
.

' imitative of sound, are prefised to rt. F ; e.g. Spagina ' to decorate ;' 87.5
.

' to treat with respect,' ataq - 5 ' to treat with disrespect ;' got
 PEEPOSITIONS AND OTHER VERBAL PREFIXES . 213
$ 489.]

to promise ;' ar- ' to make the sound which is produced in clearing
one's throat'; Gerund stic , cu & c.
4. Fax is prefixed to 3, T4, ar, fr, and similar roots ; e.g. STETA
' to go down, to set ;' STF - I ' to lead down, to cause to set ;' Gerund
अस्तमित्य & c.
5. आविः and प्रादुः
ar : are prefixed to कू, अस्, भू &c.; eg. 3 आविष्-क (537,
note) ' to make manifest ;' ATTI - ' to become manifest ;' Gerund e
कृत्य, प्रादुर्भूय. See 8 .
6. fat: is prefixed to L, T &c., and optionally to , when it denotes
disappearance ; e.g. तिरो- भू ' to disappear,' Gerund तिरोभूय; तिरस्- कृ
( $ 37, note) or faca-s , or, in two separate unconnected words, fat: 5'to
corer, to conceal, Gerund तिरस्कृत्य, or तिर कृत्य, or तिरः कृत्वा.
7. gr: is prefixed to 5 , 8, 14 , &c.; e.g.gra - F ($ 37, note) to place
1

before,' Gerund पुरस्कृत्य ; पुरो -गम् ' to go before,' Gerund पुरोगम्य or पुरोगत्य .
साक्षात्, मिथ्या , वशे. प्रादुः , नमः , and certain other words may
1

optionally be prefixed to the root or remain separate ; e.g. - or

वशे कृ to subdue, Gerund वशेकृत्य or वशे कृत्वा.
§ 489. (a) Nouns substantive and adjective may be prefixed to
the roots F to make,' sta'to be,' and a ' to become,' to express the
meaning that somebody makes a person or thing, or that a person or
thing becomes, that which is denoted by the noun prefixed to , ST
or of; e.g. sicost-e'to make ( that which is not black) black,' acoft
6
' to become black,' to become the Ganges. The roots , ,
and are in this connection treated as they are treated when preposi
tions are prefixed to them ; e.g. Gerund of guft- 5 , Frolence .
(6) The final letters of nouns which are so prefixed to , STEL , and
1, undergo the following changes :
1. 37 and sy are changed to ç, except when final in indeclinables ;
5 and 3 are lengthened ; and is changed to t ; e.g. msoft- # (from goog
and भू ), गङ्गी- भू ( from गङ्गा and भू) ; गुची- भू ( from शुचि and भू ), गुरू - भू
( from गुरु and भू);
মু ) पित्री- भू (from पिट and भू). But दोषा- भू ( from the
indecl . a and to become evening .'
2. A final 7 is dropped, and afterwards the preceding rule is applied 1

to the penultimate rowel ; e.g. trait ( from 17 and ) ' to become

a king ;' *** 1 ( from F and 5) ' to reduce to ashes .
3. Nouns with two bases assume their weak base, nouns with three
bases their middle base ; their finals are first changed as in the Loc.
Plur., and afterwards the Sandhi-rules in § 26, &c. , are applicable ; e.g.
faus- ( from fast and ) ' to put aside.'
 214 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR.
($ 490 %
§ 490. To express the sense that a person or thing becomes com
pletely, or that somebody changes a person or thing altogether to, that
which is denoted by a certain noun, the suffis are (the iuitial # of which
is nerer changed to )may be added to that noun, and the roots ,
srą, or a . or the root with the preposition #h, may be added to the
derivative so formed ; t.g. अग्निसाडू or अग्निसासंपद् ' to be changed
completely to fire, ' YEREK ' to change completely to ashes. ' Some
times the suffis are conveys the notion that a person or thing becomes,
or that somebody make a person or thing, dependent on or the pro
perty of that which is denoted by a certain noun ; e.g. Ik ' to
become dependent on, or the property of, a king ;' TE ' to make
( a person or thing ) dependent on, or the property of, a king .' The
derivatives in an which are formed in accordance with this rule remain
independent words and do not share in the properties of prepositions ;
the Gerund of कृ after भस्मसात् is therefore कुत्वा ( not कृत्य ) ; भस्मसात्कृत्वा .

CHAPTER IX.
FORMATION OF NOMINAL BASES.

§ 491. There are a few rerbal roots which, without undergoing any
change, may be used also as nominal bases ; e.g. the root ' to see,'
may also be used as a feminine noun in the sense of sight,' or an
eye;' similarly as a verbal root means ' to rejoice,' as a feminine noun
“ joy; ' y as a verbalroot “ to fight,' as a feminine noun • a fight, a bat
6

tle ; ' for as a verbal root ' to point out, ' as a feininine noun ' a point of
the compass .' In the same way the verbal root ry, when the preposition
sit is prefixed to it, means ' to go to, to befall, ' and aftre as a feminine
noun means ' what befalls a person, misfortune ;' the root ap with the
preposition ## prefised to it means ' to sit together,' the feminine noun
Berg‘an assembly ;' the root with the prepositions 34 and af
conveys the sense to bind on to, 'the word 39798 as a feminine substan
tive means ' a sandal, a shoe' ( that which is bound to the foot ).
§ 492. (a) Nearly all roots may , without undergoing any change , be
used as the last members of compound nouns, and when employed thus,
they generally correy the sense of a Present Participle of the Active,
e.g. ya knowing the law , one who knows the law ' ( from up and
N), ar ' knowing the Vedas, one who knows the Vedas' ( from
and part ).
 FORMATION OF NOMINAL BASES . 215
$ 495. ]
( 6) When a root that ends in a short vowel is ased in this maoper,
the letter & is affixed to it; e.g. Ferra conquering all, one who
conquers all' ( from fan and fa ); Pare making pictures, a painter'
( from 97 and 5 ). But fanar protecting all, one who protects all,'
( from en and ar & c .
§ 493. In general, however, nominal bases are derived from rerbal
roots or derivative verbal bases by means of sufixos , and from the
pominal bases so formed other nominal bases are derired by means of
other suffixes ; or nominal bases are formed by composition . Nominal
bases derived from roots or from other nominal bases by means of suffises
are called Derivative Nominal Bases ; nomival bases formed by coin
position are called Compound Nominal Bases or Compounds.
1. - DERIVATIVE NOMINAL BASES.

§ 494. The suffixes by which nominal bases are derived from roots or
derivative verbal bases are called primary or krit suffixes, and the
nominal bases formed by them primary nominal bases. Those suffises
by which nominal bases are derived from other nominal bases, are called
secondary or taddhita suffixes, and the nominal bases forned by them
secondary nominal bases. E.g. the bases alie'a doer ,' ara intelli
gence ,' auree one who causes to know ,' are primary nominal bases, the
first derived by the primary or kțit suffix a from it . ' to do,' the
second derived by the křit suffix fa from the root 89 ' to think ,' and the
third derived by the kțit suffix a from the causal base airt ' to cause
to know ' (of rt, N ). But the bases are the state of a doer ,' Afana
possessed of intelligence ,' gaar ' childlessness , ' are secondary nominal
bases, derived, the first by the secondary or taddhita suffis from the
primary nominal base are a doer, ' the second by the taddhita suffis a
from the priinary nominal base hra intelligence ,' and the third by the
taddhita suffix ar from the compound nominal base ' childless . '
§ 495. There is a peculiar class of primary or kşit suffixes to which
the natire grammarians have applied the technical denomination of
uņadi- suffixes, i.e. , a list of saffises headed by the suffis 30 ( or with
the mute or indicatory letter of attached to it ). They form , like other
krit suffises, primary nouns from verbal roots, but are given in special
lists because their application is rare and because the nouns derired by
them are either formed very irregularly, or the connection between the
meanings of the nouns derived by them and the roots from which they
are supposed to have been derived, is not so clearly discernible as it is
in the case of other primary nouus. Instances of nouns formed by
 216 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR . [$ 496–
means of Uņâdi-suffixes are 37 ' a horse,' from STT ' to pervade,' g'a
camel,' derived from 5 to burn ,' & c .
$ 496. The rules of Sandhi which apply to the final letters of roots
or derivative rerbal bases and the initial letters of primary or kțit suffixes
are generally those stated in § 41, & c., and 9 309, &c. The same rules
apply also to the final letters of nominal bases and initial vowels or initial
of secondary or taddhita suffises. Before taddhita suffixes which begin
with any other consonant than y , nominal bases that end in consonants
must first undergo the same changes which they undergo in their
Loc. Plur., afterwards the rules giren in § 26, &c., are applied ; there are,
however, exceptions.
§ 497. The only primary nouns the formation of which will be fully
taught here, are the Participles, the Gerund, the Infinitive, and the
Verbal Adjectives. In $ 539 the student will find a list of other common
Primary or Kșit suffixes, and in § 5 10 a list of the most common Secondary
or Taddhita suffises.
1. - PARTICIPLES.
( a ) -Participles of the Present tense.
498. ( a) The Participle of the Present Parasmai. is formed by
he addition of the suffix to the special base of the Pres. Par.; when
the special base is changeable, 577 is added to the special weak base. The
base undergoes before sta the same changes which it undergoes before the
termination fra or stra of the 3 Plur. Pres. Ind. Par. E.g.

rt. भू 1. Sp. B. भव ; 3 PI.Pres..भवन्ति ; Ptc. भवत् ‘being.'

1 rt. दिव् 4. दीव्य ; दीव्यन्ति;, दीव्यत् ‘ playing.'
rt. तुद् 6. तुद ; तुदन्ति ; T'striking.'
rt. fac 2. Sp.W.B.FOT ; > द्विषन्ति ; f@97 ' hating .'
rt. a 2. या ; Tiran ;
यान्ति 1 Art ' going.'
rt. अस् 2. स् सन्ति ; Tbeing.'
.
8

rt. 3 . जुहु ; gara ;i Tatsacrificing :

rt. 5. UI ; सुन्वन्ति ,, सुन्वत् ' squeezing
+
out.'
 TORIATION OF NOMINAL BASES. 217
§ 499.]

rt.आप् 5.Sp.W.B. आमु ; 3 Pl. Pres. आनुवन्ति; Ptc. आमुवत्' obtaining:

rt.रुथ् 7. रुन्ः रुन्धन्ति ; रुन्धत् ' obstructing .'
rt. तन् 8. " तनु : "
तन्वन्ति ; 3) तन्वत् ' stretching.'
rt. क्री 9. क्रीणी ; क्रीणन्ति ; क्रीणत् — buying.'
rt. चुर् 10. Sp.B. चोरय ; चोरयन्ति ; चोरयत् — stealing.'
it. TT; Caus . बोधय ; बोधयन्ति ; " बोधयत् ' causing to
know . '
Des. " बुबोधिष बुबोधिषन्ति;,, बुबोधिषत्— wishing to
know . '

(6) The declension and formation of the feminine base of this par
ticiple have been treated of in $ 101, &c.

(c) विद् cl. 2. to know,' forms its Pres. Partic. Par. either regularly
विदत्, or it forms by means of the suffix of the Partic . of the Red . Peri.
Par . विद्वस , declined $ 124. ( See $ 279).
$ 400. (a) The Participle of the Present Atmane. is formed by
the addition of the suffix मान ( changeable to माण by $ 58, Fem. माना or
माणा ) to the special base of the Present ; but when the special base is
changeable, आन ( instead of मान ) is added to the special weak base .
Final 37 of the special base remains unchanged before ArT ; before MTT
the base undergoes the same changes which it undergoes before the ter
mination sta of the 3 Plur. Pres. Ind. Atm. E.g.
rt. भू cl. 1. Spec . B. भव ; Partic. भवमान .

rt. दिव् cl. 4. दीव्य ; दीव्यमान.

rt. तुद् cl . 6 . 2) तुद ; तुदमान.

rt. द्विष् cl. 2. Sp. W. B. द्विषु ; 3 Pl. Pres . द्विषते; Ptc. द्विषाण.
rt. हु cl . 3 . >जुहु ; जुह्वते;
> जुहान .
rt . सु cl . 5 . सुनु सुन्वते; सुन्वान.

rt. आप cl. 5. " आनु ; >) आमुवते , आमुवान.

28
218 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR . [ 500—

rt. रुध् cl. 7.Sp.W.B. रुन्ध ; 8 PI.Pres. रुन्धते ; Ptc . रुन्धान .

rt . तन् cl.8. तनु तन्वते ; तन्वान

rt. क्री cl.9. क्रीणी ; " क्रोणते ; क्रीणान.

rt. हन् with prep. आ ; PI.Pres.A. आग्नते (5283);Ptc. आमान.
rt. चुर cl.10.Spec. B. चोरय; Partic. चोरयमाण.
rt. बुध् ; Caus . बोधय ; बोधयमान.
Des. B. बुबोधिष ; बुबोधिषमाण.
(6) This participle is declined according to $ 131.
(c) stą cl. 2. ' to sit,' forms its Pres. Partic. Atm. irregularly streita
• sitting.'
5500. (a) The Participle of the Present Passive is formed by
the addition of the suffis ATT ( changeable to ale by $ 58) to the Passive
base in य. E.g.

rt. तुद ; Pass. B. तुद्य ; Ptc. तुद्यमान ' who or what is struck .'
rt. चि ; चीय ; चीयमान ' who orwhatisgathered.'
rt. श्रु ; श्रूय ; धूयमाण ' who or what is heard .'
rt . कृ क्रिय क्रियमाण ' who or what is done.'
rt . दा ; दीय ; दीयमान ' rho or what is given !
rt. चुर् cl. 10. ,, चोर्य; चोर्यमाण ' who or what is stolen.'
rt. वुध ; Pass. बोध्य ; बोध्यमान ' who or what is caused
Caus . to know.'

Pass.
Des .
बुबोधिष्य,,, बुबोधिष्यमाण' who or what is desired
to know. '

(8) For the declension of this participle see $ 131.

( 6)-Participles of the Simple Future.
$ 501. ( a ) The Participle of the Simple Future in Parasmai.
is formed by the addition of the suffis sta to the base of the Simple Fut.
Par, in Fy or 6 ; the participle of the Simple Future in Åtmane. and
in Passive by the addition ofthe suffix # 77 to the base of the Simple Fut.
Atm . and Pass. in fg or 69. Before the suffis spa the final sy of the
Future base is dropped, before the suffix Art it remains unchanged. E.g.
 FORMATION OF NOMINAL BASES . 219
§ 502.]
Base of the Simple Fut. Future Partic.
Par. दास्यत् ‘ one who will
rt . T ; in Par. and
Atm. दास्यमान
Atm. } दास्य ;
दास्य or Pass. दास्यमान or
give.'
' who or what
in Pass.
{ दायिष्य ; दायिष्यमाण
Par. भविष्यत्
will be giren .'
who or what
rt . भू ; in Par. and
भविष्य; Atm . भविष्यमाण will be.'
भविष्य or Pass. भविष्यमाण or
in Pass.
)
{भाविष्य ; भाविष्यमाण .
' who or what
rt. बुध् ; in Par. Atm. ] Par. बोधिष्यत्
बोधिष्य
and Pass. ) Atm. बोधिष्यमाण } will know ..'
who or what
Pass. बोधिष्यमाण will be known .'
rt . चुर in Par, and Par. चोरयिष्यत् • who or what
Atm.. चोरयिषिष्य्य ;or At
} चोरय m. चोरयिष्यमाण will steal. '
Pass. चोरयिष्यमाण or • üho or what
" in Pass.
चार ्य ;
{ionचोरिष चौरिष्यमाण " } will be stolen . '
(6) For the declens and the formation of the feminine base of these
participles see $ 101 and $ 131.
(c) - Participles of the Perfect.
502. (a) The Participle of the Reduplicated Perfect Parasmai .
is formed with the suffis TÆ which is generally added to the weak base of
the Red. Perfect. When the weak base consists of only one syllable, वस्
is added with the intermediate 7, and it may be added with or without
after the roots गम् 'to go,' हन् ' to strike,' दृश् ' to see,' विश् ' to enter,' and
विद् cl. 6 ' to find.' Of the fire roots mentioned in $ 316, घस् formsthis
participle from the weak base (with ), and and form it from the
strong base with penultimate (short) भ ( without s ), while गम् and हन्
may form it in either way. E.g.
rt. भिद्;Red. W. B. बिभिद् ; Ptc. बिभिहस् ' who or what split.'
rt. तुद् तुतुद् तुतुद्वस् ' who or what struck .'
rt. दिव ; दिदिव ; दिदिवस् ' who or what played .''
(5309, a )
rt. नी ; निनी ; निनीवस् ' who or what led..'
rt . स्तु तुटु तुटुवस् ' who or what praised ..'
rt. कृ ; कृ ; ,, चकृवस् ' who or what did..
rt . अस् ; आस् ; आसिवस् ' who or vhat threw.
220 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR . [ $ 503–

rt. इष् ; Red. W. B. ईष् ; Ptc. ईषिवस् '6 who or what wished .'
rt. दा ; द ददिवस् ' who or what gare.'
rt. घस् जः जक्षिवस् ' who or what ate .'
rt. पच ; पे ; पेचिवस् ' who or what cooked .'
rt. वच् ऊच ऊचिवस् ' who or what spoke .'
rt. यज् ई; ईजिवस्‘ vhoorwhat sacrificed .'
But rt. खन् । Ptc. चखन्वस् ' who or what dug.'
rt. गम् जग्मिवस् or जगन्वस् (8809, b) “who or what
went. '

rt. हन् जनिवस् or जघन्वस् ' who or what struck.'

rt. दृश ददृशिवस् or ददृश्वस् — who or what saw.'
(6) The declension and formation of the feminine base of this par
ticiple have been treated of in $$ 122—125.
$ 503. ( a ) The Participle of the Rod . Perfect Åtmane. is
formed with the suffix आन (changeable to आण, Fem . आना or आणा )
which is generally added to the weak base of the Red. Perfect ; final
letters ofthe base generally undergo before r the same changes which
they undergo before the termination of the 3 Plur. Atm. E ...
rt. भिद् ; Red. W. B. बिभिन् ; 3. Pl. A.बिभिदिरे ; Ptc . बिभिदान.
rt. नी ; निनी ; 9
निन्यिरे ; निन्यान.
rt . स्तु तुटु तुष्टुविरे ; " तुष्टुवान.
rt. कृ ; चकृ ; चक्रिरे ; चक्राण .
rt . दा ; दद ददिरे ; ददान .
rt. यज् ई; ईजिरे ; ईजान .
(6) For the declension of this participle see $ 131.
5 304. ( a) Roots ending in ऋ (including the roots and g in
§ 318) form their Perfect Participles, contrary to the general rule, thus :
TR is added to the root, which then is changed in accordance with the
 $ 506.] FORMATION OF NOMINAL BASES . 221

rules of Sandhi ($ 48 ), and isfinally reduplicated ; in the case of Ta , on

the other hand, the root is first reduplicated, and 7 afterwards added
to the reduplicated form changed according to the rules of Sandhi. E.g.
rt. कृ Ptc. Par. चिकीर्वस् ; Ptc. (Atm. चकिराण .)
rt . तृ तितीर्वस् ; ततिराण.
rt .
: 3 शिशीर्वस् : ( , शशिराण . )
rt. 99 पुपूर्वस् पपुराण .
पृ
Some grammarians, howerer, form तितिराण and पुपुराण in Atm.;
and of वृ, पृ, and Y ($ 307 , d) some form वृवस्, पपवम्, and शशृवम् in
Par. The root कृwith सम् forms संचस्कृवम् and संचस्क्राण . The root कछ
(6 322 , 0) similarly forms आनृच्छुस्. of जागृ some form जजागृवत्, others
जजागर्वस्.
(6) Roots which drop their penultimate nasal in other forms ( see
§ 381, 6, 1) drop it also in these participles ; e.g. 373 forms (not 977 .
ख़ुस् but) आजिवस् (as if from अज् ).
$ 505. The Participles of the Periphrastio Perfect in Parasmai,
and Åtmane, are formed by the addition of the Participles of the Redupl.
Perf. of the auxiliary verbs कृ, अस् or y, to the base in आम्. E..
rt. उन्द् Ptc. P. उन्दांचकृवस् or उन्दामासिवस् or उन्दांबभूवस् .
rt. आस् A. आसांचक्राण or आसामासिवस् or आसांबभूवस् .
rt. चुर ; P. चोरयांचकृवस् or चोरयामासिवस् or चोरयांबभूवस्.
A. चोरयांचक्राण or चोरयामासिवस् or
or चोरयांबभूवस
( 11) -The Past Participles.
$ 506. (a) The Past Passive Participle is formed by the addition
to the root or to the derivative verbal base of the suffis a ( Fem . base
ता ) ; sometimes ( 8508 ) this suffix त is changed to न (changeable to
by $ 58, Fem . base ना or णा ). E.g.
rt. En ' to bathe ;' Past Pass . Ptc. नात ' bathed .'

चि ' to gather ;' चित ' gathered .'

"

rt .

rt. नी ' to lead ;' नीत ' led ..

rt. स्तु ' to praise ;' 2)
स्तुत ' praised .'
rt. भू ' to become ;' भूत — become.''
>
 222 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR . [ $ 507

rt. ' to do ;' Past. Pass . Ptc. quia done.'

rt. ' to loosen ;' ' loosened .'
Caus. B.aif ( of rt. TV ; » 9)
alreadymade to know . '
1

Des. B. fepis ( of rt. ); , Antra desired to do .'

But rt. कृ ' to scatter ;' aluf scattered .' 1

rt. f ' to split ; भिन्न ' split.'

(6) For the declension of this participle see $ 131 .
$ 507. (a) The suffis af is added to many roots without the interme.
diate , to many other roots with the intermediate F, and to a few roots is
inay be added with or without the intermediate . In general, ait
adied without to all roots ending in rowels, and to those monosyllabic
roots endiog in consonants to which any other sufix (beginning with a
consonant, except q ) must or may be added without T ; e.g.
rt PT (set) “ to go ;' Past Pass. Ptc. fyn ' gone.'
rt. 97 (anit) ' to sprinkle ;' Arthe sprinkled .'
rt. 7 (anit ) ' to join ;' I joined
rt. JC (opt.• anit) ' to cover ;' L 'covered .
r . TT (st, butsees370 (?) to grow;' De ' grown .'
(1) त is added without also to इन् , उन्द, ऋष, गुरु , चित् cl. ], जन् ,
दुष् , नु , बम, दीप , मद् , यत् , विज and some other less common roots ; e.g.
rt. For ' to kindle '; Past Pass. Ptc. Te kindled.'
6
rt. siq ' to shine'; दीन shining .'
() # may optionally be added with or without intermediate 7 to
rt. क्लिप , P. P. Ptc. क्लिष्ट or क्लिशित ' aflicted ; rt. स्वर , P. P. Ptc. स्वरित
or tof ( $ 508) ' swift ;' rt. g cl. 1, P. P. Ptc. fra or ga ' purified ;' and
to certain other roots prorided the Past Pass. Ptc. is used impersonally or
con reys the sense of beginning' to perform the action or to undergo the
state which is expressed by the root ; eg. rt.स्विद् forms स्विदित ( or स्वेदित )
or fear in the sense of beginning to perspire,' or when the Partic. is used
impersonally ( स्विदितमनेन or स्विन्नमनेन ' he has perspired').
( d ) To all other roots, and to all derivative verbal bases except
those which already end io , a must be added with intermediate < ; like.
$ 508.] FORMATION OF NOMINAL DASES . 223

wise ( against the general rule under (a) ) to tyto be hungry ' ( P. P.
Ptc. भुधित ), ग्रह 'to seize,' पत् ' to fall ' ( पतित ), वस् ' to divell ( उषित ), शी
' to lie down' ( aria) &c. After the intermediate must be lengthened
( P. P. Ptc. Teta ). E.g.
rt. TK ' to suspect;'Past Pass. Ptc. That ' suspected.'
rt. Are to blame; en ' blained .'
rt. II ' to steal;'Dərir. Base arft; Past. P. Pte. Tika'stolen .'
rt. T'i ' to know;' Caus. Base arrer; Past. P. Ptc. of Caus. antra
made to know.'

Desid. Base बुबोधिष; P. P. Ptc. of Desid. बुबोधिषित

( § 455) ' desired to know.'
>> Atm . Freq. Base äręty; P. P. Ptc. of Freq. aigrira.
rt.. to बोभूय; बोभूयित ($ 465) .
( e) When a is added without intermediate to roots ending in
consonants , the rules given in 9 309 &c. must be obserred ; e.g.
2999 ' to abandon ;'' Past Pass . Ptc. T'abandoned .'
rt. 777
rt. 7 ' to emit ;' TE ' emitted.'

rt. 54 to obtain ;' 37547 ' obtained .'

rt. ' to wish ;' ' wished .'
។
12

rt.
. दह ' to burn ;' दग्ध burnt.

rt. frz ' to lick ;' )) > >

t ' licked .'
मुग्ध or मूढ " faint.'
»

rt. l ' to faint;

rt. 7 ' to bind ;' 7 be bound.'

rt . p ' to bear ;' HTC "borde .'

$ 508. (a) Wherever the suffis a (without intermediate V) would
immediately follow upon one of the consonants or ç, it must be changed
to 7. This is substituted for a also after those roots ending in ( , ,
and sit, $ 297 , 0) which begin with a conjunct consonant and contain a
semivowel ; and also after certain other roots such as ET ' to go, ' or ' to
abandun ,' ing 'to grow ,' 1 to Ay,' a 'to perishı,' mfg 'to adhere ,' & 'to cut,'
22+ SANSKRIT GRAMNAR . [ $ 509–
An'to tear,' * ' to break, ' ' to bend, ' ( not ' to enjoy, ' ), AF
' to dive, ' ' to break ,' PTT ' to treinble' etc. 7, finalis
Before 7
also changed to , and final 37 and 5 are changed to T. E.g.
क
rt. ito scatter ;'(8 48) Past Pass. Ptc. fitoi scattered.'
.
rt. Tato strike;'($ 309, a) aof struck
6
(see
$ 507, c) .
भिन्न ' split .''
"

Preto split;'
rt. भिद
rt. to fade ;'
79

.
ग्लान faded.'
rt. T ' to go ;' » ETT ' gone.
ta 'abandoned.
:
>

rt. I ' to abandon ;'

<
rt. Z ' to cut ;' 9 ) लून ' cut. '
rt. " to bend ;' भुन ' bent ;' (but भुक्त
ů

enjoyed ').
HA ' immerged .'
19

it. HST to dive ;' 99

>

rt. c ' to sit ;' HS ( with prep . a

etc. Farquot etc.)
( 6) The following are common exceptions to this rule : rt. Hp ' to
become intoxicated ,' P. P. Ptc. A intoxicated ;' rt. EZT ' to name,'
ख्यात ' named, known ;' ध्यै ' to think,' ध्यात ' thought'; व्ये forms वीत
and ca by $ 509, a.
(c) Some roots optionally change a to 7 ; rt. Ja ' to moisten ,' P. P.
Ptc. 374 or 57 moistened ;' rt. ' to strike,' g7 or Ja ' struck ;' rt
घ्रा ' to smell ,' प्रात or प्राण ' smelt ;' rt . वै ' to protect , वात or वाण ' pro
tected ;' rt. et'to be ashamed ,' ta or tu ‘ ashamed .' Rt. fit 'to
play' generally forms at played ,' but when it means ' to gamble,' it
forms यूत . Rt. विद् ' to know,' forms विदित 'known ;' rt. विद् ' to find,
वित्त or विन , & c.
$ 509. Before the suffis ( a or 7 ) of the Past. Passive Participle roots
undergo the following changes :
(a) The roots mentioned in § 381 6, 6, ( except a ) are changed as
they are changed in the Benedictive Par.; e.g.
 2
$ 509.] FORMATION OF NOMINAL BASES . 225

rt. Ta ' to speak ;' Past Pass. Ptc. 3 spoken .' di

rt. ac ' to say ;' » उदित ' said . $

rt. a ' to carry ;' ऊढ ' carried .'

rt. Tot ' to sacrifice ;' इष्ट ' sacrificed .' §

rt. Otet ' to pierce ;' fase ' pierced .'

"
rt. 43 ' to ask ;' पृष्ट ' asked .'
,

TOT ' torn .'

19
rt. 7 ' to tear ;'
rt. "to call ;
99

" हूत called .'

rt . Po to grow ;' शून grown .'
0
rt. Fer ' to decay ;' जीन decayed .'
"

ti

rt. E'to rule ;' FTE ' ruled . म

( 6) A penultimate radical nasal is generally dropped ( see 381 0

6,1 ) ; e.g.
rt. arrut ' to bind ;' Past Pass. Ptc. are ' bound.' t

rt. 7 ' to bite ;' दष्ट bitten .'

rt. Trot ' to tie ;' arota • tied .'

rt. 47 ' to break ;' > भम ' broken .'

But rt. Forme ' to blame;' , Apa blamed .

( c) The penultimate vowel of roots that end in a nasal is generally
lengthened before a (without the intermediate ); e.g.
rt. si ' to step ;' Past Pass. Ptc . front stepped' ( s 309, b).
rt. TA ' to grow calm ;' T'calm .'
(d ) But the roots TE ' to go,' t'to bend,' TE ' to restrain ,' og ' to
sport,' 7 'to think, to kill cl. 1, ʻto serve,' and all roots of the
8th ( tanúdi) class that end in a nasal, drop their final nasal before a ; e.g.
rt. TFF ' to go ;' Past Pass . Ptc. TTT ' gone.'
6
rt. 7 ' to strike ;' struck

rt. Ta ' to stretch ;' a stretched .'

29
226 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR . ($ 510–
( e ) And the roots at'to dig ,' 17'to be born,' and at ' to obtain,'
and at the same time lengthen their vowel before a (see
drop their final न्
§ 385, 2 ); e.g.
rt. ' to dig ;' Past Pass. Ptc . al 'dug.'
A final radical a< is changed to 5 before a ( without intermediate
5 ) and a ; but when preceded by s, it is dropped ( $ 309, a ); e.g.
rt. fera ' to sew ;' Past Pass. Ptc. FLE ' sewn.
rt. Par to play ;' द्यूत or धून (8508,0).
rt. Te ' to strike ;' aof ( $ 46 ) struck .
( ) Roots of the 1st (bhvádi) class with penultimate 3 may optionally
substitute Guņa for their radical vowel before the suffis a (when added
with intermediate ), prorided the Past Pass. Ptc. is used impersonally
or conveys the sense of beginning ' to perform the action or to undergo
the state expressed by the root ; e.g. rt. ' to delight' forms usually
gran delighted ;' but in the sense of beginning to delight,' or when the
Past Pass. Ptc. is used impersonally, it forms giga or HITTA.In a few
other roots, such as fera cl. 1, to which the suffix of the Past Pass. Ptc.
may under certain conditions ($ 507, c) optionally be added with the in
termediate 5, Guņa must be substituted for the radical rowel, when a is
added with t ; e.g. Fram or feat ; but of rt. fere cl. 4, fearea or FETT .
$ 510. The following roots form their Past Passive Partic. irregularly :
(a) atto cut; Past Pass. Ptc . a ' cut.'
T to place ;' placed :
2T ' to measure ;'
frameasured ,' bartered .'
#to barter ; }"
et to finish ; Feat finished
FYT to stand ; FELTA standing.'
A ' to sing ;' fra sung .'
.

Tito guck ; fra ' sucked .'

»

a ' to drink ;' ta drunk.

I ' to split ;' छात or छित 'split.'
i ' to sharpen ;
os

Ma or Fra 'sharpened .'

 FORMATION OF NOMINAL BASES . 227
$ 511.]

at ' to weave ;' Past Pass. Ptc. Twoven .

IT to wake ;' orta awake.

afst to be poor ;' दरिद्रित · poor
(6) The roots ar ' to give,' and 'to protect,' form in the Past Pass .
Ptc. a ' given,' ' protected ;' this participle may drop its initial F, when
a preposition that ends in a vowel is prefixed to it ; e.g.47 oral ; when
has thus been dropped , a preceding or 3 is lengthened ; e.g. fae
or नीत्त ..
( c) Alphabetical list of some other roots which form their Past
Pass . Ptc . irregularly :
rt. STE ' to eat;'. Past Pass. Ptc. fry 'caten ;' (37 € n . 'food” ).
rt. 3ta to protect ;' >
ऊत protected .'
fra or att destroyed .'
>

rt. PAT to destroy ;'

rt. Fort ' to be ill ;' 29 Fut ill ' ( as with fever).
rt . Ta ' to cleanse ;' धौतa • cleansed .'

rto cefla 'to grow ; प्यान or पीन grown.'

2

ed or in ' fainting.'
,
O

rt. Tot to faint ;

IT contracted .'

rt. pet » » » fta coagulated .'

fra ' cold .
It or TT cooked .'
09

rt. T . to cook ;'

rt. 1914 ' to grow ;' 9
Fita ' grown.'
rt. 1. to delight ;' delighted .'
$ 511. A few roots cannot form the Past Pass. Ptc, in a or ; its
meaning, however, is expressed by certain adjectives derived from the
roots e.g. rt. est to waste,' era wasted ;' rt. qq ' to cook, ' tracooked,
ripe; rt. शुष् to become dry,' शुष्क dry ;' rt. कृश् 'to emaciate ' कृश
emaciated' (but e.g.with prep. 2, Tama ); rt. n'to burst open,'
' blown' (but e.g. with prep . 4,959 or 79 ) &c.
228 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR . [$ 512

§ 512. (a) A Past Active Pto. is derived from the Past Pass. Ptc. in
a (or ) by the addition of the suffix TT ; e.g.
rt. at ' to bathe ; ' P.P.Ptc ET; P. Act. P. alam'one who has
bathed .'

rt . ' to do ;' कृतः; कृतवत् ' one who has

done.'
rt. T'to split ; > भिन्न भिन्नवत् ' one who has
split.'
(6 ) For the declension and the formation of the feminine base of
this participle see $ 111 & c.
2. - Tue GERUND.
$ 513. (a) The Gerund is generally formed either by the addition
of the suffix cl, or by the addition of the suffis q , to the root or derivative
verbal base. The suffis cat is added to roots or derivative verbal bases
to which no preposition (nor any of the words mentioned in $$ 488, 489)
is prefised ; 2 is added to roots or derivative verbal bases to which a pre
position (or one of the words mentioned in $$ 488, 489) is prefised . E.g.
rt. of to lead ;' Ger. ficat 'having led .'
rt. TT cl. 10 ' to steal ;" Deriv. Base Fit; Ger. alfacar bay.
ing stolen .'
rt. Ty ' to know ;' Caus, B. a ; Ger. of Caus. are forcat baving
caused to know.'
Ger. of rt. At with prep. Pa, Parita ' having trained .'
Ger. of the Caus. of rt. TT with prop. 7 , ENT naving in
formed ,
(6) The negative not' may be prefixed to either form of the
Gerund ; e.g.
27 + opical = apricat not having led.'
अ + चोरयित्वा = अचारयित्वा ' not having stolen.'
अ + विनीय = अविनीय; अ + प्रबोध्य अप्रबोध्य .
( a )-Formation of the Gerund by means of the sufis .
§ 514. The suffix an is added to many roots without intermediate si
to some roots it may optionally be added with or without intermediate
f ; to other roots and to derivative verbal bases it is added with the
intermediate
 FORJATION OF NONINAL BASES. 229
$ 514.]
(a) त्वा is added without intermediate इ to roots ending in rowels
(except श्वि, डी, शी, पू, and ), and to such anit roots (5 298, 4, 2) end
ing in consonants as are not specially mentioned under (6) and (6)
below ; e.g.
rt. ज्ञा ' to know ; Ger. ज्ञात्वा .

rt. जि ' to conquer ;' जित्वा.

rt. यु ' to join ;' युत्वा.
rt. भू ' to become ;' भूत्वा.
rt. कृ 6
' to do ;' 22 कृत्वा .

rt . तृ to cross ;' 2
तीळ (848).
rt. पृ ' to fill3B पूर्वा (848 ).
rt. त्रै ' to protect ;' त्रात्वा (8297,8).
rt. मुच् ' to loosen%3 मुत्का.
rt. छिद् to split ;' छित्त्वा.
(6) त्वा may optionally be added with or without intermediate r, to
the optionally-anit roots enumerated in $ 298,62 and 3 (except व्र)
to इष ( इच्छति ) ' to wish,' रिष् ' to hurt ,' रुष् 'to hurt,' लुभु ' to desire,' सह
to bear,' q ' to purify ,' to many roots ending in 37 and 373 ( viz. to et
तन , मन् , कम् , क्रम् , क्लम् , चम् , तम् , दम् , भ्रम् , रम् , शम् , श्रम , स्यम् ), to roots ।

ending in इव् , and to some other roots such as वृत् ' to be,' स्तम्भ ' to
support,' संस् ' to fall,' व ' to roam about,' & c.; eg.
rt. अन् ' to anoint ;' Ger. अञ्जित्वा or अक्त्वा or अक्त्वा .
।

rt. इष् ' to wish ;' एषित्वा or इट्टा.

rt. तन् ' to stretch ;' तनित्वा or तत्वा .

rt. खन् ' to dig ;' खनित्वा or खात्वा .

rt. दम् ' to tame; ' दमित्वा or दान्त्वा.

rt. वृत् ' to be ;' वर्तित्वा

or वृत्त्वा.
(c) वा must be added with intermediate इ to शुध् ' to be hungry ,
वस् ' to dwell,' to all roots that do not fall under ( 4) and (8) , and to
derivative verbal bases ; e.g.
।

230 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [ 8 5154

rt. क्षुध् ' to be hungry ;' Ger. क्षुधित्वा or क्षोधित्वा.

rt. 7 ' to tear ;' » व्रश्चित्वा.
rt. जीव् ' to live ;' जीवित्वा.
rt. बुध , Caus. B. बोधि ; बोधयित्वा.
Desid. B. बुबोधिष;, बुबोधिषित्वा.
( 4 ) The intermediate T must be lengthened after the rt . ग्रह ' to
seize' (Ger. गृहीत्वा ), and it may optionally be lengthened after rt. ' to
grow old ' (Ger. जरित्वा or जरीत्वा ).
§ 515. When it is added to a root without intermediate y, final
radical consonants combine with the initial ą of as they combine
with the initial a of the suffis a ( $ 507, e ); moreover the root is liable
to all the changes described in $ 509 ( 0) 10. E.g.
rt. a ' to speak ;' Ger. उत्का .
rt. यज् ' to sacrifice3B इष्टवा .
rt. are ' to bind ;' बढ़ा.
rt. शम् ' to grow calm %3';' शान्त्वा ( or शमित्वा ).
गत्वा .
rt. गम् ' to go3'
rt. खन् ' to dig ;' खात्वा (or खनित्वा ).
rt. दिव् ' to play ;' " द्यूत्वा ( or दवित्वा).
$ 516. When it is added with intermediate 7, the following rules
apply to the root :
( a) Guņa is generally substituted for penultimate short vowels and
for final vowels. Penultimate nasals are not dropped. E.g.
rt . इष् ' to wish ; Ger. एषित्वा (or इष्ट्वा).
rt. दिव् ' to play ;' 99 देवित्वा (or यूत्वा).
rt. वृत् 'to be ;' वर्तित्वा ( or वृत्त्वा).
rt . शी ' to lie down%3;' शयित्वा.
rt. पू ' to purify ;' पवित्वा (or पूत्वा).
rt . → ' to grow old ;' जरित्वा or जरीत्वा .
rt. संस् ' to fall ; >) संसित्वा (or स्रस्त्वा ).
( 8) Guna may optionally be substituted for penultimater and 3 of
roots which begin with consonants and end in any consonant except a;
$ 518.] FORMATION OF NOMINAL BASES . 231

likewise for the penultimate of तृष ' to thirst,' मृष् to bear,' and कृम्
" to become emaciated ;' e.g.
rt. द्युत् ' to shine ;' Ger. द्युतित्वा or द्योतित्वा.
O

rt. लिख् ' to write ;' लिखित्वा or लेखित्वा.

rt. क्लिद् ' to be moist ;' क्लिदित्वा or क्लेदित्वा (or क्लित्त्वा ).
rt. तष् ' to thirst ; तृषित्वा or तर्षित्वा.
(c) Guna is ( against a and 6 ) not substituted for the radical rowel
of कुष् ' to extract ,' क्लिश्। ' to torment,' गुध् ' to put on' (clothes ), मुष ' to
steal, ' मृड ' to delight,' मृद् ' to rub,' रुद् 'to weep,'विद् ' to know,' and of
विज् ' to tremble, ' and certain other roots.. The roots ग्रह ' to seize ,'' वद्
6
to say,' and वस्, ‘ to dwell,' are changed as in the Past Pass. Ptc. E.g.
rt. क्लिश् ' to torment ; Ger. क्लिशित्वा (or क्लिष्ट्वा)
rt. विद् ' to know ; विदित्वा.
rt. वद् ' to say ;' , उदित्वा.
rt. वस् ' to divell ; उषित्वा.
rt. ग्रह ' to seize%3B गृहीत्वा.
(d ) A penultimate nasal of roots ending in & or F, and the penulti
mate nasal of वच् ' to roam about, ' and लुच्च् ' to tear out,' may ( against
a) be dropped ; e.g.
rt. ग्रन्थ् ' to tie ;' Ger. प्रथित्वा or ग्रन्थित्वा.
rt. वञ्च 6
to roam ;' वचित्वा or वञ्चित्वा (or वत्त्वा ).
$ 517 . The final s of derivative verbal bases in इ is gunated ; other
derivative verbal bases undergo before the intermediate of the Gerudd
the same changes which they undergo before the intermediate of the
Future, &c. E.g.
rt. चुर् cl. 10 to steal ;' Deriv. Base चोरि ; Ger. चोरयित्वा .
rt. बुध् ' to know Caus. Base बोधि ; बोधयित्वा.
Desid.. Base बुबोधिष;, बुबोधिषित्वा.
Atm. Freq. B. बोबुध्य ;, बोबुधित्वा.
$ 518. The following roots form their Gerund in a irregularly:
(a) The roots enumerated in § 510 (a) and (6) are changed in the
Gerund in cat as they are changed in the Past Pass. Ptc. ; e.g.
 232 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR . [$ 519–

rt. दो ' to cut ;' Past Pass. Ptc.दित ; Ger. दिवा.

rt . धा ' to place ;' >
हित ; हित्वा.
rt. स्था to stand ; स्थित ; स्थित्वा.
rt . पा ' to drink ;' पीत : पीत्वा .
वे ' to weave ;' उत ; उत्वा .

"
rt.

rt. दा ' to give ;' दत्त ;

99 दत्त्वा .
( 6 ) Roots in preceded by a nasal optionally retain that nasal even
when it is added without intermediate T; eg.
rt. भन्न् ' to break Ger. भड़ा
मला or भत्त्वा .
rt. अन् ' to anoint ; अङ्का or अत्का (or अजित्वा ).
अ

( c) Alphabetical list of some other roots that form their Gerund in

car irregularly :
rt. अद् ' to eat ;' Ger . जग्ध्वा .

rt. क्रम् ' to stride;' क्रान्त्वा or क्रन्त्वा or क्रमित्वा.

rt. गुह् ' to hide ;' गुहित्वा or गूहित्वा ( see $ 403,8 ) or गूदा.
rt. नश् ' to perish ;' > नंष्ट्वा ( see $ 403,13) or नष्ट्वा or नशित्वा.
rt. HIT ' to dive ;' मङ्का ( see $ 403,15 ) or मत्त्वा.
rt. मृज् ' to wipe;' मार्जित्वा ( see $ 403,19) or मृष्ट्वा.
rt. Faling to leap ;' " स्कन्वा.
rt. स्यन्द् ' to flow3;' स्यत्वा or स्यन्दित्वा .
rt. हा ' to abandon ;' , हित्वा ; (bnt Ger. of हा ' to go, ' हात्वा).
(6)-Formation of the Gerund by means of the sufrir .
8519. ( 0 ) The suffix य is added immediately to the root ; e.g.
।
आ + rt. दा ; Ger. आदाय.
वि + rt. नी ; 99 विनीय .
प्र + rt. भू ; "9 प्रभूय.
वि + rt. छिद् " विच्छिद्य ($ 38, a).
अप + rt. नु । " अपनुद्य.
 FORM ATION
OF NOMI NAL
BASES . 233
$ 522.]
(6) J is changed to co when it is preceded by a short radical vowel.
This rule applies even when the short radical vowel combines with the
final rowel of a preceding preposition to a long rowel. E ...
वि + rt. जि ; Ger .विजित्य,
प्र + rt. स्तु ; 99 प्रस्तुत्य.
प्र + rt. कृ ; "9 प्रकृत्य.
अधि + rt.s : अधीत्य .
प्र + rt. इ 3; प्रेत्य .
§ 520. The rules given in § 381 ( 6), 1, 4, 6, and 7, apply to the root
•

also in the Gerund in य ( but see $ 523 ) ; e.g.

नि + rt . बन्धः Ger. निबध्य .
प्र + rt. कृ प्रकीर्य.
प्र + rt . पृ. प्रपूर्य.
प्र + rt. वचः प्र + उच्य - प्रोच्य.

प्र + rt. वस् ; प्र + उष्य -प्रोष्य .

नि + rt. ग्रह निगृह्य. .

आ + rt . प्रछः आपृच्छच.
आ + rt. हे ; " आहूय.
प्र + rt . दिव् : प्रदीव्य .
5521. Final radical आ remains unchanged (observes 297,6 ) ; ther
and g of मि , री, and मी are changed to आ ; and the ई of ली is
optionally changed to ST (compare $ 403, 11 ). E.g.
आ + rt. दा ; Ger . आदाय .

परि + rt. ; परिवाय .

उप + rt. दी ; 99 उपदाय .

वि + rt. ली ; 9 विलाय or विलीय .

5522. (a) The roots गम् ' to go,' नम् ' to bend , ' यम् 'to restrain ,' and
रम् ' to sport ' may drop their final म् before य ( which by $ 519,8 , must
6

be changed to 2 when is dropped ) ; the roots of the 8th (tanádi) class

30 $
.
234 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR , ( 8 523

which end in a nasal (except सन्), and the roots हन् and मन् cl. 4, must
drop their final nasal. E.g.
आ + rt . गम् : Ger. आगम्य or आगत्य ,
वि + rt. तन्ः वितत्य.
प्र + rt. हन् : " प्रहत्य .
अव + rt. मन् : अवमत्य .

(8) The roots खन् ' to dig,' जन् ' to beget,' and सन् 'to obtain' option
ally drop their final 7 and lengthen at the same time their rowel when
they do so ; e.g. नि + rt. खन् : Ger. निखन्य or निखाय.
at
$ 523. Alphabetical list of other roots which form the Gerund in a
irregularly :
rt . अद् ' to eat;' Ger . जग्ध्य ; e.g. प्रजग्ध्य.
rt. क्षि ' to destroy ;' 99 क्षीय ; प्रलीय .
rt. जागृ to wake ;' 99
जागर्य ; प्रजागर्य.
rt . ज्या ' to grow old ;
"

ज्याय ; 9 प्रज्याय .
rt. मे " to barter ;' 99 माय ; अपमाय .
, or पमित्य : अपमित्य.
rt . वे ' to weave ;' ब्वाय ; प्रवाय .
.
rt. व्ये ' to cover ;' व्याय ; " उपव्याय .
( with prep . परि , परिव्याय or परिवीय ).
hel rt . शी ' to lie down ;' Ger. शय्य ; e.g. निशय्य.
नी $ 524. (a ) When the suffix is added to derivative verbal bases
of roots of the 10th ( churûdi) class or to causal bases, the final of these
bases is dropped ; but if the syllable which immediately precedes the
final of the base is prosodially short, the final of the base is changed
to sry before 4. E.g.
rt. चुर् cl. 10 ; Deriv. Base चोरि ; Ger. °चोर्य; e.g. प्रचोर्य,
rt . बुधः Caus. Base बोधि ; प्बोध्य ; प्रबोध्य.
d rt. नी ; )
नायि ; नाय्य ; आनाय्य .

che
rt. कारि ; " कार्य: 9 प्रकार्य.
 FORMATION OF NOMINAL BASES . 235
$ 526.]
But rt. गण् cl . 10; Deriv . Base गणि ; Ger. गणय्य ; eg. विगणय्य.
rt. गम् Caus. Base गमि ; , गमय्य ; " अपगमय्य .
(8) The causal base आपि ( of rt. आप् ' to obtain' ) may either drop
its final s or change it to अय् ; eg . Ger. of the Causal of प्र + आप, प्राप्य
or प्रापथ्य .
$ 525. Desiderative bases drop their final at
37 before a ; Atm. frequenta.
tive bases drop their final , when it is preceded by a consonant ;
but when it is preceded by a vowel, they drop only their final 94. E.g.

rt. बुध ; Desid . Base बुबोधिष; Ger . "बुबोधिष्य ; ०.g. प्रबुबोधिष्य.

Atm. Freq. B. बोबुध्य ; > 'बोबुध्य ; प्रबोबुध्य .
rt. भूः बोभूय ; • बोभूय्य ; प्रबोभूय्य.
(c ) -The Gerund in 377.
$ 526. ( a ) A third kind of Gerund may be formed by adding the
suffix 374 immediately to the root or the derivative verbal basc, which
before 3 generally undergo the same changes which they undergo
before the final y of the 3 Sing. Aor, of the Passive ; e.g.
rt. भिद्; 3 Sg. Aor. Pass. अमेदि ; Ger. भेदम् having
' split.'.
rt. चि ; अचायि ; , चायम् having gathered.'
अलावि , लावम् ha
' ving cut..
s
,

rt. टू >>

rt. वद् ; " >

अवादि ; , वादम् 'having spoken .'
rt. दा ; अदायि ; ,, दायम् having given.'
rt. गम् ; 3 Sg. Aor. Pass. अगमि ; गमम् ] 'having caused
or
of the Causal अगामि ; , गामम् . to go..'
( 6) This Gerund in अम् occurs only rarely. It is mostly used re
peated, lo denote reiteration or repetition of the action or state which
is expressed by the verb ; e.g. स्मारंस्मारम् ' haring repeatedly remem .
bered,' पायंपायम् ' having drunk repeatedly. ' It may also be employed after
the adverbs अग्रे , पूर्वम्, प्रथमम् ; ... प्रथम भोज व्रजति · having first eaten,
he goes.' Sometimes it is used as the last member of a compound in
6
peculiar idiomatic constructions ; e.g. एवंकारं भ ) he eats, doing ( it )
 236 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR . [6527

thus' i.e. he eats thus;' ब्राह्मणवेदं भोजयति 'he feeds as many Brahmana
as he knows;' & c.
3. - THE INFINITIVE,

$ 527. The Infinitive is formed by the suffis 3 which is added to

roots and to derivative verbal bases in the same manner in which the
termination ता of the 3 Sing. of the Periph. Future Par. or Atm. is
added to them ; e.g.

rt. दा ; Periph. Fut. दाता ; Infin. दातुम् ' to give.'

rt . जि ; जता ; जेतुम् ' to conquer.''
rt. भू ; "
भविता : भवितुम् ' to be.'
rt. कृ ; कर्ता : 2
कर्तुम् ' to do.'

rt. : तरिता : तरितुम् । ' to cross .'

orतरीता ; तरीतुम् ।
rt. ग्रह ग्रहीता ; ग्रहीतुम् ' to seize .'.'
rt. गै ; >
गाता ; " गातुम् • to sing.''
rt. पन् : पत्ता ; पतुम् ' to cook.''
rt. व्रत व्रश्चिता ; वचितुम् । to tear .'
or व्रष्टा ;
जीविता ;
तुम्
" बटुम्
जीवितुम् to live.'
rt. जीव
rt. चुर् : चोरयिता ; चोरयितुम् ' to steal.'
rt. बुध ; Periph. Fut.
of Causal बोधयिता ; बोधयितुम् ' to cause to know.'
of Desid. बुबोधिषिता; ,, बुबोधिषितुम् 'to wish to know.'
of Atm. Frq. बोबुधिता; बोबुधितुम् ' to know often.'
4. - VERBAL ADJECTIVES.

$ 528. (a) There are three common rerbal adjectives which

may be formed from any root or derivative verbal base. One of them is
formed by means of the suffix तव्य ( masc. and nent.; तव्या fem. ), another
by means of the suffix अनीय ( masc. and nent.; अनीया fem .), and the
third by means of the sufix य ( masc. and nent.; या fem. ) ; e.g.
 FORMATION OF NOMINAL BASES . 237
5530.]
rt. बुध् ' to know; बोधितव्य or बोधनीय or बोध्य ' what must or
ought to be known .'
rt. Ft' o do :';' कर्तव्य or करणीय or कार्य ' what must or ought to
be done. '
(6) For the declension of these, verbal adjectives see § 131 .
( a ) -The Verbal Adjective in तब्ब.
$ 529. The suffis post is added to roots and derivative bases in
the same manner in which the suffix gh of the Infinitive is added to
them ; e.g.
rt. दा ; Inf. दातुम् ; Vb . Adj. दातव्य what must or ought to
be given.'
rt. जि ; जेतुम्ः > जेतव्य " conquered .'
rt. भू भवितुम् ; भवितव्य what must or ought to
be .?

rt. मुन् , ,, मोक्तुम्;; मोक्तव्य what must or ought to

be loosened .'

चोरयितव्य stolen .'

rt. चुर् ; " चोरयितुम् , >

rt. बुधः
Caus . " बोधयितुम् ; बोधयितव्य ' what must or ought
to be made to know .'
Rinpan-
(6) The Verbal Adjective in srita .
5530. The vowels of primitive roots are before the suffix अनीव
( changeable to sporta by $ 58) liable to the same changes to which they
are liable in the Simple or Periph. Future Par. or Åtm .; penultimate
Fe, however, is always changed to 977 ( not to ) ; in re it is changed
to आर्.. E.g.
rt . दा ; Vb . Adj . दा + अनीय = दानीय ' what must or ought
to be given .'
rt. गै ; गा + अनीय गानीय । » sung .”
rt. जि ;: जे + अनीय जयनीय ' , conquered .'
rt. नी : ने + अनीय = नयनीय led ..

rt. श्रु : श्रो

+
+ अनीय श्रवणीय heard :

rt. कृ ; कर् + अनीय = करणीय done.

238 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR . [8 5314

rt. पच्: Vb. Adj. पचनीय what must or ought to be

cooked .'

rt .भिद् ; भेदनीय split.'

rt. सृजः सर्जनीय omitted .'

rt.निन्द निन्दनीय blamod .'

rt. गुह । गृहनीय (5403, 8) 1 hidden.'

rt. मृज मार्जनीय ( 6403,19). " wiped.

भ्रज्जनीय or fried .'
rt. भ्रज्ज
3.}
भर्जनीय (3403,14)
$ 531. The final इ of derivative bases of roots of the 10th ( churádi)
class and of causal bases, and the final 37 ofdesiderative bases are dropped
before stata ; the final 37 of Atmanepada Frequent. bases is dropped
when their final , is preceded by a vowel ; but when it is preceded by a
consonant, the whole final 4 is dropped. E.g.
rt. चुर: Der. B. चोरि ; Vb. Adj. चोरणीय ' what must or ought to
be stolen.'
rt. बुध: Caus.B. बोधि ; बोधनीय 6
inade
to know .'

n Desid.B .बुबोधिष ; , . बुबोधिषणीयः 1, desired

to know.'

„ Å.Freq.B. aigua बोबुधनीय kuowo

frequently.'
rt. भूः बोभूय ; बोभूयनीय frequent
ly to be.'
rt. दा 3 Caus. B. दापि ; दापनीय to be
made to give.'
(c ) -The Verbal Adjective in 4.
8532. When the suffix य is added to roots ending in rowels, these
vowels undergo the following chauges :
(a) Final मा, (ए , ऐ, and ओ, 8 297, b) is changed to ए ; g.
§ 534.] FORMATION OF NONINAL BASES . 239

rt. ; Verb . Adj. 24 " what must or ought to be given .'

rt. ; धेय sucked .'
गेय sung
rt. ; >
सेय finished

19
rt. सो ;
(2) Final 5 and $ are gunated ; e.g.
rt. F ; Verb. Adj. 14 'what mustoronght to be conquered.'
rt. ft; नेय » led .'
(c) For final # and # Vșiddhi is substituted ; e.g.
rt. ; Verb. Adj. Erf what must or ought to be seized .'
art crossed .'
rt. Ti
(d ) is substituted for final 3 and 5; but when the verbal adjec
tive conveys the notion of necessity, the substitute for final 3 and
is SIT . E.g.
rt. I ; Verb. Adj. 7541 ' what must or ought to be praised.'
Tout what must necessarily be praised .'
rt. लू: out what must or ought to be cat.'
99 Tou what must necessarily be cut.'
§ 533. When is added to roots with penultimate (prosodially
short) 5, 3 , # , or , the following rules apply :
(a) Penultimate 7, 3, and are gunated ; c.g.
rt. BTE ; Verb. Adj. Ha • what must or ought to be split .' .
rt. बुध बोध्य 2 known .'
(6 ) Penultimate # remains unchanged ; e.g.
rt. TT ; Verb. Adj. To whatmustor onght to be destroyed .'
$ 534. To roots with penultimate ( prosodially short) 94, is added
thus :
( a ) When the root with penultimate sy ends in a labial letter, w
remains unchanged ; when the root ends in any other letter, is
lengthened , E.g.
;
 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR . [$ 535–
240

rt. T; Verb. Adj . 744 ' what must or ought to be cursed .'
क्षम्य " borne.'
rt. क्षम् :
read .'
पाठच .
rt. पन्
. वाद्य said.'
rt. वद्
वाच्य । spoken.'
>> »
rt. व 91

(6) The 3 of theroots aq 'to be ashamed ,' q ' to speak;' y ' to

speak,' व ' to sow,' and चम् 'to sip' is lengthened, although these
roots end in labial letters ;on the other hand, the 3 ofera ' to ask,' 7
• to beget,' तक ' to laugh,' & c., यत् ' to endeavour,' शक ' to be able,' शस्
' to hurt,' and सह ' to bear' remains short. The अ of गद् ' to speak
and of some other roots is lengthened only when a preposition is prefixed
to them. B.g.
rt. 96; Verb. Adj. ay 6
what must or ought to be sown .'
सह्य 99 borne .'
rt. सह ; "

6
गद्य spoken .'
rt. गद । 95

( But with prep. प्र , प्रगाच .)

$ 535. Prosodially long vowels of roots ending in consonants remain
unchanged ; e.g.
rt. Pang ; Vorb. Adj. forry ' what must or ought to be blamed .'
6
rt. पूज पूज्य honoured ..
बन्ध्या bound .
rt. बन्ध
$ 536. (a) Final and of roots which show no intermediate q in
the Past Pass. Ptc ., are changed to go and a respectively before the
.

suffixties.

rt . सिन्; P.P.Ptc. सिक्त ; Vb. Adj. सेक्य ' what must or ought
to be sprinkled .'
rt. पच ;: पक्क : पाक्य . cooked '
" 5) .

rt. अन् अक्त : अङ्गच : anointed :

गजितः
But rt. गर्ज :. गणं.
(1) The finals of am to speak,' स्यग् ' to abandon ,' and यश् ' to
sacrifice,' remain unchanged ; likewise the final of g in gast and
 FORMATION OF NOXINAL BASES . 241
$ 537.)
नियोज्य, that of भुज in भोज्य when it means ' what must be eaten ,' and
the final or of any root when 7754 ' necessarily ' is prefixed to
the Verbal Adjective ; e.g.
rt. ; Verb. Adj. aley ' what must or ought to be spoken .'
rt. त्य 9 त्याज्य abandoned .'
rt. पच् : 3777879reet'what must necessarily be cooked .'
$ 537. Alphabetical list of some roots which form the Verb. Adj. in
y irregularly :
rt . इ ' to go ;' Verb. Adj. इत्य .
rt. 77 ' to praise ;' अर्ग्य.
rt. कृ ' to do ;' कृत्य or कार्य .
rt. खन् ' to digi खेय .
rt. गुह् ' to hide गुंह्य or गोय .
rt. चर् ' to go,' when without prepos ., or with prepos. आ
forms चर्य ; otherwise °चार्य ; ( आचर्य · to be gone to :
आचार्य ' an instructor ').
rt. g ' to be pleased ;' Verb . Adj. you .
rt. दुह् ' to milk दुह्य or दोय.
rt . दृ ' to respect ;' दृत्य .

rt.Y 'to support;' Verb. Adj. भृत्य ; ( with prep. सम् ,

संभृत्य or संभार्य ).
rt. मृज् ' to wipe ;' मृज्य or मार्य,
rt. यु ' to mix ;' " याव्य .
rt. लभ् ' to take' (with
prep . आ ); आलम्भ्य ; ( otherwise लभ्य ).
rt. " to select ;' वृत्य or वार्य .
rt. वृष् ' to rain ;' वृष्य or व l..
31 .
240 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [$ 5354

rt. शपु ; Verb.Adj. शप्य ' what mnst or ought to be cursed .'
क्षम्य borne...'

"
rt. क्षम्
rt. पठ् 99 पाठच । read .'

rt . वद् , . वाद्य said .'

rt. वचः 11 वाच्य 99 spoken.'

( 8) The t of the roots वर ' to be ashamed,' रए ' to speak,' लए ' to
speak,' व ' to sow,' and चम् 'to sip' is lengthened , although these
roots end in labial letters ; on the other hand, the अ of चत् ' to ask,' जन्
• to beget,' सक् ' to laugh,' &c., यत् ' to endeavour ,' शक् ' to be able,' शम्
' to hurt, and सह ' to bear' remains short . The अ of गद् ' to speak'
and of some other roots is lengthened only when a preposition is prefixed
to them. E.g.
rt . वप : Verb. Adj . वाप्य ' what must or ought to be sown.'
rt. सह ; सह्य borne.'
6
rt. गद् । spoken .'
( But with prep. प्र प्रगाच .)
535. Prosodially long vowels of roots ending in consonants remain
unchanged ; e.g.
rt. Farage ; Vorb. Adj. Farmer ' that must or oughtto be blamed .
6
rt. पूज पूज्य > honoured .
बन्ध्य . bound .'
rt. बन्ध
$ 536. ( a ) Final and of roots which show no intermediate in
the Past Pass. Pte ., are changed to and a respectively before the
suffixat .

rt. सिन्; P.P.Ptc.सिक्त ; Vb. Adj. सेक्य ' what must or ought
to be sprinkled .'
rt. पन् : पक्क : पाक्य 21 cooked .'

rt. अन् अक्त : अङ्गच : anointed .'

But rt. गर्न :, गर्जितः ग l.
(B) The finals of वच ' to speak ,' त्या to abandon, and बश् ' to
sacrifice,' remain unchanged ; likewise the final of g in past and
§ 537.] FORMATION OF XOXINAL BASES. 241

नियोज्य, that of भुज in भोज्य when it means ' what must be eaten ,' and
the final or of any root when a necessarily ' is prefixed to
the Verbal Adjective ; e.g.
rt. वच ; Verb. Adj. वाच्य ' what must or onght to be spoken.'
rt. त्य 9 त्याज्य . abandoned .'
rt. पच् ; अवश्यपाच्य ' whatmust necessarily becooked.'
$ 537. Alphabetical list of some roots which form the Verb. Adj. in
य irregularly :
rts ' to go ;' Verb . Adj. इत्य .
rt. ऋच् ' to praise ;' अर्ग्य.
rt. कृ ' to do ;' कृत्य or कार्य.
:

rt. खन् ' to digi खेय.

rt. गुह् ' to hide3' गुंह्य or गोय .
rt. चर् ' to go,' when without prepos. , or with prepos. आ
forms चर्य ; otherwise °चार्य ; ( आचर्य to be gone to :
आचार्य ' an instructor').
rt. जुष् ' to be pleased ; Verb. Adj. जुष्य .
rt. दुइ to milk ;' दुह्य or दोय.
rt . ' to respect ;' दृत्य .
rt.9 'to support;' Verb. Adj. IT; (with prep. सम् ,
संभृत्य or संभार्य).
rt. मृज् ' to wipe ;' मृज्य or मार्य.
rt. यु ' to mix ;' " याव्य ,.
rt. लभ् ' to take' (with
prep. आ ); आलम्भ्य ; ( otherwise लभ्य ).
rt. to select ;' वृत्य or वार्य .
rt . वृष् ' to rain ;' वृष्य or वर्ण्य.
31
 ।

242 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR . [$ 538_

rt. शंस् ' to praise ;' Verb. Adj. शस्य or शंस्य. .

rt. शास् ' to rale ;' शिष्य .

rt. सु '' to press ont'
( with prep. आ ); , आसाव्य ; (otherwise सव्य or
rt. स्तु ' to praise ;' स्तुत्य . साव्य ).
6
rt. हन् to strike ;' वध्य or घार

$ 5:38 . When the suffis J is added to derivatire verbal bases, the final
letters of the bases undergo the same changes which they undergo before
the suffix अनीय (6531 ) ; e.g.

rt. चु ; Deriv. Base चोरि ; Verb. Adj चोरणीय ; चोर्य,.

rt. बुधः Caus. Base बोधि ; बोधनीय ; बोध्य .
rt. दा ; दापि ; दापनीय ; दाप्य .
rt. कृतः Deriv . Base कीर्ति ; कीर्तनीय ; कीर्त्य.
5.-A LIST OF OTHER CONION PRIMARY OR KRIT SUFFIXES.
5539. 1. अ forms masculine (more rarely neuter) substantires which
ilenote the action or state expressed by the verbal root ; sometimes it is
employed to form adjectives, or substantives denoting the ngent, & c. The
penultimate short or the final vowel of a root commonly takes its Guņa or
Vșiddhi substitute ; more rarely it remains unchanged ; and sometimes the
root is shortened before sf. The suffix is added both to roots without
prefixes, and to roots combined with prepositions or other prefises ($ 9 488
and 489 ); sometimes the nominal base formed with it is used only in
composition with other nouns or with certain prefixes. E.g. जय m.
' conquering, rictory' ( rt. जि ) ; उदय m. ' rise ' ( rt. E with prep. उद् :)) ;
उपदेश m. 'instruction' (rt. दिए with pr. उप ) ; लोभ .n. ' greed ' ( rt. लुभ् );
6
रोग m. ' disease ' ( rt. रुज
)) ; आदर m . ' regard ' ( rt. Eह with pr. आ ) ; प्रकर्ष
। m. ' preference' ( rt. कृष , कर्षति, with pr. प्र ) ; क्रम m . ' step ' (rt . क्रम् ) ;
भय . ' fear, danger ' ( rt. भी ) ; क्षम ' patient ' ( rt. क्षम् ) ; ईश m. ' .
ruler, lord ' ( rt. ईश् ) ; योध m . a warrior ' ( rt. युध ) -पाक m. ' the act
of cooking ' ( rt. पच् ) ; प्रणाम m . ' salutation ' ( rt. नम् with pr. प्र ) ; विषाद
m . • dejection ' ( rt. सद् with pr. वि ) ; भाव M. ' being, becoming ' ( rt. भू );
मिश्रीभाव m. ' the becoming mixed ' (मिश्रीभू6439) ; सत्कार m. ' respectful
treatment ' ( सत्-कृ 9488, 3) ; अध्याय m. reading, study ' ( rt. E with
pr. अधि ) ; उपाध्याय m. a teacher ' ( rt. E with pr . उप and अधि ) ; - बुध
& 539. ] FORMATION OF NONINAL BASES . 243

“ knowing, intelligent' ( rt. gr . ). - PET knowing ' ( rt. At with pr.

TA ) ; - . ' pot-maker, potter ' ( rt. 5 ) ; arhit m . the •
light-maker, i.e., the sum ' (rt. ) ; T211 m . the water - giver, i.e., a cloud '
>

( rt. eदा ) ; द्व

1 िज in.m ' a twice-born ' or ' aa bird ' (rt. t T ) ; - ' easy
to be done ' rt. 7 ) ; grisar ditticult to be obtained ' ( rt. igot ).
2. STT ( changeable to 577 by $ 58
) mostly forms ncuter substantives
which denote the action or state espressed by the root or verbal base, the
instrument or means by which that action or state is brought about, &c.;
but it also forms some feminine nouns ( in star, especially from roots of
the churádi class or causal verbs) , and masculine nouns. A penultimate
short or a final vowel of the root is generally gunated. E.g. 1747 Noʻgoing'
n

( rt. गम् ); वचन . ' speech' ( rt. वच् ) ; वदन n . the mouth, face' (rt. वद्);
57227A n . ' reading, study ' ( rt. with pr. TT ) ; staarvo n. ' going
after ' ( rt. x with pr. 37 ) ; 797 n . 'eye' ( rt. f ) ; 977 n . ' car ' ( rt.
6
श्रु ) ; भोजन . - food ' ( rt. भुज ) ; मरण n. death ' ( rt. मृ ) ; भूषण . ' an
Ornament ' ( rt. भूष ) ; आसन . a sent ' ( rt. आस् ) ; करण 1. or कारण ..
a
' cause'' ( rt. 5 वाहन n.
कृ ) ; ara n ' a vehicle ' ( rt. 7E ); T9 n . ' a gift' ( rt. );
?
आख्यान 11.
Her ॥. ' a tale ' (rt. well with pr. 5 ) ;— 177 S. counting' ( rt.
गण ) ; -रमण m . a lorer ' ( rt. रम ).
3. STE ( Decl . V. ) forms a number of (mostly ) neuter nonns. А
penultimate short or a final vowel of the root is guvated. E.g. 77 n.
' speech ' ( rt. TI );3 n . mind ' (rt. 77 ) ;i THEN. ' adoration ' ( it.
नम् ) ; चेतस् ॥. ' mind, intellect ' ( rt. चित् ).
4. 4 ( Decl. IX . ) also forms neuter nouns, and before it a penulti
niate short or a final vowel of the root is likewise guvated. E.g. FTFARTN .
birth ' (rt. 777 ) ; ** n. ' action , deed ' ( rt. 5 ) ; The n. 'armour' (rt.
2 ) ; 57.' a dwelling, house ' ( rt. f ).
5. a mostly forins neuter substantives which denote the instrument
or means by which the action expressed by the root is accomplished.
Before this suffix, too, the vowel of the root is gunated . E.g. qran. पान
' a drinking -cup, a cup, a vessel ' ( rt. Tiara ); on n. ' the mouth, face
Ten.'a garment ' ( rt. 14 , TH ) ; ta n . " eye' ( rt. eft ) ;
( rt. 17) ; वस्त्र
6
jra a n . ' ear ' ( rt . ) ; Tia 1.'command, rule, precept,' &c. ( rt. Tr ) ;
-

- but n.orgt f. ' a tusk ' ( rt. t ).

6. fa ( Decl. XIII . ) forms a large number of feminine substantives
which generally denote the action or state expressed by the root. In
most cases, this suffis is added like, and the root undergoes before it the
same changes which it undergoes before, the suffis ñ of the Past Pass.
6
Participle. E.g. alia f. conduct ' ( rt. ft ) ; fra f. praise' ( rt. Fa ) ;
sirna f.'make,shape ' ( rt. with pr. st ) ; gift f. ' liberation ' ('rt.
 244 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR . Is 339—
) ; graf. ' knowledge' ( rt. g ) ; are f. creation ' ( rt. 3 ) ;
.

Ere f. ' sight' ( rt. [ T ); sfiti f ' speech ' ( rt. 99 ) ; fe f. sacrifice
(rt : यज ) ;3 कान्ति / loveliness ' (rt. कम् ) ; गति /. ' motion ' ( rt . गम् ) ;
ata f. 'birth' (rt. 7) ; streta f. 'striking, a blow' (rt. 67 with pr. st);
feufa /. ' standing ' (rt. RIT ) ; f. help ' (rt. 37 ) .-- As the suffix a
is changed to , so fa is changed to fa (or for), after roots ending in * .

and after
लू and some other roots ( but not after roots ending in ) ; e.y.
miliórf. scattering ' ( rt. ); grâ S. cutting' (rt. 2) ; strâ S.- fatigue' ( rt.
;

on ); but faqiat f.calamity' (rt. qq with pr. ft; Past Pass. Ptc. Faqa ).
7. BT is added, instead of Pa , to those roots ending in consonants
which contain a prosodially long vowel and show the intermediate in
the Past Pass. Participle, and to derivative verbal bases (except causal
bases and most roots of the churidi class, which take spat ; see 2, above).
E.y. SET 1. ' exertion ' ( rt. E ) ; ħar f. ' service ' ( rt. Àa ) ; TETT F.
* worship ' (rt. ( F ) ; HST f. play ' (rt . * ); T f. ' regard ' ( rt. fu
with pr. 379 ) fra
6
; f. 'the wish to know' ( from Desid . base of rt. a ) ;
fra f. ' thirst' (from Desid. base of rt. 91); INT f. hunger ' ( from
Desid , base of rt. ).

8. 3 is added to Desiderative bases to denote the ageut. E.y. para

desirous to go' (rt. 2 ); 391fag desirous to approach ' ( rt. TĄ
with pr. 39 ) ; PEU desirous to see ' ( rt. FT) ; hay desirous to
create ' ( rt. 7 ) ; gag about to die, moribuud' (rt. E ).
O. Foi may generally be added to any root or derivative verbal base
to denote the agent. Before it, a penultimate short radical vowel is
gunated, while a final vowel or penultimate 3 (except the 37 of se! roots
ending in ) takes its Vriddhi substitute . Roots in IT ( F, , and apt.
$ 297, 2 ) insert y before sta . E.g. ( fem. a ) ' splitting
(rt.fp); T1 m.'au informer' (from Caus. of rt. Ju ) ;JIT 'leading,
a leader' (rt. aft) ; TAR ' taming' (rt. ) ; for 'restraining' (rt. TA
with pr. faj; TT m . ' a father ' (rt . 7 ) ; T2T ' giving' (rt. T) ;
माहक ' recciving (rt. ग्रह ) ; घातक ' killing' ( rt. हन ).
10. a ( Deel. XVI.) also is added to roots and derivative verbal bases
tv denute the agent. It is added in every way like the termination at of
the 3 Sing of the Periplı. Fut . Par. or Atm ., which in fact, as has been
already stated ( $ 373), is the Nom . Sing. Masc. of this suffis. E.g.
of 3 ( fem . Traff ) ' n doer, an agent' (rt . 5) ; fra a giver' (rt. ar ; are
• a protector ' (rt. a ) ; 'n speaker ' (rt. 17 ); rę ' a fighter ' ( rt.
) ; & c.

1
1

1
§ 540.] FORMATION OF NONINAL BASES. 2:15

11. 57 ( Decl. IV.) forms nouns denoting the agent. It is mostly

added to roots that have prepositions prefised to them ; or the nouns
formed with it are only used in composition with other nouns. Before ,
roots are generally changed as they are chauged before the suffis 37 ( 9).
E.J. अनुजीविन् -living or dependent upon' (rt . जीव with pr . अनु ); परिव
fata ' turning round ' (rt . go with pr. qft) ; fathT dwelling' ( rt.
7A , Tafa , with pr. fa ) ; 367lTain the habit of eating hot things'
(rt. 5 ) ; irrara ‘ regarding as beautiful' ( r. 77 );-- Hamak.
ing efforts ' ( rt. %# ) ; Fift lasting ' (rt. fur); ec 'about to be,
future ' ( rt. ).
12. The primary suffixes $24. nnd 58 , which are cmployed in the
formation of the Comparative and Superlative, have been treated of in
SS 173-175.
1. -A List OF THE MOST COMMOX SECONDARY OR Taddita SUFFIXES.

$ 510. 1. 37 forms substantives and adjectives with various signifi..

cations; eg. शौच . (from शुचि ) 'purity; यौवन .. ( from युवन् ) 'youth ;
सौहार्द a (from सुहृद्) • friendship ; पार्थव . (from पृथु) breadth ;' काक ..
( from h ) ' a collection of crows;' ata 11. (from ga )'a son's son, 1
grandson ;' पोर m. (from पुर) ' a citizen ;' पार्थिव M. ( from पृथिवी) a lord
of the earth, a king;' ta m . ( from gr ) ' a descendant of Puru ;' sporta
m. (from उपगु) • n descendant of Upagn ; वैयाकरण m. ( from व्याकरण ) ,
grammarian ; (from a) divine ;' 19 (from ) coloured red ;'
चाक्षुष (from चक्षुस् ) visible ;' भाइम (from अश्मन्) ' made of stone3; & c..
2. J is similarly employed; e.g. ariet 11. (from afa) poverty ;'
910574 n. ( from qfoga ) 'wisdom ;' ari n. ( from t) 'bravery ;' arrira
॥. (from बगिज् ) trade ;' औत्सुक्य . ( from उत्सुक) •eagerness;' राज्य ..
( from राजन् ) ' sovereignty ;' वीर्य . ( from वीर) ' manliness;' सख्य . ( from
सखि ) friendship ;' सैनापत्य 1. (from सेनापति ) ' generalship; ' राजन्य m .
(from राजन्) ' a member of the regal caste ;' गाये n. (from गर्ग) 'ade
scendant of Garga ;' 404 ( from 27) dirine; faoel ( from roa) celestial ;'
गव्य ( from गो) ' borine ;' ग्राम्य (from ग्राम ) ' rustic ;' दन्त्य (from दन्त )
dental, suitable for the teeth ; ' & c.
* Tho csamples will show that Vriddhi is often substituted for the first rowel
of a nou to which the suttis 34 or 4 is added . Wheu the first vowel of a primitivo
word is preceded by I or , boing both the fivals of a word, these scmirowels are
first changed to 54 and sq respectirely before Vriddhi can bo substituted ; e.g.
वैयाकरण from व्याकरण (changed first to वियाकरण); सौवश्व ' , descendant of
Srashva ,' (from FTP , chauged tirst to wy). Tho samo rule is observed in royard
to some other words in which I and are not fiuals of aword ;c.ghlac treating
of acceuts' ( from Fat, chavged to Fat); & c.
 246 SANSKRIT GRANMAR. S 510

3. n. and at f. form abstract nouns ; e . ). Tie al. vr Tat S: ( fruin

6
TI) cowhood, the nature of a cow ;' 476 n. or car f. (from ) ' tirm
ness%3' भीरुत्व . or भीरुता/ (fromभीरु) ' cowardice ;'निःसारत्व . or निःसारता
J. (from निःसार) ' worthlessness ; भृत्यत्व . or भृत्यता 1. ( from भृत्य) ' servi.
tudo ;' &c. The suffis at sometimes denotes a collection of the objects
expressed by the noun to which it is added ; e.g. tat f. ( from 377 ) ' a
collection of men, mankind.'
4. 347 m. is added to adjectives denoting a colour and to some other
adjectives, to form abstract nouns ; the adjectives to which it is attached
undergo before it the siline changes which they undergo before the com
parative and superlative sutixes ईयस् and इष्ठ ($ 173); ev. शुक्लिमन् m.
(from शुक्ल ) 'whiteness ;' महिमन् m. ( from महत् ) ' greatness ;' वरिमन् m. (from
.
38 ) width ;' TEHT m. (from ) firmness ;' 497 m. ( from gu )
6

breadth ;' TITH m. (from 6) heaviness .' Nouns formed by this suffis
are always masculine and must be carefully distinguished from primary
neuter nouns iu 99 , such as crita n. ' action,' & c. (8 539, 4 ).
3. HE and 40 (Deel. VIII.) form possessive adjectives; e.:!. fra
(from eft) “ possessed of intelligence, intelligent ;' foran (from Fur)
possessed of knowledge, wise.' The suflis TT is added to nouns the final
or penultimate letter of which is 34, 31, or #, and to nouns that end in a
surd or sonant unaspirate or aspirate Guttural, Palatal, Lingual, Dental,
or Labial ; c.9. 211777 (from JA) possessed of knowledge ;' fanta ;
किंवत् (fromकिम् ) possessed of what ! '; कामवन ( from काम ) • loving :'
TOTO (from TA ) ‘ possessed of milk , milky ;' ra (from yra ) posses
sing light ;' 46699 (froin 6) ' possessed of, or accompanied by, the
Maruts ;' { 957 (from ) ' containing stones.' To other nouns 4 is
generally added ; .: . 39# (from STA ) possessed of fire,' & c. Final a
and & undergo before posscssive suftises the same changes which they
undergo before rowel- terminations in wenk cases ; c.9. 2a (from Ara ;
not मरुदत् ), पयस्वत् (from पयस् ; not पयोवत ); ज्योतिष्मत् (from ज्योतिस्:
not ज्योतिर्मन् ) ' possessed of light ;' विदुष्मत् (from विस् ; not विद्वन्मत )
containing learned men ;' so also ofETT, &c. ( See No. 6).
6. 57 , fa , and fina ( Decl . IV. ) likewise formi possessire adjectives.
5 is mostly added to noms ending in 3 which is dropped before ; faz
mostly to nouns ending in GTA ( see No. 5) ; rc appears only in a few
derivatives. E.g. धनिन् ( from धन ) ' wealthy :' तेजस्विन् (from तेजस् )
* splendid;' atti (from aga ) ' ascetic ;' YITI (from Ht) ' intelligent ;'
arria (from TT) ' eloquent .'
7. ça forms adjectives which denote containing that which is ex .
pressed by the nouus to which is added ; e... gioca (from 959 ) ' con .
$ 511.) FORJATION OF NOMINAL BASEB . 247

taining or bearing flowers ;' कण्टकित (from. कण्टक ) 'thorny ; व्याधित

( from s'afflicted with a disease, discased ."
8.4 ( fem . Aft ) forms adjectives which denote 'made of, consisting
of, abounding in ' that which is expressed by the nouns to which # 4 is
added. Before # and Ara final 2, 8, 7, and q must be changed to the
corresponding nasal. E.J. अश्ममय (from अश्मन् ) ' made of stone ;' आम्रमय
( from 379 ) consisting of mango trecs ;' 7742 (from 347 ) abounding
in food ;' रुमय (fromदारु) made of wood; चिन्मय (from चित् , notचिमय )
' consisting of intelligencc.' Nouns in fe are sometimes used as neuter
substantives to denote ' abundance of ' that which is expressed by the
nouu to which 421 is adiled ; e.). Saha n. ' abundance of food.'
9. Ara ( fem . Arat) forms adjectives which denote ' measuring as
much as, or reaching as far as ' that which is expressed by the noun to
which #ra is added ; e.. 556 Ft (from 358 ) as high as the thigh .'
10. Ta indecl. forms adverbs which generally denote the sense of
• like that’ which is devoted by the noun to which ac is added, prorided
the likeness referred to be an action ; e.g. ATATTE indecl. (from Art)
like a Brâliman '( Tetuta he studies like a Brahman ').
11. Other secondary suffixes, such as ac and a which are employed
in the formation of the Comparative and Superlative, and secondary
nouns such as possessive pronouns, & c ., have been mentioned separately
in preceding paragraphs (S $ 169, 189, &c.).
II.-COMPOUND NOMINAL BASES OR COMPOUNDS.
§ 341. Primary and secondary nominal bases, prepositions, and
particles may be compounded with primary and secondary nominal
bases, and the compound bases formed in this manner hare the power to
express various relations that exist between the objects or ideas denoted
by their several members, or between that which they denote as a whole
and other objects or ideas not denoted by their members — relations which,
if no composition had taken place, would hare had to be expressed by two
or more inflected words or by subordinate sentences. E.g.
tot ' a king ' + you a man ' =igou ' a king's man '
(राज्ञः पुरुषः)
aftos ' blue ' + उत्पल ' a lotus' =नीलोत्पल a blue lotus '
(नीलमुत्पलम् );
त्रि three ' + भुवन ' world ' =त्रिभुवन ' the three worlds '
taken collectively (त्रयाणां भुवनानां समाहारः);
248 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [ § 542—

दीर्घ ' long ' ++ बाहु · an arm' =दीर्घबाहु 'a person possessed
of long arms ' (दीर्वो बाहू यस्य सः);
ब्राह्मण ' . Brahman ' + क्षत्रिय ' a Kshatriya ' ब्राह्मणक्षत्रिय '
Brahman and a Kshatriya' (TTGTT fagy );
आ onto ' + मुक्ति final liberation ' = आमुक्ति unto
final liberation' ( आ मुक्त:).
$ 542. Nominal bases when employed as first members, or when
they form any but the last member of a compound, take in general no
cnse -terminations, but retain (except in so far as they are subject to the
rules of Sandhi) their crude form unchanged. Nouns with two bases
(§ 94 ) assume their wenk base, nouns with three bases ($ 95) their
middle base, pronouns the pronominal bases given in $ 177, & c. Femi.
nine adjectives that qualify a following member in the same compound,
generally assume their masculine base. E ...
चौर ' a thief ' + भय 'fear' = चौरभय ' fear from thieves' ( चौरे यो भयम् ).
6977. ' beautiful' ($ 109) + gra'a husband' = 697591 @ ' a beautiful
husband' ( रूपवान्पतिः).
FETTE ' wise' ( $ 122) + go ' a man ' = firgra ' a wise man '
(विद्वान्पुरुषः).
अस्मद् ' our (6177 ) + पिट 'father' = अस्मपितृ 'our father' (अस्माकं पिता).
पसम • the fifth ' + truf 'a wife पञ्चमभार्या • the fifth wife
( पञ्चमी भार्या )..
697 beautifuľ + prof.a wife' = 5975 'a person who has a
beautiful wife' ( रूपवती भार्या यस्य सः) .
543. ( a ) Final vowels of preceding members of compounds combine
with the initial letters of succeeding members according to the rules in
$$ 17–39. Preceding members that end in consonants first change
their final consonants as they would be changed before the termination
of the Loc. Plur., and combine afterwards with succeeding members
likewise according to the rules laid down in $$ 17–39. E.g.
y 'a Daitya ' + orft 'enemy' = cart ( 18 ) an enemy of the Daityas.'
» Lakshmi' + $ T 'a lord ' = xfty ( 18 ) ' the lord of Lakshmi.'
Typ the Ganges' + J'water' = ych ( $ 19 ) the water of the
Ganges.'
' n god' + ing sovereignty' = ($ 19 ) “the sovereignty of the
gods.
$ 545. ] FORMATION OF NOMINAL BASES . 249

y Madhu ' + att enemy ' =: HRT ( $ 20 ) “ the eneiny of Madhu.'

J'a tree ' + grap shade ' = gegrar ( $ 38, a ) ' the shade of a tree.'
लक्ष्मी · Lakshmi ' + छाया 'shade' = लक्ष्मीछाया or लक्ष्मीच्छाया ( $ 38, 6 ).
457 ' a Marut' + fa a lord ' = ora (828, c) the lord of the Maruts.'
+ 77 ' a troup ' = 45ÆT ( $ 28, d ) ' the troup of the
Maruts .'
au ( $ 73,3 ) . hunger' + FOTO'thirst' = arēqyrat ($ 28, c) ' hunger
and thirst. '
+ d ' a disease' = TIT (§ 28, d ) •hunger-disease.'
AN ($ 76,2, a) ' speech ' + 97964 ' harshness ' = a ($ 27, c )
• harslıness of speech .
+ ge ' beginning ' = atgJC ($ 27, b ) the
beginning of a speech .'
H76 ($ 88, 4) •mind' + Ta gone' = Hitra ($ 35, a ) ' gone or seated
in the mind .'
(T577 ($ 115, 3 ) ‘ a king ' + 969'a mau ' = 077969'a king's man.'
+ y'a king' =TAT ( 19) ' a king of kings.'
(6) There are a few exceptions. When the bases aita ' a cat' or sig
lip ' are preceded in the same compound by a word ending in s or
fr, these vowels may optionally unite with the initial sit of site and
ओष्ठ to ओ or औ ; बिम्बोष्ठ or बिम्बौष्ठ ' one who has bimba-like lips.'
When the word ont is followed in the same compound by a word begin
ning with 37, both the final of it and the initial may remain un
changed ; according to some, the sit of Tt may before all vowels be
changed to अव ; eg. गो + अ = गोम or गोभम or गवाम. Final इस्
and 3 of first members of compounds before initial ,, 4 , Fare
changed to go and 39 ; final 97 of first members remains before certain
words unchanged ; e.g. afią + Foght = Affortsatt a butter -jar ;'
अयस् + पात्र = अयस्ताव 'an iron ressel.' These and other specialities
are best learned from the dictionary.
$ 544. Nouns employed as last members of compounds generally
retain their bases unchanged ; occasionally, however, they are liable to
undergo slight changes, the most important of which will be noticed
in the following paragraphs. Some compounds are peculiar in requir.
ing certain suffixes to be added to them, either necessarily or optionally;
these suffixes convey no new menuing beyond what is already expressed
by the compound as such. For examples see below.
$ 545. ( a) When a feminine noun which ends with one of the feminine
suffises 34T, , or 5, forms the last member of a Tatpurusha - compound in
32 s
250 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR . [ $ 546 %

which the first meinber goverus the second member ($ 550, u , 6), or of a
Drigu -compound which conveys a derivative meaning such as is usually
denoted by a Taddhita suffix ($ 560), or of a Bahuvrihi-compound, its
final vowel is shortened ( see, however, $ 566 , 6 ). Under the same condi.
tions the final sit of it is changed to 3. For examples see below.
(6 ) When a uominal base which ends iu a long vowel forms the last
member of a compound word of the neuter gender or of au adverbial
compound, its final long vowel must be shortened ( final t be changed
to , fiual sit and sit to ).
$ 546. All compound nominal bases have by the native grammariaus
been divided into four classes, Tatpurusha, Bahuvrihi, Dvandva and
Avyayibhava .
1. A Tatpurusha -compound may, in general, be described as a
compound which denotes that which is expressed by its second member,
determined or qualified by what is expressed by its first member. Wheu
the first member of a Tatpurusha stands in apposition to the second, so
that, if the compound were dissolved, it would have to be expressed by
a substantive or adjective agreeing in case with the second member, the
Tatpurusha -compound is called a Karmadharaya. Again, a Karma
dhâraya-compound, the first member of which is a cardinal number,
is called a Dvigu-compound. It will appear, then, that a Tatpurusha
compound to which neither the term Karmadharaya nor the term
Dvigu is applicable, must in general be a compound the first member
of which, if the compound were dissolved, would he governed by the
second member, and would have to be exprozsed by a word in au
ublique case. E.g.
Tatparusha only : traget the king's man' ( TA : 989 ). Compare
the English house -top,' &c.
Karmadhâraya:ftritegas ' n blue lotus' ( oftasgē974 ). Compare the
English low -land,' & c.
Drigu : त्रिभुवन ' the three worlds collectirely ' (त्रयाणां भुवनानां समाहारः).
Compare the English fortnight,' &c.
Tatpurusha- compouvds in general may be called Dotorminative com
pounds; those Tatpurusha -compounds which are neither Karmadharaya
vor Dvigu, Dopondent determinative compounds. Karmadharaya
compounds may be called Appositional determinativo compounds, and
Dvigu -compounds Numeral determinative compounds,
A Bahuvrihi- compound is a compound which denotes something
else than what is expressed by its members. It generally attributes
 FORMATION OF NOMINAL BASES . 251
§ 546.]
that which is espressed by its second member, determined or qualified
by what is denoted by its first member, to something denoted by neither
of its members. When dissolved , it must be expressed by more than
two inflected words, riz., by the two words which are its members,
generally standing both in the Nominative case, and by & relatire or
lemonstrative pronoun in any except the Nominative case . A Bahu
vrihi compound has the nature of an adjective and assumes the gender
of the word which expresses that of which the Bahurihi-compound
forms an attribute. E.g.
Bahuvrihi: farfar ' a person with a yellow garment' ( frayrai FA :).
रूपवद्धार्य ' one who has a beautiful wife ' (रूपवती भार्या यस्य सः).
Compare the English blue- beard ,' noble-minded ,' & c.
Balurrîhi-compounds may be called Attributive compounds.
3. A Dvandva.compound is a compound which denotes all the per
sons or things denoted by its several members ; when dissolved , its
members must be connected with each other by the particle ' and .'
Whereas Tatpurusha and Bahuvrîbi-compouods always consist of only
two menibers (either of which may be a simple or a compound word ).
Drandra -compounds may consist of two or three or more members. Bg.
Drandra : Arnau ' a Brâhman and a Kșhatriya' (#TET OTTH ).
AETETUTU ' a Brahman, a Khşatriya, aa Vaishy ,
and a Shůürn .'
Drandra -compounds may be called Copulative compounds.
4. An Avyayibhava -compound is indeclinable ; its first member is
generally a preposition or adverb which , if the compound were dissolvedl.
govern the second member. There are some Avyngîbhârn -com
would govern
pounds the sense of which cannot be expressed by their members, when
uncompounded , but reqnires for its expression other words than those
actually compounded . E.g.
).
Aryayibhira : प्रत्यग्नि ' towards the fire' ( अनि प्रति ).
TYTI ' according to one's ability ' ( waarin
not going beyond one's powers.')
Aryayîbhâra-compounds may be called Adverbial compounds.
Note.The student is warned not to regard as an Avyayibhậva every
componnd that happens to be an adverb. A Bahuvtîhi-compound, being
an adjective, may be used adverbially, but it would not on that account
cease to be a Bahurrihi.
252 SANSKRIT GRANNAR . [8 547–

1. - TATPURUSHA OR DETERMINATIVE COMPOUNDS.

(a ) — Dependent Determinative Compounds.

6547. The second member is determined or qualified by the first
member, which, if the compound were dissolved, would stand
1. In the Accusative case ; e.g.
oppa ( N. Sing. Masc. °a:) ' one who has resorted to Kșişhọa
(कृष्णं श्रितः).
6
garita ( X. Sing. Masc. ° :) ' one who has orercome pain' (gerala :).
Ikite (Neut., N. Sing. ° 29 ) pleasure that lasts a moment'
( महूतै मुखम् ).
2. In the Instrumental case ; e.g.
yraru (Masc., N. Sing. ºef :) ' wealth acquired by grain ' (treitarf:).
Artagu (N. Sing. Masc. ° T :) ' like his mother ' (HITT HÇU :).
gitara (N. Sing. Masc. ' a :) ' protected by Hari ' (artor ara :).
TU ( N. Sing. Masc. * # :) ' split with the nails ' ( erita :).
3. In the Dative case ; e.g.

F (Neut., N. Sing. °F ) 'wood for a sacrificial post ' ( 4914 ).

Triza (N. Sing. Masc. :) ' good for cattle ' (na fra :).
Fari (Masc. and Nent., °of Fem .) ' intended for a Brâhman '; e..
द्विजार्यः सूपः ' broth for n Br.,' विजार्था यवागूः ' gruel for a Br.,' विजायें
99 milk for a Br.'
.
(Though compounded of its + opt, the sense or
Forrf, when no composition takes place, is not expressed by the two
words विज and अर्थ ; e.g. विजार्यः सूपः is simply विजाय सूपः) .
4. In the Ablative case ; e.g.
tra ( Neut., N. Sing. ) ' fear from a thief ( a ).
gotta ( N. Sing. Masc. ' a :) ' afraid of a wolf ' ( partita :).
pritara (N. Sing. Masc. 07 :) ' fallen from henren ' (Refrafaa :) .
5. In the Genitive case ; e.g.
7795
राजपुरुष (Masc., N. Sing. ° :) ' the king's man ' (th : 69 :).
तत्पुरुष (Masc., N. Sing. :) ' the man of him , ' i.e. ‘his man' ( ITRE
पुरुषः ).
pritrat (Fem. , N. Sing. ° *t ) ' a mountain -torrent ' ( fata ).
fya (Neut . , N. Sing . °F ) ' a hundred fools ' (Herti ya).
$ 549.) PORMATION OF XOMINAL BASES. 253

6. In the Locativo case ; c.9.

Stratos (N. Sing. Vasc. °05:) ' skilled in dice' (spais atos :).
rita (N. Sing. Jasc . 07:) dependent on God ' ( from fy and the
preposition stry, with the suffix f added to the whole compound ).
FYL9* (N. Sing. Masc. °5:) ' cooked in a pot ' ( FITEZİ 95 :).
पूर्वाह्नकृत (N. Sing. Neut . °तम् ) done in the forenoon ' (पूर्वाह्न कृतम् ).
7. Sometimes the first member is an indeclinable ; e.g.
Farina (N. Sing. Neut. a ) ' done by one's self ' (FTI FTA ).
alfaena (N. Sing. Neut. °74 ) ‘ half done ' ( ATIA garan ).
ga ( N. Sing. Neut. ° 77A ) eaten there ' (aaa).
$ 548. There is aa class of Tatpurusha- compounds the sense of which
cannot be expressed by their members, when uncompounded, because
the last member, which may be a root or a primary noun, is either not
used alone, or does when used by itself not convey the meaning which
it conveys in the coinpound. Compounds of this kind are usually
callod Upapada-compounds. Examples are :
FTTT ( $ 539,1 ; N. Sing. Masc. ° t:) * & pot-maker '; (not inta :
It is usual to dissolve this and similar compounds by means of such
phrases as कुम्भं करोतीति कुम्भकारः).
HHT ( $ 539,1l ; X. Sing. Masc. " T:) one who sings a verse of the
Simareda ' (साम गायतीति सामग.).
6
SİTET ( § 539,1 ; N. Sing. Masc. ° t:) ' one who takes a share' (wei
हरतीत्यंशहरः).
gan ( $ 492, a : N. Sing. Masc . ° ET) ' one who kills Vpitra ' ( a
हन्तीति वृवहा ).
#ina ( $192, 6 ; X. Sing Masc. ° 7 ) ' one who conquers all' (af
ञ्जयतीति सर्वजित् ).
$ 549. In certain Tatpurushas the first member retains (against $ 542)
its case-termination ; many of the compounds in which this is the case
are proper names or have otherwise a restricted meaning. E.g.
भोजसाकृत
31 KT ( N. Sing.. Neut. 977)
तम् • done with strength ' (HiTTET
traTE).
Tatra (N. Sing. Masc. Przy:) 'blind by nature ' ( 769T + stap:).
STATIFA (N. Sing. Masc. A :) ' fifth with one's self ' i.e. himself
and four others .'
TEATTE (Neut ., N. Sing ° ) voice for another ' (TTF# 777 ).
para ( Neut., N. Sing. 7 ) voice for one's self ' ( ra ).
254 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR . [ $ 550
दुरावागत (N. Sing. Masc. ° तः) ' come from afar ' (दुरात + भागतः). .

PYEST:ga or greitge (Masc., N. Sing. ' a :) .the son of a slave,' used

as a term of contempt.
rufar (Masc ., N. Sing. ° 7:) • Yudhishthira'i.e. firm in battle ( yn
Reet:).
aferat (N. Sing. Masc. a) “ touching the heart'lar Fgaunira
हृदिस्पृक् ).
T ( X. Sing. Masc. ° 57 :) born in autumn ' ( Tea
शरदिजः).
$ 550. ( a ) Some compounds of which the first member would
gorern the second member, if no composition had taken place, are like.
wiso considered Tatpurusha-compounds by the native grammarians ; e.g.
gestart (Masc., N. Sing. ° 7:) ' the forepart of the body'le Farge ).
6
Hurg (Masc., N. Sing. °3) mid -day ' ( HF :).
HIT ( N. Sing. Mase. :) ' one who has found a livelihood '
( प्राप्तो जीविकाम् ); also जीविकाप्रायः.
ATESTA (N. Sing. Masc. °a:) ' born a month ago' (ATHT HAFT TRT :).
(6) Similar are compounds the first member of which is a preposi.
tion , the sense of which, when the compound is dissolved , must be
expressed by the Past Pass. Participle of certain roots to which that
preposition is prefixed ; e.g.
HTATS (N. Sing. Vasc.° :) 'surpassing a gailand ' (wiarni ARTH ).
facraTTT ( V. Sing. Masc. Ptar :) departed from Kaushambi
( Fact : Erca :).
(c) Compounds like Hara (Masc ., X. Sing. ° 7 :) ' one who is not a
Brahman ' ( at Wret:), 971 ( Masc., N , Sing. :) not a horse ' (7 +
ips:) are likewise called Tatparushn.
§ 551. ( a ) Dependent and Appositional determinative compounds
assume mostly the gender of their final member. Dependent deter
minative compounds like gratis however ( $ 550, a ) and the com
pounds described in $ 550, b, such as fantas, take the gender of the
noun which they qualify.
(6) There are a few exceptions to this rule. Dependent deter
minative compounds (provided their first member be not the negative
prefix st ), the last member of which is one of the nouns ÀAT, gra ,
TOT, or Frut, may optionally be feminine or neuter ; e.g. raqal femu .
or a newl., a host of Brihmans;' and there are some Tatpnrusha
 FORMATION OF NOMINAL BASES . 255
§ 553.]
compounds euding in grut and ar , that must be neuter, c.y. TEST
rent., the shade of (many) sugar-canes ;' THT nent. an assembly of
princes.' Tatpurusha -compounds ending in TA ( for ufa ) night,' and
अह or अह ( for अहन् ) day.' are generally masc.; 8.9 . पूर्वराव masc. ' the
first part of the night,' are masc. ' the forenoon ;' on the other hand,
arrang'a clear day' and others are neuter. ( See § 561.)
§ 552. The power of composition, although grcat, is not unlimited,
and the native grammarians have giveu many rules stating not merely,
when it is permitted to compound two words, but also, when it is for.
bidden to do so . Here a few examples must suffice. The two wouns
GIFT an eye ' and art ' blind ' cannot be compounded to express the
sense blind of an eye ' ( TRT TT:), because in general an adjective is
compounded with a preceding Instr. case (or, rather, with a noun which,
if no compositiou were to take place, would stand in the lustr. case )
only when that which is expressed by the adjective, is caused by what
is expressed by the noun in the Instr . case, whereas in the present
instance blinduess ' is not caused by the eye .' Again, in phrases like
qori FH : 48: ' the Brâhman is the best of men,' it is not permitted to
form a compound of the two words and 8. An ordinal number cannot
be compounded with a noun in the Genit, case ; ( e.g. Hai 98 : ' the sixth
of those present). Nominal bases in or 37 , denoting an agent ($ 539,
9 and 10), are, with some exceptions, not compounded with a noun in
the Genit. case (e.g. 37Tİ AZT ' the creator of the water ,' TFT are :
one who cooks rice ;' but ace'a worshipper of the gods').
(6) — Appositional Determinative Compounds ( Rarmadharaya ).
$ 553. The following are instances of appositional determinative com
pounds given by the native grammarians :
firstcoas ( Ncut., N. Sing. Oft ) a bluc lotus ' (attes cyasa ).
Tatry (Masc., N, Sing. :)' an only lord .'
garTÁHER (Masc ., N. Plur. T:) ' the old Mimânsakas ;' i.e.
the old school of the Alimamsakas.
AT (Masc ., N. Sing. 'g:) ' a good scholar.'
araratase ( N. Sing. Masc. 97 :) ' first bathed and afterwards
anointed' ( पूर्व सातः पश्चादनालखः).
Fara ( N. Sing. Neut. ºa ! ) done and not done, ' i.e. badly
done (कृतं च तदकृतं च ).
TER ( N. Sing. Neut. ° F ) blackish -variegated .'
HOT ( N. Sing. Neut. 977 ) of similar white colour.'
256 SANSKRIT GRAMMAH . ( $ 554–
tenta ( N. Sing. Masc. Far :) “ a young bald -headed person '
( gar amfa :).
9898 (N. Sing. Neut. Orga ) slightly brown .'
9964 ( Masc., N. Sing 7:) ' a good man .'
arera ( Masc , N. Sing. :) ' an excellent teacher ' ( 78 :).
Trena ( N. Sivg. Neut. °74 ) made into a heap.'
TEUTA ( N. Sing. Masc. ° # :) black like a cloud ' ( T UTA :).
Tara Masc., N. Sing. " T:) ' a Brahman who worships the gods '
(देवपूजको ब्राह्मणः).
$ 554. In some Karmadhâraya-compounds the qualifying member
takes the second place ; e.g.
gereella ( Masc ., N. Sing. :) ' a tiger-like man ' (opper 57 957 :).
*** (Masc., N. Sing. ° t:) ' an elephant-like king ;' i.e. an
escellent king ( कुञ्जर इव राजा),
riyara (Fem ., N. Sing. ' fa :) ' a young fennlc elephant.'
TITUT (Fem ., V. Sing. OUT) ' a barren cow .'
trirane (Neut., N. Sing. °74 ) avother king ' ( tai (TFT ).
$ 555. (a ) 457 when used as first member of Karmadhâraya and .
Bahuvrihi-compounds, is changed to HET ; e.g.
Karmadharaya : HETTE (Masc., N. Sing.ºa:) ' the great god,' a name
of Shiva.
Bahuvrihi : ACTE ( N. Sing. Masc. ° T:) ' a person with big arms.'
(6) The base of the interrogative prononn, form , or ($ 194), some
times also ft, and before words beginning with vowels and a few
words beginning with consonants any, are used as first members of
Karmadharaya - compounds to express censure or contempt ; e.g.
FC (Masc., N. Sing. ' HT) ' a bad king' ( literally what sort of a
king ?' कृत्सितो राजा ).
959 or 136 (masc., N. Sing.ºr :) ' a bad man , a coward ' ( tera :
पुरुषः).
chong (Masc., N. Sing. Ong :) ' a bad horse' ( Biratsu :).
$ 556. Words which denote a point of the compass ( like gee ' eastern ,'
EITT ‘ northern' &c.) and the cardinal numbers in ' two,' pa ' three,' &c.
cannot enter into composition with other words to form with them
Karmadhâraya -compounds, except when the Karmadhâraya -compound
is a proper name. E.g. , it is forbidden to compound the two words TFT
THT: northeru troes,' or 9 T : 'five Brahmans'; but the two words
 FORMATION OF NOMINAL BASES . 257
§ 559.]
सप्तन् ' seren' and ऋषि ' a Rishi ' are compounded in the word सप्तर्षि
(Masc., N. Plur. 84 :) the seven Rişhis,' because this compound is a
proper name for the constellation of the Great Bear .
$ 557. ( a) Contrary to this rule, a word denoting a point of the
compass or a cardinal number may form a Karmadharaya- compound
with another noun, provided the compound so formed is not used by
itself, but has a Taddhita suffix added to it, or conreys, in addition to
the sense which it would convey as a Karmadharaya, a derivative

సమునకు
meaning such as is usually denoted by a Taddhita suffis, or provided the
compound becomes the first member of another compound. E.g.

కని
It is allowable to compound ' eastern ' + That'a hall ' = पूर्वद्याला
' the eastern hall,' provided this compound is not used by itself, but has
a Taddhita suffis added to it ; É UMT + Taddh. 87 = are being in
the eastern hall.' Similarly ~ + Arc = your ' six mothers' ( not
used by itself ) + Taddh. 3T = TGT the child of six mothers' i.e.
Karttikeya ); ft + T = fatwo cows,' not used in this sense, but,

ཙཱ་
ཅི་
changed to fag, in the sense of bartered for two cows ;' q + =

།ྷཱུ ོ་
ཝཎའོ་
'**
ལོག
five cows,' not used by itself, but as first member in the

ཚ
'བཙྩམིཨ་
ཞེས
Bahuvrihi-compound q ' one whose wealth consistsin five cows;' etc.
( 6 ) Moreover, a cardinal number is compounded with another noun
when the compound so formed denotes an aggregate ; e.g. fat "three'
+ 99'world ' = Fa :FT ( Neut., Nom. Sing. ° 74 ) ' the aggregate of
the three worlds ' or ' the three worlds collectively .'
( 0 ) -Numeral Delerminative Compounds (Doigu ).
§ 558. A Karmadharaya -compound formed by $ 557 is called a
Dvigu, when its first member is a cardinal number. Dvigu - compounds
which have not entered into composition with other words, and whicb
neither have received a Taddhita suffis, nor convey a meaning such
as is usually denoted by such a suffix, must, as will appear from 557, 6,
always denote an aggregate. B.g.
faceri (Neut, N. Sing.07 % ) the three worlds collectively.'
(Neut., N. Sing. " TE ) ' the four Yugas collectively.'
$ 559. Dvigu - compounds that denote an aggregate are commonly
neuter. But when the final member of a Drigu -compound ends in ,
the feminine suffix is generally added to it ; some nouns in 87, however,
retain their final 8 , and in this case the Dvigu -compound is neuter.
Feminine nouvs in 37 shorten their final or substitute for it.
Nouns in either drop their final 2, or substitute f for 879. E.g.
333
258 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR . [ § 560
qarst (Fem., N. Sing. 097) from q r + s (Neut.), an aggregate
of fire roots .'
qira (Neut., N. Sing. ° ) from 77 + F (Neut.) , ' ap aggre
gate of five dishes .'
Ter (Neut., N. Sing. ° FF ) or age (Fem., N. Sing. g ) from
997 + (Fem .), 'an aggregate of five beds.'
Tae (Neut., N. Sing. ° 37 € ) or 9 haft (Fem., N. Sing. ) from
TFT + T (Masc.) ' five carpenters.'
$ 560. Dvigu - compounds which, although no Taddhita suffix is added
to them , express a meaning usually denoted by a Taddbita suffis,
assume the gender of the nouns which they qualify, and their last
members are subject to $ 545 ; e.g.Tar in the sense of prepared
in five dishes ' may be masc., fem ., or neut.; similarly TFI ( from TT
+ 11) • bartered for five cows,' & c,
§ 561. General rule for all Determinative Compounds :
The following is an alphabetical list of the more common nominal
bases which undergo slight changes when they are the last members of
determinative compounds :
1. vyras a finger' is changed to say after numerals and indeclin
ables ; e.g. magons ' two fingers long.'
2. sara'a handful ' may optionally be changed to sta in Dvigu.
compounds ( except those described in § 560 ) after fe and for ; e.g.
27 neut, or as neut. ' two handfuls ;' but only aas bought
for two handfuls .'
3. 9767'a day,' is changed to 376 ; : 9. 37747 masc. ' a holy day ;'
qe masc. ' an aggregate of two days ;' but it is changed to 97 after in
declinables, #, and words denoting parts of the day ; e.g. are masc .
the whole day,' gate masc. ' forenoon ;' ( sce $ 551 , 6 ).
4. ' a bull, a cow,' is changed to TT, except in the Drigu- com
pounds described in $ 560 ; e.g. TTTT'an excellent ball,' qe neut.
' a collection of five cows ;' but for ' bartered for two cows.'
5. ' a ship,' is changed to an after on , and in Dvigu -com
pounds except those described in $ 560 ; e.g.spfara neut . half a ship ;'
fearg neut. ' two ships ;'but a bartered for five ships.'
6. Pire ' a road ” is at the end of all compounds changed to qui
e.g. vigy masc. ' the path of religion '; 2T ( Bahurrihi ) a country,
&c. in which the roads are pleasant.'
 FORMATION OF NOUINAL BASE8 . 259
$ 562. ]
7. T'a king ' is changed to St; e.g. Hy masc . an excel.
lent king .'
8. tha ' night'is changed to tra after numerals, indeclinables, ara,
words denoting parts of the night, suara , and gozt ; e.g. aur masc .
" the whole night,' gira masc. ' the first part of the night ;' ferre neut.
' two nights ;' ( see § 551, b. )
9. सक्थि ' athigh' is changed to सक्थ after उत्तर , पूर्व, मृग, and
after a word which denotes an object with which a thigh is compared ;
e.g. TTH neut., ' the thigh of a deer ;' 477 neut. ' a thigh like
a plank .
10. are ' a friend ' is changed to ge ; e.g. The masc. ' a friend
of Krishna ;' ha masc. ' a dear friend .'
But these changes do generally not take place in determinative
compounds, the first member of which is , or Pan ( $ 555, 6 ), or the
negatire prefix st ; e.g. rst masc. (N. Sing. ETI) ' a good king ;'
Facara masc. ( N. Sing Fore ) ' a bad friend ;' TE masc. ( N. Sing.
SITIFT ) ' one who is not a king .'
2. -BAHUVRÎHI OR ATTRIBUTIVE COMPOUNDS.
§ 562. (a) The following are instances of attributive compounds:
otarat ( N. Sing. Masc. ' t:) ' one with a yellow garment' (dramat
यस्य सः).
are ( N. Sing. Masc. ° :) ' long-armed ' (etat ang tel a:).
STÀTET ( N. Sing. Masc. ° 7 :) a village, &c., to which water has
appronched,' (प्राप्तमुदकं यं सः ).
56TY ( N. Sing. Masc. ° :) ' one by whom a car is drawn ' ( Jet
( ruit :).
392791 ( N. Sing. Masc. ° ] :) ' one to whom cattle are offered '
( उपहृताः पशवो यस्मै सः).
Benica ( N. Sing. Masc. 07:) a pot, &c., ' from which boiled rice has
been taken out ' (उद्धृतमोदनं यस्मात्सः).
tigre ( N. Sing. Masc. ºp: ) a village, &c., ' in which the men are
heroes' ( frer: 969T GEHRA :).
कृतकृत्य ( N. Sing. NMasc. ° त्यः ) - one who has done his work ' ( कृतं कृत्य
येन सः ).
THT ( N. Sing. Masc. ⓇAT) ' one whose name is Deradatta ' ( ta .
दत्तो नाम यस्य सः ).
260 SANSKRIT GRAMMAK. [ $ 569–
<
THIT ( N. Sing. Masc . :) one whose name is Nala ' (TSERT
यस्य सः) .
YHTETT ( N. Sing. Masc. ° 7 :) ' one whose chief (aim )is justice ' ( :
प्रधानं यस्य सः ).
PRINT ( N. Sing. Masc. ° t:) ' one whose highest ( occupation ) is
thinking ,' ' thoughtful' (Parat 90 FT & :).
Gare (N. Plur. Masc. :) the gods of whom Indra is the first ' i.e.
Indra and the others ( इन्द्र आदिर्येषां ते ).
(6) As the preceding may in general be considered to have been
appositional determinative compounds which, by changing their
original sense so as to make it become the attribute of some other sub.
ject, and by assuming the gender of the noun which they qualify,
have been changed into attributive compounds, so the following com
pounds may be looked upon as dependent determinative compounds
that have undergone a similar change.
fagety (N. Sing. Masc. 07:) ' one who has the brightness of lightning'
(विद्युत इव प्रभा यस्य सः).
aarenta (N. Sing. Masc. ºra :) ' of god-like shape ' (Terrara :).
In some compounds of this kind the dependent member is placed
last ; e.g.
sfer (N. Sing. Masc. Fr :) ' one who has a sword in his hand '
( असिः पाणी यस्य सः)
USEF (N. Sing. Masc. Ea :) ' one who bears a staff in his hand
(दण्डो हस्ते यस्य सः),
(c) Attributive compounds the first member of which is a cardinal
number, must not be confounded with numeral determinative or Dvigu
compounds. Instances of attributive compounds of this kind are :
farina (N. Sing. Masc. °7:) ' one who has three eyes,' a name of
Shiva, ( वीणि लोचनानि यस्य सः).
as (N. Sing. Masc. :) ' one who has four faces,' a name of
Brahman ( चत्वारिमुखानि यस्य सः ).
$ 563. The following attributive compounds may be compared with
the Tatpurusha-compounds described in $ 550 6 , c :
of or graagof (N. Sing. Masc. Of:) a tree, &c. from which the
leaves have fallen down ' (qqigana golfa FHIEF :).
FA ( X. Sing. Masc. ° FTT:) ' deroid of energy (Praha a Fit FATRE :).
37 # (N. Sing. Masc. ° # :) high-nosed ' ( wa TNART URTE ).
397 (N. Sing. Masc. ° ə :) ' one who has no son ' ( gat ara ara :).
§ 366.] FORMATION OF NOMINAL BASES . 261

$ 564. (a) AFA when used as the first member of Bahuvrihi- com
pounds is changed to HET (S 555, a ) ; e.g.
Herang ( N. Sing. Masc. ° :) ' one who has big arms' (artet ark
यस्य सः).
(6) The indeclinable & ' with ,' when used as the first member of
Bahuvrihi-compounds, is often changed to # ; c.9 .
aga or paga (N. Sing. Masc. a :) ' with one's son ,' or ' accompanied
by one's son ' (प्रवेण सह or सहित.).
$ 565. The general rule concerning feminine nouns, which has been
given in § 542, applies also to feminine nouns which form the first mem
bers of Bahuvrihi-compounds, provided those feminines do not end in ,
and provided the second member of the compound is neither an ordinal
number, nor one of the words farm , FTAT, euroft &c.; e.g.
1

Fal (N. Sing. Masc . °T:) ' one who has a brindled cow ' (partea
8:; îi is changed to T by $ 545, a ).
59751 (N. Sing. Masc. ºf:) one who has àa beautiful wife ' (watat
भार्या यस्य सः ; the final आ of भार्या is shortened by8545 , a ).
But sortie (N. Sing. Masc. ° 7 :) ' one to whom a virtuous woman
is dear ' ( uroft party :); the first member retains here its femi.
nine form , in order that this compound may be distinguished from aruto
otrog ' one to whom a virtuous man is dear. ' For similar reasons the
feminine forms are retained in other compounds, such as r .
ब्राह्मणीभार्य, &c.
§ 566. (a) The word Ti, and feminine nouns in T, when they are
the last members of Bahuvrihi- compounds, are subject to $ 545 ; e.g.
faat, 54975rt.
(6) Bahuvrihi- compounds, the last member of which is a feminine
noun in for 5 , or a noun ending in ter assume the suffix ans. Many
ori either necessarily
other Bahuvrihi-compounds assume the same suffis ,
or optionally. Bahuvrihi- compounds in 7 must take the suffix in
the feminine. E.g.
25781 (N. Sing. Masc. º:) a country & c. ' in which there are
many rivers .'
Tau (N. Sing. Fem. ° FT) a woman whose husband is dead."
बहुमाल or बहुमालक or बहुमालाक (N. Sing. Masc. ° लः, or ' क :) ' one
who has many garlands' (HST ).
 263 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR . [ $ 567—
HEITTF (N. Sing. Masc. °FTT :) or HITTĘ (N. Sing. Masc. ºut:)
‘ one who possesses great fame.'
OFTAL, V. Sing. Fem . HITACHT, a woman who has many
1
masters .'

$ 567. The following are some specimens of compounds which like.

wise are considered Bahuvrihi-compounds by the native grammarians :
39 (N. Plur. Masc. :) .about ten ' (nine ' or ' eleren ').
That (N. Plur. Masc. ºur:) ' near twenty .'
fea (N. Plur. Masc. Par:) ' two or three.'
FEFT (N. Plur. Masc. °ər:) ' twice ten ' ( i.e. ' twenty ').
aferrat (Fem ., N. Sing. Parf ) south -east .'
aurata indecl., ' seizing each other by the hair.'
Tosteros indecl., “beating each other with sticks,
$ 568. Some nouns undergo slight changes when they are the last
members of Bahuvrîbi-compounds ; the most common of them are :
1. अक्षि 'an eye' is changed to अक्ष : when अक्षि is used literally for
the eye of a living being, the Bahuvrihi-compound takes in the feminine
the feminine suffix $ ; e.g. Baru , Fem. Ir arft red -eyed .'
2. ay ' smell'is changed to pay after , ut &c.; e.g.
having a good smell, fragrant ;' Tony'smelling like a lotus.'
3. जाया ' awife ' is changed to जानि ;g. युवजानि ' having a young
wife.'
4. TRT'n tooth ' is changed to after , and after numerals when
the Bahuvrihi-compound is intended to indicate a certain age ; e.g. It
(N. Sing. Masc. f , Fem . ) having two teeth .'
5. TA ' a bow ' is changed to yraq ; e.g. MT(N. Sing.
Masc. ° F ) having a bow made of horn ,' a name of Visbņu.
6. of law ' is changed to yta when it is preceded by only one
word in the same com pound ; e.g. frayin ' one who knows the law .'
7. ANT'a nose' is changed to Te chiefly after prepositions ; e.g.
377 € ' high-nosed .'
8. E ' foot' is changed to or after numerals, after a , and in
certain other compounds ; e.g. TTT biped ;' carharing feet like
a tiger's.'
9. offspring ' and ANT understanding ' are changed to THE
and au & after 8, 3:, and the negative prefix 37 ; 4.9. THU (N. Sing.
Masc. 07:) ' without offspring ; ' gåva ' stupid.'
 FORMATION OF NOMINAL BASES . 263
§ 571.]
10. y'a thigh ' is changed to a when used literally for the
thigh of an animal ;; e.g. stay ' having long thighs.'
( For fira see § 561, 6.)
3. - DVANDVA OR COPULATIVE COMPOUNDS.
$ 569, A Dvandra -compound denotes either the mutual union
of the objects denoted by its sereral members, or it denotes their aggre
gate. In the former case the Drandva -compound assumes the gender
of its final member and the terminations of the Dual or Plural accord
ing as it denotes two or more objects ; in the latter case it is neuter
and takes the terminations of the Singular. E.g.
gfarger (Masc. Du.) • Yudhishthira and Arjuna.'
Hügår or thru (Masc. Du.) ' wealth and religion .'
ATETITTETT: (Masc. Plur.) ' a Brahman, and a Kshatriya,
and a Vaishya, and a Shadra .'
Huinea (Masc. Du.) ' a pea-hen and a cock ;' but partagat
(Fem. Du.) ' a cock and a pea- hen .'
POTITTA (Neut. Sing.) “ hand and foot.'
BTT # (Neut. Sing.) the snake and the ichneumon ' ( as an
instance of tiro natural enemies ).
Besiखे (Neut. Du.) or aeg: (Neut. Sing.) .pleasure and pain .'
Tricô (Neut. Du .) or tatot# (Neut. Sing.) cold and heat.'
There are exceptions; e.J. STESİ ( Masc. Du .) ' a horse and a
mare ;' SERIA : (Masc. Sing.) ' day and night.'
§ 570. The order in which the various members of a Dvandva -com
pound are arranged, depends partly on their meaning and partly on their
form . Words denoting various castes should be placed in the order
of the castes, beginning from the highest ; the name of an elder should
precede that of his younger brother ; and , in general, the more impor.
tant word should be placed first. Words ending with r or 3 should
precede others (e.g. itt ); likewise words which begin with a rowel
and end in 34 ( e.g. TCT ); and words which contain fewer syllables
( e.g. Fettä t). In a case where two of the three last rules would be
simultaneously applicable, the later rule should take effect in preference
to the preceding one ; e.j. इन्द्रामी, वागमी, वागिन्द्रो.
$ 571. ( u) When two nouns in F expressive of relationship, or two
nouns in # that are designations of sacrificial priests, form a Dvandra
compound, the final te of the first member is changed to Tr; the same
 264 SANSKRIT GRANNAR . [ $ 572—

change takes place when a noun in # espressire of relationship forms

A Drandva together with get. E.g.
Ararfead (Masc. Du.) father and mother .'
1
farget ( Masc. Du.) · father and son .'
gargiard (Masc. Du.) 'the Hotri and the Polri' ( two priests ).
(6) When the names of two deities that are usually mentioned
1 together in sacrifices form a Dvanda- compound, the final vowel of the first
member is mostly lengthened ; e.g.
41 (Masc. Du. ) • Mitra and Varuņa .'
STÄTTA ( Masc. Du.) • Agniand Soma. '
.

Similar changes take place in similar compounds ; e.g.

यावाभूमी or यावाक्षमे or यावापृथिव्यो or दिवस्पृथिव्यौ (Fem. Du.) heaven
and earth .' 3
$ 572. When the last member of an aggregative Dvanda-compound
ends either in a palatal consonant, or in , q, or , the rowel or is added
to it ; e.y.
690H (Neut., N. Sing. OSTA ) ' a skip and a garland ' ( from 777 +.
बज्) .
Juare (Neut., N. Sing. ° F ) ' an umbrella and a shoe ' (from yo
+ उपानह )..
Butप्रावृदशरदो (N. Du. of प्रावदशर ) the rains and the autumn.'
$ 573. It is allowable to use instead of the compound framgad
($ 571, a) simply the Dual of Forei faradt'father and mother ;' similarly
श्वभूश्वशुरौ or श्वशुरौ 'father and mother-in -law ;' भ्रातरी • brother and
sister ;'gatson and daughter,' &c.
4.-AVTAYIBDAVA OR ADVERBIAL COMPOUNDS.
$ 574. The final letters of nouns that form the final member of an
Aryayibhava -compound, are subject to the following changes :
(a) Final long vowels are shortened (as in the neuter ), final ğ is
changed to g, and final sit or it to 3.
1
(6 ) Final , whether it be original or substituted for at in accord
ance with (a ), is changed to 7 i.e. it receives the termination of the
1
Nom. or Acc. Sing. of a neuter noun in 9).
( c) Final 377 of masc. and fem . nouns is changed to op ; fioal
1
of neuter nouns may be changed to sf or to sp .
!
 § 577.] IXFLECTED WORDS IN THE SENTENCE . 265

( 1) The termination अम् must be added to शरद्, मनस् , उपानह) दिन

fact, and to certain other nouns.
(e) 37 may optionally be added to all nouns which end in a surd
or sonant unaspirate or aspirate Guttural, Palatal, Lingual, Dental, or
Labial.
$ 575. The following are instances of adverbial compounds: TITRE
upon Hari; ' TE ' on the cow -herd ' ( + 119T, $ 574, a and 6) ;
अध्यात्मम् ' on the soul ' ( अधि + आत्मन्, 5574, 0); उपराजम् ' under the
king ' (उप + राजन्, 8574, c); उपशरदम् ' near the autumn ' ( उप + शरद,
6 574, d ); उपसमिधम् or उपसमित् ' near fuel' (उप + समिध , 5 574,4) उपचर्मम् 1
or उपचर्म ' near the skin ' (उप + चर्मन् , $ 574, c); उपनदम् or उपनदि ' near i
the river ; उपगिरम् or उपगिरि ' near the mountain ;' अनुविष्णु ' after 1
1
Vishnu;' अनुगङ्गम् ' along the Ganges;' अनुज्येष्ठम् ' according to senior.
ity ;' 97599 in a corresponding manner;' gearia ' towards the fire ;'
प्रतिनिशम् ‘ erery night ;' प्रत्यक्षम् or समक्षम् 'before one's eyes ;' परोक्षम्
6
out of sight;' Fharraitu ' free froin fies ;' Haraan " beyond sleep,' i.e.
wakefully ; ' zyrtih in accordance with one's strength ;' rasina
' as long as life lasts,' i.e.'all one's life ;' her like Hari ;' agera
with the grass,' i.e. including even the grass ( to E ; Er is usually
changed to in Argayîbhava -compounds).
§ 576. Compounds may be compounded again with other simple or
compound words, and the compounds so formed may become the mem .
bers of new compounds. This repeated composition may theoretically
be carried to any extent. In practice, however, we find that the further
we follow back the current of Sanskļit literature to the time when
Sanskțit was really a living and spoken language, the more sparing is the
employment of compound words and the more limited the length of the
compounds actuallyused. The student, when writing, therefore, should
avoid long and unwieldy compounds. When dissolving a long compound,
he should, unless it be a Drandra, always dissolve it first into its two
main parts, and should dissolve these again, until none but simple
words remain.

CHAPTER X.
INFLECTED WORDS IN THE SENTENCE .

§ 577. The various forms which have been taught in the preceding
chapters, are not learnt for their own sake, but for the use to be made
of them in the sentence. For when speaking or writing a language,
people do not employ single unconnected words, but espress, what they
34 8
266 SANSKRIT GRANNAR . [ $ 578—
wish to say, in sentences, consisting as a rule of several connected words,
the forms of which are chosen in accordance with the meaning which
the speaker desires to convey. A full account of the structure of senten
ces would far exceed the limits of this grammar ; but it appears desirable
to give at least the most common rules for the employment in the sentence
of the principal verbal and declensional forms, of which in general only
the formation has been hitherto explained .
1. THE FINITE VERB.

$ 578. The most important part of a sentence is the verb , for on

the verb mainly depend the forms of the other words which a sentence
may contain . Moreover, only a verbal form may by itself, without the
addition of any other words, form a completc sentence ; and in sentences
which contain no verbal form , the sense is not complete, unless we supply
at least some form.or other, commonly a form of the Present Indicative,
of the verb ' to be .' There is a tendency, especially in the later
langunge, to employ primary nouns, such as the Past Passive and Past
Active Participles, and the Verbal Adjectives, in place of the proper
verbal forms, the Finite Verb .
$ 579. According to Chapter VII. , a verbal form may be used in
Parasmaipada or Âtmanepada, or it may be Passive. A Parasmaipada or
Åtmanepada form denotes that a certain agent performs the action, or
undergoes the state, expressed by the root or rerbal base. A passive
form denotes that somebody or something is the object of the action
expressed by the root or verbal base ; or it denotes, in the case of intran
sitive verbs, that the action or state expressed by the root is going on or
brought about by a certain agent. Where in a sentence the rerb is Par.
of Atın. (active construction ), the subject of the sentence, if it be
expressed by a separate noun , denotes the agent of the verbal action ; and
where the verb is in the Passive ( passive construction ), the subject of
the sentence, if expressed by a separate noun, denotes the object of the
verbal action, the agent of which is expressed by a noun in the Instr. case .
Passive forms of intransitive verbs are always used in the 3 Person
Sing ., and have no separate subject in the sentence, because the action is
only one, and because the subject is invariably contained in the verbal
form itself (impersonal construction ) ; here, too, the agent by whom
the action is brought about, is expressed by a noun in the Instr. case.
The later language shows a2 decided preference for passive and imper
soual constructions. E. g.
Active construction : कमलानि पश्यति · he sees lotuses ;' ईश्वर जनः
 INFLECTED WORDS IN THE SENTENCE , 267
$ 582.]
पूजयति ' man worships God ;' देवं वन्दे I praise God ;' आचार्य
rata : qa the pupil serves his master.'
Passive construction : at: fogat ' you are serred by serrants ;'
grit stead ' the enemies are conquered by the prince.'
Impersonal construction : आस्यते भृत्येन, or भृत्याभ्याम्. or भृत्यैः ' the
servant is sitting ;' ' the two servants are sitting ;' ' the servants
are sitting .'
Note : The student should clearly understand that the agent of the
verbal action is not necessarily the subject of the sentence .
$ 580. The use of the three numbers of verbal forms can offer no
difficulty . As regards the three persons, it may be mentioned that,
when the subject of the sentence consists of sereral nouns connected by
the particle 5 , of which one is the pronoun of the first person, the rerb
stands in the first person ; nod that the verb stands in the second person,
when the subject consists of several nouns connected by 7, of which one
is the pronoun of the second, and none the pronoun of the first person.
E.g. अहं च देवदत्तश्च पचावः । त्वं चाहं च पचावः त्वं च देवदत्तश्च पचयः
§ 581. The use ofthe tenses and moods, too, is comparatively simple,
and does not offer nearly the same difficulties which this subject presents
in other classical languages. The reasons of this are, that the Sanskrit
language aroids the indirect form of speech ; that the Subjunctive mood
has almost entirely gone out of use ; that tenses, the uses of which must
once have been clearly defined and strictly kept separate, have come to
be employed promiscuously ; that relations between things or ideas which
in other languages are expressed by subordinate sentences, are expressed
by means of compound or secondary nouns, or by verbal derivatives ;
the preference, shown more especially by the later language, for passive
and impersonal constructions, and for the use of Participles and Verbal
Adjectives in place of the finite verb, etc,
(a) The Present Tense ( Presint Indicative ).
$ 592. (a) The Present Tense is used to express that an action
takes place or is going on, or has not been brought to a close, at the time +

of speaking ; or is always going on, or performed habitually ; or to state

n natural fact, a general truth, etc. E.g. STOFaits 1798: Terra
मिच्छति ' my whole retinue here is ranting to run away ' इहाधीमहे ' we
are studying here ;' सवन्ति नद्यः ' rivers fiow'; हिमवतो गङ्गा प्रभवति ' the
Ganges rises from the Himàlaya ;' etc.
(6) The Present may also denote what has just taken place, or will
take place soon. E.g. mas 972 ArteTITA I ' When did you come !
268 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR . [ $ 588–
I came just now .' * vihafa 189 78911 I ' When shall you go ?
I am going now .'
$ 583. (a ) In connection with the particle the Present. conreys
the meaning usually denoted by the Imperfect or Perfect ($ 584 ). E.g.
कस्मिश्चिदने भासुरको नाम सिंहः प्रतिवसति स्म ' in a certain forest there dwelt
a lion named Bhâsuraka .'
(6) In connection with gar (without the Present or any past
tense may be used to denote past time preceding the current day. E.g.
वसन्तीह पुरा छाचाः, or अवसन् , or ऊषुः, or अवात्सुः ' formerly the pupils
dwelt here .

( ) With the adrerbs erg and go the Present conregs a future

sense. E.g. tafazi arafa rg: ' till the sun sets' or ' shall have
set'); rur she Ogar GT Àमे you will again cling to my neck .'
(d ) In regard to future erents, the Present or a Future may be used
after after and a fee($ 194 ); after any interrogative, when a desire for
something is intimated ; and also where there is no interrogative, when
the reward is stated that will be earned by the fulfilment of a desire.
E.g. कदा अड़े or भोक्ष्यते ' when will he eat ? ' कतमो भिक्षां ददाति pr
दास्यति ' who of you will gire alms ? ' यो भक्तं ददाति ( or दास्यति ) स स्वर्ग
Teyfa ( or otrufa ) he who will give me food , will go to heaven .'
(6 The three Past Tenses.
§ 584. (a) In classical literature the three Past Tenses are used with
out any apparent distinction, to denote any kind of past time.
(6) But in the older literature the Aorist at any rate is decidedly
differently employed from the Imperfect and Perfect, and native gram
marians distinguish between the three tenses thus : The Aorist either
(like the Past Passive and Past Active Participles) simply denotes the
completion of an action, or it denotes past time of the current day,
recent past time. The Imperfect denotes past time preceding the
current day, remote past time. And the Perfect, like the Imperfect,
denotes remote past time, but, unlike the Imperfect, it is used with
reference to erents not witnessed by the speaker. Hence it is that the
Imperfect and Perfect are used in narratives referring to the remote past,
while the Aorist, unless it merely denotes the completion of an action, is
the proper tense to use (particularly in dialogues) of events that have
taken place at, or close to, the time of speaking, within sight or hearing
of the speaker or hearer. The Imperfect and Perfect would hare to be
translated by the English Imperfect, the Aorist by the Perfect Present,
with or without the addition of the adrerb now . B.9.
§ 587.] INFLECTED WORDS IN THE SENTENCE . 269

उपाध्यायाय गां ददाति । अदात् । दास्यति । ' He gires ( Pres. ) a cow

to the teacher ; he has given ( Aor .) one ; he will gire ( Simple Fut.) one .'
तस्य ह पुत्रो जज्ञे रोहिती नाम । तं होवाच । अजनि ते वै पुत्रो यजस्व मानेनेनि ।i
" To him was born ( Pers.) a son, by name Rohita. Then (Varuna)
said ( Perf.) to him : Now a son has been born (Aor.) to thee ; sacrifice
him to me.'
स प्रजापतिरत्रवीदय कोऽहमिति । यदेवैतदवोच इत्यावीत् । ततो वै को नाम
TSTOFATYTI' Prajâpati said ( Impf.): Who am I then ? ( Indra ) answer .
cd ( Impf.) : Exactly what you have said ( dor.) just nowy. Hence it is
that Prajapati came (Impf.) to be called Ka .'
§ 585. (a) The Aorist also conreys the notion that an action was per
formed continuously. E.g. Ja miraH6THTX • He was giving food all
his life. '
(6) The Perfect is used in an emphatic denial. E.g. at afara
' I certainly did not go to Kalinga. '
( c) T'he two Futures.
§ 586. (a) The Simple Future and the Periphrastic Future stand in
the same relation to each other as the Aorist and the Imperfect. For while
the Simple Future either simply denotes futurity generally, as opposed
to what is present or past, or denotes an action which will take place
during the current day or in the near future, the Periphrastic Future
is used of such actions as will take place after the current day or in the
more remote future. And similarly to what we hare observed in the
case of the Aorist ( § 585, a ), the Simple Future is also employed to
express the continuousness of a future action. E.g. Jaryasffa
FIST HATTAT ' there will be born (or) there exists ( already now ) etc.'
ग्राममद्य प्रवेक्ष्यामि ‘to- day I shall enter the village;' अचिरादादास्यध्वे 'before
long you will receive ; ' JISTOTrioara • he will be teaching all his
life' ; _ : aar he will do to -morrow . '
(6) The Simple Futare also denotes purpose, intention, desire, will, etc.
E.g. घटेन कार्य करिष्यन्कुम्भकारकुलं गवाह कुरु घटं कार्यमनेन करिष्यामीति
one who wishes to use a pot goes to the house of the potter and says:
make me a pot ; I want to use it. '
( d) The Imperatire.
§ 587. The Imperative espresses command, prescript, entreaty,
request, invitation, wish, deliberation or inquiry ( all which meanings it
shares with the Potential ) . It also denotes permission, or intimates that
an action is seasonable ( and these meanings, as well as that of order or
270 SANSKRIT GRAN MAR. [$ 588

command, the Imperatire has in common with the Verbal Adjectires ).

The Imperative also ( like the Benedictire ) denotes a blessing. E.g. pre
' come !' ग्राम भवानागच्छतु ( or आगच्छेत् ) ' come to the village ! ' इह भवा
नास्ताम् ( or आसीत ) please, sit here : ' अधीच्छामो भवन्तं माणवकं भवानभ्या .
पयतु ( or अध्यापयेत् ) ' we request you to teach the boy ; 'व्याकरणमध्ययै ( or
( oriteta ) ' I should like to study granımar ; ' qasna si(or Pata )
भवान् I wish you to eat ;' किं नु खलु भो व्याकरणमध्ययै ( or अधीयीय ) 'should
6

I study grammar' ? - * * r ( or care poa : etc.) make

a mat !' or ' you may make a mat, ' or ' it is time for you to make a
mat .'-चिरं जीवतु भवान् or चिरं जीवतावान् ( or चिरं जीव्याद्भपान् ) ' may
you lire long !

(e) The Subjunctive.

$ 588. The Subjunctive of the Aorist with the prohibitive particle at,
and the Subjunctive of the Aorist or Imperfect with AT FA , are nsed in an
6
imperative sense. E.g. AT TH :, or AT A TA ,or HT Fey : do not go !'
AT Airfia, or At FH asia, or HT FH titta he shall not do. '
The Potential..
$ 589. (a) The Potential or Optative, like the Imperative, expresses a
command, prescript, entreaty, request, inritation, deliberation or inquiry
( $ 587 ).
(6) It is also used when the speaker expresses a desire or hope, but
should not be employed after the particle कचिद्. E.g. कामो मे भुञ्जीत
17 ' I hope, you will ent. ' But astra a Arar ' I hope, your mo
ther is alive. '
§ 590. (a) The Potentinl may also be used to express that something
would be possible, or is probable or likely, etc. When some such phrase as
• I think it possible,' ' I fancy , ' I suspect ' is added, the Simple Future
may be used as well as the Potential ( except after the particle ). E.g.
अपि पर्वतं शिरसा भिन्द्यात् ' he night eren break a mountain with his head;
लभेत सिकतासु तैलमपि ' one might even obtain oil from sand ;' संभावयामि
भुञ्जीत ( or भोभ्यते ) भवान्, but only संभावयामि यदुखीत भवान् ' I fancy you
will, or would eat. '
(6 ) Like the Verbal Adjectives, the Potential may be used to express
that somebody deserves, or is fit or able, to do a thing. E.g. ***
TRITT ( or Tat | disur etc.) ' you deserve, or are fit, to
marry the girl ; ' भवान्खलु भारं वहेत् ( or भवता खलु भारो वोढव्यः etc.) ' you
are able to carry the load .'
$ 595.] INFLECTED WORDS IN THE SENTENCE. 271

( 6) The Potential is used after काल, समय, and वेला ' it is time to,' whea
the particle यद् is employed. E.g. कालो यडुजीत भवान् ( कालो भोक्तम् )
“ it is time for you to eat. '
$ 591. The Potential is used in hypothetical sentences, in both the 1,

antecedent and the subsequent clauses, when the speaker wishes to say,
what would happen or not happen, if something else were to happen or
not to happen. E.g. दक्षिणेन चेद्यायान्न शकटं पर्याभवेत् ' if he were to go to
the right, his cart 'would not be upset.'
(9 ) The Conditional.
$ 592. The Conditional is used in hypothetical sentences, in both the
antecedent and the subsequent clauses, if the speaker wishes to intimate 3

that, what is stated in the antecedent clause, will not be or has not been
the case. E.g. Spaint arryda afe Far CATÀCTO ' if you came to
me, you would get ghee to eat, ' ( but you will not come) ; cliefer
tegarn there would have been plenty of food, if it had rained
properly .'
( 1 ) The Benedictive.
$ 593. The Benedictive ( like the Imperative ) is used to denote a
blessing or wish ( 587 ).
2. THE INFINITE, THE GERUND, THE PARTICIPLES, AND
THE VERBAL ADJECTIVES .

$ 594. The verb of a sentence may be accompanied by adverbs or

adverbial expressions; and it may also be accompanied by inflected nouns,
denoting the persons or things represented as bringing about the action
or state expressed by the verb. Of the inflected nouns we shall treat later
on. Among the adverbial expressions a prominent place is held by the
Infinitive and the Gerund. Together with these we may conveniently
class here the Participles and the Verbal Adjectives, because, like
the Infinitive and the Gerund, they share some of the properties of the
finite verb, and may, at any rate some of them, be even used in the place
of it.
( a) The Infinitive.
§ 595. ' The Infinitive, though formally an Accusative case, is most
ordinarily employed like the Dative case of a noun denoting an action or
state, to express the purpose or aim of another action. E ... Taara
( = पाकाय व्रजति ) - he goes in order to cook; ' भोक्तुं व्रजति ' he goes in
order to eat.' ( The same meaning may also be expressed by a primary
noun in अक , 5539, 9 ; भोतुं व्रजतिभोजको व्रजति ).
 272 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR . [$ 596–

$ 596. (a) The Infinitive is used with words implying a wish or de

sire, when the person who wishes is also the agent of the action express
ed by the Infinitive. E.g. इच्छति or कामयते or वष्टि or वाञ्छति भोतुम्
• he wishes to eat. '
(6) The Infinitive is also used in construction with a 'can, ' yo ' to
9
dare to,' # r to know to,' to dislike to ' etc., q ' to strive, ' TT ( TT
6
to begin ' etc.), FL to receive,' m (9- ' to begin' etc.), ar
( JHE ' to have power to' etc.), po to deserre, be obliged to, need,
onght, should,' etc., and with stą'to be' and its synonyms (a , faragà ).
Eg. शशाक न नियन्तुम् 'she could not restrain ; ' इन्द्रियाणि संनियन्तुं न
शक्यन्ते ' the organs of sense cannot be restrained ; ' शक्यमेवं कर्तुम् it can
be done so, it is possible to do so ;' 7 ' they did not dare to
say ;' न7 foarta farrafatan ‘ he does not know ( what it is ) to turn
6
back ;' दयितां वातुं घटस्व ' strive to protect the beloved ;' भोकुं लभते ' he
receives to eat ; तपश्चरितुं प्रचक्रमे ' she began to perform penances ;' न कर्तु।
मुत्सहे I cannot make ;' न दण्डं दातुमर्हति · he is not obliged to pay .
fine;' वक्तुमर्हसि ' you ought to say ;' अस्ति or भवति or विद्यते भोक्तुम् 'there
is ( food etc.) to eat,' etc.
( c) Also with 37 able to, equal to, competent to, fit to, capable of '
and nouns or verbs conveying the same or similar meanings. B.g. अलं opis
विज्ञातुम् ' competent to understand ;' पर्याप्तोऽसि प्रजाः पातुम् ' you are able
to protect the creatures ' प्रापयितुमीश्वर: ' able to bring: वोढुं पारयति ' he is
able to carry ;' etc.
8597. The Infinitive is also used with काल , समय, and वेला ‘ it is
time to.' E.g. कालो or समयो or वेला भोक्तुम् ' it is time to eat ' ( = कालो
1 TFT or arrest agata att ; § 590, o).
(6 ) The Gerunds in 1 and 4.
§ 598. ( a ) The Gerunis in T and y denote an action which in
point of timeprecedes the action espressed by another ( generally the
1
main) verb (of the sentence), and has the same agent. E.g.
astā ‘ he goes after having caten'; fair itara ‘ he first eats and then
drinks' ; geefrura aut og FH ' after sho had said so, the ashes were
seen by her,' i.e. ' when she had said so, she saw the ashes .' .
.

(6) Sanskpit Gerunds may often in English be translated by preposi

tions or adverbial phrases. E.g. नीत्वा or गृहीत्वा or आवाय • having led
or taken'i.e.'together with ;'gchil or frere having left or abandoned
ie. without ;' srcy ai a : fera : ' the mountain stands on this side
of the river ;' fair
s e qe te feuar ' the river is beyond the mountain. '
 INFLECTED WORDS IN THE SENTENCE . 278
$ 603.]

599. STĄ and or may be used with the Geruud, to express a

prohibition. E.J. अलं रुदित्वा · do not weep '; अलं कृत्वा or खलु कृला
AT href: ($ 588).
( c ) The Participles.
$ 600. (a) The Participles of the Prosent and of the Simple Fu
ture couvey the same meanings as the tenses to which they belong.
(6) The Present Participles may be used to show how another action
takes place or why it takes place. E.g. Tararuar: the Yavanas
cat lying down,' i.e. they lie down when eating ; sparat Tara'he dwells
( at a place ) for the purpose of studying. '
§ 601. The Perfect Participles denote any kind of past time, and
the Participle of the Parasmai, is often used in place of the finite verb.
E.y. JTHITETTONICH: goria A Kautsa approached, or has approached,
Pimini ' ( = उपासीदत्, or उपससाद, or उपासदत् ).
$ 602. The Past Passive and Past Active Participles denote the
completion of an action, or past time generally, and both are, especially
in the later langunge, often used in place of the finite rerb, either with
or without the auxiliary verb अस् ' to be.' E.g. कृतवानसि विप्रियं न मे
प्रतिकूलं न च ते मया कृतम् ' you did nothing that was displeasing to me ,
and nothing was done by me that was disagreeble to you '; artig ' he
said '; राजा कुमार देव्यै समर्पितवान् ' the king handed over the boy to the
.

queen,
$ 603. (a) The Past Passive Participle of transitive verbs denotes the
object of the action expressed by the verb, and takes the gender, number,
and case of the noun to which it refers ; formed of intransitive verbs, it is
used impersonally, and appears in the Nom. Sing. of the neuter gender.
E.. 7 : yar'a mat has been made by you ,' i.e. you have made
a mat ; TITO Yar you have sat. '
(6) The Past Passive Participle of intransitive verbs, of verbs meaning
6
to go, ' and of fuq ' to embrace ,' ' to ascend,' TA , TT, TE ' to dwell ,
T', and Fit, even when with prepositions they are transitive, may also
denote the agent. E.g. stigar TT or Ifaa yar`you have sat ';
असि विद्रुतः ' you have run away '; गतो देवदत्तो ग्रामम् D. has gone to the
village '; गतं देवदत्तेन ' D. has gone ' ; आरूढो वृक्षं भवान् or आरूढो वृक्षो भवता
' you hare ascended the tree ' ; उपस्थितो गुरुं भवान् or उपस्थिती गुरुर्भवता
' you have approached the teacher.'
(c) The Past Passive Participle of intrausitive rerbs and of verbs mean •
ing ' to go ' or ' to eat, ' may also denote the locality where an action has
6 6

35 s
 274 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR . (8 604

taken place, E.g. GTÀCTATHTH ' this is the place where they have sat,
here they sat '; इदमेषां यातम् ' here they went ' ; इदमेषां भुक्तम् ' here they
ate,' etc.
( d ) The Past Passive Participles of verbs meaning to approve of ' or
wish,' ' to know ,' or ' to honour,' may lose their past sense and be
used like ordinary adjectives. E.g. Tri Fa : or geapproved of by'or dear
to kings ' ; trai gisa: ' honoured by ' or an object of reverence for
kings '; faran ' known to me ' ; etc. ( For the Genitive, see $ 642, a.)
(d) The Verbal Adjectives.
$ 604. (a ) The Verbal Adjectives convey a passive meaning. Formed
of transitive verbs, they denote the object of the action expressed
by the verb, and take the gender, number, and case of the noun to which
they refer ; formed of intransitive verbs, they are used impersonally, and
appear in the Nom. Sing. of the neater gender. Tbey are frequently used
in place of the finite verb. E.g. airror : fa taal ' a mat should be
made by you,' i.e., you should make a mat: ; pferdei utat ' you ought
to sit dowa ' ; TUTTIA ETH ' you should be attentive' ($ 614, 6).
(6 ) The Verbal Adjectives, like the Imperative, denote a command or
injunction, or permission, or express that an action is seasonable ($ 587 ) ;
and, like the Potential, they may be used to express that a person de
serves, or is fit or able to do a thing ( 6 590, 6 ).
3. THE CASES OF NOUNS.
$ 605. Inflected nouns are employed to denote the persons or things
who or which are represented by the speaker as instrumental in bringing
about the action or state expressed by the verb of a sentence. These
persons or things may in turn be specified or more closely defined by
meaus of other inflected noms ; and inflected nouns may also be used in,
or in connection with, the adverbial expressions by which a verbal form
1
may be accompanied ; to denote the duration of an action or state, or to
add various other particulars.
$ 606. Omitting here the Vocative case , as requiring no special
remark, we may say in general, that of the seven remaining cases. all,
except the Genitive, are employed to denote the different ways in which
persons or things may be instrumental in bringing about the action or
state denoted by the verb, as agents, or objects, or instruments, or reci
pients of the object of an action, etc.; and that for the Genitive is prima
rily reserved the function of expressing relations such as obtain between
persons or things denoted by nouns. In special cases, however, the Geni
$ 609.] INFLECTED IVORDS IN THE SENTENCE . 275

tire may be employed beyond what may be said to be its proper sphere ;
and most of the other cases are frequently used in construction with
nouns, adverbs, or prepositions, or to convey statements of various kinds,
as will be shown below. And on the whole it may be added here, that the
employment of the several cases depends not merely on what the speaker
wishes to say, but also on the manner in which he desires to present a
fact to the bearer.
(a) The Nominalire.
607. ( a) The Nominatire, in active construction , denotes the
agent, and in passive construction the object of the action expressed
6
the verb ( $ 579 ) . E ... ila 7 : D. makes a mat; ' :faa
coa'a mat is made by D.'
(6) When the agent or object is put in the Nom., their predicate is put
in the same case. E.g. तदण्डमभव.मम् that became a golden egg ', असो
नृपेण चक्रे युवराजशब्दभाक ' he was made by the king possessed of the
title Yuvarâja .'
(6 ) The Accusative.
§ 608. (a) The Accusative denotes, in active construction, the di
rect object of the action expressed by the verb. With verbs expressive of
going, moving, or leading towards, and the like, the Acc. also denotes the
goal of motion. E.g. कटं करोति ' he makes a mat ' ; चौरान्पश्यति • he sees
thieres ' ; ग्राम गच्छति • he goes to the rillage ' ; गमिष्याम्युपहास्यताम् I
shall go to the state of one who deserres to be laughed at, I shall make
myself ridiculous '; etc.
(6) When the direct object is put in the Acc ., the objective predicate
is put in the same case. E.g. at 1767Ta he made them both the
aim of his arrows.'
(c) With verbs of going, the goal of motion may optionally be put in
the Datire, when bodily motion is spoken of. E.g. प्रामं or ग्रामाय गच्छति
6

• he goes to the village ' ; TARI 935 ' go to the forest ’; but only HAAT
972 Tasya Tasha ' he goes with his thoughts to Påtaliputra.'
§ 609. ( a) Transitive verbs espressive of motion may take both
the Acc. of the direct object and also the Acc. of the goal of mo
tion . E ... F1 arra he leads the goat to the village '; when a
sentence like this is turned into the Passire , only the direct object is put
in the Nom . ( § 607, a Lagà the goat is led to the village.'
(6) The verbs el ' to ask somebody after,' fet' to beg something of,'
' to ask somebody for ' take a double Acc. A double Acc. may also
2 76 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR . [ $ 610%
be used with the verb ' to milk of,' f ' to gather from ,' ' to con
fine in ,' and with verbs like to tell’and Ta ' to teach .' E.g.AİTT
पन्थानं पृच्छति ' heasks the boy after the way'; गां दोग्धि पयः or गोछेन्धि पयः
; or garedhetells
" he milks milk of the cow ' ( Acc.or 161.),gå ते धर्मम्
the boy ( dcc . or Dat. ) the law .'- In Passive construction , cat si
ta: the king was asked for Rama . '
$ 610. ( @) When a primitive rerb is turned into the Causal, the agent
of the primitive verb is put in the Accusatire, provided the primitire
verb is intransitive, or conreys the notions of going, knowing, eating,
studying, or reciting. Otherwise the agent of the primitive verb is put in
the Instrumental. E.g.
STTFH 777 : ' D. sits '.;GHALITATTN: ‘ Y.causes D. to sit.'
वेति माणवको धर्मम् ' the boy knows the law '; वेदयति माणवकं धर्मम् ' he
teaches the boy the law . ' J
अधीते माणवको धर्मम् ' the boy studies the law ' ; अध्यापयति माणवर्क
hahe instructs the boy in the law '; in Passire construction , zeza
ATTIYHg 'the boy is instructed in the law .'
But पचत्योदन देवदत्तः ' D. cooks rice '; प्राचयत्योदनं देवदत्तेन यज्ञदत्तः
‘Y. causes D. to cook rice .'
(6) The agent of and may, when these verbs are turned into the
Causal, optionally be put in the Instr. or Acc, case. E.g.otf ICE :
D.makes a mat '; mtara 7 or TF : Y. causes D.
to make a mat:
§ 611. ( a) The Accusative denotes duration and distance, and answers
the questions how long ? ' and how far ? ' E.9. Arvia he studies
a month '; *** Test ‘ he went ( the distance of )a krosha ; Find for
' the river is bent ( the distance of) a krosha .'
6) To convey the notion that an action is accomplished, and the pure
pose for which it is performed, attained within a certain period of time or
within a certain space, the Instr. is used instead of the Acc. E.g. AT
Argan Sta:' the chapter has been studied ( and finished or learnt) in
a month .'
( -) The Abl. or Loc. cases are used to denote the period of time inter
vening between two actions, or after which an action is repeated ; or the
space that interrenes between the agent and the object of an action . E.g.
अब भुत्का देवदनी यहाभोक्ता or यहे भोक्ता after haring eaten to- lay, D.
will eat ( ngain ) in ( or after ) two days ' ; TriSafACTE : ER
fara or *** Tumia ' this archer, standing here, hits the mark , at
the distance of a krosha,'
 INFLECTED WORDS IN THE SENTENCE . 277
$ 614.)
( d) The Loc. is used to denote how far one point of time is distant
from another ; and the Nom. or Loc, denote the distance between two
places. E.g. at T 3TTETAPT ATÈ the full -moon day of Agrahayana is
one month distant from the full-moon day of Kärttika'; thyha : ainsi
चत्वारि योजनानि or चतुर्पु योजनेषु — Simkishra is four yojanas distant
from Garidhumat .'
$ 612. The Accusatire is used :
(a) With paper between and party between ' or 'without. ' E.g.
अन्तरा or अन्तरेण त्वां च मां च कमण्डलुः ' between you and me there is a
water- pot '; अन्तरेण पुरुषकारं न किंचिल्लभ्यते ' nothing is got without human
effort.'
(6) With समया or निकषा ' near to, ' अभितः or उभयतः on both sides
of ,' परितः ' around,' सर्वतः ' on all sides of,' उपर्युपरि ' abore,' अभ्याधि ' on ,'
and अधोऽधः ' below . ' E.g. समया ग्रामम् orनिकषा पामम् ' near the village';
sufrat 977 on both sides of the village '; etc.
( c) With Et'ah ! alas ! ' and pra'fie ! shame! ' E.g. It'shame
upon thee !
§ 613. The following prepositions are used with the Accusative :
( a ) st in the sense of along, after, in the direction of, towards, in
consequence of, according to, ' or when conreying a distributive meaning.
E.J. अनु गङ्गाम् ' along the Ganges '; अनु पुरोहितम् ' after the priest'; तदनु
' after that '; sit : ' the ( other ) gods come after ( i.e., are inferior
to ) Hari '; ' in the direction of ' or ' towards the tree'; TATA
Foga .he waters tree after tree.'
(6) 59 in the sense of after.' E.g. 39 The term ' the
( other ) grammarians come after ( i.e., are inferior to ) Shakatayana .'
(c) Sy, ft, and gra in the sense of in the direction of, towards,' or
when conreying a distributive meaning ( like ) .
( c) The Instrumental.
§ 614. (a) In passive or impersonal constructions the Instrumental
denotes the agent of the action expressed by the verb; and generally, the
Instr . denotes the instrument or means by which anything is accom
plished, the way or rond by which somebody proceeds, etc. E.g.
Ferica : ' a mat is inade by D .; ' ' it is sat by D., ' i.e.,
• D. sits; ' TE' D. said ; ' raro ana ‘he cuts with a sickle ;'
गुणैर्बन्धनम् - the tying with strings '; एत्य वमना — haring approached by
a path '; etc.
278 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR . [ § 615—
( 6) When in impersonal constructiou the agent is expressed by the
Instr., the predicate is put in the same case. E.g. aurada xiaout.
you should be attentive .'
§ 615. (a) In connection with foc'to play, to gamble,' that which
people play with is put in the Instr. or Acc. case. E.g. opteroufa or
stretcafa he plays with dice.'
( 6 ) With verbs meaning to hire, to engage for hire,' the wages may
be denoted by the Instr. or Dat. case. E.g. Vào or vara iftita : ‘ hired
for a hundred. ' But the price paid for a thing bought is by the general
rule put in the Instr. E.y. The sa : ' bought for a thousand .'
$ .616. (a) The Instrumental also expresses cause, reason , motive,
etc. E.g. prepar Tin : ' sorrow caused by a girl '; pagar 41: ' fame on.
account of learning.'
(6) If the cause, motive, etc., be a quality expressed by a masculine or
neuter noun, the Abl. may be used instead of the Instr. E.g. qogoh
न मुक्तः or पाण्डित्यान्मुक्तः 'released on account of his learning,' but only
प्रज्ञया मुक्तः, भयात् ' through fear.''
(6) If the phrases on account of,' by reason of,' for the sake of,'
etc., are expressed by the noun 7, this noun is put in the Gen., and has
the Gen. case dependent on it. E.g. Hard Cat: ' for the sake of food .'
(d ) If nouns like it , FTTT, airror cause , reason, motire,' are quali
fied by a pronoun , any (escept the Voc. ) case may be used. E.g. Fani po
मित्तम् or केन निमित्तेन or कस्मै निमित्ताय, etc. ' for what reason ?
$ 617. The Instrumental also expresses accompaniment or association
with, and is therfore used with adverbs meaning ' with, together with ,'
with nouns meaning ' accompanied by, furnished with ,' and the like, and
with verbs meaning to associate with , meet with, conie in contact with ,'
etc.; but it may also be employed in the same sense without any such
word. E.J. पुवेण सह or सार्धम् ' with the sou ', भार्यया सहितः ' accompanied
by his wife '; धनेन संपन्नः ' endoved with wealth '; मूर्खः सङ्गः ' association
with fools '; रवं रबेन संगच्छते ' one jewel associates with another ' : संगच्छ
स्व मया सार्धम् ' meet me ( in combat) ; ओघेन युज्यते नदी ' the river is
joined with the flood ' ; qar ' the old with the young,' etc.
§ 618. The Instrumental denotes the characteristic mark or the attri.
bute of a person or thing. Eg. अपि भवान्कमण्डलुना छाचमद्रासीत् ' hare
you seen the student with his water- pot ?' HITHEATTE : ‘ an ascetic (ns is
shown ) by the matted hair ' ; etc.
619. (a) The Instrumental is also employed to denote some defect
of a part of the boily, in expressions like 7771 17 : ' blind of an eye.'
§ 623.) INFLECTED WORDS IN THE SENTENCE . 279

(6) And it is often used adverbially. E.g. arbyvature ;'

प्रायेण ' mostly '; गोत्रेण ' by descent '; समेन 'on level ground'; etc.
( d ) The Dutite,

§ 620. The Dative denotes the person or thing for whom or which
the object of an action is intended ( the indirect object ); the purpose for
which an action is performed ; or that for which a thing is there, or
serves, or may be used. E.g. 392 Ti Elfa he gives a cow to the
teacher '; देवदत्ताय गां प्रतिशृणोति —he promises a cow to D. ' ; तत्तस्यै
कथयति · he tells that to her'; दूतो रघवे विस्ष्टः ' a messenger sent to Ra.
ghu'; युद्धाय संनह्यते —he accoutres himself for battle '; यूपाय दारु ' wood
for a sacrificial post '; कुण्डलाय हिरण्यम् ' gold for an earring '; रन्धनाव
Rarant'a pot for cooking .'
§ 621. (a) The Dative of a primary noun denoting au action or state
may be used in the place of an Infinitive of purpose. E.g.qara qara
' he goes in order to cook ' ( = पक्तुं व्रजात, $ 595 ) ; आर्तवाणाय वः शस्त्रं न
FEDHAMTE ‘ your weapon is for the protection (Dat.) of the distressed,
not to inflict ( Inf.) a wound on the innocent.'
(1) The Dative may also be employed to denote the object of an Infi
nitive of purpose, provided the Infinitive itself be omitted. E.g. gonnat
व्रजति · he goes to fetch flovers ' ( = पुष्पाण्याहतुं व्रजति ); वृवाय वजमुदयच्छन्
' he lifted the thunderbolt to strike Vșitra ' (= anon ).
$ 622. With rerbs such as gg 9,59 Taquà, 377 148,or
and eren without the employment of any rerb, the Dative denotes that to
which something else tends or conduces, or what something else causes or
produces, or is made to undergo or becomes, etc. E.g. ferere dit
tendsto produce ' or ' causes distress' ; 345919 yara : ' anger causes
calamity'; अस्तु भवतां भूत्यै ' may he grant you prosperity !' उपदेशो मूर्खापां
प्रकोपाय ' adrice tends to enrage fools' ; तस्य भार्यायै किं न कल्पसे ' why do
you not become his wife '? etc.
§ 623. The employment of the Dative case in construction with the
following rerbs may be specially drawn attention to :
(a) With FTE , FETā ' to long for,' the Dat. denotes the thing longed
for. E.g. young: Fyrar he longs for flowers . '
" With y, ytrera ' to owe,' the person to whom a thing is due. E.g.
Tyrrera he owes a hundred to D.'
ith ' to be pleasant, to please,' F'to be agreeable to the
and synonymous verbs, the person pleased. E.g. Er isa
the sweetmeat is pleasant to D. ' or · D. likes the sweetmeat.'
 280 SANSKRIT GRANMAR . [ § 624
(el) With my ' to be angry with,' ' to meditate mischief against,'
fog to be jealous of,' stay stagia to envy,' and synonymous verbs,
the person with whom one is angry, etc. E.. Tara mara ‘ he is an
gry with D.'—But wheu Fy audy have a preposition prefixed to
them, they are construed with the Acc. case ; e.g. a.
(e) With #ra ' to flatter ,' ( 4-5 etc.) to deny, couceal from ,' FAT
( raga ) to stand by, declare oneself in favour of,' and styö to swear,
asseverate by oath,' the Dat. devotes the person whom one flatters, from
whom one couceals a thing, etc. E.g. For the latters D.'; etc.
§ 624. (a) The Dative is employed with 3754 ' enough for, sufficieut
for, a watch for,' and synonymous expressions, E.g. BT HET HELT or
THAT HETT or guara ngit hart ' the ( one ) wrestler is a match for
the ( other ) wrestler."
(6) With fea ' good ' or ''salutary for. ' E.g. feqhaanaa 'good for a
diseased person .'
(c) With 7: ' adoration to ! ' and FIFA hail to ! ' E.g. The
adoratiou to the gods !’ Fafea Tarz: hail to the people !'
(e) The Ablative.
§ 625. The Ablotive denotes that from which something else is
represeuted as moving away or being removed ; that from which some
thing keeps away, or is kept away, or deviates, and the like ; the place or
source from which something starts or proceeds, or is obtained, etc. E.y.
पामादागच्छति ' he comes from the rillage '; पर्वतादवरोहति · he descends
from the mountain '; अश्वात्पतितः ' fallen from the horse ': प्रासादापेक्षते ' he
sees from the palace '; आसनात्प्रेक्षते ' he sees from his scat '; यवेभ्यो गां वारय
ra or fatkara ‘ he keeps off ' or ' turus away the cow from the barley ';
गवीधुमतः सांकाश्यं चत्वारि योजनानि ' Simkishya is four yojanas distant
from Gavidhumat ' ( $ 611, d ) T
; OT ' received from them ,' etc.
1
§ 626. The employment of the Ablative case with the following
words may be specially drawo attention to :
(a) With words implying fear of, protection from , abhorrence, deviation
froin , discontinuauce, or failing agninst, the Abl. deuotes that of which
one is afraid, or from which one protects, or which one abhors, etc. E.g.
चौरेभ्यो विभेति · he is afraid of thieves ' ; चौरेभ्यस्वायते ' he protects from
thieves '; चौरेभ्यो भयम् ' fear from thieves '; अधर्माज्जुगुप्सते ' he abhors
unrighteousness '; धर्माविरमति or निवर्तते or प्रमायति ' he discontinues, or de
viates from , righteousness ' ; etc.
 § 629. ] INFLECTED WORDS IN THE SENTENCE. 281

(6) With verbs meaning to hide,' the Abl. denotes that from which
one wishes to hide. E.g. उपाध्यायादन्तर्धते or निलीयते ' he hides from the
teacber.

( c) W'ith verb: meaning to learn from , to hear from , to study under,'

etc., the Abl. denotes the persou from whom one learns. E.g. 391 : erar:
दधीते or आगमयति ' he learns from the teacher;' ताभ्यः भुला ' haring
heard from them .'
(d ) With sy strua, the Abl. denotes the material out of which a
thing is produced or made ; and with of (9-4 etc.) the source from which
anything starts. E.y. TFIEGŪ sa ‘ the arrow is made out of horn ;'
हिमवतो गङ्गा प्रभवति ' the Ganges rises from the Himalaya.''
§ 627. The Ablative is used with Comparatives and words having a
comparative sense, to denote that which is surpassed by something else.
E.g. माथुराः पाटलिपुत्रकेभ्यः सुकुमारतराः ' the inhabitants of Mathuri are
more delicate than those of Pataliputra ;' Afait amet at ' intelligence
is more important than strength ;' tifarrerafreja loss of fame
surpasses , i.e. is worse than, death .'
§ 628. ( ) gat 'other than ,' 2:2, fa ' different from ,' and synons .
mous words, and the adverbs #a escept, without, ' and HTC ' far from '
or " ucar to' are construed with the Abl. case. E.g. इतरो देवदत्तात् ' other
than D.; ' Fñ ar without D.,' etc. 3

(6) The Abl, is also employed with g, Jat, and other words which
originally denote a point of the compass ; with adverbs like grac, ;
and with दक्षिणा, दक्षिणाहि ' to the south of 'and उत्तरा, उसराहि ' to tbe
north of .' E.g. पूर्वो मामात् ' east of the rillage ;' पूर्वो प्रीष्मावसन्तः 'spring
comes before summer ; ' प्राग्ग्रामात्, दक्षिणा मामात्, etc.
(c) But gifra and similar adverbs in art , gerta: and others in 8:,
उत्तरात् and others in आत्, and उपरि, पुरः, अध : are construed with theGen .;
and 37toT and others in ga with the Acc. or Gen. E.g. GTFNISTAFT ' east .
of the rillage ;' दक्षिणेन प्रामम् or मामस्य ' south of the village,' ete.
1
§ 629. (a) grófar from,' sifatm'near to , ' and synonymous words
are construed with the Abl. or Gen. The words tt, etc., themselves, when
used adverbially, may be put in the Acc., Instr., Abl., or Loc. case. E.g.
दूरं or दूरेण or दूरात् or दूरे मामात् or प्रामस्य ' far from the village.'
(6) que separate from and FraT different from may be construed
with the Abl. or Instr. case ; and far without ' with the Abl., or Instr.,
or Acc. case. E.g. पृथग्देवदत्तात् or देवदत्तेन ; विना देवदत्तात् or देवदनेन or
देवदत्तम्.
36 8
I
 282 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR . ($ 630 .
§ 630. The following prepositions are used with the Ablative :
( 2) 379 and oft in the sense of excepting, except in .' E.y. 79 fat.
pr மான் fazi per IT: ' rain has fallen except in Trigarta .'
(6 ) apr in the sense of up to ,' until' or ' from , since.' E.9. Trreras
gara ' up to Pataliputra ;' s 137 until the sixteenth ( year ) ;'
Sara ' from the root ;' 541 577: ' since birth .'
(c) grā wheu conveying the meaning almost cqual to' or ' in return
or exchange for. ' E.g. tga: Fistrera ( or 5677 : ra, § 167, a )
' Pradyumna is almost equal to Krishna ; तिलेभ्यः प्रति यच्छति माषान् ' he
gives beans in exchange for sesamum . '
here !
( 5) The Localire.

$ 631. The Locative denotes the locality of the agent or object of

an action; the place, where or near which anything is, or where it is
placed ; the time or occasion when, or the circumstances under which, any.
thing takes place. E.g. कर आस्ते ' he sits on a mat ;' स्याल्यां पचत्योदनम्
' he cooks rice in a pot';' Parang ay ' oil (is) in sesaznum ;' Th Tata ' he
dwells with his teacher ;' Fruiraqag: ' the two fell down at his feet ;'
धूर्जगतः सचिवेषु निचिक्षिपे · the burden of the world was placed on the
ministers ;' fu ara : ' confidence ( placed ) in me;' gå ha'affec.
tion towards friends ;' तस्मिन्काले ' at that time ; ' तस्मिन्नवसरे ' on that
occasion .'
632. Esceptionally the locality is deuoted by the Accusative, in
connection with the verbs अधि -शी ' to lie upon,' अधि-स्था ' to stand upon,
inhabit,' r grą " to sit upon, occupy,' safet ' to sit down in,
occupy, ' and with & ' to dwell’after the prepositions , H7, 39,
and 37. E.g. (Aflarea ( an army ) occupies the village ;' qiaaraagia
• he stands on the mountain,' etc.
§ 633. ( a) The Locatire may also denote that for the sake of which ,
or to obtain which, an action is performed , provided the thing sought
after be connected with the object of the action. E.g. tror atrat Pa
" he kills the tiger for the sake of its skin. '
(6) In coustruction with certain adjectives in 77 derived from Past Pass.
Participles, such as sutraa ' one who has studied ,' saat ' one who
has learnt by heart,' etc. , the Loc. denotes the object of the verbs from
which the Past Pass. Participles are derived. E.g. Spuit renco ' one
who has studied grammar, versed in grammar. '
§ 634. (u) When the action performed or the state undergone by a
person or thing is mentioned for the purpose of determining the time at
 § 638.] IXFLECTED WORDS IN THE SENTENCE . 283

which, or the circumstances under which, an action is performed or a

state undergone by another person or thing, the word expressing the
former person or thing together with the noun qualifying it (which
commonly is a Participle ) is put in the locative case ( Locative ab .
solute ). E.g. fig quitar Ta : ' he went (at the time ) when the cows
are milked ;' FÀg afar stad while the wealthy are eating,
the poor sit by ;' afinita ini ag ' what happened, when hehad gone ?'
कुतो धक्रियाविनस्त्वयि रक्षितरि how can there be any hindrance of religi
ous actions, when you are the protector ? ' ga when this had been
said ;' i aia such being the case ,' etc.
(0) Instead of the Locative, it is permitted to use the Genitive abso
lute, to express the meaning of ' notwithstanding ,' although,' or ' in
spite of .' E.g. iera : ( or rufa ) stata in spite of the fact that
( people ) were crying, he went into exile ;' quants # PTT1987 : the
child was carried off, although I was looking on ,' etc.
§ 635. The Locative or Genitive case may be used :
(a) In the sense of ' among ' or ' of ' with Superlatives and words con
reying a similar meaning. E.g. मनुष्येषु or मनुष्याणां क्षत्रियः शूरतमः ' the
Khatriya is the bravest among men'or of men .'
(1) In construction with the nouns FIAT “ possessor, master,'
' lord,' अधिपति ' ruler,' दायाद ' heir ,' साक्षिन् ' witness,' प्रतिभू ' a surety ,'
and प्रसूत born to, prospective possessor of.' E.9. tig or at first'an
owner of cows,' etc.

( c) With sirghioccupied with , engaged in,' and games clerer in.'

E.g. आयुक्तः कटकरणे or कटकरणस्य ' engaged in making mats .'
§ 636. The Locative or Instrumental case may be used with hiera
' attached or devoted to ’ and Johanxious about.' E.g. wegen:
or a toca : ' ansious about his hair.'
§ 637. In construction with ay ' good to ' and faga civil to ,' either
the Locatire may be used, or one of the prepositions 9. of , or a
with the Acc. case. E.g. साधुर्देवदत्तो मातरि, or मातरमनु. or मातरं परि, or
Arai gra D. is good to his mother.'
§ 638 . The following prepositions are used with the Locatire :
(a) stw when conveying the meaning of ' ruling over ' or 'ruled over
by.' E.g. Syfs Targ 97: ‘ Brahmadatta rales over Pañichila ;'
STT TÊ RAST: ' Pañchâla is ruled orer by Brahmadatta.'
(V) 39 in the sense of ' abore, in addition to, in excess of.' E.g. उप
art: ' a droņa in addition to ' or ' in escess of a khari.'
 284 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [ § 699_
( 9) The Genitive .
$ 639. It has been already stated ( $ 606 ), that the Genitive differs
! from the other cases mainly in this, that the persons or things denoted
by it are not represented in any way as instrumental in bringing about
the actiou expressed by a verb. The Genitive, therefore, as a rule, cannot
be used in construction with verbal forms, but primarily denotes the
manifold relations between persons or things expressed by nouns. It may
also be said that the Genitive is employed to denote any relation what.
ever, to express which no other case has been specially prescribed. E.g.
TH : 954: ' the king's man .' TTT: 977: ' the foot of the animal ;' rag:
.
97 : ' the father's son ,' fad 44. Æ 'I possess wealth ;' hit fort
qurthe divided the splendour of Vishņu among the two wives.'
610. (a) Contrary to the general rule the Genitive is used to denote
the object of verbs of remembering' or ' thinking of,' of fu'to rule ,'
to share ' or ' sympathize with , and of some other less common rerbs.
E.g. मातु : स्मरति ' he remembers his mother ;' पृथिव्या ईट ' he rules the
earth ,' etc.
(6) And in connection with multiplicatives, it denotes the time in which
an action is repeatedly performed. E.g. "FETTET he eats five
: times a day .'
$ 641. ( a) By the general rule, the agent or the object of what is
denoted by any primary poun should be put in the Gen. case. E.g. * 77
6
877879 the arrival of you ,' i.e., your arrival ; stai at ' the creator of
the water ;' TOTFA tar the bearer of the thunderbolt ."
(6) But when a primary noun is accompanied, at the same time, by
both its agent and its object, generally only the object is put in the
Genitive, the agent being denoted by the Instr. case . E.g. rvat tai
6
DET Sofiaraosatt ' wonderful is the milking of the cows ( Obj. Gen. )
by one who is not a cow -herd ( A:1. Instr. ) ;' but ferater forhaps
6

TFT ‘ Vişhộumitra's ( dy. Gen. ) desire of making a mat ( Obj. Gen. ).'
i
§ 642. la construction with the following primary nouns the agent
and the object are denoted ( not by the Gen., but ) by the same cases
( Instr. or Acc.), by which they are denoted in construction with purely
verbal forms:
(a) The Infinitive, the Gerunds, and Participles ( except the Past Pass.
Participles described in $ 603, c and il ). E.y. to make a mat ;'
कट कृत्वा ' haring made a mat ; ओदन पचन ' cooking rice ; देवदत्नेन कृतम
done by D.;' ( but TATAT : dear to kings ;' 4 ftian known to
me') ; etc.
 § 646.] IXFLECTRD WORDS IN THE SENTENCE . 285

(6) Nouns in 3 derived from Desiderative bases ( $ 539, 8 ). E.g.

nts: desirous of making a mat.'
6
(c) Nouns in 37, such as arger killing ' froTTHIR ' approaching .'
etc. E.g. Jahrrara : ' killing calves .'
( 1 ) Nouns in a denoting a habit, etc. E.g. AT FTATTATTTT .in the
habit of talking slander of people.'
( e) Youns in 377 or 57, when they convey a future sense, and those
in 37, when the object is аa debt . E.g. irRhegoes to
6

eat ( $ 395 ) rice ;' ti greit paying a hundred .'

6
( 1 ) Nouns like सुकर, ईषत्कर ' easy to be made, ' दुष्कर : difficult to be
made.' E.4. Għt: Pyaar ' the mat is easy to be made by you,' i.e., it
दुर्वहम् difficult to be carried by
तेन gira
is easy for you to make the mat ; ata
him . '

$ 643. In construction with Verbal Adjectives the agent may be put

in the Instr. or Gen. case. E.g. atat or ypa : 07:gozt: ' a mat should
be made by you,' i.e., you should make a mat.
$ 644. (a) The Gen. or Instr, case may be used with adjeetives expres-.
sire of likeness or similarity. E.J. तुल्यो or सदृशो देवदत्तस्य or देवदत्तेन
• like ' or ' similar to D.'

(6) The Gen. or Dat. case inay be used in blessings with nouns like
6

आयुष्य ' long life,' भद्र ' prosperity,' कुशल ' good health,' सुख happiness,'
हित ' welfare,' etc. E.g. आयुष्यं देवदत्तस्य or देवदत्ताय भूयात् 'long life to
Devadatta !

Number and Gender .

Ş015. The use of the three numbers of nouns calls for no particu .
lar remark . Is regards the three gonders, it may be noted that an adjec
tive which refers to both a masculine and a feminine noun, takes the
masculine gender ; and that it takes the neuter gender when it refers to
several nouns of which one at least is neuter. E... # FTFT poft
सुवृत्तौ ' that man and his wife are well -conducted ;' स नरस्तस्य चरिवं च
Fürñ'that man and his conduct are astonishing.
$ 6-46 . Is intimated in § 577, the preceding rules are intended rather
for the guidance of the beginner to lay down some general principles,
than to give a complete account of all the syntactical facts of the lan
guage. Sanskrit having been in constant use for thousands of years, a set
of rules valid for one period of the language could never be expected to be
 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR .
286
strictly observed during all times and by every writer. Moreover, it
should not be forgotten that most works of the so - called classical San
skțit were composed at a time when Sanskrit had ceased to be a living
language, and when authors, even the best of them , in attempting to
follow the guidance of their great grammarians, were by no means
always successful.
be

BOMBAY : PRINTED AT THE EDUCATION SOCIETY'S PRESS, BYCULLA.

,
‫نس‬
 1

1
 3 2044 01

A FINE IS INCURRED IF THIS BOOK IS

NOT RETURNED TO THE LIBRARY ON
OR BEFORE THE LAST DATE STAMPED
BELOW .

zal
06750

SO41829 4 1943
JUN 1 2 1995
DEC H JUN 2 6 1995

WIL 2 14 1995
STALL -STUDY CELLED

CHARGE